IE tt ay Sui ’ f> } LINGUISTIC FAMILIES INDIAN TRIBES NORTH OF MEXICO, PROVISIONAL LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Linguistic Families. Family Abbreviation. Former name. PEAR IARI ae iki acl eyes ialociereie mic cae ae NCE Le tise Gal ge eke 7: ATG SCCTCEITE 1 ee ga 7 AO a een a A DAVAS CAI. acacia cine as aclaainilsis o nels ares ACD ees eicsaa les acne Tinne POV RCA MAM Se cise ion\s cm oleiaiaiciec sicinin. wie Samra 7G 1 Ca a tee kee es ERO NE ee clos Soe eo us ee Cad=cseetaseeete es Pawnian. CSW EST LEE AL ec SI NOE Rm eh os @atb es: 65. MUpnaET OMIA LATE eke ake eos sisia) cw atin bre dicdettsicneete Chimiley ace bs test GUUMMeSVANIAD . |= 2% sccleos..osdos cabess Chimsyiee woes ease MP NREL AND ON eed TM Ve ciel (ores he cts ch is tp @Ghinge ouss cask ses REIMER CRYIN bea soc Sins Soa cca tee eee Chit. acess ss See ME UETEIELO GAN: =) eens aaa ase & Oia ee Coghss.e) 2 Sasser (OTDRRID | 2 eee ees oe ee a ee <5. e ts COpieeses sssehonas Wintun PRED NCR horas ee ce sic cela Dee ied Bhnke aeoi. sous. Karok LUE LECES SITET a ee E S| eee ge ae ree Innuit. PIPERS ER PERIG ATI O92, ee Sa taels cou o alle Sees Eaeltz Soc caheee se ROMs cee acts Select os. sero een Inge s25s sores sees CEO TET Se Kalap ere senns ee EATS EY El GR Re Be See So PES Kiera: cesses eee = Lita SRITEL SSR aa Sane 2 ee a Mowat eects LNT CCTEEALNG 0 eee pe LG ea ee ee ese Cootenay. Ta Lele Dre RS SR ee ere Kole ien aoe sees LOTS hal pA Ge ae cs Pe a ees CCU: (ee ee ae LOTSE ES CODE To Be se eS MWe cane 3 aes Klamath EMINENT 4. 43. enc Se ake ale Sabine See IME Tg ue ae Ree a Yokuts INMEBRMGINaIRen te ol eeecube Mende aston see Pomo MBG REMAN Oe. 3 So tnd nacsn boss co Sere 1! eee Mutsun PUTSIME SGM JomMesee ecco a cccaweesence MTISketey. 5S. werteisteres "STR EYSISE A ae SER RS I en I ge 1. (2116) ee Se ge RRM et a ioe sci Snes oa. celne tie NGF oi. alan des ak eGR SSeS Ae os orc cGe cc acca csclzce Pali eiene costes 25 22) Pit River, DEAS TN ol ARS oD os eS Pini cece eee Pe eee oe Suc a) aoa eae ales Pithieses nes 423052] Molded: RIMM eats ti 2 Ste San Se ea ey San Antonio. SHINS NOT Ay 5 ya ee Salehaeectioee: ee DMRBAPGAUIANY 055. 006 fo4 cae nace ede wae Sa ieasos sp acete LADS 2 Sea Ying est ER NS os Z dia (OAS bees ola oels) emai MON MGRIATI ee seek soy eee ees sui estos ‘c Shosee cote yey sf. Numa. ST PYELE a Lge RL SG a a (SUT ies 20 Me ea ee Dakotan. DEE Sok aides 1 SE Nina mses Saline) 0 a0 Biigy reuse sow cen Haidan. CMAD MINES yeas Mer Me SAG ea a oe TaGhiss psec eG SERN ete ost ohh Nk elo Aa Sy No 1 A Si lp REE Ro AG Ce er ec Mea wae de RS 1292 T N——1 2 . LINGUISTIC FAMILIES. Linguistic Families—Continued. Family. Abbreviation. Former name. Mohumashan’ tac acs saceeetse sat eae obec sac. Tenis. eis ees ec Santa Barbaran. TMMUCHAM tense sea conac ores Owbesiaemecte CIVATY 2 ye as rah se MOMAW ANY ose eae oowicisseicine aie wien ceree Monica ee eae ne UGG B56 o50Bso Sosa boddeéeoodoaad Sade Weheereefaeecelsesia (Unoinayenmihy = ne Bes eo ase ose soar Wn gee see acosces WV aati pualise alesse Sense ses een aicesn Waiktes. sss scceccts Vil AS AIA ie .c stow sw as aio eine stiasemom areas AWinilowmarnn fare toot Aht. Nootka. DWiHSHOAN sae Sociscneccic«ociae scteeeceemees Wiashioeteiscnacmece Wielispekanlececce = cos islelee aces ate een la WG Son bY Gcetioact Yurok. WVIBNOSKAN teas ce Usccies ses la Stine daetacice Wishes Aaa ee be, WiaikOnan)sclecwc acess ana e alieeinemtt eae IY alle ys eee os Watllsianids so 2ouietcclematon eat aencaecwace BY kc VE ere Nice VTUIN AM e otisciscic sie wach cosa cbeetmensee SY TUN eee see rslene AMMAN G KH Se mociees octecesecheseume cereus VAVINSAS LOR a rae TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Abbato-tenah. Ath. Abeca (part of Creeks), Musk. Aberginian (collective term for some New England tribes). Alg. Abiquiti (Pueblo town). Abitiki. See Abittibi. Abittibi. Alg. Abnaki. Alg. Absaroka. See Crow. Abwoin (collective for Sioux and Assiniboins), Acana. See Quapaw. Accocessaw. See Arkokisa. Accomac. Alg. Accohanoec. Alg. Accominta (division of Pawtucket confederacy), Alg. Achalaque Province. See Cherokee. Achansa. See Quapaw. Achaques (division of Nipissings). Alg. Acheto-tinneh. Ath. Achsissaghec. See Missisauga. Ackenatzy. (Probably Aconecho.) Acolapissa. (Collective term for coast tribes near the Choctaws.) Musk.. Acoma (Pueblo town). Ker. Aconecho= A kenatzy ? Acquinoshionee. See Iroquois. Acquintanacsuak. Alg? Acuco. See Acoma. Acuera Province. Musk? Adae. Adz. Addees. See Adae. Adirondack. Alg. Adshusheer. Aes. Cad. Affats-tena. See Abbato-tenah. Agawam. (Part of Pawtucket confederacy.) Alg. Aggiticcah. (Shoshonees at Salmon Falls on Snake River.) Shos. Aglegmut. See Oglemut. -Agnichronnon. See Mohawk. 4 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Agnier. See Mohawk. Agnieronon. See Mohawk. Agoual. See lowa. Agonnonsionni. See Iroquois. Agotsegenen. See Mohegan. Aguas Nuevas. See Cibillabattano. Ahalpam. (On Lower Santiam River.) Kalap. Ahantchuyuk. Kalap. Ahazat. See Ahowsaht. Abealt. Kol. Ahk. See Auk. Ahnahaway. See Ahwahawa. Ahouandate. See Huron. Ahowsaht. Wak. Ahsheewai. See Zuiii. Ahb-tena (not to be confounded with Atnah). Ath. Aht. See Wakashan Family. Ahwahawa. Su. Aijoue. See Iowa. Ainove. See lowa. Aiowai. See Iowa. Aitizzart. See Ayhuttizaht. Akaichie (division of Sciatogas). Wail? Akamsea. See Quapaw. Akansa. See Quapaw. Alabama (division of Creek confederacy). Musk. Alberni (Barclay Sound, Vancouver Island). Wak? Alchedune. See Yalchedune. Alei (probably Alsea). Aleut.’ See Unungun. Aleya. See Alsea. Algonquin (1. Tribe on Ottawa River; 2. Synonym for Ojibwa). Alg. Alkansas. See Quapaw. Allacaweah. Collective for bands on Upper Yellowstone. Shos? Allegan. See Alligewi. Alliatan. See Snake. Alligewi (traditional). Almouchico. See Armouchiquois. Alsea. Yak. Amacaba. See Mojave. Amalecite. See Etchimin. Amalingan. See Etchimin. © Amaskohegan. See Aresaguntacook. Amalistes. See Etchimin. Ambawtawhoot-tinneh. See Abbato-tenah. Ambawtawhoot-tinneh. Ath. . AGNIER—ABUASSAWTEE. 5 Amelick. See Etchimin. Ameriscoggin. See Aresaguntacook. Amikoué. See Amikway. Amikway. Alg. Amikwuk. See Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. Ampayout. See Yampa Ute. Amuchaba. See Mojave. Anachorema. Anacostan (White River). See Nocotchtank. Anadaweo. Cad. Anantooca. See Onondaga? Anasaguntacook. See Aresaguntacook. Anasitch. See Coos. Ancara. Aucasisco (Schoolcraft). See Casco. Andaico. See Anadawco. Andastaeronnon. See Conestoga. Andastes. See Conestoga. Aneega. See Hennega. Andatahouat. See Ottawa. Aneyoute. See Oneida. An-kutshi. See Haian-kutchin. Anie. See Mohawk. Angechagemut (part of Ikogmut). Esk. Anniegue. See Cayuga. Antou-kwahn. See Tongas. Annier. See Mohawk. An-kutchin. See Hai-an-kutchin. Anlygmute. See Unaligmut. Anoyint. See Oneida. Antastoui. See Conestoga. Antokee. See Onondaga? or Nanticoke ? Apache (1. An Athapascan tribe ; 2, Synonym for Apahuatche q. ¥.). Apache de Navajoa. See Navajo. Apache-Mojave. See Yavapai. Apache-Yuma. See Tulkepa. Apahuatche. Applied by Indians of Southern Arizona to hostile tribes of northern mountains. Apahwatche. See Apahuatche. Apalachee. Musk. Apalousa. See Opelusa. Apanenae. See Pawnee. Apolashe. See Opelusa. Applegate Creek Indians. See Nabiltse. Appomattoc. Alg. Aquassawtee. See Coosawda. 4 6 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Aquauachuque. See Atquanachooks. Aquackanonk (part of the Unami). Alg. Aquatzagane. See Mohegan. Aranama (probably Arrenamuse). Arapaho. Alg. Arapasca. See Athapascan family. Arc-a-Plat. See Cootenai. Aresaguntacook (division of Abnaki confederacy). Alg. Arikara. Cad. Arivaipa (division of Apaches). Ath. Ark. See Auk. Arkansa or Akamsea. See Quapaw. Armouchiquois (collective term for southern New England tribes). Alg. Arrapahay (division of Arapaho). Alg. Arrenamuse (Texas). Arrohattoc. Alg. Arsek. Alg. Artsmilsh (collective term for Indians of Shoalwater Bay). Chin. Arwaheahwa. See Ahwahawa. Ascena. See Caddo. Aseeguang. Kol. Ashley River Indians (may be Kiawaws). Asinais Spanish (Texas). Caddoan. Asistagueronon. See Mascotin. Askikonanheronon. See Nipissing. Asphalashe. See Opelusa. Assigumaig. See Ausegumaug. Assiniboin. Su. Assinipoualak. See Assiniboin. Assony. See Nassoni. Assotoue. See Uzutiuhe. Atakhtan. See Ah-tena. Atasi. See Autossee. Atatchasi. See Uzutiuhe. Atawawa. See Ottawa. Atfalati. Kalap. Athabasca. Ath. Atimaco. See Timucua. Atirhagenrenset. See Neutral Nation. Atka. See Nikhukhnin. Atkah. See Nikhukhnin. Salsh. _Atna. See Ah-tena. Atnaer. See Ah-tena. Atnah. See Shooshwap. Atnaxthynne. See Ah-tena. Atquanachuke. Alg.? AQUAUACHUQUE—BIG BELLY INDIANS. 7 Atsina, Alg. Atsistaerhonnon. See Mascotin. Attigouanta (1. Division of Hurons; 2. Synonym for Hurons). Irq. Attakapa. Atte. Attenmut. (Part of Mahlemut.) Esk. Attigouantan. See Wyandot. Attikameque. Alg. Attionidaron. See Neutral Nation. Attiwendaronk. See Neutral Nation. Athapascan family. Interior of Alaska and Northwest British America. Atuamih. Pal? Aucocisco. See Casco. Auk. Kol. Auquagaw. See Oquaga. Aurickaree. See Arikara. Ausegumaug. (May be Mascotins.) Alg? Autossee (division of Creek Confederacy). Musk. Avoyel. Aweatsiwaenrrhonon. See Winnebago. Ayauway. See Lowa. Ayeni. See Ioni. Ayhuttisaht. Wak. Ayonai. See Ioni. Ayrate. See Lower Cherokees. Aytchart. Not Ahowsaht or Ayhuttisaht; may be Chaykisaht. Wak- Aziagmut. (Division of Kaviagmut.) Esk. Babine Indians. Ath. Backbook. South Carolina. Baloballa. See Bellacoola. Banattee. See Bannock. Bannock. Shos. Battlelemuleemauch. See Methow. Beaux Hommes. See Quapaw. Bahama. (Texas; may be Ebahamo.) Baldhead Indians. Lewis & Clarke. Bayagula. Musk. Bear River Indians. North Carolina. Beaver Indians. See Isa-ttine. Belantse-etea. See Hidatsa. Belbella. See Bellacoola. Belem (Pueblo town). Bellacoola. Salsh. Belly Indians. See Grosventre. Beshequeguelts. See Miseequigwelis. Berseamite. Alg. Big Belly Indians. See Grosventre. 8 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Big Devils (probably Yanktonais). Bilikula. See Bellacoola. Biloxi. Musk. Blanche or Blane Barbu (doubtful). Birch Indians. See Tennuth-kutchin. Biskatrongé. Texas. Blackfoot Indians: (1. Satsika, q. v.; 2. Division of Satsika; 3. Division of Teton Sioux.) Black Pawnee. See Arikara. Blood Indians. (Division of Satsika, q. v.) Alg. Bolixie. See Biloxi. Bonak. See Bannock. Bonnack. See Bannock. Borrado. Coah. Brazos (collective term for Indians on Brazos River, Texas). Brotherton Indians (collective.) Alg. Brushwood Indians. See Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. Belbella. See Bellacoola. Bissirinien. See Nipissing. Birch-rind Indians. See Tsaltsan-ottine. Caagu. See Cayuse. Caddo 1. A tribe; 2. Aconfederacy. Cad. Cahinnio. Cahokia. Alg. Cailloux. See Cayuse. Caiyoquo. See Cayuga. Cake. Kol. Calispellum. See Pend d’Oreille. Callapooya (collective). Kalap. Camiltpaw. Shap. Calispellum. See Pend d’Oreille. Caloosa. Cumquekis. Haeltz. Canadaquois. (Collective for Canadian Indians.) Alg. & Irq. Canai. See Conoy. Canarsee. Alg. Canasatauga. See Conestoga. Caninahoic. (May be a northern band of Shoshonian family.) Cannensi. See Comanche. Canohatina. See Caddo. Cansa. See Kansa. Canunga. See Mohawk. Caouita. See Coweta. Cape Fear Indians. North Carolina Capichi (with Natchitoches). Cad. Capote (Division of Utes). Shos. BIG DEVILS—CHEMACUM. Carancaguace. See Carankawa. Carankawa. Atte. Carantouan. (May be Erie.) Caribou-Eaters. See Ethen-eldeli. Caribou Indians. See Tutchohn-kutchin. Carrier Indians. See Taculli. Casita. See Cussetaw. Cataba. Catb. Castahana (‘‘Snake band” on heads of Platte and in mountains. Cataka. Probably Kwada, q.v. Shos? Cathlacumup. Chin. Cathlascon. See Wasco. Cathlacomatup. Chin. Cathlahaw. Chin. Cathlamet. Chin. Cathlanaquia. Chin. Cathlapotle. Chin? Catskill (division of Munsee). Alg. Cauneeyenkee. See Mohawk. Caughnawaga (1. Saint Regis Indians. 2. Mohawk town). _ Cautanoh. See Tuscarora. Cayas. See Quapaw. Cayuga. Irq. Caygua. See Kiowa. Cayuquet. See Kyoquaht. Cayuse. Wail. Ceni. See Asinai. Cexeninuth. See Exemnuth. Chactiouman. See Chokchooma. Chaducutl. (West coast Vancouver Island.) Wak. Chalchuni. See Chatcheni. Chanee (division of Osages). Su. Chaouanon. See Shawnee. Charcowa. Kalap? Charrow. See Cheraw. Chasta Scoton. See Shastacosta. Chatcheeni. Skitt. Chat. See Shawnee. Chaudiere Indians. See Colville, 1. Chauenow. See Shawnee. Chawa. See Cheyenne. Chaykisaht. Wak. Cheahtoe. See Chetco. Cheattee. See Chetco. Chehalis. Salsh. Chemacum. Chimk. Irq. Shos? 10 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Chemeguaba. See Chemehueva. Chemehueva. Shos. Chenandoane. See Seneca. Chennessie. See Seneca. Chepewayan. See Chippewyan. Chepontia. Cherachee. See Cherokee. Cheraw. Catb? Cherokee. Irq. Chesapeak. Alg. Chetco. Ath. Chetimaches. See Shetimasha. Chetlessenten. Ath. Cheveux Relevés. 1. Algonquin tribe; 2. Applied to another tribe (Missisauga?) near Lake Huron. Alg. Cheveriche. See Senvarits. Cheyenne. Alg. Chicacha. See Chickasaw. Chickahomini. Alg. Chicorea. Ga. or S. C. coast. Chickasaw. Musk. Chicklezat (probably Chaykisaht). Chictagah. See Illinois confederacy. Chictaghic. See Illinois confederacy. Chien. See Cheyenne. Chihohocki (may be Unalachtgo). Chilcaht (may be a collective term). Kol. Chilcotin. See Tsilco-tinneh. . Chilluckittequaw. Chin? Chilion (division of Apaches (Gileno?) at Camp Apache). Ath. Chilkhakmut. See Ugalakmut. Chiltz. See Chehalis. Chilwayhook. Chimsian (collective). Chmsy. Chinook. Chin. Chin Indians. See Nagailer. Chimnapum. Salsh? Chiouanon. See Shawnee. Chippewa. See Ojibwa. Chippewyan. 1. Sawcesaw-tinneh; 2. used for Athapascan family.) Chiricahua. See Segata-jenne. Chiricagui. See Segata-jenne. Chiskiac. Alg. Chitgagane. See Sitka. Chitwont. See Similkameen. Chocrelatan. Ath. CHEMEGUABA—COCHEES. Choctaw. Musk. Chokchooma. Musk. Chowanoec. Irq.? Chopunnish. See Nez Perce. Chonacha. See Washita. Christineaux. See Cree. Chualpay. See Colville (1). Chugachigmut. Esk. Chukchagemut (division of Kuagmut), Esk. Chukchi. See Yuit. Chuklukmut. See Yuit. Esk. Chutsinni. See Hoodsunoo. Chymsyan. See Chimsian. Cibariche. See Seuvarits. Cibillabattano (division of Apaches). Ath. Circee. See Sursee. Civalletano. See Cibillabattano. Cirié. See Sursee. Clackama. Chin. Clahnaqua. Chin. Clahoos. Haeltz. Clahoquaht. Wak. Clahosaht. See Macaw. Clallam. Salsh. Clallueeis. Haeltz. Clanaminamun. Chin. Clanninata. Chin. Classet. See Macaw. Clatsacamin. Chin. Clatseanai. See Tlatscanai. Clatsop. Chin. Claxtars. See Tlatscanai. Clayoosh. See Clahoos. Clehure. See Clahoos. Clelikittee. Haeltz. Clickatat. Shap. Clictar. See Clictas. Clictas. Skitt. Clinquit. ‘ Shap. Cloo. Skitt. Clyoquot. See Clahoquaht. Closset. See Macaw. Clowetsus. Haeltz. Cochiti (Pueblo town). Ker. Coco-Maricopa. See Maricopa. Cochees. _ Chiricahua Mountains, Cochise Apaches ? 11 12 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Cocopa. Yum. Cochise Apaches (named from chief?). Division of Apaches. Ath. Ceeur d’Alene. Salsh. Cogwell. See Quacolth. Colapissa. See Acolapissa. Collotero. See Coyotero. Colville. 1. A tribe; 2. A confederacy Salsh. Comanche. Shos. Comumpah (“mixture of Shoshonis and Utes”) located in territory of Gosiats, west of Salt Lake, and perhaps identical with them. Shos. Conerd Helene. See Cour d’Alene. Confederates. See Iroquois. Congaree. South Carolina. Connamoc (included) Corees). Irq. Conoy. Alg. Conza. See Kansa. Cookkoo-oose. See Coos. Cooniac. Chin? Coosawda. Division of Creek confederacy. Musk. Cooshattie. See Coosawda. Coosaw. See Creek. Coosue. Alg. Coosaw. See Creek. Coos. Kus. Cootenai. Kit. Copalis. Chin. Copaha. See Quapaw. Copalux. See Copalis. Copper Indians. 1. Tsaltsan-ottiné; 2. Ah-tena. Ath. Coppermine Apaches (division of Apaches). Ath. Coppermine Indians. See Tsaltsan-ottiné. Coquille. Ath. Coquin. See Tototin. Coquilth. See Quacolth. Coranine. See Coree. Corbeaux. See Crow. Corchaug. Alg. Coree. Coroa. Louisiana. Cosnino. Yum. Cosuthentun. Ath. Cotorne. See Cootenai. Cottonoi. See Cootenai. Couata-soua. See Ottawa. Coutonia. See Cootenai. COCOPA—DIGGER. 13 Couteaux. See Nicutamux. Cowassayee. Shap? Cow Oreek Indians. See Hewut. Cowichin. Salsh. Coweta. Division of Creeks. Musk. Cow. See Kansa. Cowghalingen. See Khagantayakhunkhin. Cowlitz. Salsh. Cowwelth. Skitt. Coyuklesatuch. See Howchuclisaht. Coyoukon. See Koyukukh-otana. Coyote. See Coyotero. Coyotero (division of Apaches). Ath. Cozaby. (division of Piutes east of Mono Lake, Nev.) Shos. Crosswer. See Cumshawas? Cuchan. See Yuma. Cuelca-jenne (division of Apaches.) Between Pecos and Rio Grande Rivers.) Cum Umbah. See Comumpah. Cumshawas. Skitt. Cuni. See Zuni. Cussetaw. Musk. Cutsahnim. See Similkameen. Cutgane. See Yuma. Cruzado (Spanish name; doubtful), New Mexico. Crow. 1. A Siouan tribe on Upper Missouri; 2. A synonym for Tutchohn-kutchin. Daho-tena. Ath. ‘ Deguthee-dinai. See Degothi-kutchin. Dahcotah. See Sioux. Daunkotapi. See Sioux. Deer-horn Eskimo. See Naggeuktoomute. Degothi-kutchin. Ath. Delaware Confederacy, composed of the Minsi (Munsee, afterward sep- arate), Unami, and Unalachtgo. Alg. Des Chutes Indians. Collective for Wascos (Chin); Teninos and Warm Spring Indians. Shap. . Déterreur de Racine. See Digger. Donginga. See Ta®wa*zhika. Dog-rib Indians. See Thlingcha-tinneh. Doquachabsh. Salsh. Dotami. Upper Platte, and in mountains; supposed to be Comanches. Shos ? Digger, indefinite term applied to northwestern Shoshonian bands, and, also, to bands in California. Applied especially to the Hocanticar a 14 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Dionondadie. See Tionontati. Dixies. Probably misprint for Sixes. Ath. Dog Soldiers. Band of Cheyennes. Alg. Dtinne. See Athapascan family. Dughdwabsh. See Dwamish. Dughsocum. Salsh. Dughwaha. Salsh. Dusgeowa-ono. See Tuscarora. Eagwe-Howe. See Iroquois. Eaux. See Osage. Eastern Sioux. See Santee Sioux. Ebahamo. Texas. Kcheeloot (Washington Territory). Chin? Eclikimo. See Eklikheeno. Edchawtawhoot-tinneh (may be Daho-tena). Ath. Edisto. Eesteytoch. Haeltz. Eel River Indians (division of Miamis). Alg. -Ehanktowana. See Yanktonais. Ehateset. See Ayhuttisaht. Ehonkeronon. See Algonquin (tribe). Elati-Cherokee. See Lower Cherokee. Elk Mountain Utes (included Seuvarits; division of Utes in Southeast ern Utah). Shos. Elwa. Salsh. Erie. Irq. Eriga. See Erie. Eklikheeno. Kol. Ekogmut. See Ikogmut. Epicirinien. See Nipissing. Eriehronnon. See Shawnee (used by Wyandots for Shawnees. Shea.) Ererion. See Erie. Erigoanna (Texas) ? Esaw. See Catawba. Eskimauan family. Arctic coasts and islands of America. Eskimantzik. See Eskimauan. Esopus Indians (collective name for all the Munsees, except the Minni- sinks). Alg. Esquiate. See Hishquayaht. Essenape. See Assiniboin? Este-Muskokee. See Creek Confederacy. Etakmur or Etakbush. Salsh. Etchimin. Alg. Ethen-eldeli. Ath. Etonontathronnon. See Tionontati. Ettchaottine. Ath. DIONONDADIE—GILAND. 15 Eucher (probably Yuquachee). Euquache. See Yuquachee. Euquatop Apaches (division of Apaches in Texas). Ath. Eutaw. See Ute. Ewinte. See Uintats. Exeninuth. Haeltz. Eyackimah. See Yakama tribe. Farmington Indians. See Tunxis. Fall Indians. See Grosventre. Faraone. See Yuta-jenne. Fire Nation. See Mascotin. Fish Utahs (division of Utes, at Red Lake, Utah?). Shos. Five Nations. See Iroquois. Flatbow. See Cootenai. Fishing Chukchis. See Yuit. Flathead. Applied to different tribes in various parts of America, especially to the Salish proper; also to the Waxsaws, Choctaws, &c. Fox. Alg. Folle Avoine. See Menominee. Foolish Folks. See Tutchohn-kutchin. Folsavoin. See Menominee. Fulawin. See Menominee. Gahgwahgeonuh. See Neutral Nation. Galice Creek Indians. See Taldushdun-dud-te. Galzane. See Kuilchana. Ganaweese. See Conoy. Ganeaga-ono. See Mohawk. Gaspesian (division of Micmacs). Alg. Gemex. See Jemes. Genesee. See Seneca. Gens de Bouleaux. See Tennuth-kutchin. Gens de Large. See Natsit-kutchin. Gens de Milieu (probably Kutcha-kutchin). Gens des Bois. 1. Haian-kutchin; 2. Abbato-tenah. Gens des Buttes. See Tenan-kutchin. Gens des Chaudieres. See Colville (1). Gens des Feuilles. See Wahpeton. Gens des Feuilles tirees. See Wahpacuta. Gens des Foux. See Tutchohn-kutehin. Gens des Prairies. See Mascotin. Gens des Terres. Alg. Gens du Lac. See Medawaconton. Gens du Sang. 1. Foxes; 2. part of Nipissings. Ggoneahseabneh. See Iroquois. Gila Apaches. See Tjuiccu-jenne. Giland. See Tjuiccu-jenne. 16 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS Gileno. See Tjuiccu-jenne. Gogonin. See Cayuga. Goiogoen. See Cayuga. Goship. See Gosiats. Goship Shoshonee. See Gosiats. Gosha Ute. See Gosiats. Gosh Yuta. See Gosiats. Goshoot. See Gosiats. Gosiats (collective term for several bands in Utah). Shos. Goyogouin. See Cayuga. Grandes Eaux. See Great Osage. Grand Tue. See Great Osage. Green River Snake. See Washaiki. Gros Ventres (collective term for the Minnetarees, northern Arapa- hoes, and Atsina). Gros Ventres of the Missouri. See Minnetaree. Gros Ventres of the Prairie. See Atsina. Grovent. See Gros Ventres. QGuachule Province. Timu.? Guale Province (Amelia Island, Fla.), Timu.? Guandastogué. See Conestoga. Guashilla. Haeltz. Guyandot. See Wyandot. Gweugweh-ono. See Cayuga. Hackensack (division of the Unami). Alg. Haeelbzuk (collective term for Haeltzukan family). Hahatonwan. See Ojibwa. Haian-kutchin. Ath. Haida. See Skittagetan family. Hama. See Huma. Hamockhave. See Mojave. Han-kutchin. See Haian-kutchin. Hannakalal (doubtful). Salsh. Hare Indians. See Kawcho-tinneh. Hasatch (Pueblo village). Ker. Hassinango. Irq.? Hastriryini. See Taensa. Hatorask. See Hatteras. Hatteras. Alg. Hawaleo. See Hualapai. Haverstraw (part of the Unami). Alg. Hemez. See Jemes. Hennega. Kol. Hewut. Ath. Hickory Apache. See Tannah-shissen. Hidatsa. See Minnetaree. GILENO—HUNKPAPA. 17 Hihighennimo. See Sans Puelles. Hishquayaht. Wak. Hitchitee (division of Creek confederacy). Musk. Hocamish. Salsh. Hocandikah. See Hocanticara. Hocanticara. Shos. Hochungara. See Winnebago. Hodenosaunee. See Iroquois. Hodesannogetau. See Onondaga. Hogelander. See Nochpeem. Hoh. Chimk. Hoha. See Assiniboin. Hohilpo Tushepaw. See Salish tribe. Hokium. Salsh? Hokwaits (Piute band). Shos. Homamish. Salsh. Honannehoont. See Seneca. Hongwe-Ongwe. See Iroquois. Houque-ronon (probably Algonquin1). Alg. Hooch. See Hoh. Hoodnid. See Hunah. Hoodsunu. Kol. Hook (South Carolina). H@®onah-kwahn. See Hunah. Hooneak. See Hunah. Hopi-Shinumo. See Moqui. Horican (part of Mohegans, 3). Possibly a corruption of Hierocoyes or lroquois). Horn Mountain Indians. Ath. Horoji. See Winnebago. Hotangke. See Winnebago. Hotawa. See Oto. Houaguan. Skitt. Houma. See Huma. Housatonic. See Stockbridge Indians. Howchuclisaht. Wak. Hualapai. Yum. Hudsunu. See Hoodsunu. Hueco. See Waco. Huitsla (52° to 55° British Columbia). Hullooetell (on Clarke’s Fork. Lewis & Clarke). Salsh? Huma. Musk. Humptulup. Salsh? Hunacow. See Hunah. Hunah. Kol. Hunkpapa. See Unecpapa. 1292 TN 2 18 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Hunna. See Hunah. Hunxit (Houaguan?). Skitt. Huron (1. A tribe forming the base of the modern Wyandots. 2. Syno- nym for Wyandot). Husky. See Eskimauan family. Hydah. See Skittagetan family. Ichnarumpats (Piute band). Shos. Icen-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. Ictan (general term for several Shoshonian bands, especially Washaiki and Comanches). Shos. Thanktonwan. See Yankton. Ihanktonwanna. See Yanktonais. Ikogmut. Esk. Ikoklagmut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. Illinois confederacy. Alg. Imabklimut (division of Okeeogmut). Esk. Incomeeanetook. Salsh. Ingaleet. See Kaiyuhkhotana. AInglutaligemut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. Inguhklimut. Esk. Ini. See Toni. TInkalichljuaten (collective term for several Alaskan tribes). Ath. Inkaliten (collective term for several Eskimauan and Athapascan tribes of Alaska). wh Mnkiiliiehliiate. See Inkalichljuaten. Ynnuit. See Eskimauan family. Unspellum. See Nespelum. Smsulaire. See Algonquin 1. Intietook (division of Okinagans). Salsh. Yoni. Cad. Iowa. Su. Troquois confederacy. Irq. Urrohatec. See Arrohattoc. AIsangyati. See Santee Sioux. dsa-ttiné. Ath. Ashquat. See Hishquayaht. ‘Iskousogo (may be Mascotin). UWsle de Pierre Indians. See Sinkiuse. Asleta (name of two Pueblo towns in New Mexico and Texas). Tai. Wssati. See Santee Sioux. Itawan (S. C. 1707). Itkalyaruin. See Kutcha-kutchin. Iwillik. Esk. Jacon. See Yacon. Jatam. See letan. Jaupim, See Yeopim. HUNNA—KATLAWOTSET. Jecarilla. See Tannah-shissen. Jegosasa. See Neutral Nation. Jemes (Pueblo town). Tan. Jennito. (An Iroquois tribe, perhaps Oneida.) Jenontowano. See Seneca. Jicarilla Apaches. See Tannah-shissen. Jonie. See Toni. Joshua. Ath. Jugelnuten. See Kaiyuhkhotana, Junnachotana. See Unakhotana. Junnakachotana. See Koyukukhotana. Kaadgettee. Kol. Kaaskaquatee. Kol. Kadapaw (perhaps Cataba, 4. v.). Kadiakski. See Kaniagmut. Kagataya-Koung’n. See Unungunian family. Kahkwah. See Neutral. Kahneahka. See Mohawk. Kaialigmut. Esk. Kaiganskoi. See Kygahni. Kaishadeh. See Tongas. Kaivavwits. Piute band. Shos. Kaiyuhkhotana. Ath. Kaiyukakho-tana (part of Kaiyuhkhotana), Ath. Kaka. See Cake. Kalispelm. See Pend @’ Oreille. Kaljush. See Koluschan. Kaluga. See Koluschan. Kaniagmut. Esk. Kamloops. Salsh. Kanagist. See Kaniagmut. Kanatshaganha. See Mohegan. Kanawha. See Conoy. _ Kangmaligmut. Esk. Kaninahoick. See Caninahoic. Kaninaveish. See Caninahoic. Karweewee. See Artsmilsh. Kansas. Su. Kapaha. See Quapaw. Kapa. See Quapaw. Kappaw. See Quapaw. Kaskaskia. Alg. ‘ Kaskia. Heads of Platte, &c. Maybe a Comanche band. Kataghayekiki. See Khagantayakhunkhin. Kata-Kutchin. See Kutcha-Kutchin. Katlawotset. See Killawat. 20 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Katskill. See Catskill. Kaviagmut. Esk. Kaveak. See Kavaigmut. Kaviazagemut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. Kaw. See Kansas. Kawcho-tinneh. Ath. Kauyaichits. Piute band. Shos. Keats (Piute band). Shos. Keauwee (S. C. 1701). May be a division of Cherokees. Keawa. See Kiowa. Kechumacarlo. Chmsy. Kecotan. Alg. Keechi. Cad. Keechis. Chmsy. Keekheatla. Chmsy. Kegiktowrigemut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. Kehk. See Cake. Kelutsah. Chmsy. Kemahwivi. See Chemehueva. Kenai. See Athapascan family. Kenaitse. See Knaiakhotana. Kenaizer. See Athabascan. Kenathtoix. Chmsy. Kenawa. See Conay. Kenayem. See Knaiakhotana. Kenchenkieg. Chmsy. Kenisteno. See Cree. Kennebec. See Norridgewock. Kera. See Queres Nation. Kerokia. See Cahokia. Ketandous. Chmsy. Ketahhonneet. See Tongas. Ketlitk kutchin. See Koyukukhotana. Ketschet naer. See Ah-tena. Ketoonocshelk. Chmsy. Kettle Falls. See Colville tribe. Ketwilkcipas. Chmsy. ~ Kewaughtchenunaugh. Salsh. Khagantayakhunkhin. Unu. Khionontaterrhonon. See Tionontati. Khununah. Ath. Kkgestayle-kke-ottine. See Athabasca. Kiataw. See Coyotero. Kichai. See Keechi. Kichesipiirini. See Algonquin tribe. Kichkakonerae. See Kiskakon. KATSKILIL—KLAHAR. Kicksatee. Kol. Kicktawane. See Kitchawong. Kicopoux. See Kickapoo. Kicktawane. See Kitchawong. Kidahnuts. See Tongas. Kigikhkhum. Unu. Kikhtogamut. See Shiwokugmut. Kikiallu. Salsh. Kileatah. Chmsy. Kilistinon. See Cree. Kiliwatsal. See Killawat. Kilkat. See Chimmesyanian family. Killawat. Yak. Killamuck. See Tillamook. Kilsmaht. Wak. Kimnepatoo. Esk. Kingeegamut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. Kinai. See Knaiakhotana. Kinamut. See Knaiakhotana. Kinnawalax. Chmsy. Kinroalax. See Kinnawalax. Kious. See Sioux. Kironona. See Carankawa. Kiowa. Kiow. Kishawin. Skitt. Kiskakon. Alg. Kispachalaidi. Chmsy. Kispachlahts. See Kispachalaidi. Kitchaclalth. Chmsy. Kitchawong (part of Wappinger. 2), Alg. Kitegue. Esk. Kithahtla. See Keekheatla. Kithateens. Chmsy. Kitlan. Chmsy. Kitlope. Chmsy. Kitseelaiso. Chmsy. Kitahon. Chimsy. Kittamaat. Chmsy. Kittear Eskimo. See Kittegarute. Kittegarute. Esk. Kittistzu. Chmsy. Kitunaha. See Cootenai. Kitwileoits. Chmsy. Kiwaa. See Kiowa. Kittyeatat. See Wichita. Klahar. See Clahoos. 21 22 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Klahohquaht. See Clahoquaht. Klaizzart. See Clahosaht. Klamath (of Oregon). Lut. Kleneecate. See Koluschan. ~ Knaiakhotana. Ath. Kniktagemut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. Knisteneaux. See Cree. Koassati. See Coosawda. Koeats. See Keats. Kokwai-y-toch. Haeltz. Kolchaina. See Kuilchana. Koloshe. See Koluschan family. Kolouche. See Koluschan family. Kolshina. See Kuilchana. Koltshane. See Kuilchana. Koluschan family (coast of Southern Alaska and adjacent part of Brit- ish America). Konage. See Kaniagmut. Kopagmut. Esk. Koskiemo. Haeltz. Kosukogemut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. Kosunats (division of Utes). Shos. Koumchaouas. See Cumshawas. Kowagmut. See Kuagmut. Koyukunskoi. See Koyukukhotana. Koyugmut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. Krih. See Cree. Kuagmut. Esk. Kuilchana (collective term for inland tribes of Alaska). Ath. Kukuth-kutchin. See Tukkuth-kutchin. Kullas Palus. See Pend d’Oreille. Kullerspelm. See Pend d’Oreille. Kungugemut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. Kuschkukehwakmuten. See Kuskwogmut. Kuskokwimen. See Kuskwogmut. Kuskulchewak. See Kuskwogmut. Kuskwogmut. Esk. Kutani. See Cootenai. Kutcha-kutchin. Ath. Kuynkantsi. See Koynkukhotana. KwaAcda (division of Comanches). Shos. Kwaiantikwokets (Piute band). Shos. Kwaikmut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. Kwakiutl. See Quacolth. Kwalhioqua. See Willopah. Kwatumeta-tene. See Quatomah. KLAHOHQUAHT—LUGHSEELEE. 23 Kwehtlmamish. See Nughquetelbabish. Kwichagmut (division of Oglemut). Esk. Kwiengomats. (Piute band.) Shos. Kwikhpagemut. See Ikogmut. Kwithluagemut. See Ikogmut. Kwiumpus. Shos. Kyeucut. See Kyoquaht. Kygahni (collective term). Skitt. Kygargey. See Kygahni. Kyoquaht. Wak. Labassa. See Sabassa. Laekquelibla. Haeltz. Lagotah. See Sioux. Laguna (Pueblo town). Ker. Lahanna. © Salsh ? Lake Indians. See Senijextee. Lapierre’s House Indians. See Tukkuth-kutchin. La Plaine Indians. See Bald-Head Indians. Lartielo. See Spokan. Leeshtelosh. Doubtful; head of Willamette River, Or. Lenape. See Delawares. | Lenni-Lenape. See Delawares. Lentis (Pueblo town; may be Nuestra Senora de los Angeles de Tecos). Lepan. Ath. Lilowat. Salsh. Linneway. See Illinois confederacy. Lipano. See Lepan. Little Mistassini Indians. Alg. Llanero. See Cuelea-jenne. Lodalondak. See Adirondack. Loquilt (Lilowat?) Salsh. Los Lentes. See Lentis. Los Luceros (Pueblo town). Tan. Lototen. See Tootootni. Loucheux. See Kutchin. Loup (1. Collective French term for Delawares, Mohegans, and con- nected tribes. 2. Part of Pawnees). Lower Cherokees (part of Cherokees formerly on heads of Savannah River). Irq. Lower Killamuc. See Yacon. Lower Quarter (North Carolina, 1701). Luckamute. Kalap. Luckaso. Killamue language. Lewis & Clarke. Luckawi. Killamue language. Lewis & Clarke. Lucton. Killamuc language. Lewis & Clarke. Lughseelee. Kol. 24 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Lulanna. Skitt. Lummi. Salsh. Lutuami. See Klamath. Macaw. Wak. Machapunga. Alg. Mackachack. See Mequachake. Mackanotin. See Macnootini. Mackenzie River Eskimo. See Kopagmut. Macnootini. Ath. Madowesian. See Sioux. Maechachtinni. See Seneca. Magemut. Esk. Maha. See Omaha. “Mahackeno’s tribe. Alg. Mahaquase. See Mohawk. Mahawha. See Ahwahawa. Mahingan. See Mohegan. Mahlemut. Esk. Maiken. See Mohegan. Makagmut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. Makah. See Macaw. Maleigmjuten. See Mahlemut. Malimoot. See Mahlemut. Malochee. See Mequachake. Mamekoting (division of the Munsees). Alg. Mandan. Su. Mangoac. Irq? Manhasset. Alg. Manhattan. See Recgawawanc. Mannahoac (tribe and confederacy). Mannawousut. See Manosaht. Manosaht. Wak. Mansopelea. See Mousopelea. Maqua. See Mohawk. Maquachee. See Mequachake. Magquintiquot. Alg. Marespink. Alg. Marhar. See Omaha. Marhoo Chin. | Maricopa. Yum. Marimuskeet. See Mattamuskeet. Marlain. Probably Crow. Marmalilacalla. Haeltz. Maroa. See Tamaroa. Mary’s River Indians. See Saint Mary Indians. Mascolitin. See Mascotin. LULANNA—MESSENECZ. Mascotin. Alg. Maskagau. See Maskego. Maskego (division of Ojibwa). Alg. Maskoki. See Creek confederacy. Massachuset. Alg. Massapequa. Alg. Massawomec. See Iroquois. Massetta. Skitt. Massinacac. Irq. Massit. See Massetta. Mastincha. See Cree. Matanwake. See Metoac. Matchelat. See Muchlaht. Matchedash Indians. See Missisauga. Mathlanobe. See Multnomah. Matinecock. Alg. Matotantes. Probably Oto. Mattamuskeet. See Machapunga. Mattapanient (Maryland). Alg. - Mattaponi. Alg. Mattasoon. See Ahwahawa. Matuwack. See Metoac. Mauquauwog. See Mohawk. Mauvais Monde Indians. See Ettchaottine. Mawatadan. See Mandan. Mawatangna. See Mandan. Mayganathicoise. See Mohegan. McCedas. See Mandan. ’ Mdewakontonwan. See Medawaconton. Meadow Indians. See Mascotin. Meatwho. See Methow. Mechkentowoon. Part of Mohegan 3. Alg. Medawaconton. Part of Sioux. Su. Meherrin. Irq. Melicete. See Etchimin. Menecowegee. See Miuneconjou. Mengwe. See Mingo. Menominee. Mentou. (French, doubtful.) Menuache. See Muache. Mequachake (division of Shawnees.) Alg. Merric. See Meroke. Meroke. Alg. Mescalero. See Se-jenne. Mescousing (probably Mascotin.) Messenecz. See Fox. 26 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Meteowwee. See Methow. Methow. Salsh. Metlaheatlah. Chmsy. Metoae (collective term for Long Island tribes). Alg. Meuache. See Muache. Miami. Alg. Michigamea. Alg.? Michlait. See Muchlaht. Miemac. Alg. Miednoftskoi. See Ah-tena. Mie-missouk. See Misonk. Mikasuki. Musk. Millbank Sound Indians (collective term for several Haeltzukan tribes). Haeltz. Mimbre. See Iecu-jenne. Mimbreno. See Iecu-jenne. Mingo. 1. Synonym for Iroquois; 2. detached band of Iroquois; 3. synonym for Conestoga. Minneconjou (division of Teton Sioux). Su. Minnekenozzo. See Minneconjou. Minnetaree. See Hidatsa. Minnetarees of Fort de Prairie. See Atsina. Minneway. See Illinois. Minnisink (division of the Munsees). Alg. Minocantong. See Medawaconton. Minqua. See Conestoga. Minsi. See Munsee. Miseequigwelis. Salsh. Miskaiwhu. Salsh. Miskauki. See Fox. Misonk. Salsh? Missisauga. Alg. ‘ Mississippi Sioux. See Santee Sioux. Missouria. Su. Mithouic. See Methow. Mnacadeus. See Mandan. Moapariats (Piute band). Shos. Mobilian. Musk. Moccasins-with-holes. See Broken Moccasin Indians. Modoc. Lut. Moelobite (doubtful). Musk ? Moguino (Pueblo village). Keres. Mohahoe. See Mojave. Mohave. See Mojave. Mohawk (1. an Iroquois tribe; 2. synonym for Iroquois confederacy). Irq. METEOWWEE—MUSCODAINSUG. yay | Mohegan (1. a tribe in Connecticut; 2. a tribe on the Hudson River ; 3. a group of tribes on and near Hudson River, including 2; 4. collective term for Algonquian bands of Hudson River and Southwestern New England). Alg. Mohemencho. Irq.? Mohuache. See Muache. Moki. See Moqui. Molalla. Wail. Mole-Alleg. See Molalla. Molel. See Molalla. Monacan tribe and confederacy. Irq.? Monahassano. Irgq.? Monasiceapano. Irq.? Montagnais (1. collective term for Algonquian bands, northeast of Ottawa River, Canada; 2. collective term for several Northwestern Athapascan tribes). Montauk. Alg. Montowese’s tribe. Alg. Moouchat. Wak. Moquats (not Nogwats) Piute band. Shos. Moqui. Shos. Moratoc. Alg? Morautacund. Alg. Mosette. See Massetta. Mouisa (French ; doubtful). Mountaineer. See Montagnais 1. Mountain Indians (1. Tutchohn-kutchin ; 2. Daho-tena). Mountain-men. See Tenan-kutchin. Mountain Sheep Eaters. See Tucarica. Mouringan. See Mohegan. Mousopelea. Lower Mississippi river. Movwiats (Piute band). Shos. Mowatcehit. See Moouchat. Mowiats. See Movwiats. Moyawans. Alg. Muache (division of Utes). Shos. Muchlaht. Wak. Muckleshoot (collective term for bands on Muckleshoot Reservation). Salsh. | Multnomah. Chin. Mummockahavi. See Mojave. Munsee (one of the three divisions of the Delawares and afterward a distinct tribe). Alg. Murtilpar. Haeltz. Muscodainsug. See Mascotin. 28 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Muscogee (1. The chief division of the Creek confederacy; 2. Synonym for the Creek confederacy.) Musk. Musquaki. See Fox. Musquotan. See Mascotin. Muzealero. See Se-jenne. Naanee. See Nehaunee. Naaneeaaghee. Kol. Naansi (French, 1680). Naas. See Nass. Nabedatche. Cad. Nabiltse. Ath. Nabiri (French, 1680). Nacogdoches. Cad. Nacook. See Sowhegan. Naelim. See Nehalim. Nagailer. Ath. Naggeuktormut. Esk. Nauni. See Comanche. Nalalsemoch. Haeltz. Namanamin. Kalap? Namaoskeag. Alg. Namasket. Alg. Nambe (Pueblo town). Tan. Namollo. See Yuit. ' Namoit. Kalap. Nanaimo. Salsh. Nanoos. Haeltz. Nansamund. Alg. Nantautacund. Alg. Nanticoke. Alg. Nanzatico. See Nantautacund ? Narcoctaw. Haeltz. Nargota. See Sioux. Narraganset. Alg. Nasal. Chin. Nascapee. Alg. Nascotin. Ath. Nascud. See Nascotin. Nashua. Alg. Nass (collective term for several Chimmesyanian tribes). Chmsy. Nassoni. Cad. Natacook. See Sowhegan. Natage (division of Apaches). Ath. Natche. Natch. Natche-kutchin. See Natsit-kutchin. Natchitoche. Cad. MUSCOGEE—NEUTRAL NATION. 29 Nation de Feu. See Mascotin. Nation de VIsle. See Algonquin tribe. Nation du Petun. See Tionontati. Nation du Pore-péie. Alg. Natliantin. Ath. Natootetain (may be Ntshaautin). Ath. Natsit-kutchin. Ath. © Natuessuag. See Sioux. Naudowessie. See Sioux. Naus (Maryland). Alg. Nauset. Alg. Nauwanatats (Piute band). Shos. Nawaa (division of Mohegans, 3). Alg. Naweetee. Hailtz. . Navajo. Ath. Navesink (division of the Unami). Alg. Necariage. See Wyandot. Nechacokee (may be Ochechole). Chin? Necomanchee. Chin. Necoon. Skitt. Neculta. See Taculta. Neeardeondargowar. See Oneida. Neecelowes. See Neeslous. Neeslous. Chmsy. Neeutubvig. Salsh? Neewamish. Salsh. Nehalim. Salsh. Nehaunee (1. Collective term for a group of Athapascan tribes. 2. Ne- haunees of Chilkaht River, part of Khununah. 3. Synonym for Ah- tena). Ath. % Nehawretawgo. See Oneida. Nehiro-irini. Alg. Nemarh. See Marhoo. Nemue. See Comanche. Ne Perce. See Nez Perce. Nepicingqui. See Nipissing. Nesaquake. Alg. Nespelum, Salsh. Nespod. Haeltz? Nestucea. Salsh. Netchillik. Esk. Neuchadlit. See Noochahlaht. Neuchallet. See Noochahlaht. Neus Indians. See Neusioc. Neusioc. Alg. Neutral Nation. Irq. 30 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Neuwittie. See Naweetee. Newchema. See Nuchima. Neweetg. See Naweetee. Newhawtehtahgo. See Oneida. Newicargut. Ath. Newichawanoc. Alg. Neyetse-kutshi. See Natsit-kutchin. x Nez Perce (1. The Shahaptin proper; 2. The Caddoes; 3. The Iowas). Shap. Niantic (two tribes, eastern and western). Alg. Nibissirinien. See Nipissing. Nickomin. See Necomanchee. Nicoutamuch. Salsh. Nicozliautin. Ath. Nicutamux. See Nicoutamuch. Nightan. Skitt. Nijora. Near head of Gulf of California. Nijuni. See Comanche. Nikhukhnin. Unu. Nileo Province. Arkansas. Nimkish. Haeltz. Ninstanee. See Hunxit. Nipegon. See Winnebago. Nipissing. Alg. Nipmuc. Alg. Nisqualli. Salsh. Nitchihi. See Kiowa. Nittinaht. Wak. Noache (division of Utes). Shos. Noahha. Salsh. ‘ Nochpeem (division of Wappinger, 2). Alg. Nocochtank. Alg. Nogwats (Piute band). Shos, Nogwuhmut (division of Yuit). Hsk. Nohannie. See Nehaunee. Nomenuche. See Weminuche. Nominie. See Oonawmanient. Nonstéki. See Nestucca. Noochahlaht. Wak. Nooknachamish. Salsh. Nooksahk. Salsh. Nooltenatini. Ath. Nooltonatria. See Nooltenatini. Noothum. Salsh. Nootka. See Yuclulaht. Norridgewock. Alg. NEU WITTIE—OGULMUT. 51 Northern Indians. See Athabasca. Nottowa. Irq. N’Pochle. See Sans Puelles. N’quutlmamish (probably Quehtlmamish), Nsietshawus. See Tillamook. Ntshaautin. Ath. » Nuaguntits (Piute band). Shos. Nuchusk (probably Chugachigmut). Nudarcha. See Missouria. Nuestra Senora de Belem. See Belem. Nuestra Senora de la Asunpcion de Zia. See Silla. Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de Pojuaque. See Pojuaque. Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de Zuni. See Zuni. Nuestra Senora de Los Angeles de Tecos (Pueblo town). Nuestra Senora de Los Dolores de Sandia. See Sandia. Nughlemmy. See Lumii. Nugh-quetelbabish. Salsh. Nukhlummi. See Lummi. Nuklukayette (probably part of the Tenan-kutchin or Kutcha-kutchin). Ath. Nukimut (part of Kaviagmut). Esk. Nulaautin. Ath. Nulato. See Nulato-khotana. Nulato-khotanaana (division of Kaiyuhkhotana). Ath. Numa. See Shoshonian family. Numepo. See Nez Perce. Nunatogmut. Esk. Nunatungmeun. See Nunatogmut. Nundawaono. See Seneca. Niundawaronoh. See Seneca. Nunivak people. See Magemut. Nushagagmut. Esk. Nusklaiyum. See Clallam. Nussamec. Alg. Nutachi. See Missouria. Nuwukmut. Esk. Nuwungmeun. See Nuwukmut. Ovkachoy-Atte. See Alabama. Oakinacken. See Okinagan. Ochangra. See Winnebago. Ochatequin. See Huron. Ocki Piute (Piute band). Shos. Ogalla. See Oglala. Oglala (part of Teton Sioux), Oglemut. Esk. Ogulmut. See Oglemut. 32 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Ohiaht. Wak. Oiatuch. See Ohiaht. O-i-clela. Haeltz. Oiagouin. See Cayuga. Ojibwa. Alg. Ojo Caliente. 1. Zufi village. Zun. 2. Warm Spring Apaches, Okandanda. See Oglala. Okani. See Kansa. Okeeogniut. Esk. Okinagan. Salsh. Oknaka. See Oglala. Omaha. Su. Onayalekaono. See Oneida. Oncpapa. See Uncpapa. Ondalaumak. See Ottawa. Oneida. Irq. Oneyyatecaronoh. See Oneida. Ongwe-Honwe. See Iroquois. Onieletoch. Haeltz. Oniongouen. See Cayuga. Oniotaaug. See Oneida. Oniouenronnon. See Cayuga. Onkdaka. See Oglala. Onneyut. See Oneida. Onnogante. See Oneida. Onnontae-ronnon. See Onondaga. Onnontagué. See Onondaga. Onondaga, Irq. ; Onorochrhonon. See Oneida. Ontationne. See Tionontati. Ontponea. Irq. ? Ontonagannha. See Erie. Ookjoolik. Esk. Oonawmanient. Alg. Ooquesiksillik. Esk. Qotlashoot Tushepaw (Lewis & Clarke). Salsh. Opanango. See Micmac. Opechisaht. Wak. Opecluset. See Opechisaht. Opelusa, Louisiana. Openagi. See Abnaki. Opossian. Alg. Oquaga (division of Oneidas). Irq. Orquisaco. Cad. Orunge (collective for Delawares, Mohegans, and connections). Ath. Alg. OHIAHT—PACAO. 33 Osage. Su. Osaukee. See Sac. Oshawanong. See Shawnee. Osinpoille. See Assiniboin. Osochi. See Uzutinhe. Osotchoue. See Uzutiuhe. Osottoez. See Uzutiuhe. Ossipee. Alg. Ossnobian. See Assiniboin. Otali-Cherokee. See Upper Cherokee. Oto. Su. Otontanta. See Oto. Ottare-Cherokee. See Upper Cherokee. Ottawa. 1. An Algonquin tribe; 2. Collective name for Indians Ottawa River; 3. Incorrectly applied to the Otoes. Ottoe. See Oto. Ouachita. See Washita. Ouachtenon. See Wea. Ouakich. See Wakashan. Ouaonakecinatouek. See Huron. Ouasash, See Osage. Ouatenon. See Wea. Oubenaki. See Abnaki. Ouchipawha. See Ojibwa. Ouchucehlisit. See Howchuclisaht. Ouendat. See Huron. Ouenrohronnon. See Wenro-rons. Ougatanon. See Wea. a Ouisconsin. Mascotin ? Oumalominec. See Menominee. Ounepigon. See Winnebago. Ousasoy. See Osage. Oustac (may be Westo). Outagami. See Fox. Outeoua. See Ottawa. Outtoaet. See Ottawa. Ouyape. See Quapaw. ° Overhill Cherokees. See Upper Cherokees. Owenunga. See Abnaki. Owillapsh. See Willopah. Oyaudah. See Cherokee. Oyatoh-ono. See Cherokee. Ozenbogue (French, 1675; doubtful). Ozini. Alg. Pacaha. See Quapaw. Pacao (Texas). 1292 T N——3 34 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Pachany. See Nochpeem. Pachenaht. Wak. Pachimi. See Nochpeem. Padouca. See Comanche. Pagaits (Piute band). Shos. Pagan. See Piegan. Pagayuats (Gosiats band, not the Pagaits or Paguits). Shos. Pageut. See Piute. Paguits (Piute band, not Pagaits). Shos. Pahkee. See Atsina. Pahmete (said to be part of Utes). Shos. Pahoja. See Iowa. Rah Utah. See Piute. Pahvant. Shos. Pailsh (probably Copalis). Paiute. See Piute. Pajalat (Texas). Palaquesson (French, lower Mississippi River region). Palenachendchiesktajeet. See Iroquois. Pallalt (British Columbia). Salsh? Palletto-palla. See Paloos. Paloos. Shap. Palux. See Copalis. Baluxie. See Biloxi. Ramacaeac. Alg. Pamlico. Alg. PRampticough. See Pamlico. Pemanki. Alg. Panakti. See Bannock. Panamints (Piute division). Shos. Pané. See Wichita. Pangkaw. See Ponea. Pantie. See Pawnee. Pamnionkee. See Pawnee. Panka. See Ponea. Papabi-ootam. See Papago. Rapago. Pim. Rapinachois. Alg. Bananagats. Piute band. Shos. Ranant Ute (probably Pahvant). Paroomporiats, (Piute band). Shos. Pareoomyats (not Paroompaiats). Piute band. Shos. Parushapats (Piute band). Shos. Paruguns (Piute band). Shos. Pascagula. Musk. Pascatoe (may be Patapsco). Alg. PACHANY—PICURIS. 35 Pasciotoe (may be Patapsco). Alg. Paspatank. Alg. Paspehay. Irq? Paspikaivats (Piute band). Shos. Passamaquoddy. Alg. Pastoligmut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. Patapsco. Alg. Patcheena. See Pachenaht. Patchoag. Alg. Pateskeet. See Poteskeet Pa Uche. See Piute. Paugusset. See Wepawaug. Paumanake. See Metoac. Paunak. See Bannock. Paunch Indians. See Gros Ventres. - Pautah. See Piute. Pautequami. See Pottawotomi. Paviotso. See Piute. Pawnee (1. Pawnees proper; 2. Sometimes used for Arikara). Cad. Pawnee-Pict. See Wichita. Pawtucket (tribe and confederacy). Alg. Payuche. See Piute. Peanguichia. See Piankishaw. Peccos. See Pecos. Pecos (Pueblo town). Tan. Pedee. South Carolina. ° Pelloatpalla Chopunnish. See Paloos. Pelone (part of Apaches). Ath. Pend @’Oreille. Salsh. Pend d’Oreille of the Upper Lake. See Cour d’Alene. Pennacook. Alg. Penobscot. Alg. Peoria. Alg. e Pequawket. Alg. Pequot. Alg. Perquiman. Alg. Perrian. See Peoria. Petite Nation. Alg. Petun. See Tionontati. Petuneux. See Tionontati. Pey Ute. See Piute. Piankatank. Alg. Piankishaw. Alg. -Pichena. (Perhaps Pecana). Picuris (Pueblo town). Tan. 36 ‘TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Pict (perhaps Piccawillani band of Miamis; may be Piqua Shawnees or Piankishaws). <¢ Piegan (part of Satsika). Pierruiats (Gosiats band). Shos. Pikakwanarats (division of Utes). Shos. PikmiktaKgmut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. Pima. Pim. Pinal. See Pinaleno. Pinalefio (division of Apaches). Ath. Pinal Llano. See Pinaleno. Pintiats (Piute band). Shos. Piro (1. Language of Sinecu Pueblo, Mexico. Tan. 2. Used as synonym for people of Taos Pueblo). Tan. Piscataqua. Alg. Pisquows. Salsh. Pissasec. Alg. Pitalec. Coah. Piucha (probably Piute). Piute (collective term for a number of bands in and plepite upon Nevada and Utah; relationship not yet defined). Shos. Pocomtacook. Alg. Pocumtuck. See Pocomtacook. Podunk. Alg. Pohoji. See Shoshoni. Pojuaque (Pueblo town). Tan. Pokanoket. See Wampanoag. Ponashita. See Bannock. Ponea. Su. Ponearar. See Ponca. e Ponus’ tribe. Alg. Poquonnue. Alg. Porcupine Nation. See Nation du Pore-épie. Porteur. See Taculli. Poruche. See Weminuche. Potano’s tribe. Timu. Potatuc. Alg. Poteskeet. Alg. Potomac. Alg. Pottawotomi. Alg. Poualak. See Assiniboin. Poue. See Pottawotomi. Povuate (Pueblo village). Ker. Powhatan (tribe and confederacy). Alg. Puanag. See Sioux. Puant. See Winnebago. Pudding River Indians. See Ahantchuyuk. PICT—QUIAHANLES. at Pueblo (collective-for pueblo building Indians in the southwest part of the United States). Punashly. See Bannock. Puncha. See Ponca. Puyallup. Salsh. Premorski. See [kogmut. Primoski. See Ikogmut. Pshwanwappam. See Yakama tribe. Pyede. See Piede. Quackoll. See Quacolth. Quacolth (1. A tribe; 2. A collective term for tribes of same language). Haeltz. Quactos. Skitt? Quaks’namish. See Squoxon. Quainoo (may be Quanee). Quaitso. Salsh. Quanee. Skitt? Quanoatinna. See Caddo tribe. Quantlen. Salsh. Quapaw. Su. Quaquidto (Vancouver Island, possibly Kyoquaht). Wak? Quatomah. Ath. Quatoghie. See Wyandot. Quatouwa. See Quatomah. Quatsinu. Haeltz. Quarreler. See Kutchin. Quawguult. See Quacolth. Quazacmash. Salsh. Queah. Skitt. Queets. See Quaitso. Quehaneeculta. Haeltz. Quehaquacolt. Haeltz. Quehmamish. Salsh. ‘ Quelanbuheche (French, 1675, doubtful). Quelaptonlilt. Salsh? Quenaitsath (may be Kwaaksat band of Quillehutes). Queniult. Salsh. Quentleahmish (may be ereraeten: Salsh. Queou Coupé. See Kiskakon. Quera. See Queres. Querepisa. See Acolipissa. Queres (a Pueblo tribe, chief town San Domingo; probably included all towns of the same language). Ker. ~ Querquelin. Chin. Queugue. See Cayuga. Quiahanles. Skitt. 38 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Quiarlpi. See Colville tribe. Quicsultinut. Hailtz. Quigate (may be Quapaw). Quillequaqua. See Willopah. Quinaitle. See Queniult. Quinet (French, 1675, Texas coast or vicinity). Quinipissa. See Acolapissa. Quinnechant (may be Quenaitsath). Salsh ? Quinnipiac. Alg. Quioucohanoc. Alg. Quoaqui (French, 1675, western gulf region). Rapid Indians. See Grosventre. Rappahanoc. Alg. Raritan (division of the Unami). Alg. Rascal. See Rogue River Indians. Rat River Indians. See Vunta-kutchin. Rat tribes (on Koo and Kuprianoff Ids.). May be Hoodsunoo or Cake. Rat Indians. See Tukkuth-kutchin; probably also used for Vunta- kutchin. Recgawawane (division of Wappinger 2). Alg. Rechahecrian (probably Cherokee). Red-fish Indians, See Sluacus-tinneh. Red-knife Indians. See Tsaltsanottine. Ree. See Arikara.- Renard. See Fox. Rhachoabish. Salsh. Rhagenratka. See Neutral Nation. Rhea. See Arikara. Ricearee. See Arikara. Riccohockan (probably Chtrokee). Riguehronon. See Erie. River Indians (1. Collective term for Indians on lower Connecticut River ; 2. Collective term for Indians on Hudson River; 3. Synonym for Mis- sisangas). Alg. Robbers. See Bannock. Rocky Mountain Indians. See Daho-tena. Rogue Indians (collective term for Indians on Rogue River, Oregon). Ath. Rogue River Indians. See Rogue Indians. Rootdigger (an indefinite term, about identical with Bannock or Piute). Shos. Roundhead. See Tete de Boule. Saamena. See Nicutamux. Sabassa. Chmsy. Sac. Alg. Sachimer. See Sacumehu. QUIARLPI—SANTIAM. 3? Sacmeuh. See Sacumehu. Sacumehu. Salsh. Sacbush. Salsh. Sacoqui. See Sokokee. Sahaptin. See Nez Perce. Sahehwamish (probably Sahanamish). Salsh. Sahmamish. Salsh. Sahwaunoo. See Shawnee. Saint Francis (chiefly Abnakis). Alg. Saint Helena (South Carolina). Saint Mary’s. Kalap. Saint Regis (secondary tribe). Irq. Saki. See Sac. Salish. Salsh. Salteur: (1. Part of Ojibwa; 2. Used for Sweat Alg. Salt Lake Diggers. See Hocanticara. Samdan. Kol. Samilkamuigh. See Similkameen. Samish. See Salsh. Sampich. See Sanpits. Sampichya. See Sanpits. San Augustin del Isleta. See Isleta. San Buena Ventura de Cochiti. See Cochiti. Sandia (Pueblo town). Tan. San Diego de Jemes. See Jemes. San Diego de Tesuque. See Tesuque. San Domingo (Pueblo town). Ker. San Estevan de Acoma. See Acoma. Sanetch. Salsh? San Felipe (Pueblo town). Ker. . San Francisco de Nambe. See Nambe. San Geronimo de Taos. See Taos. Sanhican: (1. Raritan; 2. Used for Mohawk). San Josef de la Laguna. See Laguna. San Juan de los Caballeros. See San Juan. San Lorenzo de Picuris. See Picuris. Sanpede. See Sanpits. San Pedro Indians (Texas). Sanpits (division of Utes). Shos. Sans Puelles. Salsh. Santa Ana (Pueblo town). Ker. Santa Clara (Pueblo town). Ker. Santee (South Carolina). Santee Sioux (collective term for eastern Sioux). Su. Santiam: (1; A tribe of the Waiilatpuan family; 2. Collective term for Santiam proper and Ahalpam). 40 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Santo Domingo. See San Domingo. San Tomas de Abiquiu. See Abiquiu. Sap. See Saponi. Saponi. Su? Saque. See Sac. Sareci. See Cheraw. Sarapina. Alg. ‘Sarlisto. See Spokan. “Sarsi. See Sursee. Sasitka. See Satsika. -Sateap (perhaps Seapeat). ‘Satchet. See Scadjat. ‘Satana. See Shawnee. ‘Satsall. Salsh. Satsika. Alg. ~ Sauk. See Sac. Saukaulutue. Skitt? Saultern 1. Division of Ojibwa; 2. Ojibwa. Alg. Sauwontiats (Piute band). Shos. Savannah: (1. Indians on Savannah River; 2. General term for Prairie Indians in different regions; 3. Synonym for Shawnee). Savinnar (Vancouver Island). Savannuca. See Savanogee. Sawanogee (part of Shawnees living with Creeks). Alg. . Saweesaw-tinneh. See Athabasca. Sayhaymamish (probably Sahmamish). Salsh. Sayoustla. See Siuslaw. Sbalush. Salsh. Schaghticoke. See Scaticook. Seaticook (secondary tribe). Alg. Scheetswish. See Coeur d’Alene. Schissatuck. See Seshaht. Schitcha. See Sitka. Schitsui. See Coour d’ Alene. S’Clallam. See Clallam. Scodamish (perhaps Squadabsh q. v.). Schoomadit (Vancouver Island). Schwogelpi. See Colville tribe. Sdodohobish. Salsh. Sdoqualbich. See Snoqualmi. Sdoqualbush. See Snoqualmi. Seapeat. Salsh. Secamish. Salsh. Secatoag. Alg. Secatquonay (probably Sitka q. v.). Sechelt (British Columbia). SANTO DOMINGO—SHINNECOCK. Secotan. Alg. Secowocomoco. . Alg. Sedentary Chukehis. See Yuit. Seepohs-haniu-makakee. See Mandan. Segata-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. Seewallitsu. Salsh. Se-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. Selawigmut (division of Kuagmut). Esk. Seminole. Musk. Seneca. Irq. Senijextee. Salsh. Sequin. Alg. Seretee. See Santee. Seshaht. Wak. Sessitong. See Sisseton. Setauket. Alg. Seunowkahtah. See Onondaga. Seuvarits (division of Utes). Shos. Seviche. See Shivwits. Sewee (South Carolina). Shackahonea. Irq. Shakie (perhaps Sac). Shaktoligmut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. Shalattoo. Salsh. Shallee. See Ootlashoot Tushepaw. Shanwappom. See Yakama tribe. Sharha. See Cheyenne. Shastacosta. Ath. Shaway. See Cheyenne. Shawnees. Alg. Sheastuckle (probably Siuslaw). Shebasha. See Sabassa. Sheberetche. See Seuvarits. Shechart. See Seshaht. Shemelakomuch. See Similkameen. Shenoma. See Moqui. Sheep Indian. See Abbato-tenah. Sheepeater. See Tucarica. Sheshapootosh. See Nasecapee. Sheshatapooshoish. See Nascapee. Shetimasha. Chit. Shewhapmuth. See Shooshwap. Shirrydika 1 (division of Washaiki); 2 See Arapho. Shienne. See Cheyenne. Shimaiwiva. See Chemehueva. Shinnecock. Alg. 4l 42 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Shinumo. See Moqui. Shis Inday (used for Apache, but probably Tannah- — Ath. Shistacoostee. See Shastacosta. Shiverets. See Seuvarits. Shivwits. Shos. Shiwi. See Zuni. Shoalwater Bay. See Artsmilsh. Shoccori (North Carolina). Shockey (perhaps Sac). ° Shoe Indians. See Ahwahawa. Shomamish. Salsh. Shoneanawetowah. See Cayuga. Shooshwap. Salsh. Shoshokie. See Tussawehe. Shoshoni. See Washaiki. Shoshoteos. See Tussawehe. Shonagan. Skitt. Shottmamish. Salsh. Shoto. Chin? Shouaguan. Skitt. Shyik. Shap. Shwoyelpi. See Colville tribe. Siaywa. Shap. Sicaog. .Alg. Sicanee. See Thekenneh. Sickename. See Seguin. Sicnahuttee. Kol. Sierra Blanca (division of Apaches). Ath. Sikseso-tene. See Sixes. Siksikhoa. See Satsika. Silela (Oregon). Silla (Pueblo town). Ker. Similkameen. Salsh. Sinniker. See Seneca. Sinakemish.« Salsh. : Sinipoual. See Sans Puelles. Sinnager. See Seneca. Sinniki. See Seneca. Sinkiuse. Salsh. Sinpavelish. See Sans Puelles. Sinpohellechach. See Sans Puelle. Sinselan. See Siuslaw. Sinspeelish. See Nespelum. Sintsink (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. Sisseton (division of Sioux). Su. Sistasoone. See Sisseton. SHINUMO—SNOQUALAMUKE. 43 Sitka: (1. A Koluschan tribe; 2. Incorrectly used for Satsika). Sitka-quonay. See Sitka. Sitkhinskoi. See Koluschan family. Sitleece (British Columbia). Ath? Siuslaw. Yak. Siwanoy (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. Siwinowe. See Shawnee. Sixes. Ath. Six Nations. See Iroquois. Skaddal. Salsh? Skadjat. Salsh. Skaget. See Skadjat. Skainamish. Salsh. Skamoynumach (division of Okinagans-Ross). Salsh. Skat-kwahn. See Skut-kwahn. Skatkmischi. See Coeur d’Alene. Skeawamish or Skeywhamish (same?). Salsh. Skedan. Skitt. Skeetsomish (may be Coeur d’Alene). Skena. (Collective.) Chmsy. Sketch-hugh. See Cour d’Alene. Skilloot (Lewis & Clarke). Chin. Skinpaw. Sha? Skitsaih. See Coeur d'Alene. Skittagat. Skitt. Skittega. See Skittagats. Skodamish. Salsh. Skoffie. See Nascapee. Skokomish. Salsh. Skopamish. Salsh. Skoylpeli. See Colville tribe. Skuecstanajump (probably Sk’tahlejum). Salsh. Skit-kwahn. Kol. Sk’tahlejum. Salsh. Skwale. See Nisqualli. Slave. See Ettcha-ottine. Slave Indians: (1. Acheto-tinneh; 2. Collective. Ath. Slowercuss-Dinai. See Sluacus-tinneh. Sluacus-tinneh. Ath. S’Magemut. See Magemut. Smes. See Smeush. Smeush. Salsh. Snake (general term for northern Shoshonian bands, especially the Washaiki and Bannocks). Shos. Snohomish. Salsh. Snoqualamuke. See Snoqualmi. 44 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Snoquamish. Salsh. Soak. Salsh. Sobabruc. Salsh. Sockamuke. Salsh. Sogup (division of Utes). Shos. Sokokee. Alg. Songish. Salsh. Sonnontouan. See Seneca. Sonnontoue-ronnon. See Seneca. Sonushogwatowar. See Cayuga. Soosooit (collective). Esk. Soquatuck. See Sokokee. Sorcier. See Nipissing. Sorsi. See Sursee. Sotto. See Ojibwa. Souriquois. See Micmac. Soulier Noir. See Ahwahawa. Souteu. See Ojibwa. Southois. See Uzutiuhe. Sowhegan. Alg. Soyitinu. Haeltz. Spokan. Salsh. Squadabsh. Salsh. Squalleahmish. See Nisqualli. Squalz. See Nisqualli. Squannaroo (Lewis & Clarke). Salsh. Squawkihow. See Neutral Nation. Squawmisht. Salsh. Squiaelp. See Colville tribe. Squinamish. See Squonamish. Squinters. See Katchin. Squonamish. Salsh. Squoxon. Salsh. Stackin. See Stahkeen. Stactalejabsh. Salsh. Stahkeen. Kal. - Staitan (probably Crow). Staklamish. Salsh. Staktamish. Salsh. St-ca-mish. See Secamish. Stegarakie. Irq? Stehtsasamish. Salsh. Stehchasamish. See Stehtsasamish. Steilacoomamish. See Stillacum. Stekin. See Stahkeen. Stick. See Khununah. SNOQUAMISH—TAGNO. 45 Stickeen. See Stahkeen. Stietshoi. See Coour d’Alene. Stikeen. See Stahkeen. Stillacum. Salsh. Stitcheosawmish. See Stehtsasamish. Stotuchwamish. See Stolutsivhamish. Stolukwamish. See Stillacum. Stolutswhamish. Salsh. Stone Sioux. See Assiniboin. Stono. North Carolina. Strongbow. See Edchawtawhoot-tinneh. Srootlemamish. See S’hotlmamish. Suanaimuch. Salsh? Sumas. Salsh? Sundown. See Samdan. Suppai (Cosninos ?). Suquamish. Salsh. Sursee. Ath. Susquehanna. See Conestoga. Sussee. See Sursee. Suthsett (Vancouver Island). Probably. Seshaht. Svernofftsi. See Oglemut. Svhet damsh (may be Swedebish). Salsh. Swalash. Salsh. Swedebish. Salsh. Swinomish. Salsh. Swoquabish. See Suquamish. Swulchabsh. Salsh. S’yilalko absh. Salsh. Tabeguachi. See Timpanagats. Tabenache. See Timpanagats. Tabequache. See Timpanagats. Tabewache. See Timpanagats. Tabiachi. See Timpanagats. Tabittiki. See Abittibi. Tabuat Utah (probably Timpanagats). Shos. Tacco (named as a Koloschian tribe, but may be the Tahko-tinneh. Tachie. See Loni. Taculli (collective term for a group of tribes on the headwaters of Fraser River, British Columbia). Ath. Taculta. Haeltz. Tadousac. Alg. Taeeteetaw. Kol. Laensa. Taen. Taensapaoa. See Tangipahoa. Tagno. See Taio. 46 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Tahano (probably Tajo). Tahkah (probably Toquaht). Tahkali. See Taculli. Tahko-tinneh (division of Khununah). Ath. Tahos. See Taos. Tahzee. See Apache. , Taigh. See Tyigh. Tairtla. See Tyigh. Tait. Salsh. Taitinapam. Shap. Taiyayanokhotana (division of Kaiy uhkhotana). Ath. Takaiyakhotana (division of Kaivuhkhotana). Ath. Takayaksen. See Kaiyuhkhotana. Takilma. Tak. Takoo. See Tacco. Takuth-kutchin. See Tukkuth-kutchin. Talcotin. See Tantin. Taldushdun-dudte. Ath? Tallgwee. See Alligewi. Talquatee. Kol. Talusa (French, 1680, probably Arkansas or Louisiana). Tamaroa. Alg. Tamp Pah Utah. See Yampaticara. Tanai. See Athapascan family. Tanana. See Tenan-kutchin. Tangipahoa. Tanico. See Tunica. Tankiteke (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. Tanna-kutshi (may be Tenan-kutchin). Tannah-shissen (division of Apaches). Ath. Taiio (collective term for several Pueblo towns of same language). Tan. Tanta-kwan. See Tongas. Tantawats. See Chemehueva. Tantsawhot-dinneh. See Tsaltsan-ottine. Taos: (1. A Pueblo town—Tafioan family; 2. A Pueblo “nation” in 1634, with Taos Pueblo as chief town; 3. Division of the Utes, named from habitat in Taos Mountains. Tappan (division of the Unami). Alg. Taranqua (probably Carankawa). Taracone. See Yuta-jenne. Taraha (French 1675, doubtful). Tarreormeut (may be Kittegarute). Tasauwihi. See Tussawehe. Tash Ute. See Taos Ute. Taskirero. See Tuscarora. Tatanchok-kutchin (probably Tutchohn-kutchin). TAHANO—TENUCTAW. 47 Tathzey-kutchin (probably Tatsah-kutchin), Tatla (British Columbia, may be Thetliotin). Ath? Tatlit-kutchin (probably Tatsah-kutchin). Tatsah-kutchin. Ath. Tatschigmut. See Unaligmut. Tatshiautin. Ath. Tatuskey. See Morautacund. Tautin. Ath. ¢ Tauxenent. Alg. Tauxitanian. Irq? Tawaa. See Ottawa. Tawaconi (division of Wichitas). Cad. Ta"wa"zhika (part of the Quapaw). Su. Taywaugh. See Tehua 1. Tchede-tene. See Chetco. Tchinkitane. See Koluschan. Tchinkitanien. See Koluschan. Tchioumaqui. Louisiana. Tchougatchi-Konaga. See Chugachigmut. Tchougazez Esquimaux. See Chugachigmut. Tchouktchi Asiatique. See Yuit. Tchutlestchum-tene. See Chetlessenten. Tdha-kuttchin (may be Vunta-kutchin, or Tukkuth-kutchin). Teahawrehbhogeh. See Mohawk. Tebechya. See Timpanagats. Teet. See Tait. Tegninateo. Irq? Tegua. See Tehua. Tehanin-kutchin. See Knaiakhotana. Tehowneanyohent. See Seneca. Tehua: (1. Collective term for several Pueblo towns of one idan hie 2. Town of the Moquis). Tan. Tejua (part of Apaches, according to Conde, but may be intended for part of Pueblos). Telategmut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. Temiscaming. Alg. Temoksee. (South of Jacobsville, Nev.; Piute Band). Shos. Temoria. See Tamaroa. Tempanahgoe. See Timpanagats. Tenan-kutchin. Ath. Tenina. Shap. Tennuth-kutehin. Ath. Tenpenny Ute. See Timpanagats. Tensaw. See Taensa. Tennai. See Navajo. Tenuctaw. Haeltz. 48 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Tesuque (Pueblo town). Tan. Tetau. See Comanche. Tete de Boule (band near head of Ottawa River, Canada). Alg. Tete Platte. See Choctaw. Tewictovee. See Miami. Texas. See Ioni. Thekenneh (may be Daho-tena). Ath. Thetliotin. Ath. Thickwood Indians. See Edchawtawhoot-tinneh. Thinthonha. See Teton. Thiroki. See Cherokee. Thlingcha-tinneh. Ath. Thlinket. See Koluschan family. Thljegonchotana. See Kaiyuhkhotana. Thnaina. See Athapascan family. Thoigarikkah. See Nez Perce (1). Thynné. See Athapascan family. Tigua. See Tehua (1). Tiguex (probably Tehua) (1). Tillamook. Salsh. Timpaiavats (division of Utes). Shos. Timpanagats (division of Utes). Shos. Timpanaguchya. See Timpanagats Timpanogo. See Timpanagats. Timpashauwagotsits (Piute band). Shos. Timucua. Timu. Tinné or Tinneh. See Athapascan family. Tintonha. See Teton. Tionontati. Irq. Titlogat People (probably Tutchohn-kutchin, or part of them). Ath. Tiwadima® (division of the Quapaws). Su. Tiyakhunin. See Unungun. Tjuiccu-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. T’kitske. See Kaiyuhkhotana. Tlaoquatch. See Clahoquaht. Tlatseanai. Ath. Tlinkit. See Koluschan family. Tnai. See Knaiakhotana. Tnaina. See Knaiakhotana. Toanhooch. See Twana. Tobacco Nation. See Tionontati. Tocwogh. Alg. Tohotaenrat. Irq. Tokali. See Taculli. Tolkotin (probably Tootootni). Tomoco. See Timucua. TLSUQUE—TSIMSHEEAN. 49 Tomgass. See Tongas. Toncawa. Tonk. Tongas. Kol. Tonginga. See Ta™wazhika. Tonto (1. A Yuman tribe; 2. Vinni ettinenne Apaches). Too. Skitt. ’ Tookaricecah. See Tucarica. Tootootni (In Oregon, not Tataten of California). Ath. Topinga. See Ta®wa®zhika. Toquaht. Wak. Toquatux. See Toquaht. Toquima (head of Reese River Valley, Nevada; Piute band). Shos. Toriman. See Tiwadima*. Torountogoats (Gosiats band). Shos. Tosawee. See Tussawehe. Tosiwitche. See Tussawehe. Totero. See Tutelo. Totiri. See Tutelo. Tototin (1. Tootootin of Oregon; 2. Tataten of California). Ath. Touchonta-kutchin. See Tutchohn-kutchin. Toustchipa. See Tushepaw. Towahha. Salsh. Towaccaro. See Tawaconi. Toweahge. See Wichita. Toweash. See Wichita. Towiac. See Tawaconi. Toy Piute (Piute band at Lower Carson Lake, Nevada). Shos. T’quawquamish. Salsh. Tratsé-kutshi (named as a part of “ Tathzey-kutchin.” Probably Tatsah- kutehin). Ath. Tripaniec. Alg.? True Thnaina. See Knaiakhotoma. Tsalakee. See Cherokee. Tsaltsan-ottiné. Ath. Tsatsnotin. Ath. Tsauwarits. See Tsowvaraits. Tschgatzi. See Chugachigmut. Tschinkaten. See Tenan-kutchin? Tschnagmut (collective term for Kaviagmut and Unaligmut). Esk. Tschugatschi. See Chugachigmut. Tschugazzi. See Chugachigmut. Tsihailish. See Chehalis. Tsilco-tinneh. Ath. Tsillane (division of Okinagans (Ross). Salsh. Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. See Edchawtawhoot-tinneh. Tsimsheean. See Chimsian. 1282 1 N——4 50 “TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Tsoigah-rikkah. See Nez Percé 1. Tsomass. See Sumas. Tsonnontouan. See Seneca. Tsouwaraits (Piute band ; formerly four bands). Shos. Tsuh-tvuh. See Isa-ttine. Ttynai. See Athapascan family. Tualiti. See Atfalati. Tuanoh. See Twana. Tucarica (named as a distinct tribe, but may be a part of Washaiki). Shos. ; Tuinontatek. See Tionontati. Tukkuth-kutchin (mentioned by Dall in 1877, but not in 1885). Ath. Tuknarikai. See Tucarica. Tulkepa (said to be Tonto, 1). Yum. Tumwater Indians. Chin. Tungass. See Tongas. Tun Ghaase. See Tongas. Tunica. Tunich. See Athapascan family. Tunxis. Alg. Tuse. See Tuscarora. Tuscarora. Irq. ‘Tushepaw (1 collective term used by Washaiki, &c., for Indians south and southeast of them; 2 Used by Lewis & Clarke as the name of a tribe, perhaps the Salish tribe). Tuski. See Yuit. “‘Tassawehe. Shos. ‘Tutchohn-kutchin. Ath. ‘Tutelo. Su. ‘Tuwurints. Gosiats band. Shos. Twahtwah. See Miami. Twakauhah. See Neutral Nation. Twana. Salsh. TTwankenna. See Neutral Nation. ‘Twightwee. See Miami. Twowokanae. See Tawaconi. ‘Tyigh (Teaxtkni of Klamaths). Sha. Wainuints (Piute band). Shos. Wehee. Uch. Ucletah. See Yuclulaht. Ucienu. Haeltz. Ugagogmut (division of Ogulmut). Esk. Ugalakmut (named by Dall in 1877, but not in 1885). Esk. Ugalentsi. See Ugalakmut. Ugalyakhmutsi. See Ugalakmut. Ugashigmut (division of Ogulmut). Esk. TSOIGAH-RIKKAH—WABINGA. 51 Ugaxpaxti (division of the Quapaws). Su. Usnulta. See Yuclulaht. Uinkarets (Piute band). Shos. Uintats (division of the Utes). Shos. Ukagemut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. Ukwogmut (division of Okeeogmut). Esk. Ulseah. See Alsea. Ultschna. See Kamégmut. Ulukagmut. See Kaiyuhkhotana. Ulukakhotana (division of Kaiyuhkhotana, Ath. Umano. See Yumano. Umatilla. Sha. Umpqua. Ath. Unakhotana. Ath. Unalachtgo (division of the Delawares). Alg. Unalakligemut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. Unalaska. See Khagantayakhunkhin. Unaleet. See Unaligmut. Unaligmut. Esk. Unami (division of the Delawares). Alg. Uncowa. Alg. Unepapa (division of the Teton Sioux). Su. Unkakaniguts (Piute band). Shos. Unkapanukuints (Piute band). Shos. Unungun. Unu. Upatsesatuch. See Opechisaht. Upper Cherokees (part of Cherokees formerly living in mountains in western North Carolina and on headwaters of Tennessee River). Gg: Upper Chinook. See Watlala. Upsaroka. See Crow. Uqluxlatuch (probably Yuclulaht). Ushery (probably Catawba). Uskeemi. See Eskimauan family. Utah. See Ute. Utaouax. See Ottawa. Utawa. See Ottawa. Ute. Shos. Utumpaiats (Piute band). Shos. Uzutiuhe (part of the Quapaws). Su. Vanta-kutshi. See Vunta-kutchin. Vaquero (division of Apaches). Ath. Vermillion (probably division of Kickapoos). Alg. Vinni-ettinenne (division of Apaches). Ath. Vunta-kutchin. Ath. Wabinga. See Wappinger. 52 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Wacamuc. Kalap? Waccamaw (South Carolina). Waccanessisi. Chiu. Waccoa. See Woccon. Wachuset. Alg. Waco. Cad. “Wahclelia Shahala (may be Watlala). Chin? Wahkiacum. Chin. Wahowpum. See Clickatat. Wahpapi. See Walpahpee. “Wahpatong. See Wahpeton. ‘Wahpeton (part of Sioux). Su. Wahpecuta (part of Sioux). Su. -Wahshawshee. See Osage. Wahtohtana. See Oto. Wakashan family (west coast of Vancouver Island).’ Wakynakaine. See Akinagan. Wallahpah. See Willopah. Wallapai. See Hualapai. Wallawalla. Sha. Walker River Piute. See Ocki Piute. Walkinpahpee. See Walpahpee. Walpahpee Snakes (Shoshonian band in Eastern Oregon). Shos. Wampanoag. Alg. Wanami. See Unami. Waoranec (division of the Munsees). Alg. Wapanachki (1. Delawares, Mohegans, and connected tribes; 2. Ab- paki confederacy). Alg. Wapatoota. See Wahpecuta. Wapekute. See Wahpecuta. Wappanoo. See Wappinger. Wappatoo Indians. See Atfalati. Wappinger (tribe and confederacy). Alg. Warareereeka (one of three divisions of Snakes (Ross); maybe Wara- dika, division of Bannocks). Shos. Warm Spring Indians: (1. Apache band, probably part of Se-jenne; 2. Collective term for Indians on Warm Spring reservation, Oreg.). Warranawonkong (division of the Munsees). Alg. Warrasqueoc. Alg. Wasco. Chin. Washaiki. Shos. Washakeek. See Washaiki. Washawshe. See Osage. Washita. Louisiana. Washo. Wash. Wassaw. See Waxsaw. WACAMUC—WICHITA. 53 Wat-Coosa (North Carolina). Wateree. Catb. Watlala (probably a collective term). Chin. Wattasoon. See Ahwahawa. Waulatpu. See Cayuse. Wawarsink (division of the Munsees. Alg. Wawyachtonoe (division of Mohegans, 3). Alg. Waxsaw (North Carolina), Wea (formerly part of the Miamis). Alg. Weanoec. Alg. Weandah. See Cherokee. Weber Ute (local name of a band of Utes). Shos. Wecquaesgeek (division of Wappingers, 2). Alg. Weitletoch. Haeltz. Wekeemoch. Haeltz. Welsh Indians (applied to several tribes, especially the Mandans). Weminuche. See Wiminuints. Wenatshepum (said to be the Pisquows, but both names are mentioned as distinct in treaty of 1855). Wenrorono (Ouenrohronnon, lived with Hurons; not to be confounded with Ouiouenronnon or Cayugas). Irq? Weopomeoec. Alg. Wepawaug. Alg. Wequehachke. See Wappinger, 1. Werowocomoco. Alg. Westenhue (division of Mohegans, 3; afterward called Stockbridges: Ruttenber). Alg. Westo. North Carolina. Western Aleut. See Nikhukhuin. Western Snake. See Wihinasht. Wetapahato. Head of Platte River, allied with Kiowas and sup- posed to be part of the Comanches (Lewis and Clarke). Shos.? Wewarka. Haeltz. i Wewarkum (not Wewarka). Haeltz. Wharcoot. Salsh.? Whashwhypum. See Clickatat. Wheelpoo. See Colville tribe. Whelappa. See Willopah. Whilapa. See Willopah. Whinega, See Hunah. Whiscaw (with Yakama confederacy). White Mountain Apache. See Coyotero. Whonkentea. Irq.? Whulwhypum. See Clickatat. Wiccaninish. Salsh ? ' Wichita. Cad. 54 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. Wico. See Waco. Wicocomoco. Alg. Wicomesse (probably Wicocomoco). Alg. Wiekagjoce (division of Mohegans 3). Alg. Wihinasht (band of Snakes west of Bannocks; name now obsolete). Shos. Willetpo Chopunnish. See Cayuse. Willopah. Ath. Wiminuints (division of Utes). Shos. Windaw (probably Wyaudot). Wingandacoa. See Secotan. Winnas Snake. See Wihinasht. Winnebago. Su. Winnemucca Indians (collective term for Piutes under Winnemucca). Shos. Winnepesaukee. Alg. Winootchi (named as a tribe of Washington Territory, but may be a collective term). Winyaw. South Carolina. Wisacky. See Waxsaw. Wisham. Chin. Wishtenatin. Ath. ‘Wasscopam. See Wasco. Wisswham. See Wisham. Waccon. Catb. Womenunche. See Wiminuints. Wongunk. Alg. Wood people. See Haian-kutchin. W’tassone. See Oneida. Wundat. See Wyandot. Wyandot (a secondary tribe formed of the *elifods and other tribes confederated after being driven from Canada). Irq. Wyanoke. See Weanoc. Xicarilla. See Tannah-shissen. ‘ Xumaia. See Yuma. Yabipaee. See Yavapai. Yacon. Yak. Yagats (Piute band). Shos. Yahshute. See Joshua. Yahooskin Snakes (Shoshonian body in Eastern Oregon). Shos. Yakama (tribe and confederacy). Shap. and Salish. Yakutat. Kol. Yaltasse. See Yatassee. Yamassee. Musk. Yamel. Kalap. Yamhill. See Yamel. WICO—ZUNI. 55 Yamkallie. See Yonkalla. Yampapa. See Yampaticara. Yampaticara (Shoshonian body, sometimes classed as part of hess Shos. Yampao. See Yavipai. Yampa Ute. See Yampaticara. Yancton of the Plains (probably Yanktonais). Yancton of the South. See Yankton. Yankton (division of Sioux). Su. Yanktonais (division of Sioux). Su. Yasuchan. See Joshua. Ath. Yatassee. Cad. Yattapo. See Yatassee? Yavipai. Yum. Yazoo. Musk? Yeletpo-Chopunnish. See Cayuse. Yellowknife Indians (1. Ah-tena; 2. Tsaltsan-ottiné). Yendat. See Wyandot. Yengetong. See Yankton. Yeopim. Alg. Yeppe (wander on Upper Platte and in mountains; ; Supposed to be part of Comanches). Lewis and Clarke. Shos.? Yoacomoco (probably Secowocomoco). Alg. Yonkalla. Kalap. Youiccone. See Yacon. * Youmatalla. See Umatilla. Yowani. Musk. Yuelulaht. Wak. Yuceulta. See Taculta. Yuit. Esk. Yukon Indians. See Kutcha-Kutehin. Yukonikhotana. See Unakhotana. Yuma. Yum. Yumano (division of Apaches?) Ath. Yuquachee. Ath. ° Yuta. See Ute. Yutahkah. See Navajo. Yuta-jenne (1. Apache name of Navajos; 2. An Apache band). Ath. Yutanund. Alg. Zindia. See Sandia. Zia. See Silla. Zuni. Zun. Sti aa Sain | ae ee ae ‘ a et eae paper irik: ‘Si ua a prasi ii aa e. ‘Aaeke eer Soatbianiae dine sit aot des) § f ae ake > OR RN aE le t ‘ , iS ayer Vid a ou iby Pee i ss haa M7 a "eae luig ae an Bg lla cecum “tegen re i Juste a ant Mil Drrnt Me aa AE Kee ont. m ah IE ae icy aa 8) sud DSTO ‘a aida pathy ie Ree a Bt WO bins: -taaeaaan Weber EE AERO ATY. Pad peli tae ont ell aes: Fakes. jeatesraoes Retrd LINGUISTIC STOCKS | or | AMERIGAN| INDIANS \) NORTH oF Mexico | BY J.W. POWELL. Seale me ou stu mee © saeeure WSS ee eee Seesecees tC ER? >) ye f ” 4A " L bel se or we ; ee 6 a) ale ——_ f2f Zz SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 4ir BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR * BIBLIOGRAPHY ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES BY JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING WAS BING TON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1892 LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of. lin- guistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By James C, Pilling. In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p. 553, text pp. 555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°. Issued separately with cover title as follows: Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau of ethnology | by | James ©. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [| Vignette| | Washington | Government printing office | 1881 Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553, text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued. Smithsonian institution—bBureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell di- rector | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- uted only to collaborators) | Washington | Government printing office 1885 Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) pp. v-viii, introdnetion pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re- ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviil, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of the sheet only. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- rector | Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constan- tine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office {| 1887 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (April 20, 1887) pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes, &°. An edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- rector | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constan- tine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1887 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (September 1, 1887) pp. ili-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°. An edition of 100 copies Was issued in royal 8°. Ill IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- rector | Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Con- stantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1888 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (December 15, 1888) pp. ili-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fae- similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- rector | Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1889 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp. iii-y, text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot’s Indian bible | and | on his other translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | Extract from a ‘Bibliography of the Algonquian languages” | [Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1890 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 1-58, 21 fac similes, royal 8°. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- rector | Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constantine Pilling | [| Vignette] | Washington | Government printing office | 1891 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. iii-iv, introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii-vili, list of fac-similes pp. ix—x, text pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. Peer AC E The series of bibliographies of which this forms the sixth number ras Started in 1887 with the Eskimauan as the first issue. They are all based upon the “ Proof Sheets of a Bibliography of the North Amer- ican Languages,” by the same author, printed in 1885, in an edition of 110 copies. Titles and collations of these works will be found on a previous page. The next in order of publication are to be the Chinookan (including the Chinook jargon), the Salishan, and the Wakashan, all of which are well under way. The name adopted by the Bureau of Ethnology for this family of languages (Athapascan) is that used by Gallatin in the American An- tiquarian Society’s Transactions, vol. 11, 1836. It has been objected to by a number of missionaries—students of various dialects of this family in the Northwest—but priority demanded that Gallatin’s name should be retained. It is derived from the lake of the same name, which, ac- cording to Father Lacombe, signifies ‘place of hay and reeds.” The following account of the distribution of the Athapascan people is taken from Powell’s “Indian Linguistic Families,” in the Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology: The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are best given under three primary groups: Northern, Pacitic, and Southern. Northern group.—This ineludes all the Athapascan tribes of British North America and Alaska, In the former region the Athapascans occupy most of the western interior, being bounded on the north by the Arctic Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow strip of coast; on the east by the Eskimo of Hudson’s Bay as far south as Churchill River, south of which river the country is occupied by Algonquian tribes. On the south the Athapascan tribes extended to the main ridge between the Athapasca and Saskatchewan rivers, where they met Algouquian tribes; west of this area they were bounded on the south by Salishan tribes, the limits of whose territory on Fra- ser River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and Dawson’s map of 1884. On the west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes nowhere reach the coast, being cut off by the Wakashan, Salishan, and Chimmesyan families. The interior of Alaska is chiefly occupied by tribes of this family. Eskimo tribes have encroached somewhat upon the interior along the Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, and Noatak rivers, reaching on the Yukon to somewhat below Shageluk Island and on the Kuskokwim nearly or quite to Kolmakoff Redoubt. Upon the two latter they reach quite to their heads. A few Kutchin tribes are (or have been) north of the Porcupine and Yukon rivers, but until recently it has not been known that they extended north beyond the Yukon and Romanzoff mountains. Explorations of - VI PREFACE. Lieut. Stoney, in 1885, establish the fact that the region to the north of those moun- tains is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map is colored accordingly. Only in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes reach the coast: the k’naia-kho- tana, on Cook’s Inlet, and the Ahthena, of Cooper River. Pacific group.—Unlike the tribes of the Northern group, most of those of the Pacific group have removed from their priscan habitats since the advent of the white race. The Pacific group embraces the following: Kwalhioqua, formerly on Willopah River, Washington, near the lower Chinook; Owilapsh, formerly between Shoalwater Bay and the heads of the Chehalis River, Washington, the territory of these two tribes being practically continuous; Tlatscanai, formerly on a small stream on the north- west side of Wapatoo Island. Gibbs was informed by an old Indian that this tribe ‘formerly owned the prairies on the Tsihalis at the mouth of the Skukumehuck, but, on the failure of game, left the country, crossed the Columbia River, and occupied the mountains to the south,” a statement of too uncertain character to be depended upon; the Athapascan tribes now on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservations, Oregon, whose villages on and near the coast extended from Coquille River south- ward to the California line, including, among others, the Upper Coquille, Sixes, Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu tfnné, and other ‘Rogue River” or ‘‘Tou-touten bands,” Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tfinné, and Chetco villages; the Atha- pasean villages formerly on Smith River and tributaries, California; those villages extending southward from Smith River along the Ualifornia coast to the mouth of Klamath River; the HupA villages or “clans” formerly on Lower Trinity River, California; the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: ‘‘They live along the western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley, to Hay Fork; along Eel and Mad rivers, extending down the latter about to Low Gap; also on Dobbins and Larrabie creeks;” and Saiaz, who “formerly occupied the tongue of land jutting down between Eel River and Van Dusen’s Fork.” Southern group.—Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer José Cortez, one of the earliest authorities on these tribes, writing in 1799, defines the boundaries of the Lipan and Apache as extending north and south from 29° N. to 36° N., anid east and west from 99° W. to 114° W.; in other words, from central Texas nearly to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they met tribes of the Yuma stock. The Lipan occupied the eastern part of the above territory, extending in Texas from the Comanche country (about Red River) south to the Rio Grande. More recently both Lipan and Apache have gradually moved southward into Mexico, where they extend as far as Durango. The Navajo, since first known to history, have occupied the country on and south of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona and extending into Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by the cognate Apache except upon the north, where they meet Shoshonean tribes. The present volume embraces 544 titular entries, of which 428 relate to printed books and articles and 116 to manuscripts. Of these, 517 have been seen and described by the compiler, 422 of the prints and 95 of the manuscripts, leaving 27 as derived from outside sources, 16 of the prints and 21 manuscripts. Of those unseen by the writer, titles and descriptions have been received in most cases from persons who have actually seen the works and described them for him. So far as possible, during the proof-reading, direct comparison has beea made with the works themselves. For this purpose, besides his own books, the writer has had access to those in the libraries of Con- gress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, and to several private collections in the city of Washington. Mr, Wilberforce PREFACE. Vile Eames has compared the titles of works contained in his own library and in the Lenox, and recourse has been had to a number of librarians throughout the country for tracings, photographs, etc. The result is that of the 517 works des«ribed de visu comparison of proof has been made direct with the original sources in the case of 424. In this later reading collations and descriptions have been entered into more fully than had previously been done and capital letters treated with move WASHINGTON, D. C., June 15, 1892. severity. PN OD LC ETO. In the compilation of this catalogue the aim has been to include everything, printed or in manuscript, relating to the Athapascan lan- guages: books, pamphlets, articles in magazines, tracts, serials, ete., and such reviews and announcements of publications as seemed worthy of notice. The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the sub- ject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, ete., being included in one alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, by printed works, and second, by manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; and in the ease of printed books each work is followed through its various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up. Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or preposition, when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first words of anonymous titles when entered under an author and from the first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. Each author’s name, with his title, etc., is entered in full but once, i. e., in its alphabetic order. Every other mention of him is by sur- name and initials only, except in those rare cases when two persons of the same surname have also the same initials. All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best. As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in only two cases: first, for proper names, and second, when the word actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been respected. When titles are given of works not seen by the compiler the fact is stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in either case the authority is usually given. Ix Pete Or LANGUAGES: Antena. See Ahtinne. ty (SW. ot ay oS Eat Se Bg a a 2 er 1 RIN et a ro to a tele 2s SA ei oe 3 Applegate Creek. See Nabiltse. Arivaipa Apache. See Apache. ORT SiD Dace Bee 20 Se: ee Sec se One ee 4 Atna. See Ahtinné. FUT GEE Sia SN ete eh OR es Soca eet! 8 Carrier Indians. See Taculli. Chin Indians. See Nagailer. INS AA apa ee Sn noe 2 a ae yea see S = 19 Chiracahua Apache. See Apache. Cook’s Inlet Indians. See Kenai. Copper Indians. See Alitimne. Coppermine Apache. See Apache. pr ee kee rf 8 oa - Sociol cate eer Os <= 20 Coyotero Apache. See Apache. i eet Ss ele SN 5 os dase tome ese hee 23 20 Deéné Dindjie. See Dene. EE rer eerie aes vs <= 2 2 eee ey eae ae 2 _ 26 Faraone. See Apache. Hare Indians. See Peau de Lievre. Haynarger. See Henagi. Re rs Seren ee eh i OL. el itis ree EN 41 Hoopa. See Hupa. (TURE. Soebe, SRS S Ba e icy Soe oP eee a ie ey 41 Ts 2 oe SES Te ee es or a nee EC ee OP ager 41 a EE ee ee as... . 2 eee ee = eee ota 2 Inkalit-Kenai. See Kenai. Jicarilla Apache. See Apache. areER SEAT tt eee Mes 2s <2 Se peewee oe eee ee Ta 45 te Orn ne fe ree ee 8 cs sa Rok e eee Oe ws ee ss SE 44 Katskenai. See Tlatskenai. tate i mn arene nen eT oe yl. alba eee tt oS alae siete als 6 49 SEO a vegies coo. TEE a RE 1 Na ga oto . St.John iii, 16, in Slavé of Mackenzie River (syHabic and roman), p. 58; Tinné or Chepe- wyan of Hudson Bay (syllabie), p.62; Tukudh of Youkon River, p. 64. The so-called Tinné specimen in roman char- acters on p. 63 is really Chippewa. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. Gospel according to Saint John . . . Tinné language. See Kirkby (W. W.) Gospel of St. Mark translated into the See Reeve (W. D.) Gospel of St. Matthew translated into the See Reeve (W. D.) Slavé langcuage. Slave language. Gospels of the four evangelists . . . in the language of the Chipewyan In- dians. See Kirkby (W.W.) Government George. See Dorsey (J. O.) Grammar: Déneé See Morice (A. G.) Montagnais Legott (L.) Montagnais Végréville (V.'T.) Navajo Matthews (W.) Grammatic comments: Apache See Featherman (A.) Apache Miiller (F.) Apache White (J. B.) Athapascan Dorsey (J. 0.) Athapasean Gallatin (A.) Athapasean Grasserie (R. de la). Gallatin (A.) Grandin (—). Chippewyan Chippewyan Deéne Morice (A. G.) Kenai Miiller (F.) Kenai Radlotf (L.) Loucheux Miiller (F.) Navajo Featherman (A.) Navajo Miiller (F.) Navajo Peau de Liévre Wilson (E. F.) Miiller (F.) Sursee Wilson (E. F.) Taeulli Miiller (F.) Tlatskenai Miiller (F.) Umpkwa Miller (F.) Grammatic treatise: Apache See Bancroft (H. H.) Apache Cremony (J. C.) 38 Grammatic treatise — Continued. Chippewyan See Baneroft (H. H.) Déné Petitot (EZ. F.S. J.) Louchewx Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Montagnais Petitot (E. F.S.J.) Peau de Liévre Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Grandin the Chipewyan verb. Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves, written (Bishop —). on one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Contains the indicative present, future, and past of the verbs to eat, to walk, and to look. This manuscript is a copy made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. Grasserie (Raoul de la). Etudes de grammaire comparée. | De la conju- objective | par | Raoul la Grasserie, | docteur en droit, juge au tribunal de Rennes, | membre de la société de linguistique de Paris. | (Ex- trait des Mémoires de la Société de linguistique, t. VI, 4° fascieule.) | [De- sign. | | Paris. | Imprimerie nationale. | M DCCC LXXXVIITI [1888]. Printed cover as above, half-title reverse gaison de blank 1 1. title as above reverse blank 1 1. text | pp. 5-39, 8°. In chapter 3 the conjugation ‘objective | polysynthétique from a number of American languages, among them the Athapascan. Copies seen: Gatschet, Powell. is illustrated by examples Etudes | de | grammaire comparée Des relations grammaticales | cousidé- rées dans leur concept et dans leur ex- pression | ou de la | catégorie des eas | par | Raoul de la Grasserie | docteur en BIBLIOGRAPHY | | | | Some forms of OF THE Grasserie (R. de Ja)—Continued. droit | Juge au Tribunal de Rennes | Membre de la Société de Lingnistique de Paris. | Paris | Jean Maisonneuve, éditeur | 25, quai Voltaire, | 25 | 1890 Printed cover as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. 345- 351, 8°. Examples from several North American lan- guages are made use of by the author: Nahuatl, Dakota, Othomi, Maya, Quiché, Totonaque, Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasque, Esquimau, Troquois, Athapaske, Chiapanéque, Sahaptin, Tehinuk, Choctaw, pp. 17, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 84, 129-132, 133, 177, 325-326, 394, 395. Copies seen: Gatschet. Grouard (Pére Emile). Abridgment of the bible in the Dené Tehippewyan language, syllabie characters. @) In a letter from the Rev. Emile Petitot, dated from Mareuil, France, Apr. 24, 1889, he tells me that among the manuscripts left by him at his last residence, St. Raphael des Tcheppewayans, Saskatechewan, was a copy of the above work. Whether the original was in manuscript or in printed form he failed to inform me. In answer to further inquiries on the subject, Father Petitot wrote me under date of June 1, 1891: “ Referring to your questions, I reiterate that the abridgment af the bible, a copy of which was left by me at St. Raphael Mission, is the work of Mer. Faraud [q. v.], made while he was a simple missionary at Athabasca, before my arrival in the missions of the far north in 1862. The same work was printed in Indian charac-* ters by Pére Grouard at Lac la Biche in 1878-'79, as well as a new and more complete edition of the Déné-Tchippewyan prayer book, another intended for the Dendjie, a third intended for the Cree. ”’ He Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The | American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba). | The Whole Subject Complete in One Volume | Illustrated with Numerous Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah M. Haines. | [Design.] | Chicago: | the Mas-sin-na-gan com- pany, | 1888. Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. preface pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illustrations pp. 9-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°. Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives special lists and a general alphabetic list of the tribes of North America, derivations of tribal names being sometimes given.—Numer- als 1-102 of the Navajo (from Catlin), p. 443; of the Apache, pp. 444-445.—Numerals 1-10 of the | | Haines (KE. M.) — Continued. Chippewyan (four sets, one ‘‘ from a German interpreter,” one ‘‘ from McKenzie,” one ‘‘ from native of Churehill,’? and one “from a Chippewyan”’), p. 450. a woman, a Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. Haldeman (Samuel Stehman). Analytic orthography: | an | investigation of the sounds of the voice, | and their | alphabetic notation; | including | the ‘mechanism of speech, | and its bearing upon | etymology. | By | 8.8. Halde- man, A.M., | professor in Delaware college; | member [&c. six lines. ] | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. | London: Triibner & co, Paris: Ben- ATHAPASCAN Haldeman (8. 8.) — Continued. jamin Duprat. | Berlin: Ferd. Dtimi- ler. | 1860. Half-title ‘Trevelyan prize essay” blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. Vii-viii, slip of additional correc- verso tions, text pp. 5-147, corrections and additions | p. 148, 4°. Numerals 1-10 of the Apache, p. 146. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu- seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull. First printed in American Philosoph. Soc. Trans. new series, vol. 11. (*) Samuel Stehman Haldeman, naturalist, was born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa., August 12, 1812; died in Chickies, Pa., September 10, 1880. in Harrisburg, and then spent two years in Dickinson College. In 1836 Henry D. Rogers, having been appointed state geologist of New Jersey, sent for Mr. Haldeman, who had been his pupil at Dickinson, to assist him. later, on the reorganization of the Pennsylvania geological survey, Haldeman was transferred to his own state, and was actively engaged on the survey until 1842. He He was educated at a classical school made extensive A year | researches among Indian dialects, and also in | Pennsylvania Dutch, besides investigations in the English, Chinese, and other languages.—Ap- pleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. Hale (Horatio). United States | explor- ing expedition. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command of | Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | Vol. VI. | Ethnography and philol- ogy. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sher- man. | 1846. Half-title ‘‘ United States exploring expedi- tion, by authority of Congress" verso blank 11. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v—vii, alpha- bet pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 11. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. General remarks on the Tahkali-Umkwa family, including alist of clans, pp. 201-204.— Vocabularies of the Tlatskanai (Tlatskanai and Kwalhiogua) and Umkwa (Umpqua), lines B, C, pp. 570-629. Anderson (A. C.), Vocabulary of the Tahkali (Carriers), line A, pp. 570-629. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- gress, Lenox, Trumbull. At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought $13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon morocco, top edge gilt, $13. Issued also with the following title: — United States | exploring expedi- tion. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command of | Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Ethnog- LANGUAGES. 39 Hale (I1.) raphy Continued, and philology. | By | Wlsratio Hale, | philologist of the expeuition. | Philadelphia: | Lea and Blanchard, | 1846, Half-title * United States exploring expedi- tion’ verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 L con- tents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix—xti, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Kames, Lenox. — Was America peopled from Polynesia? In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte- 3erlin, 1890, 8°. Table of the pronouns J, thou, we (ine.), we rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, (exc.), ye, and they in the languages of Polynesia and of western America, pp. 386-387, includes the Tinné. Issued separately as follows : — Was America peopled from Poly- nesia? | A study in comparative Philol- ogy. | By | Horatio Hale. | From the Proceedings of the International Con- Berlin, gress of Americanists | at in October 1888. | Berlin 1890. | Printed by H. 8. Her- mann. Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°. Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and of western America, including the Tinné, p. 14. Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley. Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport, N. H., May 3, 1817, was graduated at Harvard in 1837,and was appointed in the same year philol- ogist to the United States exploring expedition under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity he studied a large number of the languages of the Pacific islands, as well as of North and South America, Australia, and Affica, and also investigated the history, traditions, and customs of the tribes speaking those languages. The results of his inquiries are given in his ‘‘ Eth- nography and Philology” (Philadelphia, 1846), which forms the seventh volume of the expedi- tion reports. He has published numerous memoirs on anthropology and ethnology, is a member of many learned societies both in Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice president of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, presiding over the section of anthropology.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. Hamilton (Alexander 38.) of the Haynarger. Manuscript, 5 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on both sides the sheets, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Sent to the Smith- sonian Institution by its compiler from Crescent City, Cal., Nov., 1856. Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms of 180 words, with an added leaf, the whole comprising about 220 words and phrases. Vocabulary Hare Indians. Harmon (Daniel Williams). Haynarger. 40 Hamilton (A. 8.) — Continued. The same library has two copies of the orig- inal manuscript, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. See Peau de Liévre. A | journal | of | voyages and travels | in the interiour of North America, | between the 47th and 58th degrees of north lati- tude, extend-| ing from Montreal nearly to the Pacific ocean, a distance | of about 5,000 miles, including an account of the prin- | cipal occurrences, during a residence of nineteen | years, in differ- ent parts of the country. | To which are added, | a concise description of the face of the country, its inhabitants, | their manners, customs, laws, religion, etc. and considera-| ble specimens of the two languages, most extensively | spoken; together with an account of the princi- | palanimals, to be found in the forests and | prairies of this extensive region. | Illustrated by a map of the country. | By Daniel Williams Harmon, | a partner in the north west company. | Andover: | printed by Flagg and Gould. | 1820. Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-xxiii, text pp. 25-432, map, 8°. A specimen of the Tacully or Carrier tongue (a vocabulary of 280 words), pp. 403-412.—The numerical terms of the Tacullies (1-1000), p. 413. Extracts from the linguistic portion of this volume are given by many authors. Oopies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- neum, British Museum, Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Geological Survey. At the Field sale, no. 908, a half-morocco copy brought $3.50; at the Brinley sale, no. 4685, $5.25; at the Murphy sale, no. 1146, $2.25. Harvard: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. See Henagi. Hazen (Gen. William Babcock). Vocab- ulary of the Indians of Applegate | creek (Na-bilt-se). Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only, in the library of the | Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded by its com- piler to Dr. Geo. Gibbs, from Ft. Yamhill, Ore- gon, Jan. 10, 1857. Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms of 180 words, all the blank spaces being filled. William Babcock Hazen, soldier, born in West Hartford, Vt., September 27, 1830, died BIBLIOGRAPHY Hearne (Samuel). OF THE Hazen (W.B.) — Continued. in Washington, D. C., January 16, 1887. He was a descendant of Moses Hazen. His parents removed to Ohio in 1833. William was graduated at the U. 8. Military Academy in 1855, and after serving against the Indians in California and Oregon joined the 8th Infantry in Texas in 1857. He commanded successfully in five engagements, until, in December, 1859, he was severely wounded in a personal encounter with the Comanches. He appointed assistant professor of infantry tactics at the U.S. Military Academy in February, ‘1861, 1st lieutenant, April 6, and promoted captain on May 14. Inthe autumn of 1861 he raised the 41st Ohio volunteers, of which he became colonel on Oct. 29, 1861. He was appointed brig- adier-general of volunteers Noy. 29, 1862. He assaulted and captured Fort MeAllister, Dec. 13, 1864, for which service he was promoted a major-general of volunteers the same day. He was in command of the 15th army corps from May 19 till Aug. 1, 1865. At the end of the war he had received all the brevets in the regular army up to major-general. He was made colonel of the 38th infantry in 1866; was in France during the Franco-Prussian war, and was U.S. military attaché at Vienna during the Russo-Turkish war. In the interval between those two visits, while stationed at Fort Buford, Dak., he made charges of fraud against post- traders, which resulted in revelations that were damaging to Secretary Belknap. On Dee. 8, 1880, he sueceeded Gen. Albert J. Meyer as chief signal-oflicer, with the rank of brigadier-gen- eral.—A ppleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. was A | journey | from | Prince of Wales’s Fort in Hudson’s Bay, | to | the northern ocean. | Under- taken | by order of the Hudson’s Bay company, | for the discovery | of cop- per mines, a northwest passage, &c. | In the Years 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | By Samuel Hearne. | London: | Printed for A. Strahan and T. Cadell: | And Sold by T. Cadell Jun. and W. Davies, (Successors to | Mr. Cadell,) in the Strand. | 1795. Folded map, title verso blank 1 1. dedication pp- iii-iv, preface pp. v-x, contents pp. xi-xix, errata p. [xx], introduction pp. xxi-xliv, folded plate, text pp. 1-458, list of books verso direc- tions to the binder 1 1.seven other maps and plates, 4°. A number of Athapascan terms and proper names passim. “To conclude, I cannot sufficiently regret the loss of a considerable Vocabulary of the Northern Indian Language, containing sixteen folio pages, which was lent to the late Mr. Hutchins, then Corresponding Secretary to the Company, to copy for Captain Duncan, when he went on discoveries to Hudson’s Bay in the 20 ee eee ee =, “aa Cec a hs rae EEE ee ATHAPASCAN Hearne (S.) — Continued. year one thousand seven hundred and ninety. But, Mr. Hutchins dying soon after, the Voeab- wlary was taken away with the rest of his effects, and can not now be recovered ; and mem ory, at this time, will by no means serve to replace it.."— Preface. Copies seen: Lenox. =— A | journey | from | Prince of Wales’s fort, | in Hudson’s bay, | to | the Northern Ocean, | Undertaken | by order of the Hudson’s bay company. | For the discovery of | copper mines, a north west passage, &c. | In the Years 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | By Samuel Hearne. | Dublin: | printed for P. Byrne, No. 108, and J. Rice, No. 111, | Grafton- street. | 1796. | Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 }. dedication pp. 1ii-iv, preface pp. v—x, contents xi-xxv, introduction pp. xxvii-l, text pp. 1-459, directions to the binder p. [460], maps, plates, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen ; Geological Survey. Henagi: Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.) Vocabulary Hamilton (A.38.) Henry (Dr. Charles C.) the Apachee language. Vocabulary of In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 5, pp. 578-589, Philadelphia, 1855, 49. The vocabulary, consisting of about 400 words, pp. 578-587.— Numerals 1-10000000, pp. 587-589. Collected in New Mexico in 1853. Herdesty (W.L.) [Terms of relation-_ ship of the Kutchin or Louchieux, col- | lected by W.L. Herdesty, Fort Liard, Hudson’s Bay Ty. ] In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity and affinity of the human family, pp. 293-382, lines 67, Washington, 1871, 4°. See Ross (R. B.) Higgins (N. 8.) Notes on the Apache tribes inhabiting the territory of Arizona. Manuscript, pp. 1-30, folio, in the library of the Burean of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. Transmitted by its author to. fhe Smithsonian | Institution, April 21, 1866. On pp. 1-2 is given a list of the names of the Apache tribes with comments thereon. Pp. 3- 2 contain a general discussion of these In- | dians, their number, physical constitution, picture writing, dress, ete. Pp. 23-29 contain a yocabulary of about 100 words and phrases | | | | | arranged by classes. LANGUAGES. 4] Hoffman (Dr. Walter James). lary of the Jicarilla Apache language. Manuscript, 2 Il. 4°, Vocabu- in the lbrary of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at Washing- ton, D.C., Consists of 50 words and several songs set to in 1880 music. Hoopa. See Hupa Vocabularies of cer- By Howse (Joseph). tain North American languages. T [J?] Howse, Esq. In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 4, pp. 191-206, London, 1850, 8°. (Congress.) Vocabulary (words, phrases, and sentences) of the Chipewyan (1), Chipewyan (2), Beaver (1), Beaver.(2), and Sikanni of New Caledonia, pp. 191-193. Hubbard (Dr. —). Vocabulary of the Lototen or Tutatamys (from Dr. Hub- bard’s Notes, 1856.) In Taylor (A.S.), Indianology of California, in California Farmer, vol. 13, no. 16, June & 1860. (Powell.) List of rancherias and clans (13) of the Toto- ten, and vocabulary of 61 words. Hudson Bay: sible passages ’ See British. Adelung (J. C.) and Vater (J.S.) Whipple (A. W.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Hupa: General discussion See Gatschet (A.S.) General discussion Gibbs (G.) General discussion Powers (S.) Numerals Bancroft (H. H.) Numerals Gatschet (A.3S.) Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) Vocabulary Azpell (T. F.) Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary suschmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Crook (G.) Vocabulary Curtin (J.) Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 8.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) Vocabulary Powers (S.) Vocabulary Turner (W. W.) Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.) Words Ellis (R.) Words Gatschet (A. 8S.) Words Latham (R. G.) Hymn book: Chippewyan See Kirkby (W. W.) Slave Hymns. Slave Kirkby (W. W.) Tukudh M’Donald (R.) Hymns: Beaver See Bompas (W.C.) Beaver Garrioch (A. C.) Chippewyan Bompas (W. C.) Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas (W. C.) Déné Morice (A. G.) Isbester (J. A.) James (Dr. Edwin). 42 Hymns — Continued. Dog Rib See Bompas (W.C.) Montagnais Legoff (L.) Montagnais Perrault (C. 0.) Slave Reeve (W. D.) Tukudh M’ Donald (R.). Hymns | in Slavi lan- guage | of the | Indians of Mackenzie the | Tenni or river, | in the | north-west territory of Canada. | [Seal of the 8. P.C. K.] | BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Hymus — Continued. [ London: ] for christian land avenue, (1890. ] Title verso blank 1 1. text in the Tenni lan- guage (154 hymns with English headings) pp. 1-118, 1]. reeto blank verso printers, 16°. Pos- sibly by Rev. W. D. Reeve or Bishop Bompas. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Society promoting knowledge, | Northumber- Charing cross, W. C. ied: Inkalik : General discussion See Buschmann (J.C. E.) sancroft (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E. Dall (W. 1.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Schott (W.) Vocabulary Zagoskin (L. A.) Words Busehmann (J. C. E.) Inkalit-Kenai. See Kenai. On a short vocabulary of the Loucheux language. By J. A. Isbester. In Philological Soe. jof London] Proe. vol. 4, pp. 184-185, London, 1850, 8°. Vocabulary (85 words) of the Loucheux, to which are added for comparison afew words (14) of the Kenay, p. 185. A | narrative | of | the captivity and adventures | of | John Tanner, | (U.S. interpreter at the Saut de Ste. Marie,) | during | thirty years residence among the Indians | in the | interior of North America. | Prepared for the press | by Edwin James, M.D. | Editor of an Account of Major Long’s Expedition from Pitts- | burgh | to the Rocky Mountains. | New-York: | G. & C. & H. Carvill, 108 Broadway. | 1830. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. in- troductory chapter pp. 3-21, text pp. 23-426, 8°. Numerals 1-10 of the Chippewyan (from a German interpreter), asecond set (from MeKen- zie), and a third (from a woman, a native of Churehill), pp. 324-333. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Brinton, Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Lenox, Trumbull. At the Field sale,no. 1113, a half-moroceo copy brought $3.63; at the Squier sale, no. 552, a similar copy, $3.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 1020, 35 frs. green calf, brought $3.50. Reissued as follows: A | narrative | of | the captivity and adventures | of | John Tanner, | (U.S. interpreter at the Saut de Ste. Marie, ) | The Murphy copy, no. 2449, half | _ at frontier outposts. Jéhan (Louis-Franeois). James (E.) — Continued. during | thirty years residence among the Indians | in the | interior of North America, | Prepared for the press | by tdwin James, M.D. | Editor of an Ac- count of Major Long’s Expedition from Pittsburgh | to the Rocky Mountains. | London: | Baldwin & Cradock, Pa- ternoster Row. | Thomas Ward,84 High Holborn. | 1830. Pp. 1-426, portrait, 8°. The American edition with a new title-page only. Copies seen: Astor, Trumbull. Clarke, 1886, no. 6652, prices a copy in boards $5. Sabin’s Dietionary, no. 35685, titles an edition in German, Leipzig, 1840, 8°, and one in French, Paris, 1855, 2 vols. 8°. Edwin James, geologist, born in Weybridge, Vt., August 27.1797, died in Burlington, Iowa, October 28, 1861. He was graduated at Middle- bury College in 1816, and then spent three years in Albany, where he studied medicine with his brother, Dr. Daniel James, botany with Dr. John Torry, and geology under Prof. Amos Eaton. In 1820 he was appointed botanist and geologist to the exploring expedition of Maj. Samuel H. Long, and was actively engaged in field work during that year. For two years fol- lowing he was occupied in compiling and pre- paring for the press the report of the ‘ Expedi- tion to the Rocky Mountains, 181819” (2 vols. with atlas, Philadelphia and London, 1823). He then received the appointment of surgeon in the U.S. Army, and for six years was stationed In 1830 he resigned his commission and returned to Albany. In 1834 he again went west, and in 1836 settled in the 3urlington, Lowa.—Appleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. vicinity of Troisiéme et Encyclopédie théologique, | [&c. twenty-four lines] | publiée | par M. Vabbé Migne | [&e. six lines.] | Tome trente-quatrieme. | Dictionnaire de linguistique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs, | derniere ATHAPASCAN Jéhan (L. I.) — Continued, S’Imprime et se vend chez J.-P.Migne, éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue @Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Bar- ri¢re Wenfer de Paris, | 1858. Second title: | et | de toutes les langues mortes et Dictionnaire | de | linguistique philologie comparée. | Histoire de vivantes, | ou | traité complet @idiomographie, | embrassant | examen critique des systémes et de toutes les questions qui se rattachent | & Vorigine et a la filiation des langues, & leur essence organique Jet & leurs rapports avee Vhistoire des races humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé dun | Essai sur le réle du langage dans l’évolu- tion de intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F.Jéhan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Société géo- logique de France, de Académie royale des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three lines.] | Publié | par M.V Abbé Migne, | éditeur de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou | des cours complets sur chaque branche de la science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. | S'Imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue d’Am- | Jéhan (L. I.) boise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Barriére d’enfer | de Paris. | 1858. Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 ll. columns (two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°. Copies seen: A later edition as follows: sritish Museum, Shea. —— Troisieme et derniere | Encyclopédie | théologique, | ou troisiéme et der- niere | serie de dictionnaires sur toutes les parties de la science religieuse, | otfrant en frangais, et par ordre alpha- bétique, | la plus claire, la plus facile, la plus commode, la plus variée | et la plus complete des théologies: | [&e. seventeen lines] | publiee| par M. Vabbé Migne, | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente- quatrieme. | Dictionnaire de linguis- tique. | Tome unique. Prix: 8 francs. | LANGUAGES. 43 Continued Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistiqne | et | de philologie comparée. | Histoire de toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | traité com- plet didiomographie, | embrassant | examen critique des systémes et de toutes les questions qui se rattachent | a Vorigine et «a la filiation des langues, a leur essence organique | eta leurs rapports avee histoire des races humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé d'un | Essai sut le role du langage dans l’évolution de lintelli- Saint- Clavien), | Membre de la Société géologique de gence humaine.| Par L.-F. Jéhan (de France, de 1 Académie royale des sciences de Turin, ete. | (Quotation, three lines.] | Publié | par M. Vabbé Migne, | éditeur de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou | des cours complets sur chaque branche de la science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 7 frances. | Simprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, edi- teur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d’ Amboise, 20, au, Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barriére denfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 Virst title verso ‘avis important” 1 1. second title verso printer 1 1. introduction numbered by columns 9-208, text in double columns 209-1250, notes additionnelles columns 1249-1434, table des matiéres columns 1433-1448, large 8°. Tableau polyglotte des langues de la région alleghanique (Amérique du Nord), columns 243-248, comprises « comparative vocabulary of twenty-six words in thirty-five languages, of which lines 34 and 35 are Cheppewyan (Chep- pewyan propre) and Tacouillie or Carrier.—Ta- bleau de Venchainement geographique des langues américaines et asiatiques, columns 290- 299, contains a few words in Kinai.—The article A paches, column 308, contains general remarks on the tribal divisions.—Tableau polyglotte des langues de lacéte occidentale de 1 Amérique du Nord, columns 445-448, comprises a comparative vocabulary of twenty-six words in twelve languages, of which line 12 is Kinaf or Kinaitze. — Lennappe, ou Chippaways-Dela- ware ou Algonquino-Mohegane, columns 796- 824, contains in columns 804 and 805 remarks on the languages of the Cheppewyan propre and Tacoullies.—Tableau polyglotte de la region Missouri-Colombienne, columns 899-900, com- S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P. : : : ; . mS : prises a comparative vocabulary of twenty-six Migne, éditeur, | aux ateliers catho- liques, rue d’ Amboise,20,au Petit-Mont- rouge, | autrefois Barriére Wenfer de words in ten languages, of which lines 1 and 3 are Sussee and Atnah. Copies seen: Eames. Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 | Jicarilla Apache. See Apache. Kaiyuhkhotana: Kautz (A. V.) — Continued. Numerals See Dall (W.H.) | Manuscript, 2 unnumbered leaves, folio, Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) written on both sides, in the library of the < Bureauof Ethnology. Transmitted to Dr. Geo. = pies Piste ; | 2) Katolik Deneya tiye dittlisse, See Gibbs by its compiler, from Fort Oxford, Legoff (L.) Oregon Territory, June 19, 1855. The vocabulary is in double columns, English and Toutouten, and contains about 200 words. In the same library is a short vocabulary (about 70 words) of the same language by the Kautz (Gen. August Valentine). Vocab- | ulary of the Indian language of the | Toutouten tribe. | Kautz (A. V.) — Continued. 44 then Lieut. Kautz, which contains a few words not in the longer vocabulary. ‘There are also in the same library two copies, by Dr. Geo. Gibbs, of the longer vocabulary. August Valentine Kautz, soldier, born in His parents emigrated to this country im 1828, and settled in Brown County, Ohio, in 1832. The son served as a private in the Ist regiment of Ispringen, Baden, Germany, Jan. 5, 1828. Ohio volunteers in the Mexican war, and on his discharge was appointed to the United States Military Academy, where he was graduated in | 1852 and assigned to the 4th infantry. Heserved in Oregon and Washington Territory till the | civil war, and River wars of 1853-55, and was wounded in the latter, and in the Indian war on Puget Sound in 1856, in which he was also wounded. In 1855 he was promoted Ist lieutenant, and in 1857 commended for gallantry by Gen. Scott. In 1859-’60 he traveledin Europe. He was appointed captain in the 6th U.S. cavalry in 1861, and served with the regiment from its organization through the peninsular campaign of 1852, commanding it during the seven days until just before South Mountain, when he was appointed colonel of the 2d Ohio cavalry. He took part in the capture of Monticello, Ky., May 1, 1863, and on June 9 was brevetted major for commanding in an action near there. in the Rogue He was engaged in the pursuit and capture of John Morgan, in July, 1863, preventing him from crossing the Ohio, and afterward served as chief of cavalry of the 23d corps. On May 7, 1864, he was made briga- | dier-general of volunteers and assigned to the command of the cavalry division of the army He entered Petersburg with his | small cavalry command on June 9, 1864, for which attack of the James. he was brevetted lieutenant- colonel, and he led the advance of the Wilson raid, which cut the roads leading into Richmond from the south, for more than forty days. On Oct. 28, 1864, he was brevetted major-general of volunteers, and in March, 1865, was assigned to the command of a division of colored troops, which he marched into Richmond on April 3. He was brevetted colonel in the regular service for gallant and meritorious service in action on the Darbytown road, Virginia, October 7, 1864. Also brigadier and major general for gallant and meritorious services in the field during the war, Mar. 13, 1865. Gen. Kautz was appointed lieutenant-colonel of the 34th infantry in 1866, transferred to the 15th in 1869, and commanded the regiment on the New Mexican frontier till 1874. He organized several successful expeditions against the Mescalero Apaches, who had Hed from their reservation in 1864, and in 1870-'71 succeeded in establishing the tribe on their reservation, where they have since remained. In June, 1874, he was pro- moted colonel of the 8th infantry, and in 1875 was placed in command of the department of Arizona. Heserved in California from 1878 till 1886, and is now (1887) in Nebraska.—Apple- ton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. BIBLIOGRAPHY Kennicott (Robert). OF THE Keane (Augustus H.) Ethnography and philology of America. By A. H. Keene. In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West Indies, ete. pp. 443-561, London, 1878, 8°. General scheme of American races and lan- guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the branches of the Athabascan or Tinney family divided into languages and dialects, pp. 403- 465.—Alphabetical list of all known American tribes and languages, pp. 498-561. Reprinted in the 1882 and 1855 editions of the same work and on the same pages. Kenai: Dictionary See Radloff (L.) Adelung (J. C.) Vater (J. 8S.) Balbi (A.) Bancroft (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Radlotf (L.) Miiller (F.) General discussion and General discussion General discussion General discussion Grammatic comments Grammatic comments Numerals Ellis (R.) Numerals Erman (G. A.) Tribal names Gallatin (A.) Latham (R. G.) Adelung (J. C.) Vater (J.S.) Baer (K. E. von). Balbi (A.) Bancroft (H. H.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Dall (W. H.) Davidoff (G-. I.) Davidson (G.) De Meulen (E.) Gallatin (A.) Jéhan (L. F.) Krusenstern (A. J.von). Latham (R. G.) Lisiansky (U.) Prichard (J. C.) Roehrig (F. L. O.) Tribal names Vocabulary and Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Staffeief (V.) and Pet- roff (1.) Vocabulary Wowodsky (—). Words Buschmann (J.C. E.) Words Daa (L. K.) Words Ellis (R.) Words Jéhan (L. F.) Words Latham (R. G.) Words Pott (A. F.) Words Schomburgk (R. H.) Words Wilson (D.) Kotch-4-Kutchin vocabulary. Words from the language of the Kotch-a-Kutchin—the Indians of Yukon River, at the mouth of Por- cupine River, in northern Alaska. In Whymper (F.), Travel and adventure in Alaska, pp. 322-328, London, 1868, 8°. Consists of 175 words and phrases and the numerals 1-30. This vocabulary also appears in the repriat of Whymper, N. Y., 1869, 8°, pp. 345-350, and in ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES, Kennicott (R.) — Continued. the same, N. Y., 1871, 8°, same pages. It is also printed in Whymper's article on America, in Eth. Soc. of London, Trans., vol. 7, pp. 183-185, London, 1869, 8°. Issued also by the Smithsonian Institution, as follows: — Kutch-a‘-kutehin. | Words from the language of the Kutch-a’-Kutchin’—the Indians of Youkon river, at the mouth of the | Poreupine river, in’ Russian Russian America,—Kennicott. [Washington, D. C.: Smithsonian Institution. 18697] , Notitle-page, heading only, textll. 1-5 printed on one side only, folio. Contains about 200 words. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling. 7 The original manuscript of this vocabulary is in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C., 5 ll. folio; also a copy by Dr. Geo. Gibbs, 511. folio, from which the printed copy was set up. [ Vocabulary of the] Slave Indians, Tenne. [Washington, D. C.: Institution. 1869? ] No title-page, heading only, Smithsonian text. Il. printed on one side only; contains about 200 words. “Slave Indians of Liard. They call themselves A-che-t6-e-tin-ne, as distinguished the other Tenne. ‘A-che-t6-e-tin’-ni’ is ‘ People of the low lands,’ or ‘ People living out of the wind.’ Oopies seen: Eames, Pilling. from Liard River, near Fort | 6-12 | The original manuscript of this vocabulary | is in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. — [Biography of Robert Kennicott and extracts from his journal. ] In Chieago Academy of Sciences, Trans.vol. 1, part 2, pp. 133-224, Chicago, 1869, 8°. logical Survey.) Numerous Athapascan terms, proper names, etc. passim. [Terms of relationships of the Slave Lake Indians (Achdotinne), Fort Liard, Mackenzie river district, Hudson’s bay ty.] In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity and aftinity of the human family, pp. 293-382 lines 64, Washington, 1871, 4°. The schedules were filled in March, 1860. — Vocabulary of the Chipewyan of Slave Lake. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- lected in 1862. Contains about 160 words. There is in the same library a copy of this vocabulary, 6 ll. folio, with corrected spelling, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. (Geo- | | Kirkby (fev, William West) — A manual | of | devotion 45 Kennicott (R.) — Continued. Vocabulary of the Hare Indians, of Fort Good Hope, Mackenzie River. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- lected in 1862. Contains about 175 words. There is in the same library a copy of this vocabulary, made by the compiler (6 I. folio), and another with corrected spelling by Dr. Geo. Gibbs, also 6 11. folio. — Vocabulary of the Nahawny Indians of the mountains west of Fort Liard. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- lected in 1862. Contains about 150 words. There is in the same library a copy of this vocabulary, 6 ll. folio, made by its compiler. Vocabulary of the Tsuhtyuh (Beaver People) — Beaver Indians of Peace River west of Lake Athabasca; and of the Thekenneh (People of the Rocks) Siccanies of the Mountains, south of Fort Liard. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- lected in 1862. Contains about 175 words each In the same library is a copy of this manu- script, made by Mr. Kennicott, 6 IL folio. Hymns and prayers: | for the | Private Devo- tions | of the | Slave Indians of M*Ken- zie’s river. | By rev. W. W. Kirkby. | New York: | Rennie, Shea & Lind- say. | 1862. Title verso blank 11. alphabet [syllabary | p. 1, text (in sylabie characters with headings m English) pp. 2-16, 12°. .‘‘A small tract, the beginning of our work. —WNirkby. > Easy words, pp. 2-3.— Morning service, pp.3- 5.—Evening service, pp. 5-7.—Sunday service, pp. 8-10.— Watts’s catechism, pp. 10-13.—Ten commandments, pp. 14-16. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Trumbull. and in- struction | for the | Slave Indians of M‘Kenzie river, | by | the rev. W. W. Kirkby. | [Seal of the “C. M. 8.” for “the diocese of Rupert’s land.”’] | [London:] Printed by W.M. Watts, [186-2] Title as above p.1, text in roman characters with headings in English pp. 2-65, 16°. Hymns, (page 23 blank). — The apostles’ ereed, p.24.—The general confession, | 80, Gray’s inn road. pp. 2-22 p. 25.—Prayer of St. Chrysostom, prayer for a child, p.26.—The Lord’s prayer, the benedic- 46 Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. tion, p. 27.—Sunday morning prayer, p. 28.— Sunday evening, p. 29.—Morning prayer, p. 30.— Evening prayer, p. 31.—Morning collect, p. 32.— Eyening collect, p.33.—The decalogve, pp. 34- 36.—Catechism, pp. 37-43.—Of God, p. 44.—Of sin, p.45.—Of providence, p. 46.—Of redemp- tion, p.47.—The Lord's day, p. 48.—The Lord’s book, p.49.—Of heaven, p. 50.—Of hell, p.51.— The Saviour, p. 52.—The Christian, p. 53.—The way to heaven, p. 54.—The judgment, p. 55.— The creation, p. 56.—The fall, p.57.—The recoy- ery, p. 58.—The deluge, p.59.—Birth of Christ, p. 60.— Baptism of Christ, p.61.—Life of Christ, p. 62.—Death of Christ, p. 63.— Resurrection of Christ, p. 64.— Ascension of Christ, p. 65; end- ing with colophon, ‘‘W. M. Watts, 80, Gray’s- TInn-Road.”’ Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. A manual | of | devotion and in- struction | for the | Slave Indians of McKenzie River. | By | Rev. W. W. Kirkby. | London: | printed by W. M. Watts | 28, Whitefriars street, city. [18707] Title verso blank 1 1. the alphabet [syla- bary] p. 3, text (in syllabic characters with head- ings in English) pp. 4-76,-18°. Easy words, p. 4.—Difficult words, p. 5.— Hymns, pp. 6-27.—Apostles’ creed and other prayers, pp. 28-37.—Decalogue, pp. 38-40.—Cat- echism, pp. 41-49.—Scripture lessons, pp. 50-76. Copies seen: Church Missionary Society, Eames, Pilling. — A manual | of | devotion and in- struction | for the | Slave Indians of | McKenzie River, | by rev. W. W. Kirkby. | [Seal of the ‘‘C. M. 8S.” for | “the diocese of Rupert’s land”.] With the approbation of | the lord bishop of the diocese. { London: Church missionary society: 18712] Title-page verso alphabet [syllabary] 1 1. text (in syllabie characters with headings in Eng- lish) pp. 38-86, 24°. Easy words, p. 3.—Difficult words, p. 4.— Sunday morning pp. 5-12.—Sunday evening service, pp. 13-20.— Daily morning service, pp. 21-28.— Daily evening service, pp. 29-41.—The alphabet. p.43.—Prayers, etc., pp. 44-78.—Catechism, pp. 79-86. Copies scen: American Tract Society, British Museum, Pilling, Trumbull. service, — Manual | of | devotion and instrue- tion, | in the | Chipewyan language, | for the | Indians of Churchill. | By the rev. W. W. Kirkby. | London: | Church missionary house, | Salisbury square, [1872?] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Kirkby (W. W.)— Continued. Title verso blank 1 1. alphabet [syllabary] p. 3, text (in syllabic characters with headings in English) pp. 4-113, picture of ‘‘ The bible of the world” 11. 18°. “The same as the preceding [{London, 18717] transliterated into the Chipewyan dialect, as spoken at Churchill, 3,000 miles from M°Ken- zie’s River.’—Kirkby. Difficult words, p.4.—Numerals 1-20, p.5.— Address, p.6.—Hymns, pp. 7-29.—Prayers for children, creed, ete., pp. 30-36.—Private morn- ing devotions, pp. 87-39.— Private evening devo- tions, pp. 40-42.— Family morning devotions, pp. 43-46.—Family evening devotions, pp. 47- 50.—Public morning service, pp. 51-60.—Publie evening service, pp. 61-66.—Seripture lessons, pp. 67-96. — Catechism, pp. 97-109. — Burial service, pp. 110-113. Copies seen: British Museum, Church Mis- sionary Society, Eames, Pilling. — Manual | of | devotion and instrue- tion | in the | Chipewyan language, | for the | Indians of Churchill. | By the rey. W. W. Kirkby. | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | 77, Great Queen Street, Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields. [187-?] Title verso syNabarium 1 1. text (in syllabic characters with English headings) pp. 3-148, 18°. Difficult words, p. 3.—Numerals 1-20, p. 4.— Address, p. 5.—Hymuns (1-30), pp. 641.—The creed, Lord's prayer, and benediction, pp. 42- 43. —Decalogue, pp.44-46.— Prayers for children, p.47.—Private morning devotions, pp. 48-50.— Private evening devotions, pp. 51-53.—Family morning devotions, pp. 54-57.— Family evening devotions, pp. 58-61.—Public morning service, pp. 62-78.—Public evening service, pp. 74-80.— Public baptismal service, pp. 81-84.— Service for holy communion, ete., pp. 85-91.—Marriage service, pp. 92-94.—Burial service, pp. 95-97.— Seripture lessons, pp. 98-139.—Catechism, pp. 140-148. Copies seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. [——] The gospel | according to | Saint John. | Translated into the Tinné lan- guage. | [Three lines syllabic charac- ters. ] | London: | British and foreign bible society. | 1870. Colophon: W.M. Watts. 80, Gray's Inn Road. The transliteration of the three lines in sylla- bic characters on the title-pageis: News good | saint John by | Big river Indians language in. Title verso blank 1 1. alphabet [i. e. syllabary] verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters with chapter headings in English) pp. 38-93, 16°. sritish and Foreign Bible Soci- National Copies seen: ety, Church Missionary Society, Museum, Wellesley. ATHAPASCAN Kirkby (W. W.)— Continued. [ ]) Natsun kaothet nake Jesus Christ | be konde nezo | Saint Mark | ekaonte adikles | Tinne yatie kendi | kesi. | London: | 1874. Translation: Our lord our savior | Jesus Christ | his uews good | Saint Mark | by him written | Indian tongue according to. Title verso printers 1 1. text in the ‘Tinne language (roman characters) pp. 3-64, 18°. Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci ety, Wellesley. [——] St. Mark. Colophon: (London. } 80, Gray’s Inn Road. No title-page, heading only; text in the Tinné language (entirely in syllabic characters, with chapter headings in English) pp. 1-66, 18°. The dialect is that spoken by the Indians of Ft. Simpson. Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci- ety, British Museum, Wellesley. W.M. Watts, ] The gospels | of | the four eyvangel- ists, | St. Matthew, St. Mark, St. Luke, and St. John. | Translated into the | of | The Chipewyan Indians | [ language | of | north-west America. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society. | 1878. Title verso printers ete. 1 1. syllabarium verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic characters) pp. 5-344, 16°. Matthew, pp. 5-100.— Mark, pp. 101-161.— Luke, pp. 162-268.—John, pp. 269-344. Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci- ety, British Museum, Eames, Pilling. —— [Three lines syllabie characters. ] | The new testament. | Translated into | the Chipewyan language, | by the | ven, archdeacon Kirkby. | London: | printed for the | British and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- toria Street, H.C. | 1881. Title verso printers 1 1. Chipewyan syllaba- rium verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic characters) pp. 7-396, 12°. Matthew, pp. 7-56.—Mark, pp. 56-87.—Luke, pp. 87-141.— John, pp. 141-179.— Acts-Revela- tion, pp. 180-396. Copies seen; Fames, Pilling. —— Portions | of the | book of common prayer, | Hymns, &c., | in the | Chip- ewyan language. | By archdeacon Kirkby. | Printed at the request of | the bishop of Rupert’s land, | by the | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | 77, LANGUAGES. AT Kirkby (W. W.) —Continned. Great Queen Street, Lincoln’s-Inn- Fields, London. [1879 ?} ~ Title verso alphabet (sylabary] 1 1. text (in syllabic characters with English headings) pp. 8-195, colophon p [196], 16°. Morning prayer, pp. 3-18.—Evening prayer, pp. 19-31.—Litany, pp. 32-40. pp. 41- Hymns, Prayers 19.—Holy communion, ete. pp. 50-80 pp. 81-158.— Seripture lessons, pp. 139-181.— Catechism, pp. 182-192. 193-195. Copies seen; British Museum, Pilling, Society Music for hymns, pp. for Promoting Christian Knowledge. See Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas (W. ©) below for an edition of this work adapted for the use of the Slavi Indians. -[One line syHabie characters. ] | Portions | of the | book prayer, | and | adiinistration of common of the sacraments, | and other rites and cere- monies of the church, | According to the use of the Church of England. | Translated into the language | of the | Chipewyan Indians of N. W, America, | by the | ven. archdeacon Kirkby. | [Seal of the 8. P.C. K.] | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland Avenue, Charing Cross, London. | 1881. Title verso printers 1 1. alphabet [syllabary] verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters with headings partly in syllabic characters and partly in English and Latin) pp. 5-160, 16°. Prayers, etc., pp.5-86.—The order of the ad- ministration of the Lord’s supper, or holy communion, pp. 87-106.— The ministration of public baptism of infants, pp. 106-112. — The ministration of baptism to such as are of riper years, pp. 1138-121.—A catechism, pp. 122-131.— The order of confirmation, pp. 131-135. — The form of solemnization of matrimony, pp. 135— 142.—The visitation of the sick, pp. 142-147.— The order for the burial of the dead, pp. 148- 156.—The churching of women, pp. 157-160. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. —— Hymns, | prayers and instruction, | in the | Chipewyan language. | By the | ven. archdeacon Kirkby. | [Seal of the 8. P. C. K.] | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland Avenue, Charing Cross, London. | 1881. Title verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabie char- acters with English headings) pp. 3-91, colo- phon p. [92], 16°. Hymnsindouble columns, pp. 3-36.— Prayers, pp. 87-62.— Lessons, pp. 63-91. Copies seen: Kames, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 48 Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. — See Bompas (W.C.) BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Kirkby (W. W.) Bompas (W. C.)--Ct’d. W.C. Bompas, D. D., | bishep of Mack- and Bompas (W.C.) the | book of common prayer, | Hymns, &c., | in the | Chipewyan language. | By archdeacon Kirkby. | Adapted for the use of | the Slavi Indians | by the | right reverend W.C. Bompas, DD | bishop of Athabasca. | Printed by the | Society for pro- moting christian Great Queen Street, Lincoln’s-Inn- Fields, London, [1879?] Title verso syllabarium 11. text (in syllabic characters with headings in English) pp. 3-175, colophon p. [176], 16°. Morning prayer, pp. 3-15.—Evening prayer, pp. 16-26 —The litany, pp. 27-34.—Prayers, pp. 35-42. — Holy communion, ete., pp. 43-68.— Hymns, pp. 69-123.—Scripture lessons, pp. 124— 165.—Catechism, pp. 166-175. Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Pilling, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. See original edition of this work. Tssued also in roman characters as follows: —— —— Portions of the | book of com- | mon prayer, | hymns, etc., | im the | Portions | of | knowledge, | 77, | Kirkby (W.W.) above for title of the | Chipewyan language. | By archdea- | econ Kirkby. | Adapted for the use of | the Slavi Indians | by the | right rey. W. C. Bompas, D.D., | bishop of Atha- basca. | London: | Society for christian knowledge; | Northumber- land avenue, Charing cross. [18827] Title verso sylNabarium in roman 1 1. text (entirely in roman characters) pp. 3-175, 16°. Morning prayer, pp. 3-15.—Evening prayer, pp. 16-26.—The litany, pp. 27-34.—Prayers, pp. 35-42.—Service for holy communion, ete., pp. | 43-68.—Hymns, pp. 69-123.—Scripture lessons, pp. 124-165.—Catechism, pp. 166-175. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. See title next above for the same work in syllabic characters. Part of the | book of common prayer, | and administration of | the sacraments, | and other | rites | translated into the language of the | Chipewyan Indians of the queen’s dominion | of Canada| by the | ven. archdeacon W. W. Kirkby, D. D. | Adapted to the use of the Tenni Indians of | Mackenzie river| by the | right rev. promoting | and | ceremonies of the church, | according | to the use of | The Church of England; | enzie river. | [Seal of the S.P.C. K.] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. | 1891. Title as above verso blank 1]. contents verso blank 1 1.text (mostly in Chipewyan, roman characters, with headings and instructions in English) pp. 1-276, 16°. Morning prayer, pp. 1-13.—Evening prayet, pp. 14-23.—The creed of St. Athanasius (in English),- pp. 23-26.—The litany, pp. 26-32.— Prayers and thanksgivings upon several occa- sions, pp. 33-41. — The collects, epistles, and gospels, pp. 42-187.—Holy communion, pp. 188- 208.— Baptism of infants, pp. 209-221.—Baptism of such as are of riper years, pp. 222-229.—Cat- echism, pp. 230-236. —Confirmation, pp. 236- 238. — Solemnization of matrimony, pp. 239- 247.— Visitation and communion of the sick, pp- 248-258.— Burial of the dead, pp. 259-266,— The churching of women (or the thanksgiving of women after childbirth), pp. 266-269.— A com- mination, or denouncing of God's anger and judgments against sinners (partly in English and partly in Chipewyan), pp. 269-276. — Copies seen: Pilling. T have not been very successful in ascertaining the dates of the works by Archdeacon Kirkby, who writes me concerning them as follows: ‘Being printed, for the most part, in England, with no one to correct the proofs, many errors crept in, and in some cases two or three editions had to be printed before we could get them even approximately correct. In this way the same book was printed two or three times, which would give to it so many dates.” William W. Kirkby was born at Ham- ford, Lincolnshire, in 1827, and received his earlier education at a grammar school. When about 18 years old he went to the diocesan school at Litchfield to prepare for the duties His stay at Litchfield was very happy, and after two years his friend, the Rev. C. C. Layard, rec- tor of Mayfield, Staffordshire, offered him the mastership of the village national school, which Mr. Kirkby accepted. Whilst there a strong desire to enter the mission field came into his mind, and he offered his services to the secre- tary of the church missionary society. The offer was accepted, and in the spring of 1851 Mr. Kirkby entered St. John’s College, London, to prepare for his new duties. In May, 1852, a sudden call came for a teacher to go at once to Red River. and the committee selected Mr. Kirkby for the post. He had not yet completed his studies, but on the 6th of June of that year embarked on the Hudson Bay Company's ship, taking his bride of a few days with him, for Red River. The voyage was made in safety, and the young couple reached their destination the 12th of October, and in a few days after-_ of ateacher, which he desired to become. ATHAPASCAN Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. wards he entered upon his duties. On the 24th of December, 1854, Mr. Kirkby was ordained to the ministry by the Right Reverend David Anderson, D. D., the first bishop of Rupert's Land, and at once took temporary charge of St. Andrew's church and parish. In 1852 Mr. Kirkby was appointed to the mission of Red River, arriving there in the autemn of that year. His duties were to take charge of a model training school and to su- perintend the work of education in the colony, in those parishes belonging to the church missionary society. Shortly afterwards Mr. Kirkby, in addition to his other duties, was appointed assistant minister of St. Andrews, then the largest parish in the settlement, and continued there four years. In the meanwhile the church had spread northwards and west- wards to Fairford, Cumberland, Lac la Rouge, and the English River, 700 miles from Red River, and then at a single bound it went into the great McKenzie Valley. Archdeacon Hun- ter went thither on an exploratory tour in 1858, and the next year the bishop appointed Mr. Kirkby to take charge of the work. He at once proceeded there, and made Fort Simpson his headquarters. This fort stands in latitude 62° N., longitude 121° W., at the confluence of the Liard and Slave rivers. He began his work with munch encouragement and hope. The first care was the language, and then the erection of suitable buildings for church and school pur- poses. These latter were soon supplied by the kindness and liberality of the Hudson Bay Company's officers, who took an interest in the work. In the summer of 1862 Mr. Kirkby resolved to carry the gospel within the Arctic Circle, and if possible into Alaska. Securing a good canoe and tworeliable Indians he set off, following the ice down the McKenzie to Peel River Fort, the last trading post of the com- pany and a great rendezvous of the Indians. After a short stay here he left his canoe and, accompanied by two guides, set out to walk over the mountains. Up and down they went, over several ridges rising from 700 to 2,800 feet, and at last, by a sudden descent of 1,000 feet into the valley, he reached La Pierre’s house and another of the Fur Company's forts. Here Mr. Kirkbyremained until the30th of June, in- structing the Indians and learning the Tukudh language, a kindred one to the Tinné. He then embarked in the company’s boat on the Rat River, and then down the Porcupine River, a tributary of the Yukon. Two miles above the confluence of these Fort Yukon stands. This journey occupied three months, and at the close of it Mr. Kirkby writes: ‘‘ I have traveled over at least 3,000 miles; have been honored of God to carry the gospel far within the Arctic Circle and toa people who had never heard it before.” The work at the Yukon was then given to the Rey. R. McDonald and Mr. Kirkby devoted his time at Fort Simpson to the language. He trans- lated two of the gospels and completed a little ATH 4 LANGUAGES. 4Y Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. manual containing prayers, hymns, catechism, and short bible lessons, such as the Indians could readily understand, He also collected materials for a grammar and vocabulary for the use of others. The acquisition of the language was thus rendered easier for future mission- aries who might enter the field. In 1869 Mr. Kirkby, having been seventeen years in the field, went to England to place his children at school. Upon his return to the country, in 1870, he was appointed to York Factory, Hud- son Bay, that he might meet the Chipewyans of Churchill. Here he labored for nine years, and then retired from the mission to make a home for his children in. the civilized world ; and this he has done, being now stationed at the village of Rye, near New York. Klatskenai. See Tlatskenai. Koltschane : Tribal names See Latham (R. G.) Vocabulary Baer (K. E. von). Vocabulary sancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary 3uschmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) Kovar (Dr. Emil). Ueber die Bedeutung des possessivischen Pronomen fiir die Ausdrucksweise des substantivischen Attributes. In Zeitschrift fir Vélkerpsychologie und Sprachwissenschatft, vol. 16, pp. 386-394, Berlin, 1886. (*) Examples in a number of American lan- guages, among them the Athapascan, p. 390. Title from Prof. A. F. Chamberlain, from copy in the library of Toronto University. Krusenstern (Adam Johann von). Wor- ter-Sammlungen | aus den Sprachen | einiger V6lker | des | déstlichen Asiens | und | der Nord west-Kiiste von Amerika. | Bekannt gemacht | von | A. J.v. Krusenstern | Capitain der Rus- sisch kaiserlichen Marine. | St Petersburg. | Gedruckt in der Druckerey der Admiralitiit | 1813. Title verso note 1 1. Vorbericht pp. i-xi, half title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, Druckfehler verso blank 1 1. 4°. W ortersammlung aus der Sprache der Kinai (from Dawidoff, Resanoff, and Lisiansky), pp. 57-68. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, Brit- ish Museum, Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wat kinson, Wellesley. Kutchin. Vocabulary of the Hong Kut- chin language. Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Contains about 130 words, entered on one of the Smithsonian forms of the standard vocabu- lary. 5O BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Kutchin: Kutchin — Continued. See Petitot (KE. F.S. J.) toehrig (FE. L. O.) Ross (KR. B.) Whymper (F.) General discussion See Bancroft (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Dall (W. H.) Herdesty (W. L.) Vocabulary Numerals Numerals Relationships Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Tribal names Latham (R. G.) Words Daa (L. K.) Vocabulary Jancrott (H. HH.) Words Ellis (R.) Vocabulary 3uschmann (J.C. FE.) | Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) | Kwalhiokwa: Vocabulary Kennicott (R.) Vocabulary See Bancroft (TH. FH.) Vocabulary Kutehin. Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.) Vocabulary Hale (H1.) Vocabulary Murray (A. H.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) L. L. J.C.et M. I. Titles of anonymous | Latham (R.G.)— Continued. works beginning with these letters are entered in this bibliogmaphy under the next following word of title. Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous | contributions to the ethnography of | North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 2, pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. (Congress.) Table of words showing affinities between | the Ahnenium and a number of other Amer- ican languages, among them the Kenay, pp. 32- 34. — On the languages of the Oregon ter- ritory. By R.G. Latham, M.D. Read before the Society on the 11th Decem- ber, 1844. In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, pp. 154-166, Edinburgh, [1848], 8°. (Congress.) A table of 10 Sussee words showing miscel- laneous affinities with a number of other Amer- ican languages, among them the Kenay, Taculli, and Chipewyan, pp. 160-161. ——On the ethnography of Russian | America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. Read before the Society 19th February, 1845. In Ethnological Soe. of London, Jour. vol. 1, pp. 182-191, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) General discussion upon the classification of the languages of the above-named region, and a list of the yocabularies which haye been printed. Reference is made to the Kenay, Atnah, and Inkalite. —— The | natural history | of | the vari- eties of man. | By | Robert Gordon Latham, M. D., F. R.S., | late fellow of King’s college, Cambridge; | one of the vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- ety, London; | corresponding member to the Ethnological society, | New York, etc. | [Monogram in shield. ] | London: | John Van, Voorst, Pater- noster row. | M.V.0@CL [1850]. Half-title verso blank 11. title verso printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. preface pp. vil-x1, bibliography pp. xiii-xv, explanation of plates verso blank 1 1. contents pp. xix-xxviil, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 11. 8°. Division F, American Mongolidz (pp. 287- 460), includes : Comparative vocabulary (38 words) of the Loucheux and Kenay, pp. 297- 298; comments on the northern Athabaskans, pp. 302-308; comparative vocabulary of the Chippewyan, Tlatskanai, and Umkwa (60 words), pp. 808-310; of the Beaver and Chippe- wyan (50 words and phrases), pp. 370, 371. Copies seen: Bureauof Ethnology, Congress, Eames. —— The | ethnology | of | the British colonies | and | dependencies. | By | Rh. G. Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | corre- sponding member to the Ethuvlogical society, New York, | ete. ete [Mono- gram in shield. ] | London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- noster row. | M. DCCC. LI [1851]. Title verso printers 1 1. contents pp. v—vi, preface verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-264, list of works by Dr. Latham ete. 1 1. 16°. ‘Chapter vi, Dependencies in America (pp. 224-264), contains a list of the divisions and subdivisions of the Athabaskans, pp. 224-227. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames. The | native races | of | the Russian empire. | By | R.G. Latham, M.D., F. R.S8., &e., | author of [&ce. two lines. ] | With a Jarge coloured map, | Taken from that of the hnperial Geographical Society of St. Petersburg, | and other illustrations. | ; London: | Hippolyte Bailliere, 219, Regent street; | and 290, Broadway, New York, U. 8. | Paris: J.B. Bail- liere, rue Hautefeuille. Madrid: Bailly Bailliere, calle del Principe, | 1854. ——QOn the ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. ah Latham (R. G.) — Continued. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. notice verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vili, large map, text pp. 1-340, 12°. The tribes of Russian America (pp, 259-297) contains a brief account of the linguistic affine | ities of the various divisions, including the Athabaskans, pp. 291-294. ; Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Hames. — On the Languages of New Califor- nia. By R.G. Latham, M.D. In Philological Soc. [of Loudon], Proc.vol. 6, pp. 72-86, Loudon, 1854, 8°. (Congress.) Comments upon the Athabascans, pp. 74-75. A few words of Hoopah, Navajo, and Jicorilla, p. 85. languages of Northern, Western, and Central America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. (Read May the 9th. ) In Philological Soe. [of London), Trans. 1856, pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) The Athabascan Grottp (pp. 65-70) contains lists of tribal divisions of the Takulli, p. 66; Kutshin, p. 67; Kenai, p. 67; Atna, pp. 67-68; Koltshani, Ugalents, Atna, p.68.—General dis- cussion of the Athabaskan, pp. 68-70.—Com- | parative vocabulary of the Navaho and Apatch | (27 words), pp. 96-97.— Table of words showing affinities between the several Pueblo languages and the Navahoand Jicorilla, pp. 99, 100. — Opuscula. | Essays | chiefly | philo- logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D., F. | R.5S., ete. | late fellow of Kings college, | Cambridge, late professor of English | in University college, London, late | assistant physician | at the Middlesex hospital. | Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta street, Covent garden, London | and | 20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. | Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. Title verso printer 11. preface pp. iii-iv, con- tents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda and cor- rigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. A reprint of a number of papers read before the ethnological and philological societies of London. Addenda and corrigenda (1859) (pp. 378-418) contains: Comparative vocabulary of the Nay- aho and Pinaleno, p. 385; of the Beaver Indians and Chippewyan, p. 413. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Watkinson. At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 639, brought $2.57. The Murphy copy, no. 1438, sold for $1. Elements | of | comparative philol- ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M. D., F.R.S., &c., | late fellow of King’s | j | | Leclerc (Charles). | Latham (R.G.) —Continned. college, Cambridge; and late professor of English | in University college, Lon- don. | London: | Walton Upper Gower street, and and Maberly, | Ivy lane, Paternoster row; | Longman, Green, Longman, Roberts, and Green, | Pater- row. | 1862. | The Right of Translation is Reserved. Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xi, noster contents pp. xili-xx, tabular view of languages and dialects pp. Xxi-xxviii, chief authorities pp. XXiX-xxxli, errata verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1- 7o2, addenda and corrigenda pp. 753-757, index pp. 758-774, list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 11. 8°. Chapter lv, Languages of America, The Es- kimo, The Athabaskan dialects [ete.] (pp. 384- 103), contains: Divisions of the Takulli, p. 388; of the Kutshin with English defihitions, p- 389.—Athabaskan tribal names with meanings, p. 390. — Comparative vocabulary (35 words) of the Kenay, Kutshin, Slave, and Dog-rib, pp. 390-391; of the Chepewyan and Takulli (47 words), pp. 391-392; of the Ugalents, Atna, and Kolstshani, pp. 392-393; of the Tlatskanai, Kwaliokwa, and Umkwa (30 words), p. 394; of the Navaho, Apatsh, and Pinaleno (27 words), pp. 394-395; of the Hoopah and Jecorilla (12 words), p. 395. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- gress, Hames, Watkinson. Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the Rey. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 1812. In 1819 he was entered at Eton. wo years afterwards he was admitted on the founda- tion, and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his first passion and his last, though for botany he had a very strong taste. He died March 9, 1888.—Theodore Watts in lhe Athenwum, March 17, 1888. Bibliotheea | ameri- cana | Catalogue raisonné | Wune tres- précieuse | collection de livres anciens | et modernes | sur l’Amérique et les Philippines | Classés par ordre alpha- bétique de noms d’Anteurs. | Rédigé par Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] | Paris | Maisonnenve & Ci | 15, quai Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LXVIL [1867] Cover title as above, half-title verso details of sale 11. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°. Includes titles of a number of Works eontain- ing material relating to the Athapascan lan- guages. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 52 Leclerc (C.) — Continued. —- Bibliothee: [ 10s.; at the Squier sale, no. 651, $1.50. Leclerc, 1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 1889, 4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought $2.75. | americana | Histoire, géographie, | voyages, archéologie et linguistique | des | deux Amériques | et | des iles Philippines | rédigée | Par Ch. Leclere | [Design] | Paris | Maisonneuve et Cie, libraires- éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25, | 1878 Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xvili—xx, cata- logue pp. 1-643, supplément pp. 645-694, index pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°. The linguistic part of this volume occupies pp. 537-643; if is arranged under names of lan- guages and contains titles of books relating to the following: Langues américaines en général, pp. 537-550; Apache, p. 553; Athapasea, p. 554; | Déné, pp. 578-579. Copies seen: Boston Athenzum, Congress, Eames, Harvard, Pilling. Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12s.; another copy. no. 12173, large paper, 1l. ls. Leclerc’s Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, prices it 15 fr., and no. 2832, acopy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large- paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12s. Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. | Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, géographie, | voyages, archéologie et linguistique | des | deux Amériques | Supplément | N° I[-2]. Novembre 1881 | (Design. ] | Paris | Maisonneuve & Ci°, libraires- éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25 | 1881 [-1887] 2 parts: cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. advertisement 1 1. text pp. 1- 102, colophon verso blank 1 1.; printed cover, title differing somewhat from the above (verso blank) 11. text pp. 3-127, 8°. These supplements have no separate section devoted to works relating to American lan- guages, but titles of works containing material relating passim. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. to Athapascan languages appear | Lefroy (Sir John Henry). BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE | Leclere (C.) — Continued. 3 parts: printed cover as above verso can- tents, title as above verso note 1 1. advertisement verso blank 11. table verso blank 11. text pp. 1- 153; printed cover differing slightly from above, verso contents, title like printed cover verso note 1 1. text pp. 3-161, contents p. [162]; printed cover, title verso notice 1 1. text pp. 3-170, table 1 1., 8°. Contain titles of a number of American lin- guistic works, among them a few Athapascan. Copies seen: Pilling. There were issues for 1878 and 1887 also. (Eames.) A Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dog-Rib Words. In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe- dition, vol. 2, pp. 400-492, London, 1851, 8°. A vocabulary of 45 words in each of the above- named languages. The first was collected at Great Slave Lake from an interpreter, the sec- ond from Nanette, an interpreter at Fort Simp- son, both in 1844. ‘~ Reprinted in the later editions of the same work, for titles of which see Richardson (J.) Legends: Maisonneuve, in 1889, prices each of the two | supplements 3 fr. [——] Catalogue | des | livres de fonds | et en nombre | Histoire, Archéologie, | Ethnographie et Linguistique de l’Europe, | de l’Asie, de l'Afrique, | de VAmérique et del’Océanie, | [Design. ] | Paris | Maisonneuve freres et Ch. Leclere, éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire— quai Malaquais, 5 | (Ancienne maison Th. Barrois) | 1885[-1888-1889] Chippewyan See Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Loucheux Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Peau de Liévre Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Slave Petitot (E. F.S. J.) [Legoff (Rev. Laurent).] Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. Marg. M. Alacoque. | Dégayé Margrit Mari bépade ekkoredyain, Jesus | ttahoneltte deneca hourzhzi, tta yed- ziyé | padasanoudelni waléssi, Don aneltte sin: Addi: {[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper. 1888. ] A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as above and containing twelve ‘‘ Promises of Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary,” in the Mon- tagnais language, on the verso of which is a colored picture of the sacred heart with in- scription, in English, below. Mr. Kemper has published the same Promises on similar cards in many languages. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. Cours | Winstructions | en | langue montagnaise | par | le rev. pere Legoff, Ptre | oblat de Marie immaculée | Montreal | imprimerie J. Fournier, 162, rue Montcalm | 1889 Cover title as above, letter to pére Legoff from t Vital J. Ev. de St-Albert O.M.I. (dated from Ile a la Crosse, le 26 septembre 1887, ap- proving the work) recto blank 11. title as above verso blank 1 1. text (in roman characters with some special characters, headings in French) ~ pp. 3-444, table des matiéres pp.i-y, errata p. [v1], 8°. Symbole des apotres, Mystére de la ste-tri- a ATHAPASCAN Legoff (1..) — Continued. LANGUAGES. 53 | Legoff (L.) — Continued. nité, création, ete. (instructions 1-47), pp.s- | 229.—Deécalogue (48-56), Vertus théologales (57-59), pp. 263-274.—Sur la priére (60-67), pp. 274-307, — Grandes vérités (68-81), pp. 307-370.— Sermons détachés ou de circon- atance (82-100), pp. 371-44. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Wellesley. pp. 229-263. gnaise | par | le Laurent Legotf, ptre | oblat de Marie imma- culée | Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 1889 Cover title as above, half-title verso blank rev. pere Grammaire | de la | langue monta- | 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop's ap- | proval verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. 9-24, text pp. 25-342, table of contents pp. 348-351, errata verso blank 1 1. folding table of verbs between pp. 110-111, 8°. General remarks concerning the Montagnais and their language, pp. 9-13.— Montagnais alphabet and words, pp. 13-24.—Of the article | and other determinatives, pp. 25-28.—Noun or substantive, pp. 29-44.—Pronouns, pp. 45-63. — Adverbs, pp. 64-86.—Prepositions and postposi- tions, pp. 87-95.—Conjunctions, pp. 96-98.—In- terjections, pp. 99-101. — Adjectives, pp. 103- 117.— Verbs, pp. 118-326.— Terms of relation- | ship, pp. 327-331.—Names of parts of the body, pp. 331-336.—Names of parts of the bodies of fishes and birds, pp. 336-337.—Sentences, the most commonly employed in conversation, pp. | 338-342. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. Reviewed by Gatschet (A.S.), in the Amer- | ican Antiquarian, vol. 11, p. 389, Nov., 1889. (Pilling.) —— Histoire | de | ancien testament racontée aux Montagnais | par | le rey. pere Laurent Legoft, ptre | oblat de Marie immaculée | Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 1889 Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop's ap- proval verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text in roman characters pp. 7-200, table of contents pp. 201-214, errata 1 p. 8°. The text consists of thirty-three chapters, carrying the bible narrative from the creation of the world to the time of Jesus Christ. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. — Katolik | Deneya ‘tiye dittlisse | Livre de priéres | en langue monta- gnaise | Par le Rév. Pere Legott, O. M. I. {Two lines Latin; two lines Monta- gnais] | [Oblate seal] | Montreal | C. O. Beauchemin & fils, Libraires-Imprimeurs, | 256 et 258 rue Saint-Paul, | 1890 | [Two lines Mon- tagnais] Cover title as above, title as above yerso ap- probation of + Vital J. Graridin O. M. LT. Evéque de St-Albert 1 1. alphabet (in roman characters) p. 3, systéme alphabétique monta- gnais [syllabary], pp. 4-5, text (roman charac- ters, with a few special ones; headings in French) pp. 7-398, table pp. 399-404, 16°. Anciennes priéres du matin et du soir, pp. 7 16. pp. 17-36. — Maniére (@administrer le baptéme, pp. 37-46. messe, pp. 47-78.—Chemin de la croix, pp. 79- 108.—Devotions, etc. pp. 109-126. pp. 127-189.— A ppendice au catéchisme, pp. 190- 222.—Cantiques, pp. 223-394.— Hymn Priéres corrigées, La sainte Catéchisme, set to music, pp. 395-398. Copies seen: Eames,Gatschet, Pilling, Welles- ley. —— Livre | de priéres | en langue mon- tagnaise | [One line syllabie charac- ters] | Par le Réy. Pere Legoff, O. M. I. | [Two lines French; two lines syla- bie characters | | Montréal. | C.O. Beauchemin & fils, Libraires-Imprimeurs, | 256 et 258 rue Saint-Paul. | 1890 | [Two lines syHabie characters ] Cover title as above, title verso approbation of + Vital J. Grandin O. M. I. Evéque de St- Albert 11. roman alphabet p.3, systéme alpha- bétique montagnais [sylabary] pp. 4-5, text (in syllabie characters, with French headings) pp. 7433, table pp. 485-440, 16°. Contents as under the next previous title ex- cept that there is no ‘‘appendice”’ to the cate- chism, and the four pages of music are omitted. Copies seen: Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Welles- ley. Pére Legoff was born at Landéda, diocese of Quimper, Finistére. He pursued his classical studies at the college of Lesneven, and his theo- logical studies partly at the Seminary of Quim- per, partly at Autun, at the scholasticate of the congregation of the Virgin Mary, to which he belongs. Ordained a priest gn the 26thof May, 1866, he immediately received instructions and lett France for America the 5th of the following July. He arrived at St. Boniface on the 14th of October, and was sent from there to St. Joseph, near Pembina, where he remained until the 21st of May, 1867. On his return to St. face he received orders to go to the mission of 3oni- St. Peter,on Lake Caribou, where he arrived the 4th of October, remaining until the 15th of June, 1870, when he left for the Ile A la Crosse, where he arrived at the end of July. There he remained until July, 1881, during which time he composed the books titled above. His health failing, he proceeded to St. Boniface, where he received medical treatment for nine months. In May, 1882, he started for his mission, reach- ing there July 15, where he has since remained, except during the time spent in Montreal while his books were going through the press. 54 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Lenox: This word following a title or within paren. | theses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the Lenox Library, New York City. Lesley (Joseph Peter). On the insensible gradation of words, by J. P. Lesley. In American Philosoph. Soe. Proe. vol. 7, pp. 129-155, Philadelphia, 1861, 8°. (Qongress.) Contains a few words in Chippewyan. Lessons and prayers | in the | Tenni or Slavi language | of the | Indians of Mackenzie river, | in the | north-west territory of Canada, | [Seal of the 8. IDRC {[London:] Society for promoting | christian knowledge, | Northumberland | avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1890.] | Title verso blank 1 1. text in the Tenni lan- | guage with English headings pp. 3-81, 16°. | Possibly by Rev. W. D. Reeve, or Bishop Bom- | pas. | Lessons (1-66), pp. 3-66.— Family prayers, pp. | 67-76.— Private prayers, pp. 76-81. | Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. Lipan: Lord’s prayer See Bancroft (H. TH.) Lord's prayer Coleccion. Lord’s prayer Pimentel (F.) Vocabulary Gatschet (A.S.) Words Bollaert (W.) ANCHHCKI =(IOPHi). [Lisiansky (Capt. Urey).] Uyremecrsie | nokprh cpita Bp | 1803. 4.5. 1806 rajax, | m0 ToBerbuito | ero mMmeparopeKaro BermsectBa | Arercangzpa Ilepsaro, | na Kopad.zb | Hes, | noq> nayaspe TROMB | P1o;a KanuTaMbieiivenanTa, NIN Kauluratia | l-ro pa tra m Kapracpa | TOpia Jucancnars. | Yaecrs neppas[—propaa ]. | Cask Tepoyprb, Bb Tuvorpavin O. Apex- esepa, | 1812. Translation.—V oyage | around the world | in the years 1803,4,5 and 1806, | by order of | his imperial majesty | Alexander I, | on the ship | Neva, | under command | of captain-lieutenant of the navy, now captain | of the Ist rank and knight | Urey Lisiansky. | Vol. I|-IT}. | St. Petersburg, in the printing-oflice of Th. Drechsler, | 1812. 2 vols. 8°. Vocabulary (about 500 words) of the lan- | guages of the northwestern parts of America, Russian-Kadiak-Kenai, vol. 2, pp. 154-181. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. — A | voyage round the world, | in | the years 1803, 4, 5, & 6; | performed | | by order of hisimperial majesty | Alex- | ander the First, emperor of Russia, | in| | the ship Neva, | by | Urey Lisiansky, | Lisiansky (U.) — Continued. | captain in the Russian navy, and | kuight of the orders of St.George and St. Vladimer. | Printed for John Booth, Duke street, Portland place; and | Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, Paternoster row; | by S. Hamilton, Weybridge, Surrey. | 1814. Pp. i-xxi, 1 1. pp. 1-388, maps, 4°. London: Linguistic contents as under next previous title, pp. 329-337. Copiesweon: Astor, Boston Athenzum, Prit- ish Museum, Congress. : re copy at the Pinart sale, no. 1372, brought Betis These vocabularies reprinted in Davidson (G.), Report relative to * * * Alaska, in Coast Survey, Ann. Rept. 1867, pp. 293-298, Washine- ton, 1869, 4°; again in Davidson (G.), Report relative to * * * Alaska, in Ex. Doc. 77, 40th Cong., 2d sess., pp. 328-333; and again in Davidson (G.), in Coast Survey, Coast Pilot of Alaska, pp. 215-221, Washington, 1869. 8°. For extracts see Schott (W.); Zagoskin (L. A.); Zelenoi (S. J.) Loew (Dr. Oscar). Vocabulary of the Apache and of the Navajo. In Gatschet (A. 8.), Zwolf Sprachen aus dem Sidwesten Nordamerikas, pp. 98-115, Weimar, 1876, 8°. Contains about 400 words each. Seattered throughout the same work are many phrases, remarks on grammatie construction, ete., all from Dr. Loew's manuscripts. —— Vocabulary of the Arivaipa lan- euage. In Wheeler (G. M.), Report upon U.S. Geog. Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424465, 469, Washington, 1879, 4°. Contains 211 words in the first division and 80 words and sentencesin the second. Collected in Arizona, September, 1879. — Vocabulary of the Navajo language. In Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon U.S. Geog. Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 469, Washington, 1879, 4°. I. Contains 217 words in the first division and 26 additional words and sentences in the second. Collected in New Mexico, June, 1873. Lord’s. The Lord’s Prayer | In one hun- dred and thirty-one tongues. | Contain- ing all the principal languages | spoken | in Europe, Asia, Africa, and Ameriea. | London: | St. Panl’s Publishing Com- pany, | 12, Paternoster Square. [n.d.] Title verso blank 1 1. preface (signed F. Pin- cott, fellow of the Royal Asiatic Society) pp. 1-2, contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-62, 12°. ~ Lord’s prayer in the Chippewyan or Tinné (roman and syllabic), p. 61. Copies seen: Church Missionary Society. 2 oe le = Lubbock (Sir John). civilisation | and the | primitive con- | Pee - FT ae. er TT ee ATHAPASCAN Lord’s prayer: See Apostolides (S.) Bereholtz (G. I.) sSompas (W. C.) Kirkby (W. W.) Lord's. Rost (R.) Rompas (W. W.) Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan Dog Rib Lipan Baneroft (1H. TT.) Lipan Coleccion. Lipan Pimentel (1.) Slave Bergholtz (G. F.) Slave Kirkby (W. W.) Slave Reeve (W.D.) Slave Rost (N.) Tinné Bompas (W.C.) »Tukudh Bompas (W.C.) Tukudh Rost (R.) Lototen. See Tututen. Loucheux: | Dictionary See Petitot (E.F.5. J.) Miiller (I) Petitot (BK. F.S. J.) Grammatic comments Grammatic treatise Legends Petitot (2. F.S. J.) Relationships Morean (L. TH.) Songs Petitot (BE. F.S. J.) Text Promissiones. Vocabulary Sancroft (IL. 1H.) Busehmann (J.C. FE.) Isbester (J. A.) Latham (RR. G.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Words Daa (Ti. Ke) Words Gibbs (G.) Words Petitot (FH. F.S. J.) dition of men. | Mental and social con- dition of savages. | By | sir John Lub- Hock. bart. WL. P:, I. oR. 8. [&e. two lines. ] | London: | Longmans, Green, and co. | 1870. author Half-title verso printers 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—-viii, con- tents p. ix, list of illustrations pp. xi-xii, list of principal works quoted pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 1-823, appendix pp. 325-862, netes pp. 363- 365, index pp. 367-3880, four other plates, 8°. A few words in Tahkali, Tlatskanai, and Athabasean, p. 288. : Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- gress, Eames. — The | origin of civilisation | and the | primitive condition of man. | Mental and social condition of savages. | By | sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R.S. | Author [&c. two lines. ] | New York: | D. Appleton and com- pany, | 90,92 & 94 Grand street.’| 1870. ty apt of The | origin of LANGUAGES. 55 | Lubbock (J.) — Continued. | Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface to the American frontispiece 11. edition pp. ili-iv, preface pp. v-viii, contents p. ix, illustrations pp. xi-xii, list of principal works quoted pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 1-323, ap- pendix pp. 325-262, notes pp. 363-365, index pp. 367-380, four other plates, 12°. | Linguistics as under title next above, p. 288. Copies seen: Pilling. | —— The | origin of civilisation | and the | primitive condition of man, | Mental and social condition of savages. | By | sir John Lublrock, Bart., M. P., FE. RLS. | Author [&ec. two lines.] | edition with additions. | London: | Longmans, Green, and co. | 1870. Pp. i-xvi, 1-426, 8°. Linguistics as under titles above, p. 327. Second Copies seen: British Museum. | —— The | origin of civilisation | and the | primitive condition of man. | Mental and social condition of savages. | By | sir John Lubbock, Bart., M.P., F.R. S. | Vice Chancellor [&c. three lines. | | Third edition, with numerous addi- | tions. | London: | Longmans, Green, and co. | 1875. Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 416- 417. Copies seen: British Museum. —— The | origin of civilisation | and the | primitive condition of man. | Mental and social condition of savages. | By Sir John Lubbock, Bart. M. P. F.R.S. | D.C. L. LL.D. | President [&c. five lines.] | Fourth edition, with numerous additions. | London: | Longmans, Green, and co. | 1882. Half-title verso list of works *‘by the same author ’’ 11. frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. preface pp. v-vili, contents pp. ix—xill, illustrations pp. xv—xvi, list of the principal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1480, appen- dix pp. 481-524, notes pp. 525-533, mdex pp. 533- 548, five other plates, 8°. Linguistics as under titles above, p. 427. Copies seen: Eames. —— The | origin of civilisation | and the | primitive condition of man | Mental and social condition of savages | By | sir John Lubbock, bart. | M.P., F. R. S., D.C. L., LL.D. | Author [&c. four lines] | Fifth Edition, with numerous Additions | 56 Lubbock (J.) — Continued. London | Longmans, Green, and co | 1889 | All rights reserved Half-title verso printers 1}. frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface (dated February, 1870) pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of principal works quoted pp. xix-xxiii, text pp. 1-486, appendix pp. 487- 529, notes pp. 531-539, index pp. 541-554, list of works by the same author verso blank 1 1. five other plates, 8°. Linguistics as under titles above, p. 432. Copies seen: Eames. Lucy-Fossarieu (M. P.de). Extrait | du compte rendu sténographique | du Congres international | des sciences ethnographiques, | tenu & Paris du 15 au 17 juillet 1878. | Les langues indi- ennes|de la Californie. | Etude de philologie ethnographique, | par M. P. de Lucy-Fossarieu, | membre du con- seil central de l’Institution ethnogra- phique, | lauréat de la Société améri- caine de France. | [Design.] | Paris. | Imprimerie nationale. | M DCCC LXXXI [1881]. Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-55, 8°. Vocabulary of the Loloten or Tutatamys, pp. 20, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 54. Copies seen: Brinton, Pilling. Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- ature | of | American aboriginal lan- guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. | With additions and corrections | by professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by Nicolas Triibner. | London: | Triibner and co., 60, Pater- noster row. | MDCCCLYIII [1858]. Half-title ‘‘ Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica I” verso blank 1 1. title as above verso printer 1 1. preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. ed- itor’s advertisement pp. ix-xii, biographical memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph- ical notices pp. xyv-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, ad- denda pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 257-258, 8°. Arranged alphabetically by lan- guages. Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and Nicolas Triibner, pp. 210-246. Contains a list of grammars and vocabularies, and among others of the following peoples: American languages generally, pp. xv-xxiv; Apaches, pp. 8, 211; Athapascan, pp. 14, 211; Atnah, pp. 15,212; Beaver, p.18; Chepewyan, pp. 35-36, 215-216; Dogrib, p. 66; Hoo-pah, p. 82; Hudson's Bay, pp. 83-84, 223; Kinai, pp. 92-93, 225; Koltschanes, p. 96; Kutchin, Loucheux, pp. 99, 226; Lipan, p.226; Navajos, pp. 132-133, 233; Pinalefios, p. 150; Sicannis, p.175; Sussee, p. 178; Tacullies, pp. 178-179, 240; Tah-lewah, p. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued. 179; Vicorillas (Jicarillas), p. 186, 241; Tlats- kanai, p. 189; Umpqua, pp. 195, 244. Copies seen: Bureauof Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling. ; At the Fischer sale, no. 990, a copy brought 5s. 6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the Squier sale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, $2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. Dr. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed the plan and purport of this work that little more remains for me to add beyond the mere state- ment of the origin of my connection with the publication, and the mention of such additions for which I am alone responsible, and which, during its progress through the press, have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole. This is but an act of justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig; because at the time of his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 pages were printed off, and these constitute the only portion of the work which had the benefit of his valuable personal and final revision. Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the history of spoken language. As a first section of amore extended work on the lit- erary history of language generally, he had pre- pared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of the aboriginal languages of America. The man- uscript had been deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological Society at New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in Europe, under my personal super- intendence. Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, in- tending then to confine myself simply to pro- ducing a correct copy of my friend’s manuscript. 3ut it soon became obvious that the transcript had been hastily made, and but for the valu- able assistance of literary friends, both in this country and in America, the work would prob- ably have been abandoned. My thanks are more particularly due to Mr. E.G. Squier, and to Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by whose considerate and valuable coéperation many dif- ficulties were cleared away and my editorial labors greatly lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labor nor expense in the attempt to render the work as perfect as possible; with what success must be left to the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate the labors of a pioneer in any new field of liter- ary research.—Editor’s advertisement. Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in this country [England], was held in considerable esteem as a jurist, both in Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden in 1809, with but little exception he continued to ATHAPASCAN Ludewig (IH. Ef.) — Continued. reside in his native city until 1844, when he both countries he practiced law as a profession, his bent was the study of literary history, which was evidenced by his ‘‘ Livre des Ana, Essai de Catalogue Manuel,” published at his own cost in 1837, and by his ‘‘ Bibliothekonomie,”’ which appeared a few years later. But, even whilst thus engaged, he delightedin investigating the rise and progress of the land emigrated to America; but, though in of his subsequent adoption, and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of the peopling of America gained him the highest consideration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as aman of original and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann’s ‘* Serapzweum;”’ and amongst the chief of his contributions to that journal may be mentioned those on ‘‘ American Libraries,” on the ‘‘Aids to American Bibliog- raphy,” and on the ‘‘ Book-Trade of the United States of America.’’ In 1846 appeared his ‘‘ Lit- erature of American Local History,” a work of much importance and which required no small amount of labor and perseverance, owing to the necessity of consulting the many and widely scattered materials, which had to be sought out from apparently themost unlikely channels. These studies formed a natural induction to the present work on ‘‘ The Literature of Ameri- ean Aboriginal Languages,’’ which occupied his leisure concurrently with the others, and the printing of which was commenced in August, 1856, but which he did not live to see launched upon the world; for at the date of his death, on the 12th of December following, only 172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of love with him for years; and if ever author were mindful LANGUAGES. HT Ludewig (II. f.) — Continued. M. McDonald (R.) — Continued. McDonald (fev. Robert). [Terms of relationship of the Tukuthe, collected by R. McDonald, esq., a factor of the company, Peel River Fort, Hudson’s Bay Territory, June, 1865. | Tn Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity and aftinity of the human family, pp. 293-382, lines 68, Washington, 1871, 4°. A selection | from the | book of com- mon prayer, | according to the use of the | United Chureh of England and Treland, | Translated into | Tukudh, | by the rev. R. M‘Donald, | missionary of the Church missionary society. | [Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | London: | Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, | 77, Great Queen street, Lincoln’s-inn-fields; | 4, Royal exchange; and 48, Piccadilly. | 1873. Title verso printers 1 1. text with headings in English pp. 1-123, 18°. Order for morning prayer, pp. 1-9.—Order for [ of the nonuwm prematur in annum, he was when he deposited his manuseript in the library of the American Ethnological Society, difiident him- self as to its merits and value on a subject of such paramount interest. He had satisfied him- self that in due time the reward of his patient industry might be the production of some more extended national work on the subject, and with this he was contented; for it was a dis- tinguishing feature in his character, notwith- standing his great and varied knowledge and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to drudgery if needful, if he could in any way assist in the promulgation of literature and science. Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of many of the most distinguished European and American literary societies, and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars both in America and Germany, as will readily be acknowledged should his voluminous corre- spondence ever see the light. In private life he was distinguished by the best qualities which endear a man’s memory to those who survive him: he was a kind and affectionate husband and a sincere friend. Always accessible and ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied to him for advice upon matters appertaining to literature, his loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends, and in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her learned men in America, a genuine type of a class in which, with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined a painstaking and plodding perseverance but seldom met with beyond the confines of ‘the Father- land.’’—Biographic memoir. evening prayer, pp. 10-18.—Prayers, pp. 19- 20.—Order of the administration of the Lord’s supper, pp. 20-53.—Baptism of infants, pp. 54— 66; of adults, pp. 66-78.—Solemnization of mat- rimony, pp. 79-93.—Burial of the dead, pp. 94— 104.—Chilig [hymns, nos. i-xxx]}, pp. 105-123. Copies seen: Church Missionary Society, Eames, Pilling, Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. ] Nuwheh kukwadhud Jesus Christ | vih kwunduk nirzi | Matthew, Mark, Luke, John | ha rsiotitinyokhai kirre | kwitinyithutluth kwikit. | John rsiotitinyoo vih etunetle | tig ha | Tukudh tsha zit | thleteteitazya. | London, | 1874. Colophon: London: printed by Wm. Clowes and sons, Stamford street | and Charing cross. Literal translation.—Our lord Jesus Christ | the gospel of | Matthew, Mark, Luke, John | by them written | epistle first of | John written by him | intothe | Tukudh tungue | translated. 58 McDonald (R.) — Continned. Title verso blank 11. text (with chapter tities in English) pp. 3-267, 12°. Matthew, pp. 8-75.—Mark, pp. 76-121.—Luke, pp. 122-199.—John, pp. 199-257.—Epistles of | John i-ili, pp. 257-267, Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. — Ettunetle choh | kwunduk | nyuk- wun treltsei. | Rev. M. Ostervald, | kirkhe. | Ven. archdeacon MeDonald, | kirkhe thleteteitazya Takudh tsha | zit. | [Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.] Title verso blank 1 1. text (Osterwald’s | abridgment of the history of the bible; with the exception of chapter titles in English, en- tirely in the Takudh language) pp. 3-23, 16°. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- | moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. Ettunetle | tutthug enjit gichin- chik | ako | sakrament rsikotitinyoo | ako chizi | thlelchil nutinde akg kindi | kwunttlutritili | Ingland thlelchil | tungittiyin kwikit. | Takudh tsha zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdeacon | McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe. | [Seal of | the Sy PC. K.))i| London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland | avenue, Charing cross, W. C. [1885. ] English title: Book of common prayer |_and | administration of the sacraments, | and other | | rites and ceremonies of the church | accord- | ing to the use of the | church of England. | (The Preface and Tables are printed in Eng- lish, and the Epistles | and Gospels are not in- serted, except those taken from the Old | Tes- tament, which are given at the end. The Psalter, the Form | of Prayer tobe used at Sea, the Ordination Service, and the| Articles of Religion are omitted from this Edition.) | Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven. | archdeacon McDonald, D. D.| [Seal of the | S.P.C.K.] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.] Takudh title verso 1.1 recto blank, English’ title recto 1.2 verso blank, preface, concerning | the service of the church, of ceremonies, ete. 2 ll. proper lessons etc. 4 ll. tables and rules 4 11. text (with the exception of a few headings in English, entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 1-221, 16°. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. Some copies differ in title-page and collation, as follows: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE McDonald (R.) — Continued. —— Ettunetle | tutthug enjit gichinchik | ako | sakrament rsikotitinyoo | ako chizi | thlelchil nutinde ako kindi | kwunttlutritli | Ingland thlelehil | tungittiyin kwikit. | (The Epistles and Gospels are not inserted.) | Takudh tsha zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdea- con McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe. | [Seal of the 8. P. C.K. ] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.] English title: Book of common prayer | and | administration of the sacraments | and other | rites and ceremonies of the church | according to the use of the | Church of Eng- land. | (Lhe Preface and Tables are printed in English, and the Epistles and Gospels are not inserted, except those taken from the Old | Testament, which are given at the end.) | Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven. archdeacon MeDonald, D. D.| [Seal of the Sales (Comer i] London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.] Takudh title verso 1. 1 recto blank, English title recto 1.2 verso blank, toxt (with the excep- tion of a few headings in English, entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 1-221, 16°. The preface and tables mentioned on the English title-page are omitted from the only copy I have seen. Copies seen: Pilling. Ochikthud ettunetle trootshid, | ako | ettunetle choh trorzi ochikthud | ettunetle | ako | thlukwinadhun ‘ket- chid trorzi kah | dr. Watts, | kirkhe. | Thleteteitazya | archdeacon MeDon- ald, D. D., | kirkhe. | London: | printed by the Religious tract society. | 1885. Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 8-17, 16°. Catechism, pp. 3-8.—Old Testament pas- sages, pp. 9-18,—New Testament passages, pp. 14-17. Copies seen: Pilling. [——] Tukudh hymns. [London: Society for promoting christian knowledge. 1885.] Colophon: Printed by William Clowes and sons, limited, London and Beccles. No title-page or heading, title above from outside cover, syllabarium pp. i-iv, text (en- tirely in thé Tukudh language) pp. 1-74, 16°. Chilig [hymns, nos. i-lxxvi], pp. 1-58.— Doxologies, nos. i-iv, p.59.—Canticles, pp. 60- 65.—Catechism, pp. 66-74. 7 is — 4 f°s.78 Toye a ATHAPASCAN McDonald (R.) — Continued. Copies seen: Bames, Pilling, Society for Pro- moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. A later edition, with title-page, as follows : — Chilig | Takudh tshah zit. | Hymns | in Takudh language. | Composed and translated | by the | ven. archdeacon MeDonald, D.D. | [Seal of the 8. P. C. K.] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. | 1890. Colophon: Printed by William Clowes and sons, limited, | London and Beecles. | Title on cover “ Takudh hymns,’ inside title as above verso blank 1 1. syllabarium pp. iii-vi, text (entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 1-89, eolophon p. [90], 16°. The textual matter of pp. 1-58 of this edition agrees page for page with those pages in the edition titled next above; though the matter has been entirely reset, I think. Chilig [hymns, nos. 1-94], pp. 1-73.—Doxol- ogies, nos. i-iv, p.74.—Canticles, pp. 75-80.—- | Ochikthut etunetle [catechism], pp. 81-89. Copies seen: Bames, Pilling. Zzehkko enjit gichinchik | nekwazzi ttrin ihthlog kenjit | ako gichinchik | ttrin kittekookwichiltshei kenjit kah. | Bp. Oxenden vut sun kwut_ sut |, thleteteitazya | chizi gichinchik kah | tikyinchiknut ako trinyunnut enjit. | Chutruii kenjit gichinchik tthui, | ako | chunkyo rsotitinyoo enjit gichinchik, | archdeacon McDonald. | Kirkhe. | [Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | London: | Society for promoting christian knowledge, Northumberland avenue, Charing cross, W.C. [1885.] Title verso blank 1 1. text (Oxenden’s family | prayers, entirely in the Tukudh language, with the exception of a few phrases in English) pp. 3-50, 16°. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- | moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. — David vi psalmnut. | Takudh tsha zit thleteteitazya | ven. archdeacon | M*Donald, D. D. | kirkhe. | [Seal of | thes. eC. 1K] | Winnipeg, Man.: | Printed by Robt. | D. Richardson | for the | Society for | Promoting Christian Knowledge, | | London. | 1886. Title verso blank 11. text (with the exception | of headings in English and Latin, entirely in | the Takudh language) pp. 1-195, 16°. | Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. LANGUAGES. 5G McDonald (R.) — Continued. —— The | new testament | of | our lord and saviour | Jesus Christ. | Translated into) Takudh by | ven. archdeacon McDonald, D.D. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society. | 1886. Title verso blank 1 1. text (with chapter des- ignations in English) pp. 5-576, 16°. Matthew, pp. 5-76.—Mark, pp. 77-122.—Luke, pp. 125-200.—John, pp. 200-257.—Acts, pp. 259- 333.—Epistles, pp. 333-537.— Revelation, pp. 538- 576. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. On page 251 of his work entitled ‘*’The In- dians,”’ 'Voronto, 1889, Rev. Jolin MeLean com- mentson asyllabary by Archdeacon Me Donald as follows: ‘Several years ago the Venerable Archdea- con MeDonald, whose mission is on the Yukon and who for a term of years dwelt one mile within the Aretie Circle, invented a very elab- orate sylabary, which he applied tothe Tukudh language, one of the family of the Hyperborean languages. ‘The syllabary consisted of 400 syl- lables, which, when thoroughly memorized, enabled the Tukudh Indians to read their own language with perfect ease. Having translated the New ‘Testament and Prayer Book, he utilized his syllabic system, and so accurate was its construction that in four months the natives could read the Word of God. Great benefits flowed to the people from this invention, as they speedily learned the truths of morality and religion for themselves.” Having never seen any publication in the Tukudh language printed in what is usually termed a syllabary, my interest was aroused, and under date of March 9, 1889, I wrote Mr. McLean for such further particulars as he might beable to furnish. Under date of March 28 he replied as follows: ‘““My statement is based upon the following: The archdeacon was in Winnipeg three or four years ago and was interviewed by a reporter of the Manitoba Free Press. ‘The report of that interview was a long one, which I have pre- served in my scrapbook. In this report is the following: ‘A syllabary has been made of the syllables made use of in the language. While the syllables of the Cree language number only about 32, the syllabary required for the Tukudh contains about 500 syHables; and this, notwith- standing the apparent difficulty, some of the Indians bave learned in a fortnight. These syllables are written out in Roman letters. Some of the more intelligent have learned to read the gospels fairly within three months.’ T have an interview held with the archdeacon’s brother, and several references to the arcldea- con in letters which he wrote himself and were printed in the newspapers; also letters and notes of travel by Hudson Bay Company’s officers. This, however, is the only reference 60 McDonald (R.) — Continued. to the syllabary; but, as it was so explicit, I felt that surely there could be no doubt con- cerning it. Should you find it to be incorrect I would feel obliged if you would kindly let me know, as I am very desirous of being accurate.”’ Under date of August 6, 1890, Mr. McLean again wrote me, as follows: ‘‘ When first [read the account of Archdeacon MeDonald’s sylabary I was under the impres- sion that it was composed of characters similar to the Evans characters,in the Tukudh lan- guage. Iam not now of that opinion. I think he must arrange the Roman characters in the form of a syllabary and by this means teach the Indians to read rapidly.” Tn his letter was inclosed aclipping from the Regina Leader of July 8, 1890, published at Regina, Assiniboia, N. W. T., reading as fol- lows: ‘“Over one year ago a famous American eth- nologist wrote to the Rev. Dr. McLean, Moose Jaw, calling in question some statements made by him in his book on The Indians of Canada, relating to the existence of a syllabary of the Takudh language. Dr. McLean replied that he had excellent authority for his statement, but that he would write at once to Dr. R. McDonald, of Peel River, inventor of the sylabary, and learn particulars. As Dr. McDonald’s mission house for a time was one mile within the Arctic Cirele it was expected that it would take two years to receive a reply to the letter. An an- . . . . . 4 swer has just been received, within thirteen months, and acopy of the syllabary, the con- tents of the letter corroborating Dr. McLean’s statements in his book ‘The Indians of Can- ada,’ and in his latest work, just published, ‘James Evans, Inventor of the Syllabic Sys- tem of the Cree Language.’ The following is a copy of the letter: ““«Sr. MATTHEW’S, «PEEL RIVER, January 22, 90. “‘*The Rev. John McLean: ‘Dear Str: I send you a copy of the sylla- bary referred to. You will observe that very few of the rows after the first page are com- plete, simply through want of space. This will show that there is no exaggeration. As to the | time taken in learning to read in the Takudh tongue by means of the syllabary, instead of | exaggerating, the fact is itis understated rather than otherwise in some cases; for instance, there is one that learnt the syllabary in three days and to read the gospels in about a month. I may say that Ido not claim great credit for the invention of the syllabary. It was sug- gested by Evans’s syllabic characters. “With high consideration, “Yours respectfully, “*R, McDONALD, D. D., “ eS A Yh anbyphb @ G a S>>A WV Tl Cvs aye f (Siero, ONS ele Eee he iim WG 6D. > Cy Wim Te CG PEDGD::2,.5 Th GAB DO Raye, Te Gis uaneana -S2 aie) T eo) ef (3) Z Cree eel eke peep Dp pA Uo el Daca@ Dp DD QU. } (1) S Engns3anm wes Gwe = (NW). Sh &BRBBR Ww Seer) SS BM Ws || ch S&S BBBR DW imo & 5 8 2 OY Wy v |) Ts esr iw (2) || Ts @BBBB RM BW N (4 PRD ess AO ad ae M e& 3 3 3 Ww «|| Hiatus > — Accessories:. o * EXPLANATORY NOTES. (1) These letters are not differentiated in Dene. (2) v is the nasal n, (3) 2 is the French j. (4) S is phonetically intermediate between ¢ and s. The vowels as in Italian, except @ as the ein Fr. je, te. — Ther of Ar, Ar is hardly perceptible. gy, y are very guttural. A is the result of uvular vibra- tions. Kh, Th=k+h,tt+h. @ almost = ty. f is a peculiarly sibilant./. The dot accompanying consonants represents the exploding sound (rendered by ¢ in- corporated in the signs). * is prefixed to proper names, and o is suffixed to syllables the vowel of which it is necessary to render long. The rest as in Engl. 68 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ‘THE SOME OF THE Advantages of the New Syllabary. I.— The direction of the curve or angle of each sign infallibly determines the nature of the vowel added to the fundamental consonant of each syllable, and this direction is always perceived without the least effort of the mind. In the Cree Alphabet such as given in Petitot’s Grammaire raisonnee, this direc- tion on which depends the vowel of the syllable is either difficult to discern or governed by no fixed rules. Thus, in that Syllabary, C points to the right, Lb to the left, @ upwards, \ downwards, though the consonants expressed by these differently turned signs are ALL in connection with the SAME vowel a. Hen- ce confusion—with co-relative difficulty—for the mind of the pupil. Il.— All the cognate sounds are rendered in the new syllabies by similarly formed characters the general shape of which denotes the phonetic group to which they belong, while their intrinsic modifications determine the nature of the particular sound they represent. Thus the dentals are expressed by a single curve; the gutturals by a double curve; the soft sibilants by a curve with un- dulating extremities; the hard sibilants by a double curve with like extrem- ities, etc. Therefore our 30 ‘sets of letters are practically reduced to 9, viz.: QIGcdeECCCAC E&. Sothat the pupil who has become familar with these 9 signs may almost be said to have mastered the whole Alphabet; for another good point in its favor is that III.— The modifications of each fundamental character take place internally and in conformity with logical and therefore easily learnt rules. To illustrate this remark, we will refer to the sign ©. The student who already possesses the aforesaid 9 principal signs will recognize it at sight—through its double undulating curve—as a hard sibilant which, being affected by no modification, must be given the primary hissing sound Sa. Let us now insert therein the perpendicular line which, when used as an internal accretion to a sign, corres- ponds to the A of the Roman Alphabet (as in < hra, € hwa, C tha, G kha), and we obtain & sha. Should we cross the end of its horizontal line, we will thereby add ar to that sign which will then become & tsha.or cha. In li- ke manner, € may be changed into & tsa which in its turn is liable to be transformed into G tsa. C, €, etc. may also become @, &, etc. —This logic and consequent facility are sadly wanting in the old Syllabary which is made up of disconnected signs many of which are differentiated only by addi- tional and ezternal smaller signs (Ky 1S 1, 1H Bb be «I “ with the new system, In conclusion, we may be permitied to state as illustrative of the practical worth of the new Syllabary that through it Indians of common intelligence have learnt to read in one week’s leasurely study before they had any Primer or printed matter of any kind to help them on. We even know of a young man who performed the feat in the space of two evenings. 70 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE A®> —Di 1H» pHaw~ BOGGGSRGGSG Gm rim mim im mim mm FAC-SIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE’S DENE PRIMER. ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. ay DOEDBIC” BPsBxz AA _— oe oy), 2 eam eS? Mosales0r . CAS) Dt tl @ eee 7 G75). Sis Cs) FAC-SIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE'S DENE CATECHISM. Di MDs [a 72 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Morice (A. G.) —Continned. Morice (A. G.) — Continued. Translation: The-little-catechism drawn-on Half-title (Le Petit Catechisme et prieres) (written). | Jesus-Christ was-born then since | | verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. {Seal.] | avertissement pp. 5-6, text (Carrier and French, With-it 1890-times it-annually-revolved | usually on facing pages) pp. 8-143, (half-titles at Stuart’s-Lake there | fatherMorice made-it. pp-7,51 and 95). table des matieres p. 144, sq. Title as above verso blank 1 1. text (entirely 16°. in the Déné language and in syllabie charac- On each page of the work are given foot-notes ters) pp. 3-18, sq. 16°. See the fac-simile of the explanatory of peculiarities in the Carrier text title-page on p.71 of this bibliography. and of the translation. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. Catechism, pp. 7-49.—Prayers for the morn- Some copies of this catechism differ in colla- ing, pp. 52-69.—Prayer for the evening, pp. 70- tion: Title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 41- 73.—Divers prayers (pp. 74-93): Prayer on 56. The author informs me that an edition of arising, p. 74.— Prayer on retiring, p.75.—The 500 of these was printed ‘‘to form part of a mysteries of the rosary, pp. 76-79.—Salve, ‘Recueil de Priéres’ which I am not yet pre- Regina, p. 80.—Prayer to St. Joseph, pp. 81-83.— pared to publish.’ (Eames, Pilling, Shea.) Prayer for the dead, p. 84.—Acts for the bene- diction of the holy sacrament, pp. 85-93, verso a The western Dénés—their manners ore 4 note in French by the author.—Cantiques (pp. and customs. By the Rey. Father A. 96-143): ‘To the sacred eucharist, pp. 96-103.— G. Morice, O. M. I., Stuart’s Lake, B.C. To the Holy Spirit, p. 104.—To the Holy Virgin, In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 7 pp- 105-112.—To St. Joseph, pp. 118-115.—To (whole no. vol. 25), pp. 109-174, Toronto, 1890, 8°. the Holy Angels, pp. 116-117. — For various (Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling, Wellesley.) occasions, pp. 118-148. Classification of the Déné tribes, p. 113.— Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Powell. Déné songs with music, 156-157.— Apologue —— [Teestles-Nahwoelnek, or Carrier (three lines) in the language of the Carrier In- : Review. dians (‘‘ written with the new signs” with ; A : interlinear transliteration and followed by Stuart’s Lake, 1891. ] English translation), p. 166.—Remarks on the Pp. 9-32, 8°. language of the westerm Dénés, pp. 166-167. An eight-page periodical, printed entirely in the Déné syllabic characters invented by Pére — The Déné languages. Considefed in Morice. At this writing (January, 1892) but Themselves and Incidentally in their three numbers have been issued—those for Relations to Non-American Idioms. October, November, and December, 1891. No.1 By the Rev. Father A. G. Morice, O. M. I. begins with: page 4, the precede aaa held, I presume, for the preliminary matter relating to the volume. The contents are of a varied nature—the first number, for example, containing: Indian or local names, p. 9.—News from below [i. e. from the colonized portion of British Columbia], p. 9.—News from the New World, p. 10; fromthe Old World, p. 10.—Scripture text, p. 11.—Life of St. Athanasius, p.11.—Bible questions and answers, p. 12.--Letter from the bishop, p. 12.— A picture and its explanation, p. 13.—Concern- ing the Review. p. 13.—A story, pp. 14-15.— Hymns, p. 15.—Useful information, ete., p. 16. Copies seen: Pilling, Powell. In Canadian Inst. Trans. vol. 1, pp. 170-212. Toronto, 1891, 8°. (Pilling.) Introduction, pp. 170-171.—Phonetics and graphic signs (pp. 172-175) ineludes ‘‘ the new methodical easy and complete Déné syllabary,” p. 175.—General characteristics of the Déné languages, pp. 176-181.—The nouns; their vari- | eties and inflections, pp. 181-184.—The adjec- tives and the pronouns, pp. 185-189.—The sim- ple or primary verbs, pp. 189-195.—The com- posite verbs, pp. 195-200.—Varieties of verbs, pp. 200-204.— Miscellaneous notes. pp. 204-212. Issued separately with half-title (The Déné languages), on the verso of which begins the text, paged as in the original article, 170-212. | [——] Dictionnaire | de la Langue | (Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Powell.) Chilkohtine. | Mission | du lace William. It has also been translated into French and | Avril 1884. CH) is in course of publication in the Missions de la Congrégation des Missionnaires Oblats de Marie Immaculée, Paris. * Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-170, double columns, 8°. Contains about 5,000 words, which need Le | petit catechisme | al’usage | des rearrangement and retranscription. It has sauvages porteurs | Texte & Tradue- been prepared for publication as far as the let- tion ae Notes | suivi is | prieres du Be matin | et du soir | Par le R. P. Morice, Gales | Kuti Nitsa ee | sé O.M.J. | [Two lines quotation] | aan Ue ; ( ) | Sp ah = iteral translation: With | Above-Chief Mission | du lace Stuart | 1891 [God] | his-word | after one-speaks. Colophon: Typographie de la Mission du Lac Manuscript; pp. 1-42, 12°. Stuart. No. 10. Contains 5 sermons in Chilkohtin. ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Morice (A. G.) — Continued. —— Dictionnaire | Des Verbes | De la Langue Porteur | par | le R. P. A. G. Morice, O.M. I. | Mission du lae Stuart | 1887-18 . (*) Manuscript; title verso and following leaf blank, text pp. 1-128, double column, small 4°. A-CO only finished. Parties [ ) Grammaire | Des gables du Discours | de la Langue Porteur. 1887. G*) Manuscript; pp. 1-96, double column, broad 8°. conju- Contains four chapters, subdivided into 19 articles and 132 rules. [ ] Mannel | Du Sauvage | contenant | Prieres, Instructions, Cantiques | Et Catéchisme. | Mission du Lae Stuart | 1888. (*) Manuscript; title verso blank, text pp. 1-120, 16°, in the Carrier language. Contains: Part I. Morning and evening prayers, examination of conscience, acts before and after communion, acts and hymn for the benedictionand divers miscellaneous pray ers.— Part II. Instructions on confession and com- munion and the reception of sacraments gener- | ally.—Part III. 45 hymns, all original.—Part TV. The short catechism of Christian doctrine. [——] Yakeesta pe’ teestles ra etata hok- ween natseehwolnek. [1889.] (*) Literal translation: Sky-on-sits [God] his- paper after old-time about one-narrates. Manuscript; pp. 1-55, 12°, being a free trans- lation and adaptation of the book of Genesis, in the Carrier dialect. — Déné roots | By the Rev. Father A. G. Morice, O.M.I. [1890.] (*) Manuscript; 30 pages, folio. Introduction, 13 pp.—Vocabulary of 370 Eng- lish words which are roots in Déné, with their equivalents in 17 or 18 Déné dialects, 17 pp. — Les Evangiles | Pour tous les Dimanches | Et | Fétes d’obligation | De Année | Traduits | Par le R. P. A. G. Morice, O. M. I. | Mission du Lae Stuart | 1890. @&) Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text 78 ages, note-paper size. S Contains the selections from the gospels read in Roman Catholic churches on all Sundays and feasts of obligation through the whole year, translated into the Carrier language. [ ] Twelve | Stories of adventure | in Carrier. 1890. (*) Manuscript; 60 pages, note-paper size, being translations and adaptations of the most thrill- ing stories found in English periodicals and destined by the translator for publication in a projected monthly review in the new syllabics. See page 70 for title of the Review. | 13 Morice (A. G.) — Continued. [——] Twelve | Short Lives of the Saints. 1891. Manuscript; 26 pages, 4°. ) — [Words, phrases, and sentences in the Déné language. 1891.] (=) Manuscript in possession of its author, who has prepared it for the use of the Kthnology. surean of Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to the study of Indian languages. Grammar | of | The Carrier Lan- guage | With Notes | On Local Peeul- iarities and Idiotisms | By Rey. A.G. Morice, O. M. I. 3) Manuscript, 73 pages, broad 8°, begun in February, 1891, and yet unfinished; in posses- sion of its author, who tells me he has reached the chapter on the pronoun. Are the Sociology and Mythology indigenous or exotic? (*) Manuscript, 30 pages folio, recently prepared by its author for publication in the Transac- tions of the Royal Society of Canada. Contents: Introductory — Ethnological — Sociological—Carrier sociology exotic; general Carrier arguments—Carrier sociology exotic; proved by facts—Carrier mythology partially exotic— Creation myths. The manuscripts titled above are in the possession of their author, who has kindly furnished me information concerning them, as also the notes from which I have compiled the following biographic notice: Father August, Morice was born on tht 27th of 1859, at Saint-Mars-sur-Colmont, France. After the usual elementary studies at the Christian school at Oisseau, where his family had removed, he was sent, when 13 years of age, to the Eeclesiastical College at Mayenne, with a view to prepare himself for the priesthood. Feeling called to the foreign missions, he subsequently joined the Order of the Oblates of Mary Immaculate (O. M. 1.) and made his final vows therein in October, 1879. and being as yet in minor orders, the famous decrees of 1880 commanded the dispersion of the members of such religious orders as had not the official sanction of the French Government. Previous to the execution of these decrees he was sent by his superiors to British Columbia, where he arrived on the 26th of July, 1880. At the completion of his theological studies and after he had learned a little of the English lan- guage he was promoted to the priesthood, July 2, 1882, and given charge of the Chilkotin In- dians, whose language he immediately pro- ceeded to learn. After two years of study he found himself able to preach to them without the aid of aninterpreter. In 1885 he was sent to his present station, Stuart’s Lake, where he repeated—but with less difficulty, owing to the grammatical aftinity of the two languages—his linguistic studies in the dialect of the Carrier. srothers’ While still studying theology 74 Miiller (Friedrich). Grundriss | der | Sprachwissenschaft | von | D*. Fried- rich Miiller | Professor[&c. three lines. ] | I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band. | I. Abtheilung. | Nachtriige zum Grund- riss ausden Jahren | 1877-1887]. | Wien 1876[-1888]. | Alfred Holder | K. K. Universitiits-Buchhiindler. | Rothen- thurmstrasse 15. 4 vols. (vol.1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 part 1 all published), each part and division with an outside title and two inside titles, 8°. Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American languages, was originally issued in two divi- sions, each with the following special title: Die Sprachen | der | schlichthaarigen Rassen | von | Dr. Friedrich Miiller| Professor [&e. eight lines.] | I. Abtheilung. | Die Sprachen der australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der amerikanischen Rasse. | Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Hélder| K. K. Hof- und Universitiits-Buchhindler | Rothen- thurmstrasse 15. Die Sprachen der amerikanischen Rassen; Allgemeiner Charakter dieser Sprachen (in- cluding some Athapascan examples), vol. 2, BIBLIOGRAPHY first part, second division (1882), pp. 181-183.— N. Nabiltse : ' General discussion See Gibbs (G.) Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) Vocabulary Dorsey (J. 0.) Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) Vocabulary Hazen (W. B.) Nagailer: Vocabulary See Adelung (J.C.) and | Vater (J.8.) Vocabulary Mackenzie (A.) Nahawny. See Nehawni. National Museum: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that insti- tution, Washington, D.C. Natsun kaothet Tinné. Navajo: Dictionary General discussion General discussion yeneral discussion Gentes Grammar Grammatie comments Grammatie comments Grammatic comments Numerals Numerals Numerals . Saint Mark See Kirkby (W. W.) See Matthews (W.) (J. C.) and Adelung Vater (J.S.) Bancroft (H. H.) Busehmann (J.C. E.) Matthews (W.) Matthews (W.) Featherman (A.) Miiller (F.) Wilson (E. F.) Beadle (J. H.) Gatschet (A. 3.) Haines (E, M_) OF THE Miller (F.) — Continued. Die Sprachen der Athapasken- (Tinne-) und Kinai-Stiimme, pp. 184-192, treats of sounds, roots, nouns, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and — numerals, making use of examples from the Tschippewyan, de liévre, Loucheux, Tahkali, Tlatskanai, Umkwa, Apatshe, Navajo, Hupa, and Kinai. Peau Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. Murray (Alexander H.) Vocabulary of — the Kutchin of the Yukon or Kutchi- Kutehi, drawn up by Mr. M’Murray ~ [sic]; to which the Chepewyan syno- nyms were added by Mr. M’Pherson. In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi- — tion, vol. 2, pp. 382-385, London, 1851, 8°. A list of about 100 words and the numerals 1-300. Reprinted in the later editions of the same . work; see Richardson (J.) Collection of words having a similar sound and signification in the Kutehin and Dog-rib languages. In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe- dition, vol. 1, pp. 899-400, London, 1851, 8°. A vocabulary of 22 words. teprinted in the later editions of the same see Richardson (J.) work; Navajo — Continued. Numerals See Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) Prayer Matthews (W.) Proper names Proper names Catlin (G.) Matthews (W.) Smithsonian. Packard (R. L.) Proper names Relationships Songs Matthews (W.) Text Matthews (W.) Vocabulary Arny (W. F. M.) Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary Beadle (J. H.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.) Cushing (I. H.) Davis (W. W. H.) Domenech (E. H. D.) Eaton (J. H.) Gatschet (A. 8.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Loew (O.) Vocabulary Matthews (W.) Vocabulary Nichols (A. 8.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Pino (P. B.) Powell (J. W.) Vocabulary Schooleraft (H. R.) Vocabulary Shaw (J. M.) Vocabulary Simpson (J. H.) Vocabulary Thompson (A. H.) Vocabulary Turner (W. W.) Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.) Vocabulary Whipple (W. D.) Vocabulary Willard (C. N.) ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 15 Navajo— Continued. Numerals — Continued. Navajo language. Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Colleeted in New Mexico, 1867-1868. Recorded on one of the blank forms (no. 170) Navajo Navajo Navajo Peau de Liévre Slave Vocabulary See Wilson (KE. F.) Chippewyan See Kirkby (W. W.) Words Barreiro (A.) Chippewyan Miiller (F.) Words Daa (L. K.) Chippewyan Pott (A. F.) Words Ellis (R.) Chippewyan Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- Words Gatschet (A. 5S.) son (G. M.) Words Latham (R. G.) Dog Rib Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- Words Matthews (W.) son (G. M.) Words Tolmie (W. F.) and | Hupa 3ancrott (H. H.) Dawson (G. M.) Hupa Gatschet (A.S.) Words Wilson (D.) Hupa Miiller (F.) wala: Hupa Tolmie ie F.) and Daw- = b. we i son (G. M.) i poabulery a seem ape ic Kaiyuhkhotana Dall (W. H.) Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) Sai Si Vocabulary Ross (R. B.) Reus. BLES (B=) Kenai Erman (G. A.) New Improved & Easy alphabet. See Renan Miiller (F.) Morice (A. G.) Kutechin Buschmann (J.C. E.) New Methodical Dene sylla- Se Dat Ane) iB : Loucheux Miiller (F.) bary. See Morice (A. G.) Navajo Beadle (J. H.) Nichols (A. Sidney). Vocabulary of the NAS ae Gatschet (4. S.) Haines (E. M.) Miiller (F.) Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw son (G. M.) Miiller (F.) Ellis (R.) of the Smithsonian Institution, issued to col- | Sussee Sullivan (J. W.) lectors, and containing 211 words. Of these, | Taculli Ellis (R.) equivalents are given in about 180 cases. Taculli Harmon (D. W.) Northern Indians. See Athapascan. Taculli Miller (F.) Nulato Inkalik. See Inkalik. Taculli Pott (A. F.) iiainésals: Taculli Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- ote : son (G. M.) ee ac att ad ) Tahlewah Bancroft (H. H.) ae set ( te ) Tahlewah Ellis (R.) es. peas Tahlewah Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- PEAY » SR os son (G. M.) e.. pascriee Pee Tinné Campbell (J.) pace Bei AC IA EY Tlatskenai Ellis (R.) Apache Dugan (T.B.) ae é A Mii F Rees, Radaanatin S.) Vlatskenai uller (F.) rom i aff ie MK. é | Ugalenzen Dall (W. H.) Bee aines (i. BE.) Umpkwa Duflot de Mofras (E.) Apache Haldeman (S. 5.) | cle es Umpkwa Miiller (F.) Apache Miiller (F.) = < r. ¢ Umpkwa Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- Apache Pimentel (F.) gon (Ge M.) te (W feet i ee Apache Tolmie re F.) and Daw- | Tinehotana Dall (W. H.) oh meta sea a — Wailakki Bancroft (H. H.) oni Giang ee | Wailakki Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- D ALASS1Cal. s G.M. Chippewyan Ellis (R.) | oe ted % Chippewyan Haines (E. M.) | Nuwheh kukwadhud Jesus Christ . . . Chippewyan James (E.) Tukudh. See McDonald (R.) 0. O'Brian (—). A Vocabulary of Fort ; O'Brian (—)— Continued. Simpson Dog-Rib, by Mr. O'Brian, of | the Hudson’s Bay Company. In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi- tion. vol. 2, p. 398, London, 1851, 8°. | Contains about 75 words. Reprinted in the later editions of the same work; see Richardson (J.) Vocabulary of the language of a tribe dwelling near the sources of the River of the Mountains, and known to the voyagers by the name of ‘‘ Mauvais Monde,” and of the Dog-rib dialect, drawn up by Mr. O’Brian, of the Hud- son’s Bay Company’s service. In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe- dition, vol. 2, pp. 399-400, London, 1851, 8°. Contains about 50 words in each dialect. Ochikthud Palliser (Capt. John). 76 O'Brian (—) — Continued. teprinted in the later editions of the same work; see Richardson (,J.) ettunetle [Tukudh]. | See McDonald (R.) Orozco y Berra (Manuel). Geografia de las lenguas | y | carta etnografica | de México | precedidas de un ensayo de clasificacion de las mismas lenguas | y de apuntes para las inmigraciones de las tribus | por el lic. | Manuel Orozco y Berra | [Five lines quotation] | [De- sign. | | México | imprenta de J. M. Andrade y F. Escalante | [CJalle de Tiburcio num. 19 | 1864 Haif-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. vii-xiv, halt-title (primera parte) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-887, index pp. 889-392, map, folio. Chapter viii, Familia apache 6 yavipai, pp. 40-41, chapter xii, Familia apache, p.59, refers both to the Athapasean and Yuman.—Chapter xxv, Apaches, pp. 368-387, is a general discussion on refers to the Yuman.— Section viii of the geographic distribution of these peoples and includes the Tontos, Chiricaguis, Gilenios, Mimbrenos, Faraones, Mescaleros, Llaneros, Lipanes, Navajés, Chemegne [Shoshonean], Yuta [Shoshonean], Mueca Oraive [Shosho- nean], and the Toboso (‘‘lengua perdida”’). Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenwum, Boston Public, Brinton, British Museum, Con- gress, Eames, Watkinson. lee Exploration.— British North America. | The | journals, detailed reports, and observations | rel- ative to | the exploration, | by captain Palliser, | of | that portion of British North America, | which, | in latitude, lies between the British boundary line and the | height of land or watershed of the northern | or frozen ocean respec- | tively, | and | in longitude, between the western shore of lake Superior and | the Pacific ocean, | During the Years Cae? 1857, 1858, 1859, and 1860. | Presented to both Houses of Parliament by Command of Her Majesty, | 19th May 1865. | [English arms. ] | London: | printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, | print- ers to the queen’s most excellent maj- | esty. | For her majesty’s stationery of- fice, | 1863. | (Price 3s, 6d. ) BIBLIOGRAPHY | | | | | | | | Our Forest Palmer (Dr. Edward). OF THE Children. | Vol. 1, No. 1. Shingwauk Home. February, 1887 [-Vol. IV. No.6. September, 1890]. Edited by Rev. E. F. Wilson and published monthly at the Shingwauk Home, Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario; sm. 4°. No.10 of vol. 1 is a “Christmas number.” In 1888 a ‘Summer number”’ appeared, no. 4 of vol. 2; also a ‘“Christmas number,” ‘‘no. 10” of yol! 2) although the next issue is numbered 10 also. These special issues are larger than the regular ones, and illustrated. The regular issues con- sisted of 2 ll.or 4 pp.each until no. 3 of vol. 3 (for June, 1889), when the periodical was made a 16-page illustrated monthly. The first seven numbers of vol. 1 were in size about 6 by 9 inches and were unpaged; with no.8 the size was increased to about 8 by 10 inches, and the pages numbered, each issue being paged inde- pendently (1-4) until the beginning of vol. 2, from which a single pagination continues (excepting nos. 4 and 10) to no.1 of vol. 3 (pp. 1-48), the next no. being paged 5-8, No.3 of vol. 3 (June, 1889) begins a new series and a new and con- tinuous pagination (pp. 1-256), each issue since then having 16 pp. 4°, and being provided with a cover. The last issue—that for September, 1890—says: ‘‘As has already been announced, this is the last issue of ‘Our Forest Children.’ Next month, October, will appear the first num- ber of the ‘Canadian Indian.’ [q.v.] Reeve (W. D.), The Chipewyan Indians, vol, 2, pp. 6-7. Wilson (E.F.), The Sarsee Indians, vol. 3, pp. 97-102. — The Navajo Indians, vol. 3, pp. 113-117. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. Palliser (J.) — Continued. Printed cover as above, title as above (omitting the price) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-325, colophon 1 p. folio. Sullivan (J. W.), Vocabularies of the North- west Indians, pp. 207-216. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Geological Survey. Priced by Dufossé, Paris, 1887, no, 24911, 12 fr. Packard (Robert Lawrence). Terms of re- lationship used by the Navajo Indians. Manuscript, 4 leaves, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Navajo Reservation, New Mexico, in 1881, This manuscript has been corrected and supple- mented by Dr. Washington Matthews, Fort Wingate, N. Mex. Vocabulary of the Pinella and Ariva Apache language. Manuseript; 5 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. It bears the Smithsonian Institution receipt stamp of Dee. 24, 1867. ATHAPASCAN . Palmer (E.) — Continned, Contains the 180 words adopted by the Smith- sonian Institution as a standard vocabulary. Arranged four columns to the page, two of English and two of Apache. There is a copy of this vocabulary in the same library, made by its compiler; 6 unnum- bered leaves, folio, written on one side only. Peau de Liévre: Dictionary See Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Grammatic comments Miller (1.) Grammatic treatise Petitot (E.F.S. J.) Legends Petitot (EF. F.S.J.) Relationships Morgan (L. H.) Text Promissiones. Vocabulary Kennicott (R.) Vocabulary Petitot (E. F. 8. J.) Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) Words Charencey (C. F. H.G.) Words Petitot (EB. F.S. J.) _ [Perrault (Chi Grigg Ovide).] L. J. C.-& Ba - ad M. J. | Priéres, | Cantiques | et Cate- chisme | en | langue Montagnaise ou Chipeweyan. | [One line sylabic char- acters.] | [Oblate seal.] | Montreal: | Imprimerie de Louis Per- rault. | 1857. ©) Title verso approbation of | Alexandre, Eveé- que de St. Boniface, O. M.T. 1 1. text pp. 3-144, 18°. Prayers, etc., pp. 3-46.—Syllabary, p. 47.— Cantiques (22), pp.49-92.—Catechism. pp.93-144. Title from Dr. J.H. Trumbull from copy in his possession. Referring to the note under the next succeeding title, descriptive of the addi- tion of pp. 145-180, he says: ‘‘ My copy is in the original binding, fresh and unused, and is evidently complete as issued.” | i. J. C. & M. J. | Prieres, | can- tiqueset catechisme | en langue | Mon- tagnaise ou Chipeweyan. | [One line syllabic characters.] | [Oblate seal.] | Montréal: | imprimerie de Louis Per- rault et compagnie. | 1865. Title verso approbation of f Alexandre Evyéque de St. Boniface, O. M.T.1 1. ‘‘ quelques notes"’ signed Chs. Ovide Perrault pp. i-xi, text in syllabic characters with French head- ings in italics pp. 3-174, table des cantiques (alternate lines Montagnais in syllabic charac- tersand French in italics) pp. 175-179, 18°. Sig- natures alternately in twelves and sixes. See the fac-simile of the syllabary, p. 78. In the preliminary ‘notes’ the author in- cludes a letter, ‘‘A Messieurs les Redacteurs du Pays,” which contains the alphabet [sylla- _bary], p. iv, and an ‘‘exemple” of the charac- ters with transliteration and translation into French, p.v. Also a ‘‘ Lettre de Monseigneur Faraud, Evéque d’Anemour, 4 Chs. O. Per- rault, Eer., Avocat de Montréal,” pp. vii-x, giving examples and explanations of the syl- labic characters ‘‘que nous employons pour les langues sauvages.” LANGUAGES. rai Perrault (C. O.) —Continued. Prayers, pp. 1-17.—Way of the cross, pp. 18- 40.—Alphabet [syNabary], p.41.—Hymns (nos. 1-38), pp. 43-117.—Catéchisme, pp. 119-174. Copies seen: Eames, O'Callaghan, Pilling, Shea. The copies of this work belonging to Mr. Wilberforce Eames and myself differ from the other two. They lack the six preliminary leaves paged i-xi; and following page 179 are pages 145-180 (signatures 9 in twelve and 10 in six). Page 145 is headed *‘ Explications de quelques Images propres aA linstruction des Montagnais,”’ embracing hymns nos. 1-13 in syllabie characters, with headings in French, in italics. These copies are in the original bind- ” ing and seem to be as issued from the press. It is probable that the copies of this kind are of the earlier issue. The first shect is com- plete ; the title-leaf is connected with leaf paged 23-24; the second leaf with leaf paged 21-22, &c. The Explications appear to have been printed as asupplement to the edition of 1857. The copies left over were bound up with the edition of 1865. Subsequently, 1 presume, the six leaves containing the quelques notes were inserted and the book issued without the Paplications. A similar copy was priced by Dufossé in De- cember, 1889 (no. 36739), 10 fr.; and another in June, 1890 (no. £0911), at the same figure. Petitot (Pére Emile Fortuné Stanislas Joseph). Etude sur la nation monta- gnaise par le R. P. Petitot de la Con- grégation des Oblats de Marie Imma- culée. In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 1, pp. 129- 216; vol. 2, pp. 1-64, Lyon, 1868-1869, folio. (Pilling.) List of names of divisions of the Athapascan family, with English signification, vol. 1, p. 136.— Langue montagnaise (general discussion), pp. 159-160.—List of words showing affinities in various Athapascan languages, pp. 215-216.— Names of the months in Loucheux, Peau de Liévre, and Montagnais, vol. 2, p. 48.—Many Athapascan words, phrases, and sentences passim. Issued separately : Paris, A. Hennuyer et fils, Paris, 1868, 63 pp. 12°. (*) — Déné Dindjies. In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte- rendu, premiére session, vol. 2, pp. 13-37, Nancy et Paris, 1875, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.) Comparisonof Déné-Dindjie terms with those of various other languages, pp. 13-15.—Com- parative table Navajo, Déné (different dialects), and Dindjie, pp. 20-21. Outils en pierre et en os du Mac- Kenzie (cercle polaire arctique). In Matériaux pour Vhistoire primitive et naturelle de Vhomme, pp. 388-405, Toulouse, 1875, 8°. (Pilling.) Contains a number of Chippewyan and Eski- mauan names of implements passim. 78 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Ly tha | the | thi Ly dha} dhe! ahi Ci tta | Ut tte |} ti C: tthal(Y tthe |) tthi (CT tea | dU tee | 7) td FAC-SIMILE OF THE SYLLABARY FROM PERRAULT’'S MONTAGNAIS PRAYER-BOOK OF 1865. ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 79 Petitot (E.F.S. J.) — Continued. -— Dictionnaire | de la | langue Dene- Dindjié | dialectes | Montagnais ou Chippéwayan, Peaux de Liévre et Loucheux | renfermant en outre | un grand nombre de termes propres a sept autres dialectes de la méme langue | précédé | @une monographie des Dene- Dindjié | Vune grammaire et de ta- bleaux synoptiques des conjugaisons | par | le R. P. KE. Petitot | Missionnaire- Oblat de Marie Immaculée, Officier WAcadémie, Membre correspondant de VAcadémie de Nancy, | de la Société WAnthropologie et Membre honoraire de la Société de Philologie de Paris. | [Two lines quotation.] | [Design.] | Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | libraire des sociétés Asiatiques de Paris, de Caleutta, de New-Haven (Btats-Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) | de l’Keole des langues Orientales vivantes, de la Société philologique, etc. | 28, rue Bonaparte, 28 | Maisonneuve, quai Voltaire, 15 | San Francisco, A.-L. Ban- croft and Ce, | 1876 Cover title as above, omitting the design, and with the addition of five lines at the be- ginning (Bibliothéque | de | linguistique et d@ethnographie américaines | Publiéepar Alph. L. Pinart | Volume IJ), half-title verso notes 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp.vii-ix, avant-propos pp. xi-xviii, monographie des Déné-Dindjié pp. xix-xxvi, essai sur lorigine des Deéné- Dindjié pp. xxvii-xlv, abreviations p. [xlvil], précis de grammaire comparée des trois princi- paux dialectes Déné-Dindjié pp. xlvii-lxxxv, errata pp. Ixxxvii-lxxxviii, text pp. 1-367, colo- phon p. [368], 5 folded tables, 4°. Comparative grammar of the Montagnais, Peaux-de-liévre, and Loucheux, pp. xlvii- Ixxxv.—Dictionary of the Déné-Dindjié in four columns, French, Montagnais, Peaux-de-liévre, and Loucheux, arranged alphabetically by French words, pp. 1-367.—Tableau général des verbes Montagnais, folded table no. 1.—Suite des conjugaisons des verbes Montagnais, folded table no. 2.—Tableau général des verbes Peaux de Liévre, folded table no. [3].— Tableau gé- néral des verbes Loucheux, folded table no. 1 (4].—Verbes Loucheux a désinences irrégu- liéres, folded table no. 2 [5]. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Congress, Pilling, Wellesley. Fifty copies were issued ‘‘ sur papier de Hol- lande extra,” at 175 fr.; 150 copies ‘‘ sur papier fort,” at 125 fr.; and 150 copies ‘sur papier ordi- naire,” for the use of the Mackenzie mission. _— Monographie | des | Dend-Dindjic | 34 par | le r. p. E. Petitot | Missionnaire- Oblat de Marie-Immaculée, Officier Petitot (KE. F.S. J.) — Continued, VAcadémie, | Membre correspondant de VAcadémie de Nancy, | de la Société VAnthropologie | et Membre honoraire de la Société de Philologie et dEth- nographie de Paris. | Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | li- braire de lasociété Asiatique de Paris, | de Vécole des langues orientales vi- vyantes et des sociétés Asiatiques de Caleutta, | de New-Haven (Btats- Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) | 28, rue Bonaparte, 28 | 1876 Cover title as above, half-title verso printer 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-109, list of publications 1 1. 8°. General discussion on language, pp. 1-6.— General discussion of the Athapascan lan- guages (pp. 7-22) ineludes a short comparative vocabulary, French, Latin, Montagnais, Peaux de Liévre, and Loucheux, p. 16.—A comparative vocabulary of the Nabajo, Déné (de divers dia- lectes) and Dindjié, p. 22. — Comparative vocabulary of the Wakish (Tétes-Plates) and Yukultas (Tétes-Longues), p. 104.—Compara- tive vocabulary of the languages of the Haidas (Kollouches, Iles Charlottes), Tonguas (IKol- louches, Alaska), Yukultas (Tétes-Longues, Colombie britannique), Wakish (Tétes-Plates, Oregon), Dnainé (Atnans, Alaska), Dindjié (Mackenzie), and Déné (Territoire du No.-O.), p. 105.—Also seattered phrases and terms with significations. Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Pilling. Six légendes américaines identifiées a Vhistoire de Moise et du peuple hébreu. In Les Missions Catholiques, vol.10, pp.476-624, vol. 11, pp. 1-160, Lyon, 1878-'79, folio. (Pilling.) A legend from each of the following peoples: Chippewyan, Peaux de Lievre, Loucheux, Sixi- caques ou Pieds-noirs, Chaktas, Tzendales, in all of which native words occur passim. De Vorigine asiatique des Indiens de Amérique arctique. Par le R. P. Emile Petitot, O. M. I. Missionnaire au Mackenzie, officier d’Académie, etc. In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 12, pp. 529- 611, Lyon, 1879, folio. (Pilling, Wellesley.) Many Athapascan terms passim. De Vorigine asiatique des Indiens de VAmérique aretique. In Société Philologique, Actes, vol. 12, pp. 39- 76, Alengon, 1883, 8°. Une version de la legende nationale de la femme au metal . . . chez les Denes (par- allel columns French and Deéné), pp. 41-46. —— On the Athabasca District of the Canadian North-west Territory. By the Rey. Emile Petitot. In Royal Geog. Soc. Proc. vol. 5, pp. 633-655, London, 1883, 8°. (Pilling.) Contains a number of geographic, tribal, and personal names, se 80 Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued, De la formation du langage; mots formés par le redoublement de racines hétérogénes, quoique de signification synonyme, c’est-a-dire par réitération copulatiye. In Association frangaise pour lavancement des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen, 1883), pp. 697-701, Paris, 1884, 8°. Survey, Pilling.) Contains examples in a number of North American languages, among them the Déné Atnan, and Dindjié. (Geological La femme au serpent. Déné Chippewayans. In Mélusine, Revue de Mythologie, littéra- ture populaire, traditions et usages, vol. 2, no. 1, columns 19-21, 1884, 4°. (Gatschet.) The legend is first given in French, with the “Texte original du conte chippewayan” fol- lowing. On the Athapasca district of the Canadian North-west Territory. By the Rey. Emile Petitot. In Montreal Nat. Hist. Soc. Record of Nat. Hist. and Geology, pp. 27-53, Montreal, 1884, 4°. Contains numerous names of rivers, lakes, ete., in Chippewyan. Reprinted with the same title in: Montreal Nat. Hist. Soe. Canadian Record of Science, vol: 1, pp. 27-52, Montreal, 1884, 8°. This latter magazine took the place of the Record of Natural History and Geology above mentioned, only one number of that serial hav- ing been issued. Légende des Paris, April 5, Paralléle des coutwmes et des croy- ances de la famille Caraibo-Esquimaude avec celles des peuples Altaiques et Puniques. In Association frangaise pour lavancement des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen, 1883), pp. 686-697, Paris, 1884, 8°. (Geological Survey, Pilling.) A number of Déné words with French mean- ings passim. Vocabulaire Mélanges américains. piéganiw. Deuxiéme dialecte des Nin- nax ou Pieds-Noirs. Recueilli par Emile F. 8. Petitot. In Société Philologique, Actes, vol. 14, pp. 170-198, Alengon, 1885, 8°. Petit vocabulaire Sarcis, pp. 195-198. Traditions indiennes | du | Canada nord-ouest | par | Emile Petitot |ancien missionnaire | [Design] | Paris | Maisonneuve freres et Ch. Leclere | 25, quai Voltaire, 2[5] | 1886 | Tous droits réservés Colophon: Achevé @imprimer le 19 Aoftt 1886 | par G. Jacob imprimeur a Orléans | pour BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Petitot (E. F.8. J.) — Continued. Maisonneuve fréres | et Charles Leclere | li- braires éditeurs | 4 Paris Half-title of the series (Les | littératures po- pulaires | tome xxiii) verso blank 1 1.title of the series verso blank 1 1. half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. i-xvii, remarque p. [xviii], text pp. 1-507, index et concordance pp. 909-514, table des matiéres pp. 515-521, ouvrages du méme auteur 1 1. colophon verso blank 1 1. list of the series verso blank 1 1. 16°. Forms vol. 23 of ‘‘ Les littératures populaires de toutes les nations.” Deuxiéme partie, Légendes et traditions des Dindjié ou Loucheux (pp. 13-102), besides many terms passim, contains: Texte et traduc- tion littérale de la premiére légende [inter linear], pp. 95-100.—Héros et divinités des Dindjié, pp. 101-102. Troisiéme partie, Légendes et traditions des Déné Peaux-de-Liévre (pp. 103-306), besides many terms passim, includes: Texte et traduc- tion littérale [interlinear of a legend], pp. 302- 303.—Liste des héros, des divinités et des monstres Peaux-de-Liévre, pp. 304-3806. Quatriéme partie, Légendes et traditions des Duné, Flancs-de-Chiens et Esclaves (pp. 307- 344), besides native terms passim, contains: Texte et traduction littérale de la premiére légende, pp. 341-343.—Héros et divinités des Flanes-de-chiens, p. 344. Cinquiéme partie, Légendes des Déné Tchippewayan (pp. 345-442), besides many native words passim, includes: Texte et tra- duction littGrale de la premiére légende, pp. 437-440.—Heéros et divinités des Déné Tchippe- wayan, pp. 441-442. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Powell. The original texts of these traditions, with literal translations, were subsequently pub- lished as follows: — Traditions indiennes | du | Canada nord-ouest | Textes originaux & tra- duction littérale | par| Emile Petitot | Ancien Missionnaire, Officier d’Acadé- mie, Membre de la | Société de Philolo- gie, etc. | [Two lines quotation] | Alencon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp. et Lith. | Place d’Armes, 5. | 1888 In Société Philologique, Actes, vols. 16 & 17 (half-title 1 1. title as above 1 1.) pp. 169-614, Alencon, 1888, 8°. (Eames, Wellesley.) The whole work is in double columns, French and the native language. Deuxiéme partie, Traditions (1-10) des Dindjié ou Loucheux (Bas-Mackenzie, Ander- son et Montagnes-Rocheuses), pp. 175-253. Troisiéme partie, Traditions (1-43) des Déné Peaux-de-Liévre, pp. 255-414.—Observances et superstitions (1-17), pp. 415-447.—Contes et notions physiques (1-16), pp. 448-463. Quatriéme partie, Traditions (1-9) des Duné des Flanes-de-chiens, pp. 465-503. ATHAPASCAN Petitot (Kk. F.S. J.) — Continued. Cinquiéme partie, Traditions (1-17) des Dene Tehippewayans, pp. 505-588. Issued separately, also, as follows: Traditions indiennes | du | Canada nord-ouest | Textes originaux & tra- duction littérale | par | Emile Petitot, | Ancien Missionnaire, Officier d’Aca- démie, Membre dela | Société de Philo- logie, ete. | [Two lines quotation] | Alengon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp. et Lith | Place d’Armes, 5. | 1887 Cover title: Emile Petitot | indiennes | du | Canada nord-onest | (1862-1882) | Textes originaux & traduction littérale | [Two lines quotation] | Alengon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Dnp. et Lith. | Place d’ Armes, 5. | 1888 Cover title as above, half-title verso print- exs 1 1. title as above verso ‘ Extrait du bulle- tin” ete. 1]. introduction pp. i-vi, | blank 1. text pp. 1-439, table des chapitres pp. 441-446, colo- phon verso blank 1 1. 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, pp. 7--85, 87-246, 247-279, 280-295, 297-335, 337-420. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Gatschet, Pilling. The original manuscript of this work has title as follows: —— 1862-1866 | Textes originaux et | traductions Litterales | des | Traditions et Legendes | des | habitans du nord- ouest | du Canada | recueillies et tra- duites | par | Emile Fortune Stanislas Joseph | Petitot | Ancien [&c. two lines] Manuscript, pp. 1-321, folio, in the library of the Comte de Charencey, Paris, France, under whose auspices the work was published. Traditions — En route | pour |la mer glaciale | par | Emile Petitot | Ancien mission- | naire, Officier d Académie, | Lauréat des Sociétés de géographie de Paris et de Londres, | Membre de Sociétés savantes. | Ouvrage accom- pagné de gravures (apres les dessins de auteur. | [Two lines quotation. ] | Paris | Letouzey et Ané, éditeurs | 17, rue du Vieux-Colombier | [1888] | Tous droits réservés. Cover title as above, half-title verso list of works by the same author 1 1. portrait 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso errata 1 1. introduction pp. 1-3, text pp. 5-394, list of engravings 1 p. 12°. A few Tchippewayan, Iroquois, and other terms and expressions passim. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling. — La femme aux métaux, légende na- tionale des Danites. ATH 6 plusieurs | LANGUAGES. 81 Petitot (E.'S. J.) — Continued. Meaux, 1888, Marguerith-Dupré, impr. (*) 24 pp. 12°. Title from the same author's Autour du grand lac des Bsclaves. —— Quinze ans | sous Je | cerele polaire | Mackenzie, Anderson, Youkon | par | Emile Petitot | Ancien Missionnaire, Officier d’Académie, | Lauréat des Sociétés de Géographie de Londres et de Paris, | Membre de plusieurs Sociétés savantes. | Ouvrage accompagné de 18 gravures de H. Blanchard | et dune carte @Erhard | Vaprés les dessins de Vauteur | [Two quotation] | [Design ] | Paris | E. Dentu, éditeur | libraire dle la Société des gens de lettres | 3, Place de Valois, Palais-royal | 1889 | (Tous droits réservés. ) lines Cover title differing somewhat from above, half-title list of the author 1 1. continuation of list verso frontis- piece 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. introduetion pp. xi-xvi, contents pp. Xvii-xxi, list of illustrations verso blank 11. text pp. 1-822, errata verso blank 11. map, 12°, verso works by same Names of the sixteen seasons, or divisions of the year, in the Peau-de-Liévre language. p. 87.—Names of the fifteen lunar months in the Peau-de-Liévre language, p. 88.—Specimen of Dindjié songs, with translation, p. 187.— Words, sentences, and names of geographic features in Esaquimaux, Dindjié, and Peau-de- Liévre or Deéné, passim, especially on pp. 15, 19, 34, 169, 180, 188, 189, 213. Copies seen: Bureanof Ethnology, Gatschet, Pilling. —— Accord | des | mythologies | dans la | cosmogonie des Danites arctiques | par | Emile Petitot, Prétre | ex-mission- naire et explorateur arctique | [Five lines quotation] | [Device] | Paris | Emile Bouillon, éditeur | 67, rue Richelieu, 67 | 1890 Printed cover nearly like above, half-title verso works by the same author 1 1. title as above verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduetion pp. i-xiii, text pp. 1-452, notes pp. 453-462, authors cited pp. 463-468, index pp. 469-488, table of contents pp. 489-490, errata and omissa pp. 491-493, 12°. Many Déné-Dindjié words passim.—Cosmo- gonic table of the Mexicans, p. 460. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Gatschet, Pilling. —— Origine Asiatique | des Esquimaux | Nouvelle Etude ethnographique | Par Emile Petitot | Ex-Missionnaire et 82 Petitot (KE. F.S. J.) — Continued. Explorateur arctique, Curé de Mareuil- les-Meaux (S.-et-M.) | [Two lines quo- tation] | [Vignette] | Rouen | imprimerie de Espérance Cagniard | Rues Jeanne-Dare, 88, et des Basnage, 5 | 1890. Cover title as above, title as above (verso “Extrait du Bulletin de la Société normande de Géographie”’) 11. text pp. 3-33, sm. 4°. On pp. 25-33 are given tables of words show- ing similarities between the words of various languages of the Old and New World. Among the North American languages a number of examples are given from the Dindjié, Peau- de-Liévre, Ingalik, Slave, Tehippewyan, and Apache. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling. — Autour du grand lac | des Esclaves | par | Emile Petitot | ancien mission- naire et explorateur arctique | Ouvrage accompagné de gravures et d’une carte par auteur | [Two lines quotation] | [Design] | Paris | Nouvelle librairie parisienne | Albert Savine, éditeur | 12, rue des Pyramides, 12 | 1891 | Tous droits ré- servés. Cover title: KBmile Petitot | Autour | du grand lac | des | Esclaves | Ouvrage accom- pagné de gravures et d'une carte par l’auteur | [Two lines quotation] | [Design] | Paris | Nouvelle librairie parisienne | Albert Savine, éditeur | 12, rue des Pyramides, 12 | Tous droits réservés. Cover title, ouvrages d’ Emile Petitot pp. i-iv, errata pp. v-vi, half-title verso portrait of the author 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. xi-xiii, text pp. 1-358, notes pp. 359-364, table des matiéres pp. 365-369, tables des gravures verso blank 11. map, 12°. Les Tchippewayans (pp. 1-180), besides many native terms passim, contains, on pp. 97-111, a general account of the Athapascan and their divisions.—Les Flanes-de-chiens, pp. 183-314, contains many native terms passim. — Les Esclayves, pp. 315-358, includes many native terms passim.—Nomenclature des peuplades Danites, pp. 360-363. Copies seen: Pilling. — Comparative vocabulary of several Athapascan languages. Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded at Fort Good Hope, McKenzie River, in the summer of 1865. Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no. 170) of 211 words. The first page is headed Famille Montagnaise ou Déné (Chippewaya- nanok des Crees); 3° Nation: Eselaves—Tribu des Peaux de Liévre, The blank pages are BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE | Petitot (E. F.S. J.) — Continued. ruled in four columns, headed respectively “demi-tribu des Kat’a-gottiné (fleave MeKen- zie)”; ‘‘demi-tribu des Yeta-gottiné (mon- tagnes-rocheuses)’’; ‘‘demi-tribu des Katcho- gottiné (limite des bois au N. E. de Good- Hope)”; ‘‘demi-tribu des Nnéa-gottiné (limite des bois au 8. E. de Anderson)”. The schedule in the first column is completely filled, there are scarcely any words in the see- ond, the third is one-fourth filled, and in the fourth about three-fourths of the words are given. Notes on the Montagnais or Chippe- wayans. By Father Petitot. Manuscript, 3 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Received at the Smithsonian Institution, Oct. 11, 1865. This material, which is in French, opens on the first page with an account of the Monta- gnais, their habitat, and division into nations and tribes. The second and third pages con- tain a short vocabulary of words (pére, mére, enfant, ete.) with pronominal prefixes. — Comparative vocabulary of several Déné languages. Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded at Fort Norman-Franklins, Great Bear Lake, Jan. 11, 1869. Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no. 170) of 211 words, to whicha score of words have been added by Father Petitot. The blank pages of the form have been ruled in four columns, headed respectively : Déné (homo) Chippayananok (des_ Crees), Chippewyans (des Anglais), Montagnais (des Frangais); Déné (homo) Kkayttchane othné (des Chippewyan), Hare Indians (des Anglais), Peaux de Liévre (des Frangais) ; Dindjié (homo) Déhkewi (des Peaux de Liévre), Kutchin (de Richardson), Loucheux (des Frangais) ; Innok (sing.) Innoit (plur. homo) Wiyaskimew (des Crees), Otzelna, Ennahke (des Dénés), Hoskys (des Anglais), Esquimaux (des Frangais). [Manuscripts in the Athapascan languages. | e) In response to a request for a list, with de- tailed deseription, of his unpublished manu- scripts, Father Petitot wrote me from Mareuil- les-Meaux, France, April 24, 1889: My linguistic manuscripts still in my hands are as follows: A Déné (Peau-de Liévre)—French vocabulary, not comprising verbs. This I had not time to finish while at the mission. A work on the Déné (Peau-de-Liévre) roots, in alphabetic order. A work on the formation of language by jux- taposition of roots synonymous but heteroge- neous. This subject I treated casually at the Rouen meeting of the French Association for the Advancement of Science, Aug. 23, 1883. A book of prayers for the use of the Indians among whom I worked. It comprises Catholi¢ ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 83 Petitot (i. F.8. J.) — Continued. prayers in Esquimauand Déné (Peau-de-Liévre) by myself; Dindjié by R. P. Seguin; Dens ([chippewyan), by Archbishop Taché; and Dané castor by KR. P. J. Clut, now bishop of Erindel. An Esquimau Tchiglit catechism. I was obliged to leave at my last residence, St. Raphael, Saskatchewan, 75 leagues north of It. Pitt, several manuscripts by myself, among them the following : A complete course of instructions and ser- mons in the Déné Peau-de-Liévre, and many instructions in Dénée Techippewyan. A copy, written by myself, of the abridgment of the bible in Déné Tehippewyan, by Mer. Faraud, vicar apostolic of Mackenzie. — Chants indiens du Canada | Nord- Ouest | recueillis, classés et notés par | Emile Petitot | prétre missionnaire au Mackenzie | de 1862 4 1882. | Offert 4 la Smithsonian Institution | avec les hommages respectueux | de auteur | Emile Petitot ptre | curé de Mareuil- les-Meanx | (S. & M.) | 1889. Manuscript, 7 by 11 inches in size; title as above verso table 1 1. songs with musical notes pp. 1-16; in the library of the compiler of this bibliography. Cree songs, p. 1.—Déné Tchippewayan songs, pp. 2-3.—Déné Esclave songs, pp. 3-5.—Duné Flanes-de-Chien songs, pp. 6-7.—Déné Peau-de- Liéyre songs, pp. 7-10.— Dindjié or Loucheux songs, pp. 11-15.—Esquimaux Tchiglit songs, pp. 15-16. Emile Fortuné Stanislas Joseph Petitot was born, December 3, 1838, at Grancey-le-Chatean, department of Cote-@’Or, Burgundy, France. His studies were pursued at Marseilles, first at the Institution St. Louis, and later at the higherseminary of Marseilles, which he entered in 1857. He was made deacon at Grenoble, and priest at Marseilles March 15, 1862. A few days thereafter he went to England and sailed for America. At Montreal he found Mon- seigneur Taché, bishop of St. Boniface, with whom he set out for the Northwest, where he was continuously engaged in missionary work among the Indians and Eskimos until 1874, when he returned to France to supervise the publication of some of his works on linguisties and geography. In 1876 he returned to the Petroff (Ivan). Pilling (James Constantine). missions and spent another period of nearly six | years in the Northwest. In 1882 he onee more returned to his native country, where he has | since remained. the curacy of Mareuil, near Meaux, which he still retains. The many years he spent in the inhospitable Northwest were busy and eventful ones, and afforded an opportunity for geo- In 1886 he was appointed to | graphic, linguistic, and ethnologie observations | and studies such as few have enjoyed. He was the first missionary to visit Great Bear Lake, which he did for the first time in 1866, He went Petitot (H. I". 8. J.) — Continued. on foot from Good Hope to Providdnce twice, and made many tours in winter of forty or fifty days’ length on snowshoes. He was the first missionary to the Eskimos of the Northwest, having visited them in 1865, at the mouth of the Anderson, again in 1868 at the mouth of the Mackenzie, and in 1870 and again in 1877 at Fort McPherson on Peel River. In 1870 his travels extended into Alaska. In 1878 illness caused him to return south. He went on foot to Athabaska, whence he passed to the Saskat- In 1879 he established the mission of St. Raphael, at Angling Lake, for the Chippewyans of that region; there he remained until his final departure for France im January, 1882. For an account of his linguistic work among chewan in a bark. the Eskimauan and Algonquian tribes, see the bibliographies of those families. See Staffel (V.) and Petroff (I. ) Pilling: This word following a title or within pa- rentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to is in the possession of the compiler of this bibliography. Smithson- ian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J.W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- uted only to collaborators) | Washington | Government printing office | 1885 Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W. Powell p. iii, preface pp.v—viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of li- braries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- xxxviii, listof fac-similes pp. xxxix—xl, text pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of the sheet only. —— Some queer American characters. By James C. Pilling. In the Analostan Magazine, vol. 1, pp. 58-67, Washington, 1891, 4°. Contains an account of the various lhiero- glyphs, alphabets, and syllabaries in use among the Indians, with a number of fac-similes, among them one (reduced) of the title-page of Father Morice’s Dene primer. Pimentel (Francisco). Cuadro descrip- tivo y comparativo | de las | lenguas indigenas de México | por | D. Fran- cisco Pimentel | socio de numero | de la Sociedad Mexicana de geografia af 84 Pimentel (F.) — Continued. estadistica. | [Two lines quotation. ] | Tomo primero[-segundo].|[ Design. ] | México | imprenta de Andrade y Escalante | calle de Tiburcio numero 19. | 1862[-1865]. 2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp.v-—lii, half-titles versos blank 2 Il. text pp. 5-539, index verso blank 1 1.; half-title verso works ‘‘del mismo autor” 1 1. title verso blank 11. advertencia pp. v—vi, half- title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-427, note verso blank 1 1. index verso blank 11. 8°. Lord’s prayer in the Lipan (los Apaches son una nacion barbara que recorren las provincias del Norte de Mexico), vol. 2, p. 251. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenaeum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Watkinson. Cuadro descriptivo y comparativo | de las | lenguas indigenas de México, | o tratado de filologia mexicana, | por | Francisco Pimentel | miembro de varias | sociedades cientificas y literarias de México, | Europa y Estados Unidos de America. | (Segunda edicion unica com- pleta.) | Tomo Primero[-Tercero]. | México. | Tipografia de Isidoro Epstein | Calle de Nuevo-Mexico N°. 6. | 1874-1875]. 3 vols.: printed cover nearly as above, half- title verso notices 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. prologo pp. iii-xvi, text pp. 1-422, erratas verso blank 1 1. indice pp. 425-426, printed notices on back cover; printed cover, half-title verso ‘‘obras del mismo autor” 1 1. title (1875) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-468, erratas verso blank 1 1. indice pp. 471-472, notice on back cover; printed cover, half-title verso ‘‘ obras del mismo autor ’”’ 11. title (1875) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-565, erratas pp. 567-568, indice pp. 569-570, copyright notice verso blank 1 1. notice on back cover, 8°. ; El Apache, vol. 3, pp. 483-524, contains a general account of the Apache languages and dialects, including a comparative vocabulary in Spanish, Apache, and Othomi (pp. 486-488), a vocabulary of the Apache Mexicano with Spanish definitions (pp. 512-514), the Apache numerals 1-2000 (pp. 515-516), a comparison of forty words in eight Apache dialects, viz, Apache norte-americano, Apache mexicano, Mimbreno (Copper mine), Pinaleno, Navajé, Xicarilka (Faraon), Lipan, and Mescalero (pp. 516-521), and the Lord’s prayer in Lipan (p. 522). Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. Pinaleno Apache. Pinart (Alphonse L.) Alph. Pinart | Sur | les Atnahs| Extrait de la Revue de Philologie et d’Ethnographie, n° 2. | Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | libraire des sociétés Asiatiques de See Apache. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF Pino (Pedro THE Pinart (A. L.) — Continued. Paris, de Caleutta, de New-Haven | (Btats-Unis), de Shanghai (Chine) | 28, rue Bonaparte, 28 | 1875 Cover title as above, no inside title; text pp. 1-8, 8°. The dialect treated is the Atnaxthynné. General remarks, pp. 1-3.—Vocabulary of 275 words and phrases, alphabetically arranged by Atnaxthynné words, pp. 3-8. Copies seen: Pilling. -— Vocabulary of the Atnah lan- guage. @) Manuscript, 90 pp. folio, in possession of its author. Russian and Atnah. Collected at Kadiak in 1872. Mayor may not belorg to the Athapascan family of languages. Some years ago, in response to a request of mine for a list of the manuscript linguistic material collected by him, Mr. Pinart wrote me as follows: “T have collected, during my fifteen years of traveling, vocabularies, texts, songs, etc., gen- eral linguistic materials in the following lan- guages or dialects. It is impossible at present to give you the number of pages, etc., as most of it is to be found among my note-books, and has not been put in shape as yet.” Among the languages mentioned by Mr. Pinart Tlatskenai, Chiracahua Apache, and White Mountain Apache. Bautista). Exposicion | Sucinta y Sencilla | de la Provincias del | Nuevo Mexico: | hecha | por su dipu- tado en Cértes | Don Pedro Baptista Pino, |con arregloa sus instrucciones. | Cadiz: | Imprenta del Estado-Mayor- General. | Ano de 1812. (&) 51 pp. 8°. “Del Nabi joe,’ ten words and phrases, pp. 40-41. Title from the late Dr. J.G. Shea, from copy in his possession. Noticias | historicas y estadisticas | de la antigua provincia del | Nuevo- Mexico, | presentadas por su diputado en cortes | D. Pedro Bautista Pino, | en Cadiz en atio de 1812, | Adicionadas por el Lic. D. Antonio Barreiro en | 1839; y ultimamente anotadas por el Lic. | Don José Agustin de Eseudero, | para la comision de estadistica militar | de la | republica Mexicana. | [Five lines quotation. ] | México. | Imprenta de Lara, calle de la Palma num 4, | 1849. Title verso blank 1 1. dedication pp. i-iv, text pp. 1-98, indice 2 1]. map, sm. 4°. Del Navajoe, pp. 85-86, contains a short vocab- ulary (ten words) with definitions in Spanish. Copies seen; British Museum, Congress, Shea, were the heey A im Per me te eh ee 2) ae —- -. -eF i i i i i i i i ri rl te ale i at '? se Pott (August Friedrich). Die ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 85 Pope (Maj. F.L.) Vocabulary of words from the Siccany language. ‘ Manuscript, pp. 1-13, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1865. Contains about 280 words and phrases, in the handwriting of Dr. Geo. Gibbs. The where- abouts of the original I do not know. On the first page is the following note: “The tribe known as the Siccannies inhabit the tract of country lying to the northwest of Lake Tatla, in British Columbia, and their lan- guage is nearly the same as that spoken by the Connenaghs, or Nahonies, of the Upper Sti- kine.” quinare und vigesimale | Ziihlmethode | bei Volkern aller Welttheile. | Nebst aus- fiihrlicheren Bermerkungen | iiber die Zahiworter Indogermanischen Stammes J und einem Anhange iiber Fingerna- men. | Von | Dr.August Friedrich Pott, | ord. Prof. [&c. four lines. ] | Halle, | C.A. Schwetschke und Sohn, | 1847. Cover title nearly as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. dedi- eatory notice 1 |. preface pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-304, 8°. Many North American languages are repre- sented by numerals, finger names, etc., among them the Chippewyan (from Mackenzie) and Tacoullies (Carrier), p. 66. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, British Museum, Eames, Watkinson. — Doppelung | (Reduplikation, Gemi- nation) |als | eines der wichtigsten Bil- dungsmittel der Sprache, | beleuchtet | aus Sprachen aller Welttheile | durch | Aug. Friedr. Pott, Dr. | Prof. der Allgemeinen Sprachwiss. an der Uniy. au Halle [&c. two lines. | | Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862. Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- tation 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v—vi, text pp. 1-304, list of books on verso of back cover, 8°. Contains examples of reduplication in many North American languages, among them the Athapascan, p.37; Atnah, p. 42; Kenai, pp. 42, 54, 120; Taheuli, pp. 42, 62; Tlatskanai, p. 41, and Umkwa, pp. 37, 42. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames. Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- wissenschaft. In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine Sprachwissenschatt, vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354; vol. 2, pp. 54-115, 209-251; vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275; Supp., pp. 1-193; vol. 4, pp. 67-96; vol. 5, pp. 38-18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large8°, (Bureau of Ethnology.) . Pott (A. F.) — Continued. The literature of American linguisties, vol. 4, pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. Pott’s death, which occurred July 5, 1887. The general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued from the manuscripts which he left, and thatit is to close with the languages of Australia. In the section of American linguistics publications in all the moreimportant stocks of North America are mentioned, with brief characterization. Powell: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the library of Major J. W. Powell, Washington, D.C. Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian lin- guistic families of America north of Mexico. By J. W. Powell In Bureau of ‘Ethnology, Seventh Annual teport, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°. Athapascan family, with a list of synonyms and principal tribes, derivation of the name, habitat, ete., pp. 51-56. Tssned separately as follows: — Indian linguistic families of America | north of Mexico | By | J. W. Powell Extract from the seventh annual report of the Bureauof ethnology [Vignette } Washington | Government printing office | 1891. Cover title as above, noinside title, half-title p. 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Yopies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling, Powell. ——[ Vocabulary ofthe Navajo language. ] Manuscript, 8 ll. folio, written on one side only. Collected at Fort Defiance, New Mexico, in 1870. In possession of its author. Contains about 100 words and the numerals - 1-1000. Powers (Stephen). The northern Cali- fornia Indians. In Overland Monthly, vol. 8, pp. 825-333, 425- 435, 530-539; vol. 9, pp. 155-164, 305-313, 498-507, April-December, 1872. Continued under the title of ‘‘ The California Indians,” no. 7 to no. 13, vol. 10, pp. 322-333, 535-545; vol. 11, pp. 105-116; vol. 12, pp. 21-31, 412-424, 530-540; vol. 13, pp. 542-550. April, June, and August, 1873; Janu- ary, May, June, and December, 1874. San Fran- cisco, 1872-1874, 8°. (Eames.) The first series consists of six articles, scat- tered through whichare a few native terms. Ar- ticle no. iv, vol. 9,pp.155-164,relates to the Hoopa or Hoopaw Indians, and contains, on pp.157-158, some remarks on the Hoopa language, a speci- men of its vocabulary, and outlines of grammar. —— Vocabularies of the Wailakki and Hupa languages. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, written on Preces post 86 Powers (S.) — Continued. of Ethnology. Each of these vocabularies contains the 211 words adopted by the Smithsonian Institution on one of its later blanks as a standard vocabulary. Prayer book: Beaver See Bompas (W. C.) Beaver Garrioch (A. C.) Deéné Morice (A. G.) Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas (W. C.) Montagnais Legoff (L.) Montagnais Perrault (C. 0.) Slave Kirkby (W. W.) Slave Lessons. Slave Reeve (W. D.) Tukudh McDonald (R.) Prayers: Seaver See Bompas (W.C.) Chippewyan J3ompas (W.C.) Chippewyan Tuttle (C. R.) Déné Morice (A. G.) Dog Rib Bompas (W. ©.) Navajo Matthews (W.) privatam [Dené]. See Morice (A. G.) Prichard (James Cowles). Researches | into the | physical history | of | man- kind. | By | James Cowles Prichard, M.D. F.R.S. M.R.I.A. | correspond- ing member [&c. three lines.] | Third edition. | Vol. I[-V]. | London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper, | Paternoster row; | and J. and A. Arch, | Cornhill. | 1836[-1847]. 5 vols. 8°. The words ‘‘ Third edition,’ which are contained on the titles of vols. 1-4 (dated respectively 1836, 1837, 1841, 1844), are not on the title of vol. 5. Vol. 3 was originally issued witha title numbered ‘ Vol. I1I.—Part I.’ This title was afterward canceled, and a new one (num- bered ‘ Vol. III.”) substituted in its place. Vol. 1 was reissued with a new title containing the words ‘Fourth edition” and bearing the im- print ‘London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper, | Paternoster row. | 1841.” (Astor) ; and again “Fourth edition. | Vol. I. | London: | Houlston and Stoneman, | 65, Paternoster row. | 1851.” (Congress.) According to Sabin’s Dictionary (no. 65477, note), vol. 2 also appeared in a ‘“Pourth edition,’ with the latter imprint. These several issues differ only in the insertion of new titles in the places of the original titles. Of the Languages of the Nations inhabiting the Western Coast of North America (pp. 438- 441) contains on p. 440 a short comparative vocabulary of the Esquimaux, Kinai, and Ugal- jachmutzi. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum, Congress, Eames. The earlier editions, London, 1813, 8°, and London, 1826, 2 vols., 8°, contain no Athapascan material. | Priéres, cantiques et one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau Promissiones BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE vatechisme en langue montagnaise. See Perrault (C. 0.) Primer: Beaver See Bompas (W.C.) Chippewyan Bompas (W.C.) Déné Morice (A. G.) Dog Rib Bompas (W.C.) Tinné Bompas (W.C.) Tukudh 3ompas (W.C.) Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. Marg. M. Alacoque. | Napwé- kakwadhet Jesukri dakay Mareuerite | Marie Alacoque pat kudjozji, tehau- tinkeet | chidzji — ttset kwendjat kudjidhizji. [Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper. 1890. | A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as above and containing twelve ‘ Promises of Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the Loucheux language, on the verso of which is a colored picture of the sacred heart, with in- scription in English below. siékinidhen Mr. Kemper has published the same ‘‘ prom- ises’’ on similar cards in many languages. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. Marg. M. Alacoque. | Na‘ett- sekagower Jesukri dekayé Mareuerite | Marie Alacoque pa kudezi; ménik*é sedzéé | ttsen kudezi. [Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper. 1890. ] A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as above and containing twelve ‘‘ Promises of Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the Peau de Liévre language, on the verso of which is a colored picture of the sacred heart with inscription in Latin below. Mr. Kemper has published the same ‘‘ prom- ises”’ on similar cards in many languages. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. sokéyéniwenh kupa domini nostri [Mon- tagnais]. See Legoff (L.) Proper names: Apache See Catlin (G.) Apache Cremony (J. C.) Apache White (J. B.) Athapascan Catlin (G.) Athapascan Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Dog Rib Catlin (G.) Chippewyan Catlin (G.) Navajo Catlin (G.) Navajo Matthews (W.) Navajo Smithsonian. Taculli Anderson (A. C.) Umpkwa Stanley (J. M.) Psalm book: Tukudh See McDonald (R,) Quaritch (Bernard). — Catalogue | of books on the Radloff (Leopold). ATHAPASCAN Q. Quaritch (B.) — Continued. Quaritch: This word following a title or included within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the bookstore of Bernard Quaritch, London, Eng. A general | cata- logue of books, | offered to the public at the affixed prices | by | Bernard Quaritch, | London: | 15 Piceadilly. | 1880. Title verso printers 1 1. preface (dated July, 1880) pp. iii-iv, table of contents pp. v-x, cata- logne pp. 1-2166, general index pp. 2167-2395, 8°. Tncluides the parts issued with the numbers 309 330, from July, 1877, to November, 1879. American languages, pp. 1261-1269, contains titles of a few works containing material relating to the Athapascan languages. Copies seen: Bureanof Ethnology, Congress, Eames. history, geography, | and of | the philology | of | America, Australasia, Asia, Africa. | I. Historical geography, voyages, and | travels. | Il. History, ethnology, and philology | of America. | III. History, topography, and ethnology | of Asia, Polynesia, and Africa. | Offered for Cash at the affixed net prices by | Bernard Quaritch. | London: | 15 Piccadilly, June 1885 to October 1886. | 1886. Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747- 3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on the back: QUARITCH’S | GENERAL | CATALOGUE | PART XII. | VOYAGES | AND | TRAVELS { AMERICANA | AND | ORIENTALIA | LONDON 1886. This volume com- prises nos. 362-364 (June, July, and August, 1885) of the paper-covered series, with the addi- tion of a special title and a general index. American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains R. | Radloff (L.) — Continued. — Mémoires | de | Académie impé- Einige kritische Bemerkungen iiber Hrn. Busehmann’s Behandlung der Kinai-Sprache; von Leopold Radloff. In Académie Imp. des Sciences, Mélanges russes, vol. 3, pp. 364-399, St. Petersburg, 1857, 8°. (Eames.) ‘Lhe grammatical sketch of the Kinai in this | article is extracted from the works of Lisi- ansky, Resanow, Dawydow. and Wrangell. At the end of the article is the note: (Aus dem Bull. hist.-phil., T. xiv, No. 17, 18, 19). LANGUAGES. 87 titles of books relating to the Athapasean lan- guages. The complete ‘ General Catalogue,” of which the above is a part, comprises 15 volumes bound in red cloth, paged consecutively 14066. Haeh volume has its own special tifle and index, with the title of the series and the nmmber of the part lettered on the back. It was originally issned as nos. 332-375 of the paper-covered series, from November, 1880, to August, 1887, at which date the publication was discontinued. Copies seen: Eames. A large paper edition as follows: A general | catalogue of books | of- fered to the public at the affixed prices. | by | Bernard Quaritch | Vol. I[-VT] | London: | 15 Piccadilly, | 1887. 6 vols. royal 8°. An index volume was an- nounced. but it has not yet (Mareh, 1892) ap- peared, American languages, as under the preceding title, vol. 5, pp. 8011-3042. Copies seen: Lenox. This edition was published at 15/. for the set, including the seventh or index volume. —— No.86. London, December, 1887. | A rough list | of | valuable and rare hooks, | comprising | the choicest por- tions of Various Libraries, | and many very cheap works of every class of Lit- erature, | at greatly reduced prices, | offered by | Bernard Quaritch, 15, Pie- eadilly, W. Printed cover (with title: ‘* The miscellane- ous and the musical library of Mr. William Chappell,” ete.), catalogue with heading as above, pp. 1-128, 8°. American languages, pp. 1-18, contains titles of afew works giving information relating to the Athapascan languages. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. riale des sciences de St.-Pétersbourg, VII° série. | Tome XXI, N°8. | Leopold Radloft’s | Wérterbuch der Sprache | herausgegeben | von | A. Schietner. | (Lu le 5 mars 1874.) | St.-Pétersbourg, 1874. | Commission- VAcadémie Impeériale des sciences: | & St.-Pétersbourg: | MM. Eggers et Cr, H. Schmitzdortt, | J. Kinai- naires de Richardson (Sir John). 83 Radloff (L.) — Continued. Issakof et Tcherkessof; | 4 Riga: | M. N. Kymmel; | 4 Odessa: |M. A. E. Kechribardshi; | & Leipzig: | M. Léo- pold Voss. | Prix: 40 Kop.—13 Ner. Cover title as above, title as above verso notices 1 1. preface (by A. Schiefner) pp. i-x, text pp. 1-33, 4°. Brief grammatie sketch, with songs, pp. i- x. — German-Kinai dictionary (double eol- umns), pp. 1-32.—Numerals, 1-1000, pp. 32-33. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Reeve (Archdeacon W. D.) The | lord’s prayer, apostles’ creed, | &c. | in the | Slavi language. ; Compiled | by the rev. W. D. Reeve. | London: | Church missionary house, | Salisbury square, | 1881 Title veyso printers 1 ]. half-title (‘‘ Sylaba- rium’) p. [3] the verso p. [4] giving the sylla- 3ritish Museum, Congress, bary, ‘Syllabarium” in roman characters p. [5], text (alternate pages sylabie and roman characters) pp. 6-11, 16°. Christ’s love (hymn) in syllabic characters, p. 6; same in roman, p.7.—The Lord's prayer, ten commandments in brief, syllabic, p.8; same in roman, p. 9.—The apostles’ creed, and a prayer, syllabic, p.10; same in roman, p. 11. Copies seen: Church Missionary Society, Eames, Pilling. —— The Chipewyan Indians. In Our Forest Children, vol. 2, pp. 6-7, Shing- wauk Home [Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario}, April 1888, 4°. Contains a list of Chipewyan tribes and twenty-nine Chipewyan words and short sen- tences with English meanings. —— See Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.), in the Addenda. The index entries under Bible, page 8, refer- ring to this anthor are incorrect; they should read ‘*Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)” Titles of the works referred to will be found in the Addenda. —— See Hymns. —— See Lessons. Relationships: Apache See Morgan (L. H.) Apache White (J. B.) Athapascan Dorsey (J. 0.) Kutebin Herdesty (W.L.) Louchenx Morgan (L. H.) Navajo Peau de Liévre Packard (R. L.) Morgan (L. H.) Slave Kennicott (R.) Slave Morgan (L. H.) Tukudh MeDonald (R.) Tukudh Morgan (L. H.) Arctic | search- ing expedition: | a | journal of a boat- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Richardson (J.) — Continued. voyage | through Rupert’s land to the Arctie sea, | insearch of | the discovery ships under command of | sir John Franklin. | With an appendix on the physical geography of North America, | Bysir John Richardson,C. B.,F. R.S. | inspector of naval hospitals and fleets, | ete. ete. etc. | In two volumes. | Vol. I{-IT]. | Published by authority. | London: | Longman, Brown, Green, and Longmans. | 1851. 2vols.: frontispiece 1 1. title verso notice and printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-vili, text pp. 1-413 verso printers, eight other plates; frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-vii, text pp. 1-157.appendix pp. 159-402, explanation of plates 1 & 11 pp. 403-416, postscript pp. 417- 426, folded map, 8°. Chap. xii, On the Kutchin or Loucheux, vol. 1, pp. 377418, contains a number of tribal names with English meanings.—Chapter xiii, Of the ’Tinné or Chepewyans, vol. 2, pp. 1-32, contains a number of tribal names with definitions.— Vocabulary of the Chepewyan of Athabasca (about 330 words and phrases collected from Mrs. McPherson), vol. 2, pp. 387-395.—Dog-rib vocabulary (32 words, collected by Sir John Richardson at Ft. Confidence), vol. 2, pp. 395- 396.—Dog-rib vocabulary (60 words collected by an officer of the Hudson Bay Co. at Ft. Simp- son), vol. 2, p. 397. Contains also the following: Lefroy (J. H.), Vocabulary of Chepewyan and Dog-rib words, vol. 2, pp. 400-402. McPherson (M.), Vocabulary of the Chepe- wyan, vol. 2, pp. 382-385. Murray (A. H.), Comparative vocabulary of the Kutehin and Dog-rib, vol. 1, pp. 399-400. —— Vocabulary of the Kutchin of the Yukon, vol. 2, pp. 382-385. O’Brian (—), Vocabulary of Fort Simpson Dog-rib, vol. 2, p. 398. —— Voeabulary of the Mauvais Monde and of the Dog-rib of the River of the Mountain, vol. 2, pp. 897-400. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- neum, British Museum, Congress. Eames, Geo- logieal Survey, Trumbull. Aretic | searching expedition: | a | journal of a boat-voyage through Ru- pert’s | land and the Arctic sea, | in search of the discovery ships under command of | sir John Franklin. | With an appendix on the physical geogra- | phy of North America. | By sir John Richardson, C. B., F. R. 8., | inspector of naval hospitals and fleets, | ete.,ete., ete. | New York: | Harper and brothers, publishers, | 82 Clitf street. | 1852, ~~ ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Richardson (.J.) — Continued. Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-xi, text pp. 13-336, appendix pp. 337-516, advertisements | pp. 1-6, 1-3, 3 unnumbered pp. 8°. Linguistics as in the original edition titled next above, pp. 262-277, 422-443, 501-509. Copies seen: Warvard, Gen. A. W. Greely, Washington, D.C. — Arctic | searching expedition: | a | journal of a boat-voyage through Ru- pert’s | land and the Aretic sea, | in search of the discovery ships under command of | sir John Franklin. | With an appendix on the physical geogra- | phy of North America. | By sir John Richardson, C. B., Ff. R.S.,| inspector of naval hospitals and fleets, | ete., ete., etc. | New York: | Harper and_ brothers, publishers, | 329 & 331 Pearl street, Franklin square. | 1854. (@) 516 pp. 8°. Title from Gen. A. W. Greely. Field's sale catalogue, no. 1971, mentions an edition, New York, Harper & Brothers, 1856, 516 pp. 12°. Rivington (—). Rivington (—). Roehrig (F. L. O.) [A comparative vocabulary of the Chepewyan (accord- ing to R. B. Ross), the Chipewyan (according to Kennicott), the Slave Indians (according to Kennicott), the Hare Indians of Fort Good Hope (according to Kennicott), and the Hare Indians of Great Bear Lake (according to Petitot), with remarks on each by FL. 0. Roehrig. January 15, 1874.] Manuscript, 22 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The vocabularies, 180 words each (copied from manuscripts at that time in the library of the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel columns and occupy 9 leaves. These are fol- lowed by 18 pages of ‘‘ remarks,” each voeab- wary being treated of separately. See Gilbert (—) and [A comparative vocabulary of the languages of the Kutchin tribes, em- bracing the Kut-cha-kut-chin (aceord- ing to Herdesty); the Kut-cha-kut- chin (according to Kennicott’s manu- | script), and the Kut-cha-kut-ehin (from a printed copy of Kennicott), with remarks by F. L.O. Roehrig. January 15, 1874. ] Manuscript, 17 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The three vocabularies, of 180 words each (copied from manuscripts then in the library of the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel 89 Roehrig (I*. L. O.) — Continued. columns, occupy the first 9 leaves, and are fol- lowed by Dr. Roehrig’s remarks, 8 11., in which he treats of each vocabulary separately. —— [A comparative vocabulary of the Nahdwney, or Indians of the mountains northwest of Fort Liard (according to Kennicott), and of the Nehawney of Nehawney River (according to R. Bb. with remarks by F. L. O. February, 1874]. Manuscript, 14 unnumbered pages, 4°, in the Ross), Roehrig. library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The vocabularies, consisting of 180 words each (copied from manuscripts then in the library of the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel columns, followed by a third column headed ‘“‘remarks,”’ which are comparatively Follow- ing these are 5 pages, containing two sets of few in number; they occupy 9 pages. “remarks,” also by Prof. Roehrig, two pages of which refer to the vocabulary of Kennicott and three to that of Ross. ——[A comparative vocabulary of the Taheulli (according to Anderson, in Hale’s exploring expedition) and of the Kenai (from the governor of Rus- sian America), with remarks by F.L. February, 1874. ] Manuscript, 14 unnumbered pages, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The vocabularies (the first of 180 words, the O. Roehrig. second of 60) are in parallel columns and oc- cupy 10 pages. containing two sets of ‘‘ remarks,” These are followed by 4 pages the first three pages relating to the vocabulary of Ander- son and one to that last mentioned in the title. —— [A comparative vocabulary of the Hong-kutchin (with the original spelling of the anonymous vocabulary), the Natsit kutchin (according to R. B. Ross), and another Kutehin dialect (not specified ; according to R. B. Ross), with remarks by F. L. O. Roehrig. August 17, 1874. ] Manuscript, 15 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The vocabularies, 180 werds each (copied from manuseripts then in the library of the Smithsonian Institution), are in parallel col- umns, occupying 9 leaves, followed remarks, by Dr. by the toehrig, each set of words being treated of separately. — [A comparative vocabulary of the Sikani and Beaver Indians, embracing the Si-kan-i (according to R. R. Ross) ; the Si-kan-i (according to F. L. Pope); the Sikani of the mountains south of Fort Liard; and the Beaver Indians of Peace River west of Lake Athabasca 90 Roehrig (F. L. O.) — Continued. (according to Kennicott) ; withremarks by F. L. O. Roehrig. August 20, 1874. ] Manuscript, 16 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. » The vocabularies, 180 words each (copied from manuscripts then in the library of the Smith- sonian Institution), are in parallel columns and occupy 9 leaves; these are followed by 7 leaves containing remarks on each by Dr. Roehrig. While in charge of the philologic collections made by the Smithsonian Institution Dr. Gibbs was accustomed to refer the material relating to the several linguistic families to specialists throughout the country, in order that he might have the benefit of their knowledge of the sub- ject. was called In pursuance of this policy Prof. Roehrig upon for assistance, and the col- lections relating to a number of families in the northwest were sent to him for criticism, among them the Athapascan. The various manuscripts noted above under the head of ‘‘ Remarks”’ are the result of this plan. Rogue River: Vocabulary See Barnhardt (W. I.) Dorsey (J. 0.) Dorsey (J. 0.) Vocabulary Tribal names Rogue River John. See Dorsey (J. 0.) Rooney (Jake). See Dorsey (J. 0.) Ross (Alexander). See Dorsey (J. 0.) Ross (R. B.) Vocabulary of the pure Chepewyan,or language of the Cariboo- eaters and Yellowknives. Manuscript. 6 unnumbered leaves, written on one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded on one of the ‘standard yvocabu- lary” forms of the Smithsonian Institution, con- taining 180 words, equivalents of all of which are given. The manuscript is in the hand- writing of Dr. Geo. Gibbs. — Vocabulary of the Kutcha Kutchin, Yukon River. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Procured from Mr. Herdesty, who had _ resided Indians about ten years. among these Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- tion’s standard vocabulary forms of 180 words, equivalents of nearly all of which are given. The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs. Vocabulary of the Natsit Kutehin (Strong Men) language. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Procured from an Indian who had been several years in the Hudson Bay Company’s service. Recorded on one of the forms of the Smith- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE | Ross (R. B.) — Continued, sonian Institution’s standard vocabulary of 180 words, nearly all the blanks being filled. The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs. Vocabulary of the Nehaunay River. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only. in the library of the Nehaunay of Collected from a mem- ber of one of the tribes residing in the moun- tainous country between the Liard ‘and Mae- kenzie rivers. sureau of Ethnology. Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- tion’s standard vocabulary forms of 180 words, eq uivalents of nearly all of which are given, The manuseript is in the handwriting of Dr. Gibbs. —— Vocabulary of the Si-kan‘-i lan- guage. Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, written on one side only, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms of 180 words, equivalents of allof which are given. — Vocabulary of a dialect of the Tin- néan language. Manuseript. 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only, in the library of the 3ureau of Ethnology. Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- tion’s forms of a standard vocabulary of 180 words, equivalents of nearly all of them being given. ‘The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs. Rost (Reinhold). The | lord’s prayer | In Three Hundred Languages | com- prising the | leading languages and their principal dialects | throughout the world | with the places where spoken | With a preface by Reinhold Rost, "Cj 15E. 5 Wily ees London | Gilbert and Rivington | Linited | St. John’s house, Clerkenwell, E.C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) | Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 11. con- tents 11. text pp. 1-88, 4°. . The Lord’s prayer in a number of American languages, among them the Chippewyan (sylla- bic), p. 14; Chippewyan or Tinne (roman), p. 14; Slavé-Indian (roman), p.75; Slavé-Indian (syl- labic), p.75; Tukudh, p. 84. Copies seen: Kames. —— The | lord’s prayer | In Three Hun- dred the | leading languages and their principal dialects | throughout the world | with the places where spoken | With a pref- ace by Reinhold Rost, | C. I. E., LL.D., Languages | comprising PH. D. | Second edition | London | Gilbert and Rivington | ees eee ae ne ee oS ied ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Rost (R.)— Continued. Limited | St. John’s house, Clerkenwell, K.C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) | Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 Il. con tents 11. text pp. 1-88, 4°. Linguistic contents asunder title next above. Jopies seen: Pilling. | | 91 Ruby (Charles). Vocabulary of the Chiracahna-Apache language. Manuseript, 3 unnumbered leaves, folio, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded, Sept., 1886, with the assistance of Mickey Free, interpre- ter. S. Sabin (Joseph). pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 1. advertise- ments verso blank 1 l.a list of works relating to the science of language ete. pp. 1-16, 8°. Contains a few titles of works relating to the Athapascan languages, p. 6. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. A later edition as follows: title as above, title as above verso — Triibner’s | catalogue | of | dictiona- ries and grammars | of the | Principal Languages and Dialects of the World. | Second edition, | considerably enlarged and revised, with an alphabetical in- dex. | A guide for students and book- sellers. | [Monogram. ] | London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, Ludgate hill. | 1882. Cover title as above, title as above verso list of catalogues 11. notice and preface to the sec- ond edition p. iii, index pp. iv-viii, text pp. 1-168, additions pp. 169-170, Triibner’s Oriental & Linguistic Publications pp. 1-95, 8°. Contains titles of works in American lan- guages (general), p. 3; Athapascan, p. 18; Kinai, p. 94. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. — No. 1[{-12]. January 1874[-May, 1875]. | A catalogue | of | choice, rare, and curious books, | selected from the stock | of | Triibner & Co., | 57 & 59, Ludgate hill, London. {London: Triibner & co. 1874-1875. ] 12 parts: no titles, headings only; catalogue (paged continuously) pp. 1-192, large 8°. This series of catalogues was prepared by Mr. James George Stuart Burges Bohn. See Triibner's American, European, & Oriental Literary Ree- ord, new series, vol. 1, pp. 10-11 (February, 1880). Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer- ica, no. 8, pp. 113-118, including titles under the heading Athapask, p. 115. Copies seen: Eames. Triibner (Nicolas), editor. (H. E.) Mr. Nicolas Triibner was born at Heidel- berg June .17, 1817. On being removed from school, in 1832, as his father was unable to send him toa university, he was placed in the estab- lishment of Mr. Mohr, the university book- seller of his native town. Six or seven years later he entered the house of Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, at Gottingen. In 1840 he moved to Hofiman & Campe’s, at Hamburg, and in 1842 to Wilmann’s, at Frankfort, who had a large foreign trade, especially with England. Here he met the late Mr. William Longman, who offered him a situation in the London house. This he accepted, and accordingly went to England in 1843 as foreign corresponding clerk of Messrs. Longman’s. In 1851 Mr. Triibner See Ludewig started business on his own account, and soon | LANGUAGES. 101 Tribner (N.) — Continued. acquired a widely spread reputation in the liter- ary world by his publications of oriental works. He did much for American bibliography, also for that of Australia, and was elected a member of several learned societies in the United States. He died suddenly March 30, 1884. Trumbull: This word following a title or within parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trum- bull, Hartford, Conn. Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond). On Numerals in American Indian Lan- guages, and the Indian Mode of Count- ing. By J. Hammond Trumbull, of Hartford, Conn. In American Philolog. Ass. Trans. 1874, pp. 41-76, Hartford, 1875, 8°. Examples Chepewyan, Apache. Issued separately, also, as follows: in Navajo, and —— On | numerals | in American Indian languages, | and the | Indian mode of counting. | By J. Hammond Trumbull, LL. D. | (From the Transactions of the Am. Philological Association, 1874.) | Hartford, Conn. | 1875. Half-title on cover, title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 1-36, 8°. Contains numerals, with comments thereon, in many American languages, among them a number of the Athapascan. Copies seen: Brinton, British Eames. Pilling, Powell, Trumbull. Priced by Quaritch, no. 12565, 7s. 6d. Museum, | —— Indian languages of America. In Johnson’s New Universal Cyclopedia, vol. 2, pp. 1155-1161, New York, 1877, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Congress.) A general discussion of the subject, in- cluding comments on the Athapascan family. [ ——] Catalogue | of the | American Li- - brary | of thelate | mr. George Brinley, | of Hartford, Conn. | Part I. | America in general | New France Canada ete. | the British colonies to 1776 | New Eng- land | [-Part IV. | Psalms and hymns music science and art! [&c. ten lines] | Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- wood & Brainard Company | 1878 [-1886 } 4 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. The fifth and last part is said to be in prepara- tion. Indian languages: general treatises, and col- lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, p. 141. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821. 102 Trumbull (J. H.) — Continued. He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to ill health, he was not graduated with his class, his name was enrolled among its members in 1850, and he was given the degree of A.M. He settled in Hartford in 1847, and was assistant secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, and secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in 1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre- sponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected its president in 1868. He has been a trustee of the Watkinson free library of Hartford, and its librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of the Wadsworth athenzum since 1864. Dr. Trum- bull was an original member of the American Philological Association in 1869, and its presi- dent in 1874-1875. He has been a member of the American Oriental Society since 1860 and the American Ethnological Society since 1867, and honorary member of many State historical soci- eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted special attention to the subject of the Indian languages of North America. He has prepared | a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's | Indian Bible, and is probably the only Amer- | ican scholar that is now able to read that work. In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- | guages of North America at Yale, but loss of | health and other labors soon compelled his res- ignation. The degree of LL. D. was conferred on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H. D. in 1887,— Appleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Turner (W. W.) — Continued. Manuscript, 12 unnumbered leaves, written on both sides, folio, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The vocabulary contains 364 English words, equivalents of which are given in whole or in part in the following languages: Tacully or Carrier (from Harmon, p. 403), Tahkali (from Hale, p. 569), Tlatskanai (from Hale, p. 569), Umkwa (from Hale, p. 569), Umpqua (from Tolmie, in Royal Geog. Soe. Journal), Apache (from Bartlett, in Whipple), Pinal Lleno (from Whipple), Jicorilla (from Simpson), Navajo (from Simpson), Navajo (from Eaton. in School- eraft, vol. 4), Hoopah (from Gibbs, in Sehool- craft, vol. 3). See Whipple (A. W.), Ewbank (T.), and Turner (W. W.) William Wadden Turner, philologist, born in London, England, October 23,1810; died in Washington, D. C., November 29, 1859. He came to New York in 1818, and, after a public- school education, was apprenticed to the ear- penter’s trade, but subsequently became a printer. At the age of twenty-six he was master of the French, Latin, German, and Hebrew. Afterward he studied Arabie with Prof. Isaac Nordheimer, and they proposed to write together an Arabic grammar, but, receiving no encouragement, they prepared instead A Crit- ical Grammar of the Hebrew Language (2 vols., New York, 1838) and Chrestomathy : or A Gram- matical Analysis of Selections from the Hebrew Seriptures, with an Exercisein Hebrew Compo- Tukudh: sition (1838); also a Hebrew and Chaldee Con- Bible, New test. See McDonald (R.) cordance to the Old Testament (1842). In order Bible, gospels McDonald (R.) to superintend the printing of these books, Mr. Bible, John i-iii, Bible history Bible passages Bible passages Bible passages Bible passages Bible passages Bible passages Catechism General discussion Hymn book Hymns Lord’s prayer Lord’s prayer Prayer book Primer Psalm book Relationships Relationships Text Words MeDonald (R.) MeDonald (R.) American. Bible Society. Bompas (W.C.) British. Church. Gilbert & Rivington. MeDonald (R.) Bompas (W. C.) MeDonald (R.) MeDonald (R.) Bompas (W.C.) Rost (R.) MeDonald (R.) Bompas (W.C.) MeDonald (R.) McDonald (R.) Morgan (L. H.) MeDonald (R.) Wilson (E. F.) Turner removed to New Haven, as the only sufficient supply of oriental type was to be found there and at Andover. He was engaged in setting the type during the day, and spent his evenings in preparing the manuscript. On the completion of the works, Mr. Turner added to his linguistic attainments a knowledge of Sanskrit and most of the other chief Asiatic lan- guages, and later he turned his attention tothe languages of the North American Indians. He edited a Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Lan- guage of Oregon (1853), and Grammar and Die- tionary of the Yoruba Language (1858), which was issued by the Smithsonian Institution. In 1842 he was elected professor of oriental litera- ture in Union theological seminary, New York city, and he continued in that office until 1852, when he was called to Washington by the com- missioner of patents to take charge of the library of that department. He was a member of the American oriental society and secretary of the National institute for the promotion of Tukudh hymns. See McDonald (R.) Tukudh primer. See Bompas (W.C.) science. Mr. Turner was considered in his day the most skillful proof-reader in the United States. In addition to the literary labors that aa = pie Turner (William Wadden). [Compara have been already mentioned, he translated tive vocabulary of languages of the Athapascan family. ] from the German Friedrich L. G. von Raumer’s America and the American People (New York, a -_ Tuttle (Charles Rh.) Ululuk Inkalik. Umfreville (Edward). ATHAPASCAN Turner (W. W.) —Continued. 1845), and was associated with Dr. ?. J. Kaut- mann in the translation of the twelfth German edition of Ferdinand Mackeldey’s Compendium of Modern Civil Law (London, 1845). He also translated William Latin-German Lexicon for Ethan A. Andrews’s Latin-English Lexicon (New York, 1851). of Am. Biog. Freund's Appleton’'s Cyelop. Our north land: | being a full account of the | Canadian north-west and Hudson’s bay route, | together with | a narrative of the ex- periences of the Hudson’s bay | expedi- tion of 1884, | including | a description of the climate, resources, and the char- acteristics of | the native inhabitants between the 50th parallel | and the Arctic circle. | By Charles R. Tuttle, | Of the Hudson’s Bay Expedition [&e. [se Ugalenzen: Numerals See Dall (W. H.) Tribal names Latham (R. G.) Vocabulary Adelung (J.C.) and Vater (J.S.) Vocabulary Baer (K. E. von). Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) Words Buschmann (J.C. E.) Words Daa (L. K.) See Inkalik. The | present state | of | Hudson’s bay. | Containing a full description of | that settlement, and the adjacent country; | and like- wise of | the fur trade, | with hints for its improvement, &e. &c. | To which are added, | remarks and observations made in the inland | parts, during ¢ residence of near four years; | a speci- men of five Indian languages; and a | journal of a journey from Montreal to | New- | York. | By Edward Umfreville; | eleven years in the service of the Hudson’s bay com- | pany, and four years in the Canada | fur trade. | London: | printed for Charles Stalker, No. 4, Stationers- | court, Ludgate -street. | MDCCXC[1790]. Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 ]. contents pp. i-vii, dedicatory remarks pp. 1-2, prefatory advertisement pp. 3-10, text pp. 11- 128, 133-230, list of books 1 1. plate and two folded tables, 8°. LANGUAGES. LOS Tuttle (C. R.) —Continued. two lines.] | Tlustrated with Maps and Engravings. | Toronto: | C. Blackett Robinson, 5 Jordan street. | L885. Half-title (Our north land) verso blank 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v—vi, con- tents pp. vii-xiv, index to illustrations pp. xv- xvi, text pp. 17-581, appendix pp. 583-589, two maps, 8°. Apostles’ creed in Chippewyan, syllabic characters, p. 131.—List of Tinneh dialects, pp. 300-301.—Chippewyan syllabarium, p. 379. Copies seen: Hames, Pilling. Tututen : Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.) Vocabulary Dorsey (J. 0.) Vocabulary Everette (W. E.) Vocabulary Hubbard (—) Kautz (A. V.) Luey-Fossarieu (M. P. de). Vocabulary Vocabulary Umfreville (E.) — Continued. “A specimen of sundry Indian languages spoken in the inland parts of Hudson's Bay between that coast and the coast of California,” being a vocabulary of 44 words of several American languages, among them the Sussee, on folded sheet facing p. 202. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenwum, Brit- ish Museum, Brown, Congress, Eames, Shea. Priced in Stevens's Nuggets, no. 2722. 7s. 6d. At the Field sale, no. 2407, acopy brought $1.50; at the Squier sale, no. 1446, $1.63. Quaritch, no. 28280, 11. 4s. Priced by Eduard Umfreville | iiber | den ge- genwiirtigen Zustand | der | Hudsons- bay, | der dortigen | Etablissements | und ihres Handels, | nebst | einer Be- schreibung | des Innern von Neu Wal- lis, | und einer | Reise von Montreal nach Neu York. | Aus dem Englischen. | Mit | einer eigenen neuen Charte, einer kurzen Geographie | dieser Linder und mehreren Erliuterungen | herausgege- ben | von | E. A. W. Zimmerman, | Hofrath und Professor in Braun- schweig. | Helmstadt, bey Fleckeisen. 1791. Title verso blank 1 1. introduction preface etc. pp. lii-xxvi, text pp. 1-164, map, 8°. Vocabulary of the Sussee, p. 148. Copies seen: Brown, Harvard. Umpkwa: See Gallatin (A.) Gatschet (A.S.) Hale (H.) Miiller (F.) General discussion General discussion Gentes Grammatic comments 104 Umpkwa— Continued. See Duflot de Mofras (1.) Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) Stanley (J. M.) Anderson (A. C.) Numerals Numerals Proper names Vocabulary Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.} Vocabulary Barnhardt (W. H.) Vocabulary Busehmann (J.C. E.) Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Gatschet (A.S.) Hale (H.) Latham (R. G.) Milhan (J. J.) Vocabulary Voeabulary Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Linguarum totinus orbis | Index | alphabeticus, | quarum | Grammaticae, Lexica, | col- lectiones vocabulorum | recensentur, | patria significatur, historia adum- | bratur | a | Joanne Severino Vatero, | Theol. Doct. et Profess. Bibliothecario Reg., Ord. | S. Wladimiri equite. | Berolini | In officina libraria Nicolai. | MDCCCXV [1815]. Second title: Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, Lexica | und | Wortersammlungen | aller Sprachen der Erde | nach | alphabetischer Ord- nung der Sprachen, | mit einer | gedriingten Uebersicht | des Vaterlandes, der Schicksale | und Verwandtschaft derselben | von | Dr. Johann Severin Vater, | Professor und Biblio- thekar zu Koénigsberg des 8. Wladimir- | Or- dens Ritter. | Berlin | in der Nicolaischen Buchhandlung. | 1815. Latin title verso 1. 1 recto blank, German title recto ]. 2 verso blank, dedication verso blank 1 Jae 1. address to the king 1 1. preface pp. i-ii, to the reader pp. iii-iy, half-title verso blank 11. text pp. 3-259, 8°. Alphabetically arranged by names of languages, double columns, German and Latin. Notices of works in Chepewyan, pp. 42-43. Copies seen: Pilling. A later edition in German as follows: jureau of Ethnology, Eames, Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, Lex- ika | und | Wortersammlungen | aller Sprachen der Erde | von | Johann Se- verin Vater. | Zweite, véllig umegear- beitete Ausgabe | von | B. Jiilg. | Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen Buchhandlung. Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1 Decem- ber 1846) pp. v—-x, titles of general works on the subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged Ve Vater (J.S.) — Continued. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Umpkwa — Continued. Vocabulary See Scouler (J.) Tolmie (W. F.) Turner (W. W.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Whipple (A. W.) Words Daa (L. K.) Words Ellis (R.) Words Pott (A. F.) Words Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) Unakhotana: Numerals See Dall (W. H.) Vocabulary Vocabulary Baneroft (H. H.) Dall (W. H.) by names of languages) pp. 1-450, additions and corrections pp. 451-541, subject index pp. 542- 563, author index pp. 564-592, errata 2 11. 8°. Notices of works in Atnah (Kinn-Indianer), pp. 88,459; Atnaer, p.459; Chepewyan, pp. 63, 473; Tnkiiliichliiaten, pp. 497-498; Kinai (Ugaljaschmutzi), pp. 204, 504; Sussee (Sursee), p. 385; Tacullies, p.389; Umpqua, p. 427. Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Harvard. At the Fischer sale. no. 1710, acopy sold for 1s. Végréville (Pére Valentin Théodore), [Manuscripts relating to the Monta- gnais, Chippewyan Dené lan- guage. | (*) In response to a request for a list of his papers relating to the Athapascan languages, Father Végréville, under date of Apr. 23, 1891, furnished me the following: 1. Monograph on the Dené-Dindjié. graphic notes. or Ethno- Points of resemblance or non- resemblance with the other nations, savage or civilized. 2. Grammar of the Montagnais, Chipweyan, or Dené. ‘This grammar is composed of three parts: The first, after the prolegomena, treats of the noun, the adjective, the verb, ete., and of their diverse accidences; the second gives the syntax; the third, or etymology, treats of the composition and decomposition of words. It serves to abridge the dictionaries consider- ably. The tables of verbs, though much less com- plicated than in the Assinniboine and the Cree, are yet of considerable extent, for two reasons: First, because of the great number of para- digms produced by the union of the personal termination with the preceding affix; and, second, the irregularity of the terminal root in the immense majority of the verbs, which I had to arrange in groups that divide and sub- divide. 3. The Montagnais-French dictionary, con- taining about 18,000 words, out of which one might form more than 100,000 by means of the rules laid down in the grammar, third part. x oe ss! —* ys —> + oo ae jon 8 p= es ayn page «ileal eR a At mally gee” 2s Gyr ob ete © 2 eet, eg ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Végréville (V.T.) — Continued. 4. All the material necessary for the compo- sition of the» French-Montagnais dictionary, whieh will be as large as the preceeding. 5, Several other works: Songs, catechism, instructions, historic epitome of religion. It grieves me to have to say that for the present all my scientifie and literary work is A task serious and more stopped. more 105 | Végréville (V.'T.) — Continued. important is imposed upon me. . . . Tam | the only priest to minister at Fort Saskat- chewan, where I go every fortnight, a dis- tance of 22 miles. On the intervening Sundays | T am needed at Edmonton, where the pastor | understands only English and French, and leaves to my care three-fourths of his congre- gation, who speak Cree. IT am the only mis- sionary who speaks the language of the Assin- niboines, and I am obliged, once or twice each year, to spend some weeks among them, some 40 miles from here. You will not be surprised, therefore, when I tell you that it is nearly two years since I have had any time to devote to my manuscripts, and very little even to my cor- respondence. Father Valentin Théodore Végréville, mis- sionary, Oblate of Mary Tmmaculate, was born at Chatres, Canton of Evron, Department of Mayenne, France, September 17, 1829. He made his studies successively at Evron, Laval, Le Mans. and Marseilles, where he was ordained priest in 1852. west. He commenced to exercise the apostolic ministry in that locality and the environs among the half-breeds and peoples of divers nationalities (1852-1853) and prepared to pene- trate more deeply into the North. During 1853-1857 he gave his attention to the Monta- gnais (Tchipeweyans) and to the Cris (Crees) of TlealaCrosse. The winter of 1857-58 he passed again at St. Boniface. In 1858 he returned to Tle A la Crosse. leaving there in 1860 to found the mission of Lac Caribou, in the midst of the Montagnais, and visiting thence the Crees found farther to the south. Returning south to St. Boniface, he went in 1865 to Lae la Biche, where he ministered to the Indians and mixed populations speaking the Montagnais angl Cree. In1874 and 1875 he served the mission of St. Joachim (Edmonton). In 1875, 1876, and 1877 he gave his attention to the Assimiboines and to the persons speaking Cree and French of Lac Ste. Anne. In 1877 and 1878 he built N. D.de Lourdes (Fort Saskatchewan), and then He had already been made an | O. M. I. religions, when, by way of Havre, New | York, Montreal, Chicago, and St. Paul, he went | to St. Boniface, then capital of all the North- | returned to Lae Ste. Anne (1878-1880). In1ss80he | descended the Saskatschewan River, stopping | at St. Laurent, whence he soon departed to establish suecessively the following missions: St. Eugéne (1880), St. Antoine de Padone (Batoche) (1881), Ste. Anne in the townof Prince Albert (1882), St. Louis de Langevin (1883). The first half of the year 1885 found him going from one of these missions to another according as La od at his presence seemed required in those times of In the month of July, 1885, he ascended again toward Edmonton, and as- sumed charge of the Mission of St. Cliristopher. trouble and war. Numerous visits in the neighborhood of the posts designated above complete the lists of wanderings of thismissionary. He is now sta- tioned at St. Albert, Alberta. Vocabulary: Ahtinné Ahtinné Ahtinné Ahtinné Ahtinné Ahtinné See Allen (IT. T.) jaer (IX. EE. von). Bancroft (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Dall (W. H.) Gallatin (A.) Ahtinné Jéhan (L. F.) Ahtinné Latham (R. G.) Ahtinné Pinart (A. L.) Alhtinné Wrangell (F. von). Apache Allen (H. T.) Apache sancrott (H. HL.) Apache jartlett (J. R.) Apache Bourke (J. G.) Apache Buschmann (J.C. E.) Apache Chapin (G.) Apache Cremony (J.C.) Apache Froebel (J.) Apache Gatschet (A. 5.) Apache Gilbert (G. K.) Apache Henry (C.C.) Apache Higgins (N.S.) Apache Hoftman (W. J.) Apache Loew (0O.) Apache McElroy (P. D.) Apache Palmer (E.) Apache Pimentel (F.) Apache Ruby (C.) Apache Schooleraft (H. R.) Apache Sherwood (W. L.) Apache Simpson (J. H.) Apache Smart (C.) Apache Ten Kate (H. F.C.) Apache Turner (W. W.) Apache Whipple (A. W.) Apache White (J. B.) Apache Wilson (E. F.) Apache Yarrow (H. C.) Athapascan Athapasean. Athapasean sancrott (H. H.) sancrott (H. H.) Bompas (W. C.) Juschmann (J.C. E.) Garrioch (A. C.) Ilowse (J.) Kennicott (R.) Latham (R.G.) M' Lean (J.) Morgan (L. H.) Roehrig (F. L. O.) Adelung (J.C.) and Vater (J.S.) Anderson (A. C.) Salbi(A.) Bancroft (H. H.) jeaver Beaver Jeaver Beaver Beaver Jeaver Beaver Beaver Beaver jeaver Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan Chippewyan 106 BIBLIOGRAPHY ®F THE Vocabulary — Continued. Vocabulary — Continued. Chippewyan See Bompas (W. C.) Kenai See Latham (R. G.) Chippewyan Buschmann (J.C. E.) Kenai Lisiansky (U.) Chippewyan Gallatin (A.) Kenai Prichard (J. C.) Chippewyan Howse (J.) Kenai Roehrig (F. L. O.) Chippewyan Jéhan (L. F.) Kenai Statfeief (V.) and Petroff Chippewyan Kennicott (K.) (1.) Chippewyan Latham (Rk. G.) Kenai Wowodsky (—). Chippewyan Lefroy (J. H.) Koltschane Baer (K. E. von). Chippewyan Chippewyan Mackenzie (A.) M’ Lean (J.) Koltschane Koltschane Jancroft (H. H.) 3uschmann (J.C. EB.) Chippewyan McPherson (H.) Koltschane Latham (R. G.) Chippewyan Reeve (W.D.) Kutehin sancroft (H. H.) Chippewyan Richardson (J.) Kutehin Buschmann (J.C. KE.) Chippewyan Roehrig (F. L. 0.) Kutehin Dall (W. H.) Chippewyan Ross (R. B.) Kutechin Kennicott (R.) Chippewyan Thompson (E.) Kutehin Kutehin. Chippewyan Whipple (A. W.) Kutehin Morgan (L. H.) Chippewyan Wilson (E. F.) Kutchin Murray (A. H.) Coquille Abbott (G. H.) Kutehin Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Coquille Dorsey (J. 0.) Kutehin Roehrig (F. L. 0.) Déné Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Kutechin Ross (R. B.) Dog Rib Bancroft (H. H.) Kutehin Whymper (F.) Dog Rib Dog Rib Dog Rib Dog Rib Dog Rib Busehmann (J.C. E.) Latham (R. G.) Lefroy (J. H.) Morgan (L. H.) Murray (A. H.) Kwalhiokwa Kwalhiokwa Kwalhiokwa Kwalhiokwa Lipan Bancroft (H. H.) 3uschmann (J. C. E.) Hale (H.) Latham (R. G.) Gatschet (A.S.) Dog Rib O'Brian (—). Loucheux Bancroft (H. 3.) Dog Rib Richardson (J.) Loucheux Buschmann (J.C. E.) Dog Rib Whipple (A. W.) Loucheux Isbester (J. A.) Henagi Anderson (A. C.) Loucheux Latham (R. G.) Henagi Hainilton (A.5S.) Montagnais Adam (L.) Hudson Bay Adeling (J.C.) and Vater Nabiltse Anderson (A. C.) (J.5.) Nabiltse Dorsey (J. O.) Hudson Bay Whipple (A. W.) Nabiltse Gibbs (G.) Hupa Anderson (A. C.) Nabiltse Hazen (W. B.) Hupa Azpell (‘T. F.) Nagailer Adelung (J.C.) and Vater Hupa Bancroft (H. H.) (J.S.) Hupa Buschmann (J.C. E.) Nagailer Mackenzie (A.) Hupa Crook (G.) Navajo Arny (W.F.M.) Hupa Curtin (J.) Navajo Bancroft (H. H.) Hupa Gatschet (A.S.) Navajo Beadle (J. H.) Hupa Latham (R. G.) Navajo Buschmann (J.C. E.) Hupa Powers (S.) Navajo Cushing (F. H.) Hupa Turner (W. W.) Navajo Davis (W. W. H.) Hupa Whipple (A. W.) Navajo Domenech (E. H. D.) Inkalik 3ancroft (H. H.) Navajo Eaton (J. H.) Inkalik Buschmann (J.C E.) Navajo Gatschet (A.S.) Inkalik Dall (W. H.) Navajo Loew (O.) Inkalik Schott (W.) Navajo Matthews (W.) Inkalik Zagoskin (L. A.) Navajo Nichols (A.8.) Kaiyuhkhotana Dall (W. H.) Navajo Petitot (E. F.S.J.) Kenai Adelung (J. C.) and Vater Navajo Pino (P. B.) (J.S.) Navajo Powell (J. W.) Kenai 3aer (K. E. von). Navajo Schooleraft (H. R.) Kenai Balbi (A.) Navajo Shaw (J. M.) Kenai 3ancroft (H. H.) Navajo Simpson (J. H.) Kenai Buschmann (J.C. E.) IWavajo Thompson (A. H.) Kenai Dall (W. H.) Navajo Turner (W. W.) Kenai Davidoff (G. 1.) Navajo Whipple (A. W.) Kenai Davidson (G.) Navajo Whipple (W. D.) Kenai De Meulen (E.) Navajo Willard (C. N.) Kenai Gallatin (A.) Navajo Wilson (E. F.) Kenai Jéhan (L. F.) Nehawni Kennicott (R.) Kenai Krusenstern (A. J.von). Nehawni Roehrig (F. L. 0.) ES ee a oo re oi tie bake ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. Vocabulary — Continued. Nehawni See Ross (Rh. B.) Peau de Liévre Kennicott (R.) Peau de Liévre Petitot (EK. F.S. J.) Roehrig (1. L. O.) Barnhardt (W. H.) Dorsey (J. 0.) Peau de Liévre Rogue River Rogue River 107 Vocabulary — Continued. Tinné Tinné Tinné Tinné Tinné Tinné Tlatskenai Tlatskenai Tlatskenai Tlatskenai Tlatskenai ‘Tlatskenai Tlatskenai Tututen Tututen Tututen Tututen Tututen Tututen Ugalenzen Ugalenzen Ugalenzen Ugalenzen Ugalenzen Ugalenzen Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Umpkwa Unakhotana Unakhotana Wailakki Willopah Willopah W. Sikani Buschmann (J.C. E.) Sikani Howse (J.) Sikani Pope (I. L.) Sikani Roehrig (1. L. 0.) Sikani Ross (R. B.) Slave Kennicott (R.) Slave Kirkby (W. W.) Slave Latham (R. G.) Slave Morgan (L. H.) Slave Roehrig (F. L. O.) Sursee Balbi (A.) Sursee Bancroft (H. H.) Sursee Buschmanun (J.C. E.) Sursee Gallatin (A.) Sursee Jéhan (L. F.) Sursee Latham (R. G.) Sursee Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Sursee Sullivan (J. W.) Sursee Umfreville (E.) Sursee Wilson (E. F.) Taculli Anderson (A. C.) Taculli Balbi (A.) Taeulli Bancroft (H. H.) Taculli Buschmann (J. C. E.) Taeculli Gallatin (A.) Taculli Harmon (D. W.) Taeculli Jéhaa (L. F.) Taculli Roehrig (F. L. O.) Taeulli Taculli. Taeculli Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- son (G. M.) Taculli Turner (W. W.) Taculli Whipple (A. W.) Taculli Wilson (E. F.) Tahlewah Crook (G.) Tahlewah Gibbs (G.) Tinné Bompas (W.C.) Tinné Campbell (J.) Tinné Dawson (G. M.) Wailakki: Numerals See Bancroft (H. H.) Numerals Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- son (G. M.) Vocabulary Powers (S.) See Dorsey (J. O.) Watkinson: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of _ the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. Warner (James), sr. Wellesley: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the library of Wellesley college, Wel- lesley, Mass. Wentzel (W.F.) See Dorsey (J. 0.) Pinart (A. L.) Ross (R. B.) Tinné, Tolnie (W. F.) Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- son (G. M.) Anderson (A. C.) Bancrott (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. 1.) Gallatin (A.) Hale (H.) Latham (R.G.) Turner (W. W.) Anderson (A. C.) Dorsey (J.O.) Everette (W. E.) Hubbard (—). Kautz (A. V.) Lucy-Fossarieu (M. P. de). Adelung (J.C.) and Vater (Jase) Baer (K. E. von). 3ancrott (H. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Dall (W. H.) Latham (R. G.) Anderson (A. C.) Bancroft (H. H.) sarnhardt (W. H.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Gallatin (A.) Gatschet (A.S.) Hale (H.) Latham (R. G.) Milhau (J. J.) Scouler (J.) Tolmie (W. F.) Turner (W. W.) Whipple (A. W.) Bancroft (H. H.) Dall (W. H.) Powers (S.) Anderson (A. C.) Gibbs (G.) Letters to the Hon. Roderic McKenzie, 1807-1824. In Masson (L. R.), Les bourgeois de la Com- pagnie du nord-ouest [part 2], pp. 67-153, Que- bee, 1889, sm. 4°. Vocabulary (260 words) of the guage, pp. 97-104. Wheeler (Capt. Seaver lan- George Montague). [Seal.] | Engineer department, U. S. army. | Report | upon | United States Geographical Surveys | westof the one hundredth meridian, | in charge of | capt. Geo. M. Wheeler, | Corps of en- gineers, U.S. army, | under the direc- 108 Wheeler (G. M.) — Continued. tion of | the chief of engineers, U.S. army. | Published by authority of the honorable the Secretary of war, | in accordance with acts of Congress of June 23, 1874, and February 15, 1875. | In seven volumes and one supplement, accompanied by one | topographic and one geologic atlas. | Vol. I1.—Geograph- ical report{[—VII.—Archwology ]. | Washington: | Government printing office. | 1889[1875-1889. ] 7 vols. and supplement to vol. 3, 4°. The dates of the respective volumes are: I, 1889; II, 1877; III, 1875; 111, supplement, 1881; EV, 1877; V,1875; VI, 1878; VII, 1879. Gatschet (A.S.), Appendix. Linguistics, vol. 7, pp. 899-485. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, Geological Survey, National Museum, Pilling, Trumbull. Whipple (Amiel Weeks), Ewbank (T.), and Turner (W. W.) Explorations BIBLIOGRAPHY and surveys for a railroad route from | the Mississippi river to the Pacific ocean. | War department. | Route near | the thirty-fifth parallel, under the com- mand of lieut. A.W. Whipple, | topo- graphical engineers, in 1853 and 1854. | Report | upon’ the Indian tribes, | by | lieut. A. W. Whipple, Thomas Ewbank, esq., and prof. Wm. W. Turner. | Washington, D.C., | 1855. Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 1. illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 7-127, seven plates, 4°. plorations and surveys for a railroad from the Mississippi river to the Pacific ocean,” vol. 3, | White (Dr. John B.) Included in ‘‘ Reports of ex- | of which it forms the third part; it was also | issued separately, without the plates. Chapter V, Vocabularies of North American Languages (collected by A. W. Whipple; elas- sified, with accompanying remarks, by Wm. W. . 5S “ | Turner), pp. 54-103, contains, under the heading | i Apache, parallel vocabularies of the Navajo and Pinal Leno (225 words each, collected by Whipple), pp. 81-83.—Remarks on the vocabu- | laries (by Turner), pp. 83-85. -— Comparative vocabulary of 25 words of Hudson’s Bay (from Dobbs), Chepewyan (from Mackenzie), Dog- Rib (from Richardson), Tacully (from Harmon), Umkwa (from Hale), Hoopah (from Sehool- eraft), Navajo (from Schoolcraft), and Apache (from Bartlett’s manuscript), pp. 84-85. Copies seen: Pilling. : At the sale of Prof. W.W. Turner's library in New York, May, 1860 (nos, 294-296), eight copies of the separate edition were sold. Myx. T. W. Field’s copy (no, 2523) sold in 1875 for $1.75. Amiel Weeks Whipple, soldier, born in Green- wich, Mass., in 1818, died in Washington, D. jureau of Ethnology, Eames, Whipple (Gen. William Denison). OF THE | Whipple (A. W.)— Continued. C., May 7, 1863. He studied at Amherst; was graduated at the U.S. military academy in 1841; was immediately afterward in the hydrographic survey of Patapsco River, and in 1842 in surveying the approaches to New Orleans and the harbor of Portsmouth, N. H. In 1844 he was detailed as assistant astronomer upon the northeastern boundary survey, and in 1845 he was employed in determining the north- engaged ern boundaries of New York, Vermont, and New Hampshire. In 1849 he was appointed assistant astronomer in the Mexican boundary commission, and in 1853 he had charge of the Pacific railroad survey along the 35th parallel. In 1856 he was appointed engineer for the south- ern light-house district and superintendent of the improvement of St. Clair flats in St. Mary’s river. At the opening of the civil war he at once applied for service in the field, and was assigned as chief topographical engineer on the staff of Irvin McDowell.—A ppleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. Gen. Vo- cabulary of the Navajo language by General William D. Whipple, stationed at Fort Defiance, New Mexico. Manuscript, 2 leaves, written on one side only, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- ogy. Contains 40 words only. An appended note says: ‘‘ Transmitted to Geo. Gibbs, from Louisville, Ky., by General Geo. Hl. Thomas, with a letter of transmittal dated Mareh 5, 1868." Vocabulary of the [Coyotero] Apache. In Gatschet(A.S.), Zwolf Sprachen aus dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas, pp. 99-115, Weimar, 1876, 8°. Contains about 400 words. —— Classified list of the prepositions, pronouns, &¢., of the Apache language. Manuscript, 2 wmnunbered leaves, 4°, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. —— Degrees of relationships in the lan- guage of the Apache tribe. Manuscript, 2 unninbered leaves, 4°, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Names of the different Indian tribes in Arizona, and the names by which they are called by the Apaches, Manuscript, 5 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Remarks on the general relations of the Apache language, Manuscript, 7 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Soe te aoe ee ee —— ee ee avs White (J. B.) — Continued. Sentences in Apache, with a classifi- cation of men, women, and children, with the Apache names. a tae he Manuscript, 25 pages, 12°, in the library of the Bureauof Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book. [Vocabulary of the Apache and Tonto language, with notes, by Dr. John B. White. ] Manuseript, pp. 1-110, 12°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book, the first page of which contains an abbreviation of the above title; pp. 2-3 are blank. Notes, p. 4.—Cur- rency in use by the Apaches, p. 5.—Indian wearing apparel, p.5.—Tontoe numerals, p. 6.— Apache numerals, p. 7.— Vocabulary of the 'Ton- toe and Apache, alphabetically arranged by * English words, pp. 8-89.—The Tontoe words are on the outer margins of the versos of the | | leaves, the inner margin containing running notes and comments. The English words are on the left-hand margin of the rectos and the Apache words on the right-hand or outer mar- gin.—Tribal relationships, pp. 90-91.—Imple- ments of war, seasons of the year, p. 92.—Pro- nouns, adverbs, and adjectives, p. 98.—Anat- omy, pp. 94, 96.—Sentences in Apache, pp. 95, 97.—Trees, p. 98.— Animals, pp. 99-102.—'Towns, camps, &¢., pp. 103-104.—Vegetables, p. 105.— Musical instruments, p. 106. These manuscripts were collected by Dr. White while serving as ageney physician at the San Carlos Indian reservation, New Mexico, from October, 1873, until November, 1875. White Mountain Apache. See Apache. Whymper (Frederick). Travel and ad- venture | in the | territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian America—now ceded to the | United States—and in various other | parts of the north Pacific. | By Frederick Whymper. | [Design.] | With map and illustrations. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street. | 1868.| The right of Translation is reserved. : Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printers ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 109 Whymper (I°.) — Continued. Copies seen: Boston Public, British Museum, Congress. At the Field sale, catalogue no, 2539, a copy brought $2.75. | —— Travel and adventure | in the | territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian America—now ceded to the | United States—and in various other | parts of the north Pacific. | By Frederick Whymper. | [Design.] | With map and illustrations. | New York: | Harper & brothers, pub- lishers, | Franklin square. | 1869. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. preface pp. xi-xii, contents pp. Xiii-xviii, list of illustrations p. xix, text pp. 21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and plates, See Linguistics asin London edition, pp. 841-350. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, Powell. Reprinted 1871, pp. xix, 21-353, 8°. The French edition, Paris, 1871, 8°, contains no Athapascan material. (Pilling.) Russian America, or “Alaska”: the Natives of the Youkon River and adja- cent country. By Frederick Whymper, Esq. In Ethnological Soc. of London Trans. vol. 7, pp. 167-185, London, 1869, 8°. Kuteh-a-kutchin vocabulary, compiled by the late Major Kennicott, pp. 183-185. | Willard (Celeste N.) Vocabulary of the Navajo language. Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, folio; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- lected in 1869. Recorded on one of the standard vocabulary forms, no. 170,o0f the Smithsonian Institution, containing 211 English words, equivalents of nearly all of which are given in the Navajo. Willpah: : Vocabulary See Anderson (A. C.) Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) Wilson (Daniel). Prehistoric man | Re- 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii- | ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustrations p. a [xx], text pp. 1-306, appendix pp. 307-331, map, ‘ plates, 8°. Appendix V. Indian dialects of Northern Alaska (late Russian America), pp. 318-328, contains: Co-yukon vocabulary, words from | ‘ the Co-yukon dialect, spoken (with slight vari- 4 ations) on the Yukon River for at least 500 | ‘ miles of its lower and middle course (Ingelete, 7 a variety of same dialect), pp. 320-821. . Kennicott (R.), Kotch-a-kutchin vocabulary, pp. 322-328. | searches into the origin of civilisation | in the old and the new world | By | Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor of history and English literature in Uni- versity college, Toronto; | author of the “Archeology and prehistoric annals of Scotland,” ete. | In two volumes. | Volume I[-II]. | Cambridge: | Macmillan and co., | and 25, Henrietta street, Covent gar- den, | London, | 1862. | (The right of Translation is reserved. ) 110 Wilson (D.) — Continued. —— Prehistoric —— Prehistoric Wilson (Rev. Edward Francis). 2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispaece 1 1. title verso printer 1 ]. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp.vii-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xviii, text pp. 1-488, plan; half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso printer 1 |. contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-475, ap- pendix pp. 478-483, index pp. 485-499, verso advertisement, 8°. Word for ‘‘mother,’’ in several American In- dian languages, including the Tlatskanai, Na- vajo, and Kenay, vol. 1, p. 71. Oopres seen: British Museum, Eames, Watkinsen. Congress, man | Researches into the origin of civilisation | in the old and the new world | By | Daniel Wil- son, LL.D. | professor [&c. two lines. ] | Second edition. | London: | Macmillan and co. | 1865. | (The right of Translation is reserved.) Half-title verso design 1 |. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso printer 1 1. dedication verso blank 11. contents pp. vii-xiii, colored plate 1 1. illus- trations pp. xv-xvi, preface (dated 29th April, 1865) pp. xvii-xviii, preface to the first edition pp. xix-xxvi, half-title verso blank 11. text pp. j-622, index pp. 623-635, 8°. Linguistics as under previous title, p. 59. Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. man | Researches into the Origin of Civilisation | in the Old and the New World | By | Daniel Wil- | son, LL. D., F.R.S. E. | professor [&c. two lines.] | Third edition, revised and enlarged, | with illustrations. | In two volumes. | Vol. I[-II). | London: | Macmillan and Co, 1876. | (The right of Translation is reserved. ) 2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. preface (dated 18th Novem- ber, 1875) pp. vii-viii,contents pp. ix—xiii, illus- trations pp. xiv-xv, text pp. 1-399; half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-ix, illustrations pp- x-xi, text pp. 1-386, index pp. 387-401, works by the same author ete. 11. 8°. Linguistics as under previous titles, vol. 2, p. 373. ; Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Har- vard. The Sarcee Indians. By Rey. E. F. Wilson- In Our Forest Children, vol. 3, no. 9 (new series no. 7), pp. 97-102, Shingwauk Home, On- tario, December, 1889, 4°. Graminatical notes, p. 101.—Vocabulary (112 words and phrases), pp. 101-102. Mr. Wilson acknowledges his indebtedness to Rey. H. W. Gibbon Stocken, Church of Eng- BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Wilson (E. F.) — Coutinued. land missionary to the Sarcees, for information and valuable notes. Report on the Sarcee Indians, by the Rey. E. F. Wilson. In Fourth Report of the committee appointed for the purpose of investigating of the North-Western Tribes of the Dominion of Canada; in British Ass. Ady. Sci. Report of the fifty-eighth meet- ing, pp. 288-255, London, 1889, 8°. Vocabulary (160 words and short sentences), English and Sarcee, pp. 249-252.— Notes on the language, pp. 252-253. Mr. H. Hale, pp. 253-255. The languages . . . Followed by notes by committee report issued separately, without title-page, repaged 1-23. (Kames, Pilling.) {[——] An Indian history. [Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario. 1889.] No title, heading as above, pp. 1-15, 8°. A circular distributed for gathering information, linguistic and ethnologic, regarding any partic- war tribe of Indians. On the first page the author says he is ‘‘trying to collect material with a view to publishing a short popular his- tory of some one hundred or so of the best known Indian tribes, together with a little in- sight into the vocabulary and grammatical structure of each of their languages.” Page 2, pronunciation; pp. 3-7, words and sentences, three columns, the first English, the second ex- amples from various Indian languages, among them the Tukuth, Sarcee, and Apache; the third is left blank for filling in the particular language desired; pp. 7-10, questions concern- ing language, with examples from several lan- guages; pp. 11-14, questions of history; p.15, ‘‘A few particulars about the Indians.” Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. The Navajo Indians. By Rev. E. F. Wilson. In Our Forest Children, vol. 3, no.10 (new series no. 8), pp. 115-117, Shingwauk Home, Ontario, January, 1890, 4°. Grammatical notes, p. 116 —Vocabulary (84 words and phrases), pp. 116-117. A comparative vocabulary. In Canadian Indian, vol. 1 (no. 4), pp. 104-107, Owen Sound, Ontario, January, 1891, 8°. A vocabulary of ten words in about 56 lan- guages, mostly North American, and including the Chipewyan, Takulli, Tukuth, Sarcee, Navajo, and Apache. Rev. Edward Francis Wilson, son of the late Rev. Daniel Wilson, Islington, prebendary of St. Paul’s Cathedral, and grandson of Daniel Wilson, bishop of Caleutta, was born in London December 7, 1844, and at the age of 17 left school and emigrated to Canada for the purpose of lead- ing an agricultural life; soon after his arrival he was led to take an interest in the Indians, and resolved to become a missionary. After two ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 111 Wilson (E. F.) — Continued. | Words — Continued. years of preparation, much of which time was Kenai See Jéhan (L. F.) spent among the Indians, he returned to Eng- | Kenai Latham (R. G.) land, and in December, 1867, was ordained dea- | Kenai Pott (A. F.) con. Shortly thereafter it was arranged that he | Kenai Schomburgk (R. H.) should return to Canada as a missionary to the Kenai Wilson (D.) Ojibway Indians, under the auspices of the Mhureh Missionary Society, which he did in July. 1868. He has labored among the Indians | ever since, building two homes—the Shingwauk — Home, at Sault Ste. Marie, and the Wawanosh Home, two miles from the former—and pre- yaring linguistic works. 5S Bs Wisconsin Historical Society: These words fol- Kutehin Kutehin Lipan Loucheux Loucheux Loucheux Montagnais Navajo Daa (L. K.) Ellis (R.) Bollaert (W.) Daa (L. K.) Gibbs (G.) Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Petitot (EK. F.S.J.) Barreiro (A.) lowing a title or within parentheses after a Navajo Daa (L. K.) note indicate that a copy of the work referred | Navajo Ellis (R.) to has been seen by the compiler in the library | Navajo Gatschet (A. S.) of that institution, Madison, Wis. Navajo Latham (R.) Woodruff (Dr. Charles E.) Dances of Navajo Matthews (W.) the Hupa Indians. By Dr. Charles E. Navajo Tolmie se F.) and Daw- r iP hfe son (G. M.) ee aS. Navajo Wilson (D.) In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 538— 61, Washington, 1892, 8°. (Pilling.) Hupa names of [four] dances, p. 55. Peau de Liévre Peau de Liévre Sikani Charencey (C. F. H. G.) Petitot (E. F. S.J.) Daa (L. K.) Words: Slave Ellis (R.) Ahtinné See Daa (L. K.) Sursee Adelung (J. C. E.) and Ahtinné Ellis (R.) Vater (J.S.) Ahtinné Petitot (E. F.S. J.) Taculli Daa (L. K.) Ahtinné Pott (A. F.) | Taculli Ellis (R.) Ahtinné Schomburgk (R. H.) | Taculli Gatschet (A. S.) Apache Bourke (J. G.) Taculli Latham (R. G.) Apache Daa (L. K.) Taculli Lubbock (J.) Apache Ellis (R.) Taculli Pott (A. F.) Apache Gatschet (A.S.) Taeulli Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- Apache Latham (R. G.) son (G. M.) Apache Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- Tinné Brinton (D. G.) son (G. M.) | Tinné Crane (A.) Apache Wilson (E. F.) | Tinné Gatschet (A. 5.) Athapascan Brinton (D. G.) Tinné Hale (H.) Athapascan Daa (L. K.) Tlatskenai Daa (L. K.) Athapascan Ellis (R.) Tlatskenai Ellis (R.) Athapascan Hearne (S.) Tlatskenai Farrar (F. W.) Athapascan Kovar (E.) Tlatskenai Lubbock (J.) Athapascan Lubbock (J.) Tlatskenai Pott (A. F.) Athapasean Pott (A. F.) Tlatskenai Wilson (D.) Beaver Daa (L. K.) Tukudh Wilson (E. F.) Chippewyan Charencey (C. F. H. G.) Ugalenzen Buschmann (J. C. E.) Chippewyan Ellis (R.) Ugalenzen Daa (L. K.) Chippewyan Latham (R.G.) Umpkwa Daa (L. K.) Chippewyan Leslie (J. P.) Umpkwa Ellis (R.) Chippewyan Schomburgk (R. H.- | Umpkwa Pott (A. F.) Chippewyan Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- | Umpkwa Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- son (G. M.) son (G. M.) Déné Charencey (C. F. H. G.) Dog Rib Daa (L. K.) | Wowodsky (Gov. —). Vocabulary of Dog Rib eS | the [Kenai] language of Cook’s Inlet Dog Rib Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- | Baw son (G. M.) sear Hupa Ellis (R.) | Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on both Hupa Gatschet (A.S.) | sides, inthe library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Hupa Latham (R. G.) | Recorded on a blank form containing 60 Eng- Inkalik Buschmann (J. C. E.) | lish words, equivalents of allof which are given Kenai Buschmann (J.C. E.) | in the Kenai. Kenai Daa (L. K.) | There is in the same library a copy of this Kenai Ellis (R.) | vocabulary, 2 lL. folio, made by Dr. Gibbs, 112 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Wrangell (Admiral Ferdinand von). Ob- servations recueillies par lTAnmiral Wrangell sur les habitants des Cotes Nord-ouest de PAmérique; extraites du russe par M.le prince Emanuel Galitzin. | Wrangell (IF. von)—Continued. In Nouvelles annales des voyages, vol. 1, 1853 (vol. 137 of the collection), pp. 195-221, Paris, n. d. 8°. Short vocabulary of the Mednovskie [Copper Islanders] and the Ougalantsi, p. 199, ee. | BETEHOI (CG. 1.)—Continuea, Xicarilla Apache. See Apache. Yarrow (Dr. Henry Crécy). Vocabulary of the Jicarillia language. In Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon U.5.Geog. | Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 470, Washington, 1879, 4°. Consists of 211 words in the first division and six in the second. Collected at Tierra Amarilla, New Mexico, September, 1874. BATOCKHHD (leur. Jaspenrin AreKchii). [Za- goskin (Lieut. Laurenti Alexie).] Te- mexojwad OnNCH | YaCTH pyCCKUX’b BAaybaiii | Bb Amepukb. | Lponssegenuaa | Jeiivenanroms J. 3arocknabim | BB 1842, 1843 nm 1844 ro- Aax’b.| Cb Mepkaropckol KapTolw rpaBu poBati Horo Ha Mbju.—actb neppaa[-sropaa ]. | Cauntoerepoyprb. | Mevarano Bb runorpaiii Kapja kKpaiia. | 1847[-1848]. Translation: Pedestrian exploration | of parts of the Russian possessions | in America. | Accomplished | by Lieutenant L. Zagoskin | in the years 1842, 1843 and 1844. | With a Mer- | eator’s chart engraved on copper. | Part first {-second]. | St. Petersburg. | Printed in the printing office of Karl Krai. | 1847[-1848}]. 2 vols.: 1 p.1. pp. 1-183; 1 p.1. pp. 1-120, 1-15, 1-45, 8°. Vocabulary of the Inkilik and Inkalit Yugel- mut, vol. 2, appendix, pp. 17-20.—List of vil- lages, with population statistics, vol. 2, appen- dix, pp. 39-41.—List of birds in Koikhpagmiut and Inkilik, vol. 2, appendix, pp. 42-43. Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum. The vocabularies are reprinted in Busch- | mann (J. C. E.), Der athapaskische Sprach- | stamm, pp. 269-312. 3EJEHOM (Cemens Hang) [Zelendi (Semion Iliich)]. Wss.zevesie us qnesanka sciirenanta | Sarockna, BeJeHNarO BL dKCHeEANNIN, CoBep- WeHHO Mb 10 MaTepHky cbBepo-3anaAHoii Avepuku, nravo Bb coopasin P. TL. 0. 82 fAusapa 1847 roqa. (Cocrapaewo A. Wa. C. W. 3ereHbiM, ) Translation: Extract from the diary of Lieutenant Zagoskin, kept during a journey made by him on the mainland of Northwest America. Read before the Russian Geographic Society, January 8, 1847. (Compiled by active member §. I. Zelenot.) In Zapiski (etc.), Journal of the Russian Geographical Society, vol. 2, pp. 185-202, with map, St. Petersburg, 18—? 8°. Collection of words (150) of two Ttynai peo- ple (Inkalik and Inkalit), pp. 177-181. Issued separately also. Only the separate seen. (Yale College.) —— II3preyenie usb ynesiin a aciitenanra Baro- CKMN, BeenHaro Bb oOKcHeAuyin, COneplieR- Holi uMb nO MiTepuKy cbBepo-sanay noit Amepunu. (Cocrapaseno J. U1. CG. W, dereubiw. ) In Russian Geographical Society Journal, vols. 1 and 2 (second edition), pp. 211-266, St. Petersburg, 1849, 8°. Comparative vocabulary in parallel columus, Russian, Inkalik proper, and Inkalit, pp, 246- 249. Auszug aus dem Tagebuche des Lieutenants Sagoskin iiber seine Expe- dition auf dem festen Lande des nord- westlichen Amerikas. In Denkschriften der Russischen Geogra- phischen Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg, Band 1, Weimar, 1849, 8°. (A translation, from the Russian, of vols. 1 and 2 of the Memoirs of the Russian Geographical Society.) (*) Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 359-374. Title from Banecroft’s Native races. Zzehkko enjit gichinchik ['Tukudh]. See McDonald (R.) —_— rw were Apostolides (S.) Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). 4 i é ; ADDENDA. | One Hundred Different Languages. | Compiled by 8. Apostolides. | [Text | from Acts ii. 8, two lines.] | Second | edition. | London: | printed and published by W. M. Watts, | 80, Gray’s-inn road. (1871. ] Title verso notice of entry L 1. index 1 1. half-title verso blank 11. text (printed on one | side only) ll. 17-116, 12°. Lord’s prayer in Chipewyan (syllabic char- | acters), 1. 32. Copies seen: Kames. For title of earlier edition, see page 4 of this bibliography. Allgemeiner | ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas der Vélker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung | von neiinzehn Karten, | auf denen die, um die Mitte des neiinzehnten Jahr- hunderts statt findende geographische Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach- verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie der neiien Welt abgebildet und versinn- licht worden ist. | Kin Versuch | von | D* Heinrich Berghaus. | Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha. | 1852. Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus’ physikalischer Atlas,etc.) verso]. Ll recto blank, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19 maps, folio. I. Die nordischen Volker, 3. Athapascas, treats of the habitat, tribal divisions, speech | relations, etc., of the Sah-issah-deinnihs, Bi- ber-Indianer, Daho-Deinnih, Idtschahtawaht- Deinnih, Kantschu-Deinnihs, Tleingchah- Deinnihs, Tontsawhot-Deinnihs, Tahkali, Nauscud-Deinnihs, Slouacus-Deinnihs and Nogailers, pp. 53-54.—Muap no. 17 is entitled “Ethnographische Karte von Nordamerika,” “Nach Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Cla- vigero, Hervas, Hale, Isbester, &c.” Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. oe [ [ Our lord’s prayer | in | [Bompas (Bishop William Carpenter). } The acts of the apostles. | Translated into the Teni (or Slavé) language | of the Indians of Mackenzie river, | north-west Canada. | By | The right rey. the bishop | of Mackenzie river. | London: | British and foreign bible society. | 1890. Title as above verso ‘‘ The acts of the apos- tles in Teni’’ 11. text (entirely in Teni, roman characters) pp. 3-84, 16°. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. For title of the four gospels in Slavé (roman characters), by this author, see page 10 of this bibliography. ] The epistles [and revelation]. | Translated into the Teni (or Slavé) language | of the Indiansof Mackenzie river, | north-west Canada. | By | The right rev. the bishop | of Mackenzie river. | London: | British and foreign bible society. | 1891. Title as above verso ‘‘ The epistles in Teni’ 1 1. text (entirely in Teni, roman characters) pp. 3-269, colophon p. [270], 16°. Romans, pp. 3-35.—I and II Corinthians, pp. 36-89.—Galatians, pp. 90-101.—Ephesians, pp. 102-112.—Philippians, pp. 1138-120.—Colossians, pp. 121-128.—I and II Thessalonians, pp. 129- 140.—I and IL Timothy, pp. 141-157.—Titus, pp. 158-161.—Philemon, pp. 162-163..-Hebrews, pp. 164-187.—James, pp. 188-196.—I and II Peter, pp. 197-211.—I, II, and III John, pp. 212-224.— Jude, pp. 225-227.—Revelation, pp. 228-269. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. and Reeve (W.D.)] The | gospel of St. Matthew | translated into the | Slave language | for | the Indians of north-west America. | In the Syllabie Character. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- toria street. | 1886. Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syNabic characters) pp. 1-86, 12°. Some copies were issued without the title-page. ’ 113 114 [Bompas (W.C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]— Continued. This gespel and the remaining portion of the translated by Bishop Bompas and transliterated into syllabic char- new testament were acters by Mr. Reeve. Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci- ety, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. { — ] The | gospel of St. Mark | translated into the | Slavé language, | for | Indians of north-west America. | In the Syllabie Character. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- toria street. | 1886. Title verso blank 1 1, half-title (one Jine in syllabic characters and at bottom ‘‘ Gaspel of St. Mark’’) on the verso of which begins the text [p.86] in syllabic characters followed by pp. 87-136, 12°. Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, Pilling, Welles- ley. | — ] The | gospel of St. Luke | translated into the | Slavé language, | for | Indians of north-west America | In the Syllabic Character. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria street. | 1890. Title as above verso printers 1 1. half-title (“The Gospel of St. Luke, in Slavi’’ and one line syllabic characters) verso beginning of text [p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters pp. 2-92, 12°. Copies seen: FKames, Pilling. ] The | gospel of St. John, | translated into the | Slavé language, | for | Indians of north-west America. | In the Sylabic Character. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria street. | 1890. Title as above verso printers 1 1. half-title (‘The Gospel of St.John, in Slavi’’ and one L BIBLIOGRAPHY OF line syllabic characters) verso beginning of text | [p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters pp. 2- 67, 12°. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. —| The | acts of the apostles, | and the epistles [and revelation], | translated into the | Tenni or Slavé language, | for | Indians of Mackenzie river, north-west | Canada, | By the Right Rey. | the bishop of Mackenzie river. | In the Syllabic Character. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria street. | 1891. L THE [Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]— Continued. Title as above verso printers 1 1. text (en- tirely in syllabic characters) pp. 1-374, 12°. Acts, pp. 1-87.—Romans, pp. 88-123.—I and II Corinthians, pp. 124-182.—Galatians, pp. 183- 194.— Ephesians, pp. 195-206.—Philippians, pp. 207-214. — Colossians, pp. 215-222.I[ and II Thessalonians, pp. 223-235.—I and IT Timothy, pp. 236-253.—Titus, pp. 254-258, Philemon, pp. 259-260.— Hebrews, pp. 261-286.—James, pp, 287-296.—1 and II Peter, pp. 297-312.—I, IT, and III John, pp. 315-326. — Jude, pp. 327-829,— Revelation, pp. 330-374. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Erman (Georg Adolph), editor. Archiv | fiir | wissenschaftliche Kunde | von | Russland. | Herausgegeben | von | A, Erman, | Erster[—Fiinfundzwanzigster] Band. | 1841[-1867]. | Mit dreiTafeln. | Berlin, | gedruckt und verlegt von G. Reimer. [n.d.] 25 vols. 8°. Schott (W.), Ueber ethnographische Exgeb- nisse der Sagoskinschen Reise, vol.7, pp. 480- 512. Copies seen: Congress. Hale (Horatio). Language as a test of Mental Capacity. By Horatio Hale, M.A. (Read May 26, 1891.) In Royal Soc. of Canada, Trans.and Proc. vol. 9, pp. 77-112, Montreal, 1892 (?), 4°. A general discussion upon American and Australian languages. The Athapascan family is the most fully treated of the American tongues—the Déné Dindjié, Navajo, Tinné, and Hupa with many examples, comments upon primary roots, grammatic forms, ete. principally from Petitot. Issued separately as follows: Language as a test of mental capac- ity: | being an attempt to demonstrate the | true basis of anthropology. | By Horatio Hale, M. A., F. R.S8.C. | Hon- orary Member [&c. six lines.] | From the transactions of the Royal society of Canada, vol. ix, sec. ii, 1891. [Montreal. Dawson brothers. 1892?] Half-title on cover as above, no inside title, text pp. 77-112, 4°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Pilling, Powell. Klaproth (Heinrich Julius von). See Merian (A. A. von) and Klaproth (H. J. yon), on next page. McDonald (fev. Robert). Mosis | vit ettunettle ttyig | Genesis, Exodus, Le- vitikus. | Genesis ettunettle. | Arch- deacon McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe thleteteitazya. | ATHAPASCAN McDonald (R.)—Continued. London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society. | 1890. Title (verso ‘Archdeacon McDonald's version of Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, in Tukudh)’’ 1 1, text (entirely in Tukudh, roman characters) pp. 3-282, colophon p. [283] verso blank, 16°. Genesis, pp. 3-113.—Exodus, pp. 114-211.— Leviticus, pp. 212-282. Copies seen: Kames, Pilling. — The fourth and fifth books of Moses, called | Numbers, and Deuteronomy. | Moses vit ettunetle ttyig ako | ttank- thut nikendo | Trigwitittittshi ako Deuteronomi kutrahnyoo. | Tukudh ttsha zit thleteteitazya. | By | arch- deacon McDonald, D. D. | London: | printed for the British and foreign bible society | 1891. Title (verso ‘‘Archdeacon Mc Donald's version of Numbers, Deuteronomy, in Tukudh"’) 1 1. text (entirely in Tukudh, roman characters) pp. 3-191, colophon p. [192], 16°. Numbers, pp. 3-103.—Deuteronomy, pp. 104- 191. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Under date of Jan. 28, 1892, Mr. McDonald informs me that he has sent to the British and Foreign Bible Society for publication the books of Joshua, Judges, Ruth, and Samuel J, in Tukudh. ] SyHabary [in Tukudh]. [London: Society for promoting christian knowledge. 1886. ] No title-page, heading only; text pp. 1-3, sq. 16°. For description of this syllabary see pp. 59-60 of this bibliography. Copies seen: Pilling. Maisonneuve (J.) Catalogue | des | livres des fonds | et en nombre | His- toire, Archéologie | Ethnographie et Linguistique de l’Europe | de lAsie 5 | de VAfrique | de VAmérique et de | VOcéanie | [Vignette] | Paris | J. Maisonneuve, libraire-édi- teur | 25, quai Voltaire, 25 | (Ancienne Maison Th. Barrois) | 1892 Cover title as above verso list of grammars, title as above verso note 1 1. text pp. 3-127, back cover verso list of catalogues, 8°. Linguistique générale (including titles of a number of books referring to American lan- guages), pp. 30-44.—Grammaires, Dictionnaires, Textes et Traductions (pp. 45-127) inelude titles of works in Déné Dindjié, p.72; Montagnais, p. 111. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Masson (L.R.) Les | bourgeois | de la Compagnie | du nord-ouest | recits de voyages, lettres et rapports inédits LANGUAGES. 115 Masson (L. R.)—Continued, relatifs | au nord-ouest canadien | Pu- bliés avee une | esquisse historique | et des Annotations | par | L. R, Masson | Premiére Série | [Monogram] | Québec | de Vimprimerie générale A, Coté et Cie | 1889 Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-vi, contents pp. vii-ix, half-title (Récits de voyage, lettres et rapports inédits relatifs au nord-ouest cana- dien) verso blank 11. contents verso blank 11. half-title (Reminiscences by the honorable Roderic McKenzie, being chiefly a synopsis of letters from Sir Alexander Mackenzie) verso blank 11. text pp. 7-66, half-title (Mr. W, F, Wentzel, Letters to the Hon, Roderic McKen- zie, 1807-1824) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 69-153, half-title verso blank 11, text pp. 155-413, errata p. [414], announcement of second series verso blank 11. map, sm. 4°. Wentzel (W. F.), Letters to the Hon. Roderic MeKenzie, pp, 67-153, Copies seen: Major Edmund Mallet, Wash- ington, D.C. [Merian (Baron Andreas Adolf von) and Klaproth (H. J. von).] Triparti- tvm | sev | de analogia lingvarvm li- bellvs [Continvatio I-LIT] | Typis Haykulianis divendente Ca- rolo Beck | Viennae MDCCCXX[- MDCCCXXIII] [1820-1823] 4 vols.: title verso quotation 1 1. prefatory notice verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 1-193, 1 folded leaf of numerals verso blank; Continva- tio I (1821), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 197-314, 1 folded leaf of numerals verso blank ; Continvatio IT (1822), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 317-585, 3 unnumbered pages, one of which is on a folded leaf; Continvatio III (1823), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 589- 807, 1 unnumbered page of numerals, oblong folio. The work is a comparative vocabulary in various languages of words having a similar sound and meaning. Each one of the four vol- umes is arranged under a separate alphabet, and with five columes to a page. The first column, headed Germ., contains words in Ger- man, Dutch, English, Danish, Swedish, ete. ; the second column, headed Slav., contains words in Slavonic, Russian, Polish, Bohemian, ete.; the third column, headed Gal., contains words in Latin, Greek, French, Italian, Span- ish, Welsh, Ivish, Breton, etc.; the fourth col- umn, headed Mixta, contains words in miscel- laneous European, Asiatic, African, American, and Oceanic languages; and the fifth column, headed Notulae, contains explanations. Among the American languages in which examples are given is the Kinai. Copies seen: Eames: . oP 2 ir. . ' 7 » Pr i 5 as » Oe cat re) he ee A : s au Z Ree tp ‘ s = sy a : aa + be ee ae : tN AE Ale eR aac eet re \ ag RY Ree? a ; 5 hs ee sme 4 7 o ae Aedes Rod sere) ale ‘ An eT Gey’ tiial-tak. vf Pe as aaa Peni e - * * ‘ A Oe, on ee So odd err Fines, al ea SMA by ean mere et ere $3 ; a2 e. oe ~ RR anriae Fes ti ie Ae ah : H OH 253 2 hs sbi Rm, hae, Ae ing SMa te ‘ See Sake vos = be 1744 1744 1790 1791 1795 1796 1801 1802 1802 1802 1802 1802 1803 1806-1817 1807 1810-1812 1811 1812 1812 1813 1814 1814 1815 1820 1820-1823 1826 1830 1830 1832 1835 1836 1836-1847 1839 1840 1841 1841 1841 1841-1847 1844 1844 1846 1846 1846 1846 ~ 1846 1847 1847 1847 1847-1848 1848 1848 1848 CHRONOLOGIC Athapascan Chippewyan Sursee Sursee Athapascan Athapasean Various Various Various Various Various Various Various Various Various Kenai Chippewyan Kenai Navajo Kenai Kenai Various Chippewyan Taculii Kenai Various Chippewyan Chippewyan Navajo Taculli Various Kenai Various a Tinné Umpkwa Umpkwa Inkalik Umpkwa Various Athapascan Kenai Taculli Various © Various Athapascan Chippewyan, Tacully Inkalik Inkalik Ahtinné Athapascan Taculli Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Words Words Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabulary Numerals Vocabulary Words Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabularies Bibliography Vocabulary, numerals Words Various Numerals Numerals Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Vocabulary Vocabularies g Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Numerals Vocabularies General discussion Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Various Bibliographic Numerals Vocabulary Vocabulary Words General discussion Vocabulary INDEX. Dobbs (A.) Thompson (E.) Umfreville (E.) Umfreville (E.) Hearne (S.) Hearne (S.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) McKenzie (A.) Adelung (J. C.) and Vater (J. S.) McKenzie (A.) Davidotf (G. I.) Classical. Lisiansky (U.) Pino (P. B.) Krusenstern (A. J. von). Lisiansky (U.) McKenzie (A.) Vater (J. 5S.) Harmon (D. W.) Merian (A. A. von). Balbi (A.) James (E.) James (E.) Bareiro (A.) Taculli. Gallatin (A.) Prichard (J. C.) Baer (K. E. von). James (E.), note. Tolmie (W. F.) Scouler (J.) Tolmie (W. F.) Erman (G. A.) Duflot du Mofras (E.) Latham (R. G.) Scouler (J.) Latham (R. G.) Anderson (A. C.) Hale (H.) Hale (H.) Vater (J. 8.) Pott (A. F.) Zelenoi (S. I.) Zagoskin (L.) Schomburgk (R. H.) Latham (R. G.) Anderson (A. C.), note. 117 118 1848 1849 1849 1849 1849 1849 1850 1850 1850 1850 1850 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851 1851-1857 1852 1852 1852 1852 1852 18538 1853 1853 1853 1853 1854 1854 1854 1854 1854 1854 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1855 1856 1856 1856 1856 1856 1856 1856 1856 1857 1857 1857 1857 1857 1857-1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1859 1859 1859 Various Chippewyan Inkalik Inkalik Inkalik Navajo Chippewyan, Kenai Loucheux Navajo, Apache Various Various Apache Apache Athapascan Chippewyan Chippewyan, Dog Rib Dog Rib Dog Rib Kutchin Kutchin, Dog Rib Various Various Hupa Navajo, Apache Umpkwa Various Various Athapascan Hupa, Tabhlewah Various Various Various Athapascan Midnoosky Navajo Various Various Various Apache Apache Athapascan Tututen Various 2 Athapascan Henagi Umpqua Various Various Various Various Willopah Kenai Montagnais Nabiltse Navajo Various Apache Athapascan Apache Athapascan Coquille Various Athapascan Various Various CHRONOLOGIC Various Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Words Words Vocabulary Vocabularies Comparative vocabularies Vocabularies General discussion Vocabulary Tribal names Vocabulary Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabularies Personal names General discussion Vocabularies Tribal names Vocabularies General discussion Words Words Tribal names Vocabulary Vocabulary, numerals Vocabularies Words Words Vocabulary Vocabulary Comparative vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabularies g Bibliographic Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabulary Gramuiatic treatise Prayer book Vocabulary Vocabulary Words Vocabulary Bibliography Vovabulary Concordance Vocabulary Vocabularies General discussion Vocabularies Vocabularies INDEX. Gauatin (A.) McLean (J.) Schott (W.) Zelenoi (S. I.) Zelenoi (S. I.) Pino (P. B.) Schomburgk (R. H.) Isbester (J. A.) Simpson (J. H.) Latham (R. G.) Howse (J.) Berghaus (H.) Bartlett (J. R.) Latham (R. G.) MePherson (M.) Lefroy (J. H.) O'Brian (—). O'Brian (—). Murray (A. H.) Murray (A. H.) Richardson (J.) Schooleraft (H. R.) sibbs (G.) Simpson (J. H.) Stanley (J. M.) 3erghaus (H.) Richardson (J.) Gallatin (A.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Latham (R. G.) Wrangell (F. von). Eaton (J. H.) Richardson (J.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Latham (R. G.) Bartlett (J. R.) Henry (C.C.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Kautz (A. V.) Whipple (A. W.) James (E.), note. Triibner & Co. Hamilton (A. S.) Milhau (J. J.) Latham (R. G.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Richardson (J.), note. Gibbs (G.) Radloff (L.) Perrault (C. O.) Hazen (W. B.) Davis (W. H.) Daa (L. K.) Froebel (J.), note. Ludewig (H. E.) Froebel (J.) Anderson (A. C.) Abbott (G. H.) Jéhan (L. F.) Buschmann (J. C. E.) Barnhardt (W. H.) Buschmann (J. ©. E.) —— ee ee eee ee ~ —<— —_-- ro CHINOOKAN Durieu (P.) — Continued. New-York, Cincinnati, and Chicago: | Benziger brothers, | printers to the holy apostolic see. [n,d.] [Kamloops, BeG@a: L393.) Frontispiece verso l. 1 recto blank, title verso letter from Pope Leo XII and copyright notice (1869) 1 1.“ approbations to Bishop Gilmour's bible history’? 3 Il. preface pp. v-vi, text in English, pp. 7-56+, in Chinook Jargon, steno- graphic characters, pp. 1-604-,12°. In course of publication, and will contain 330 pages in English and about 400 in Jargon. This work is an outcome of the enterprise of Father Le Jeune, of Kamloops, British Columbia, who has transcribed Bishop Durieu’s | Jargon translation of the bible history into the characters adopted by him for teaching his Indian charges to fead and write; adeseription | of which will be found in this bibliography under his name. His notes have been repro- | duced by him, with the aid of the mimeograph, on sheets the size of those in the edition of the | bible history in English, with which they have been interleaved. When finished it will be issued in an edition of 200, that number of copies of the edition in English having been furnished by Father St. Onge, of Troy, N.Y. Copies seen: Pilling. IT have in my library a copy of each of two editions of a ‘‘Chinook Vocabulary,” with imprints of 1886 and 1892, on the respective title pages of which appears the name of Bishop Durieu. These I had placed under his name, LANGUAGES. 1) qn Durieu (P.) — Continued. but in a letter to me, dated November 16, 1892, the bishop modestly disclaims their authorship, which he attributes to Father J. M. R. Le Jeune, under whose name, with accompa nying explanations, they will be found in this bibliography. — See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) The Rev. A. G. Morice, of Stuart's Lake Mission, British Columbia, a famous Athapas- can scholar, has kindly furnished me the fol- lowing brief account of this writer : ‘‘ Bishop Paul Durieu was born at St. Pal-de- Mous, in the diocese of Puy, France, December 3,1830. After his course in classies he entered the novitiate of the Oblates at Notre Dame de VOzier in 1847 and made his religious profession in 1849. He was ordained priest at Marseilles Mareh 11, 1854, and was sent to the missions of Oregon, where he occupied, successively, sev- eral posts. Atthe breaking out of the rebellion among the Yakama Indians he had to leave tor the Jesuit mission at Spokane. He was after- wards sent to Victoria and then to Okanagan by his superiors. Thence he was sent as superior of the Fort Rupert Mission, and when, on June 2, 1875, he was appointed coadjutor bishop of British Columbia, he was superior of St. Charles House at New Westminster. On June 3, 1890, he succeeded Bishop L. Y. D’ Her- bainez as vicar apostolic of British Columbia. ‘ Heunderstands but does not speak several Salishan dialects, and he is especially noted for his unqualified suecess among the Indians.” E. Eames: This word following a title or within par- entheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Eames, New York City. Eells: This word following a title or within paren- theses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been loaned to me for collation and description by Rey. Myron Eells, Union City, Mason County, Washington. Bells (fev. Myron). How languages grow. In the Advance, March 25 and July 8, 1875, Chicago, 1875, folio. (*) Relates wholly to the Chinook Jargon. Title and note furnished by Mr. Eells. — Art. IV. The Twana Indians of the Skokomish reservation. By Rey. M. Eells, Missionary among these Indians. In Hayden (F. V.), Bulletin, vol. 3, pp. 57-114, Washington, 1877, 8°. (Pilling.) Four songs in Chinook, with English trans- lations, pp. 91-92. Issued separately with cover title as follows: — Author’s edition. | Department of the interior. | United States geological Eells (M.) — Continued. and geographical survey. | F. V. Hay- den, U. 8S. Geologist-in-Charge. | The | Twana Indians | of the | Skokomish reservation in Washington territory. | By | rev. M. Eells, | missionary among these Indians. | Extracted from the bulletin of the survey, Vol. III, No. 1. | Washington, April 9, 1877. Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 57-114, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, National Museum, Pilling. — Hymns | in the | Chinook Jargon Language | compiled by | rev. M. Eels[sic], | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | [ Vignette. | | Portland, Oregon: | publishing house of Geo. H. Himes. | 1878. Cover title as above, title as above verso copyright notice (1878) 1 1. note p. 3, text pp. 4— 30, sq. 16°. Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- lish headings, and English translation), pp. 4— 26 Bells (M.)— Continued. 27.—Lord’s prayer, with interlinear English translation, pp. 28-29.—Blessing before meals, with interlinear English translation, p. 30. Copies seen: Dunbar, Eames, Georgetown, Pill‘ng, Wellesley. — Hymns | inthe | Chinook+Jargon+ Language | compiled by | rev. M. Eells | Missionary of the American Mis- sionary Association. Second edition. | Revised and Enlarged. | Portland, Oregon: | David Steel, sue- cessor to Himes the printer, | 169-171 Second Street, | 1889. BIBLIOGRAPHY Cover title as above verso note, title as above | verso copyright notice (1878 and 1889) 1 1, note p. 8, text pp. 440, sq. 16°. Hymus (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- lish headings and English translation), pp. 4 31.—Hymn in the Twana or Skokomish lan- guage, p. 32; English translation, p. 33 —Hymn in the Clallam language, p.34; English trans- lation, p. 35.—Hymn in the Nisqually language, p. 386; English translation, p. 37.—Medley in four languages (Jargon, Skokomish, Clallam, and English), p. 36; English translation, p. 37.— Lord’s prayer in Jargon, with interlinear Eng- lish translation, pp. 38-29.—Blessing before meals, in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 40. Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley . The Twana language of Washington territory. By rey. M. Eells. In American Antiquarian, vol. 3, pp. 296-303. Chicago, 1880-1881, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) A grammatic treatise upon several Indian languages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook Jargon, p. 303. The Chinook Jargon. In the Seattle Weekly Post-Intelligencer, vol. 1, no. 52, p. 4, column 8, Seattle, Washington Ty., September 29, 1882. (Pilling.) Explains the origin of ‘‘that miserable Chinook,” defends it as a useful intertribal language and for intercourse between the Indians and white men, gives the derivation of several words of the language and some gram- matic notes. —— History of | Indian missions | on the Pacifie coast. | Oregon, Washington and Idaho, | By | rev. Myron Eells, | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | With | an introduction | by | rev. G. H. Atkinson, D.D. | Philadelphia: the American Sunday- school union, | 1122 Chestnut Street. | 10 Bible house, New York. [1882.] Frontispiece, title verso copyright (1882) 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vi, introduction by G. H. Atkinson pp. vii-xi, pref- ace (dated October, 1882) pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-270, 12°. OF THE _ Bells (M.) —Continued. Chapter v, Literature, science, education, morals, and religion (pp. 202-226), contains a short list of books, papers, and manuscripts relating to the Indians of the northwest coast, among them the Chinook and Chinook Jargon, pp. 203-207, 209-211. Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. Ten years | of | missionary work | among the Indians | at | Skokomish, Washington territory. | 1874-1884. | By Rey. M. Eells, | Missionary of the American Missionary Association. | Boston: | Congregational Sunday- School Publishing Society, | Congrega- tional house, | Corner Beacon and Som- erset Streets. [1886.] Half-title (Ten years at Skokomish) verso blank 11, trontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright (1886) and names of printers 1 1. preface 11. dedication verso note 1 l contents pp. Vii-x, introduction pp. 11-13, text pp. 15-271, 12°. Hymn (three verses) in Chinook Jargon, with English translation, pp. 248-249.—Speci- men lines of a Jargon hymn, pp. 253-254. Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. Indians of Puget Sound. (Sixth paper.) Measuring and valuing. In American Antiquarian, vol. 10, p. 174-178, Chicago, 1888, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) and remarks concerning the numeral system of quite a number of the lan- guages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook. The preceding articles of the series, all of which appeared in the American Antiquarian, contain no linguistic material. It was the intention of the editor of the Antiquarian, when the series should be finished, to issue them in book form. So far as they were printed in the magazine they were repaged and perhaps a number of signatures struck off, The sixth paper, for instance, titled above. I have in my possession, paged 44-48. Numerals, — The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam Indians of Washington Territory. By Rey. Myron Eells. In Smithsonian Institution, Annual Rept. of the Board of Regents for 1887, part i, pp. 603- 681, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) Numerals 1-10 of a number of Indian lan- guages of Washington Territory, among them the Chinook Jargon, p. 644.—Remarks on the same, p. 645.—Three words of the Chinook Jar- gon not found in Gibbs's dictionary, p. 652.— Word for God in Twana, Nisqually, Klallam, and Chinook, p. 679. “The Chinook Jargon has been ably com- piled by Hon. G. Gibbs. I know of but three words in this locality of Indian origin which are not in his dictionary. Out of about 300 words and phrases which answer for words eS ee CHINOOKAN Bells (M.)— Continued. given by him, only about 470 are used here’ which shows how the same language will vary in different localities.” This article was issued separately, also, without change. And again as follows: The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam Indians of Washington territory. By Rev. Myron Eells. In Smithsonian Institution, Mise. Papers relating to anthropology, from the Smithsonian report for 1886-87, pp. 605-681, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.) Linguistic contents as under title next above. — Aboriginal geographic names in the state of Washington. By Myron Kells. In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 27 35, Washington, 1892, 8°. (Pilling.) Arranged alphabetically and derivations given. The languages represented are: Chin- ook, Chinook Jargon, Nez Percé, Chehalis, Clallam, T'wana, Calispel, Cayuse, Puyallup, and Spokane. [Dictionary of the Chinook Jar- gon. | es) Under date of January 9, 1893, Mr. Eells writes me, concerning this work, as follows: “Thave been at work for the last ten months, as I have had spare time, on a Chinook Jargon- English and English-Chinook Jargon Diction- ary, With introduction, remarks about the lan- guage, and grammar. Iam gathering all the words I can find, whether obsolete or not, from about fifteen Chinook dictionaries which have been issued since 1838 with the various spell- ings, marking, as far as I can, all those now in | use; also introducing all which have been adopted into the language of late years from the English and all phrases which can be used as words. I have gonethrough with the English- Chinook part and have nearly three thousand words; have gone through with the Chinook- English part except S and 7’ and have about two thousand; | hope to finish it this winter, though it is much more of a task than I sup- posed it would be when I began. I hardly expect it will ever be published, but will keep it in manuseript, having done it largely to pre- serve the language in its present transitional form, which is quite different trom what it was | thirty or forty years ago. “T hardly know whether it is worth while for you to mention this, as it is in such an unfin- | ished state; still I have even now put far more work on if than I have on all my other Chinook Jargon writings.” — [Words, phrases and sentences in the Chinook Jargon. | ED) Manuseript in possession of its author. Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to the study of Indian languages, second edition, pp. 77-103, 105, 109-111, 113-125, 127, 129, 132-188, 189-227. On p.228 isa translation of John iii, 16. LANGUAGES. ZA Bells (M.) — Continued, [Sermons in the Chinook Jar- gon. | (*) Manuscript, 26 pages, 8°, in possession of its author. “About 16 years ago,in 1875, when I was learning to talk the language, I wrote four ser mons in the Chinook Jargon which I still have. Since that time | have preached a great dealin the language, but do it so easily that I simply English and talk On looking over these sermons I make a few headings in extempore. find that were I to use them again I should need to revise them and to change many expressions so as to make them clearer,” Titles and notes of these three manuscripts furnished me by Mr. Hells. —— See Bulmer (T.S.) Rev. Myron Eells was born at Walker's Prairie, Washington Territory, October 7, 1523; he is the son of Rev. Cushing Eells, D. D., and Mrs. M. I’. Eells, who went to Oregon in 1838 as missionaries to the Spokane Indians. He left Walker's Prairie in 1848 on account of the Whitman massacre at Wallawalla and Cayuse war, and went to Salem, Oregon, where he began In 1849 he removed to Forest Grove,Oregon; in 1851 to Hillsboro, Oregon, and in 1857 again to Forest Grove, at which places he continued his school life. In 1862 he removed to Wallawalla, spending the time in farming and the wood business until 1868, except the falls, winters, and springs of 1863-64, 1864-65, to go to school, and 1865-'66, when he was at Forest Grove in college, graduating from Pacific University in 1866, in the second class which ever graduated from that institution. In 1868 he went to Hartford, Conn., to study for the ministry, entering the Hartford ‘Theological Seminary that year, graduating from it in 1871, and being ordained at Hartford, June 15,1871,as a Con- gregatioral minister. He went to Boisé City in October, 1871, under the American Home Missionary Society, organized the First Con- gregational church of that place in 1872, and was pastor of it until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells was also superintendent of its Sunday school from 1872 to 1874 and president of the [daho Bible Society from 1872 to 1874. He went to Skokomish, Washington, inJ une, 1874, and has worked aS missionary of the American Mis- sionary Association ever since awong the Sko- komish or Twana, and Clallam Indians; pastor of Congregational church at Skokomish Reser- vation since 1876, and superintendent of Sun- day school at Skokomish since 1882. He organized a Congregational church among the Clallams in 1882, of which he has since been pastor, and another among the whites at Sea- beck in 1880, of which he was pastor until 1886. In 1887 he was chosen trustee of the Pacific University, Oregon; in 1885 was elected assist- ant secretary and in 1889 seeretary of its board of trustees. He delivered the address before the Gamma Sigma society of that institution in 28 Bells (M.) — Continued. 1876, before the alumni in 1890,and preached the baccalaureate sermon in 1886. In 1888 he was chosen trustee of Whitman College, Wash- ington, delivered the commencement address there in 1888, and received the degree of D.D. from that institution in 1890. In 1888 he was elected its financial secretary, and in 1891 was asked to become president of the institution, but declined both. He was elected an associate member of the Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a corresponding member of the Anthropological Society at Washington in 1885, to both of which societies he has furnished papers which have been published by them. He was also elected vice-president of the Whitman Historical Society at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1874 to 1886 he was clerk of the Congregational Asso- ciation of Oregon and Washington. Mr. Eells at present (1893) holds the position of superintendent of the department of ethnol- ogy for the State of Washington at the World's Columbian Exposition. Emmons (George Falconer). Replies to inquities respecting the Indian tribes of Oregon and California. By George | Faleoner Emmons, U.S. N. In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3. pp. 200-225, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. Vocabulary of the Clatsop dialect (about 40 words), pp. 223-224. ‘‘Many words in this language, I presume, are common to the Chinook language, and per- haps to the Chickeelis and Kilamukes, who mix with and appear to understand each other.” Everette (Dr. Willis Eugene). Compar- ative literal translation of the ‘‘ Lord’s Prayer” in the Té¢inuk or Chinook Jar- gon with English. (C2 igs Manuscript; recorded ‘‘ from personal knowledge of the language. Written at Chil- eat, Alaska, 1884. Corrected word by word by Sitka and Chilcat Indians.’ Comparative literal translation of the Ten Commandments in the T¢éinuk | or Chinook Jargon with English. (*) Manuscript; recorded ‘from personal knowledge of the language. Written at Pyra- mid Harbor, Alaska, in May, 1884, and cor- rected word by word by repeating to Chilcat, Sitka, and British Columbia Indians until they were thoroughly satisfied with each word and its meaning, as well as a full understanding of | each sentence.” A Dictionary of the Language of the “Khnkit” (Klingi’t) or Chileat Indians of Alaska, together with that of the Téinuk, or Chinook Trade Jargon used on the North American Pacific Coast compared with English. GS) BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Everette (W. E.)— Continued. Manuscript; 1,000 words, alphabetically arranged. Recorded ‘‘ from personal knowledge of the language, and corrected word by word by the Indian trader, Mr. Dickinson, and Chilcat and Sitka Indians, during April, 1884, at Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.” Titles and notes concerning the above manu- scripts furnished by the author. Hymn in the Chinook Jargon as sung by the Indians of Lake Chelan, Washington territory, U.S. A. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°,in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. The hymn, which is written in black ink, is accompanied by an English interlinear trans- lation in red. — The Lord’s Prayer | in | Chinook Jargon | asspoken by the Indian Tribes that live on the Pacific coast of West- ern Oregon, U.S. A. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°,in the library of the 3ureau of Ethnology. The prayer in Jargon is written in black, with an English interlinear translation in red. The two last mentioned manuscripts were transmitted to the Bureau of Ethnology from the Yakama Indian Agency, August 15, 1883. From notes kindly furnished me by the sub- ject of this sketch, I have compiled the follow- ing: Dr. Willis Eugene Everette was born in 3rooklyn, New York, in 1855. He was placed under the care of tutors at an early age, and when his parents died, at the close of the war, he began to plan for his own education and future life work. After eight years of study under private tutors and in various schools of learning, he resolved to attempt to investigate the origin of the aboriginal races of North America. He went direct into the field among the Indians of the western shores of Hudson Bay, where he wintered. Here he began study- ing the languages, manners, and customs of the Cree, Athabasca, and Chippewa. Thence be journeyed amongst the Saulteux, Blood, Piegan, and Blackfeet; the Sioux, Gros-Ventres, Man- dan, Assiniboine, and Crow; the Paiute and Klamath people; the Rogue River, Alzea, and Siletz Indians; the Umatilla and Nez Percé people; the Klikitat and Yakima tribes; the Indians of Puget Sound; thence up along the 3ritish Columbia coast to Chileat, Alaska, where the Tlinkit, Sheetkah, and other Alaskan races were found; thence across the main range of Alaska into the headwaters of the Yukon River, and down the Yukon throughout the interior of Alaska to the Arctic sea coast, among the Kutcha-Kutechin, Kvichpatshi, and Yukoniyut people, of the valley of the Yukon River and seacoast of Norton Sound; and, finally, down to the Aleutian Archipelago, among the Aleuts of Unalaska, thus com- pleting a chain of investigation from the CHINOOKAN -—. -, - =a Everette (W. E.)— Continued. northern extremities of the United States and along the Pacific coast to the northwestern part of North America. From time to time he returned to civilization for the making studies in geology, medicine, chem- istry, law, and mineralogy. He is now writing up bis numerous explora- tions as fast as his mining and law practice will permit. He bas several hundred manu- scripts, personally collected, of the languages, purpose of LANGUAGES. 29 Everette (W. Kk.) — Continued. manners, customs, and traditions of the North American aborigines, and is in hopes that some day he will have leisure enough to reduce them ten volumes. set of about Although mining geology and mining law is into a quarto his profession, his actual life work has been the study of the anthropology of our North Ameri- can aborigines, and he devotes all his spare time to the latter. His present location is ‘Tacoma, Washington. KF. Featherman (A.) Social history | of the | races of mankind. | First division: | Nigritians[—Third division: | Aoneo- Maranonians ]. | By | A. Featherman. | [Two lines quotation. ] | London : Triibner & co,, Ludgate Hill. | 1885 [-1889]. | (All rights reserved. ) 3 vols. 8°. A general discussion of a number of North American families of speech occurs in volume 3, among them the Chinook, which occupies pp. 369-378, and which includes a brief account of their language on p. 373. Copies seen: Congress. Field (Thomas Warren). ’ Indies, ete. pp. 4438-561, London, 1878, 8°. | General scheme of American races and lan- guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the branches of the Chinookan family, divided into languages and dialects, p. 474. —Alphabetical list of all known American tribes and lan- guages, pp. 498-561. same work and on the same pages. Langevin (H.L.) British Columbia. | Report of the hon. H. L. Langevin, C. B.,|minister of public works. | Printed by order of parliament. | [Vignette.] | Ottawa: | printed by I. B. Taylor, 29, 31 and 33, Rideau street. | 1872. Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 J. contents pp. iii-iv, [list of] appen- dices pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-55, appendices pp. 56— 246, 8°. Appendix CC. A dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or Indian trade language of the north Pacific coast. Published by T. N. Hibben and Co., Vietoria, B.C. Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 161-173. Part II. English-Chinook, pp. 174- 182. : Copies seen: Georgetown. Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. In Philological Soe. [of London], Proc. vol. 2, pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. (Congress.) Contains a number of Cathlascon terms in the comparative lists of words. Reprinted in the same author’s Opuseula, pp. 275-297, for title of which see below. — On the languages of the Oregon ter- ritory. By R.G. Latham, M.D. Read before the Society on the 11th Decem- ber, 1844. In Ethnological Soe. of London, Jour. vol. 1, pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) A yoeabulary of the Shoshonee, showing ‘affinities (such as they are)’’ with a number of American languages, among them the Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 159-160. This article reprinted in the same author’s Opuscula, pp. 249-264, for title of which see below. The | natural history | of | the varie- ties of man. | By | Robert Gordon Reprinted in the 1882 and 1886 editions of the | L. Latham (R. G.) —Continued. In Encyclopedia Britannica, ninth edition, vol. 12, pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. Columbia Races, p. 826, includes thedivisions of the Chinookan. Knipe (Rev. C.) [Comparative vocabu- lary of the Chinook and Tahkaht. } Manuscript, 3 leaves, folio, written on one side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- nology. Included in an article by Mr. Knipe, entitled: Notes on the Indian tribes of the northwest coast of America. Latham, M.D., F.R.S., | late fellow of King’s college, Cambridge; | one of the vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- ety, London; | corresponding member to the Ethnological society, | New York, ete. | [Monogram in shield. ] | London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- noster row. | M.D. CCCL [1850]. Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xili-xv, explanation of plates verso blank 1 1. contents pp. xix-xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. Division F, American Mongolid (pp. 287— 460) includes a classification of a number of North American families, among them the Chintcks, pp. 316-323. This includes a general discussion, pp. 316-321; Jargon words of Eng- lish origin (26), of French origin (22), and derived by onomatopeceia (8), pp. 321-322. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Con- gress, Eames. On the languages of Northern, West- ern, and Central America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. (Read May the 9th.) In Philological Soc. [of London], Trans. 1856, pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) Brief references to the Chinook and its rela- tion to other northwest languages. This article reprinted in the same author’s Opuscula, pp. 326-377, for title of which see below. Opuseula. | Essays | chiefly | philo- logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D., F. R.S., etc. | late fellow of Kings college, Cambridge, late professor of English | in University college, London, late 44 Latham (R. G.) —Continned. assistant physician | at the Middlesex hospital. | Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta street, Covent garden, London | and | 20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. | Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. lii-iv, contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda and corrigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. A reprint of a number of papers read before the ethnological and philological societies of London, among them the following, which include Chinookan material: On the languages of Oregon territory (pp. | 249-264) contains a comparative vocabulary of the Shoshonie with other languages, among | them the Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 255-256. Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnog- raphy of North America (pp. 275-297) contains a number of Cathlascon words in the compara- tive lists. On the languages of northern, western, and central America (pp. 326-377) contains brief references to the Chinook and its relation to other languages. Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) contains brief comments on the Chinook, p. 388; Chinook words, p. 389: short vocabulary (12 words) of the Chinook compared with Selish and Shoshonie, pp. 415-416, Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Watkinson. At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 639, brought $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438, sold for $1. Elements | of | comparative philol- ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., &c., | late fellow of Kings Col- lege, Cambridge; and late professor of English | in University college, Lon- | don. | London: Walton and Maberly, | Upper | Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster | row; | Longman, Green, Longman, Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row, | 1862. | The Right of Translation is Reserved. Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1, preface pp. vii-xi, contents pp. xlii-xx, tabular view pp. xxi-xxxii, errata p. [xxviii], text pp. 1-752, addenda pp. 753-757, index pp. 758-774, 8°, Vocabulary of 48 words, and the numerals 1-10in the Watlala language, pp. 402-403. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. Dufossé, 1887 catalogue, no. 24564, priced a copy 20 fr., and Hiersemann, no. 36 of cata- logue 16, 10 M. | | Leclerc (Charles). BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Latham (R. G.)— Continued. Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the Rev. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 1812. In1819 he wasentered at Eton. Two years afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his first passion and his last, though for botany he had a very strong taste. Hedied March 9, 1888.—Theodore Watts in The Atheneum, March 17, 1888. Bibliotheca | ameri- cana | Catalogue raisonné | d’une trds- précieuse | collection de livres anciens | et modernes | sur l’Amérique et les Philippines | Classés par ordre alpha- hétique de noms d’Auteurs. | Rédigé par Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] | Paris | Maisonneuve & Cie | 15, quai Voltaire | M.D. CCC. LXVII [1867] Cover title as above, half-title verso details of sale 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. V-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°. Includes titles of a number of works contain- ing material relating to the Chinookan lan- guages. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 10s.; at the Squier sa le, no. 651, $1.50. Leclere, 1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 1889, 4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought $2.75. Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, géographie, | voyages, archéologie et linguistique | des | deux Amériques | et | des iles Philippines | rédigée | Par Ch. Leclere | [Design] | Paris | Maisonneuve et Cie, libraires- éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xviii-xx, cat- alogue pp. 1-643, supplément pp. 645-694, index pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°, The linguistic part of this volume occupies pp. 537-643; it is arranged under families, and contains titles of books in many American lan- guages, among them the following: Langues américaines en général, pp. 537-550 ; Chinook, p. 565. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Eames, Pil- ling. Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12s.; another copy, no. 12173, large paper, 1l. 1s. Leclere’s Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, pricesit 15 fr., and no. 2832, a copy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12s. Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. Lee (Daniel) and Frost (J. H.) Ten years in Oregon. | By D. Lee and J. H. Frost, | late of the Oregon mission of CHINOOKAN Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) — Cont'd. the Methodist episcopal church. | [Picture. ] | New-York: | published for the authors: 200 Mulberry-street. Collord, Printer. | 1844. Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 3-6, contents pp. 7-11, text pp. 13-344, 12°. Specimen of an Indian [Cathlascon] prayer with English translation, pp. 184-185.—A num- ber of sentences and grace before meals in the language of the Indians of the Cascades, p. 204. —Hymn (two verses) in the Cascade with English translation, p. 205.—Vocabulary (50 words) of the Clatsop [Chinook Jargon], south side of the Columbia River, pp. 848-344. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzum, Brit- ish Museum, Congress, Pilling, Trumbull. A few sentences in Chinook Jargon from this work are reprinted in Allen (J.), Ten Years in Oregon. gee Legends: Chinook See Boas (F.) Chinook Jargon St. Onge (L. N.) [Le Jeune (Pere Jean-Marie Raphael). ] Practical | Chinook [Jargon] vocabu- lary | comprising | all & the only usual words of that wonderful | Language arranged in a most | advantageous LANGUAGES, 45 | Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. | | | | order for the speedily learning of | the | same, after the plan of | right rev. bishop Durieu O M I. | the most experi- enced Missionary & Chinook | speaker | in British Columbia. | St. Louis’ mission | Kamloops. | 1886. Cover title verso directions for pronouncia- | tion, no inside title; text pp. 1-16, 16°. The vocabulary, which is Chinook Jargon, is | arranged by lessons, i-xviii, without headings. | They comprise: i, numerals; ii, the firmament, seasons, and days of the week; iii, geographic | features, &c.; iv, the family and relationships; v, animals; vi, implements and utensils; vii, nationalities; viii, nouns; ix,money; x, parts of the body; xi, wearing apparel; xii, domestic utensils; xiii, nouns; xiv, adjectives; xy, pro- nouns ; xvi,adverbs ; xvii, verbs; xviii, scripture names and church terms. Copies seen: Eells, Pilling. A later edition with title-page as follows: — Chinook [Jargon] Vocabulary. | Chinook-English. | From the Original of Rt. Rey. | Bishop Durieu, O. M. I. | With the Chinook Words in Phonog- raphy | By | J.M. R. Le Jeune O. M. I. | Second Edition. | Mimeographed at Kamloops. | Octo- ber 1892. Cover title verso ‘‘ Duployan Phonetic Alpha- bet,” no inside title, text (triple columns, Chinook Jargon in italics alphabetically Pee arranged, Jargon in stenographic characters, and English in italics) pp. 1-16, prayer in Jar- gon, stenographic characters, on recto of back cover, verso list of publications by Father Le Jeune. Copies seen: Pilling. Early in October, 1892, I wrote to Bishop Durieu requesting a copy of the 1886 edition of the ‘Chinook Vocabulary,’’ composed by him, and received in reply (November 1) a state- ment to the effect that he would be glad to oblige me, but that he had written no such book. Transcribing the title-page of the little book in question, I sent it to him asking an explanation, as his name was given thereon. The following is his response: NEw WESTMINISTER, B. C., Nov. 16, 1892. Dear Sir: In answer to your favor of the 11th inst., I beg to state that what I wrote you in my last is but the truth. I have not written anything in the Indian language or in the Chinook. What you have enumerated under my name, because my name is mentioned on the title of the work, must be placed under the name of Rey. Father Le Jeune asthe publisher and the author. But to make sure of it, and in order that your bibliography may be correct, I will serd this letter to Rey. Father Le Jeune, of Kamloops, begging him to give you the name of the author of those works you have placed under my name. I have the honor to be. dear sir, Your humble servant, PAUL DURIEU. This was sent me with the following explan- atory letter by Father Le Jeune: KAMLOOPS, B. C., Nov. 21, 1892. DEAR Str: Bishop Durieu gave me those les- sons in Chinook, in a few flying sheets, over twelve years ago (September, 1879). Of course those sheets are lost long ago. As his lordship does not want to appear as the author of those little pamphlets, you had better mention them as arranged by myself out of lessons received from his lordship. Yours, FATHER LE JEUNE. ] [Two lines stenographic charac- ters.] | No. 1. Kamloops Wawa May 2. 91 [—67. 26 Feb. 95] A periodical in the Chinook Jargon, steno- graphic characters, intended as a weekly, but issued in its early stages at irregular intervals, at Kamloops, British Columbia, under the edi- torship of Father Le Jeune, and reproduced by him with the aid of the mimeograph. See fac- simile of the first page of the initial issue. The first three numbers are in triple col- umns, Jargon in italics, Jargon in shorthand characters, and English in italics; the fourth number is in double columns, Jargon in short- hand and English in italics; the subsequent issues are in shorthand with headings in Eng- 46 Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. lish. All the issues are in 16° except nos. 5-6 and 7-8 (dotible numbers), which are in 32°. At the beginning each issue consisted of 8 pages, with continuous pagination, but occasionally the parts were separately paged. Beginning with no. 33, the first issue of vol. 2, all the num- bers consist of 4 pages each. The following is a detailed list of the issues, made up from my copy, which is the only one I have seen, giving number, date of issue, and pagination: No.1 May 2,’91, pp. 1-8, 16°. 2 9) 91, 1-16, 16°. 3 16, '91, 17-24, 16°. 4 Aug. 5,'91, 25-32, 16°. 1-32, 32°. 1-32], 32a. 5-6 Sept. 91, [7-8 Oct. 91, 9 Feb. 1, ’92, 1-4, 16a°. 10 6, 92, 5-8, 16°. 11 14, ’92, 9-12, 16°. 2 21,'92, 13-16, 16°. 13 28, ’92, 17-20, 16°. 14 Mch. 6,’92, 21-24, 16°. 15 13,’92, [25-29], 17-208, 16°. 16 20, '92, 33-34, 21-24), 39-40, 16°. 17 27,'92, 41-48, 16°. 18 Apr. 3,’92, 49-52, 1-4c, 16°. 19 10, ’92, 25-28b (57-60 lacking), 16°. 20 10, '92, 65-66, 29-325, 71-72, 16°. 21 17-24, ’92, 73-74, 33-86b, 79-80, 16°. 22 24, ‘92, 81-82 (83-86 lacking), 87- 88, 16°. 23 May 1,’92, 89-90, 37-40b, 95-96, 16°. 24 Synge: 105-112 (97-104 lacking), 16°, | 2d 15, 792; 113-114, 41-44b, 119-120, 16°. | 26 22, '92, 12-122, 123-1260, 127-128, 45-48b, 16°. 27 26, '92, 129-130, 131-1340, 135-136, 16°. 28 June 5,'92, 137-138, 139-142b, 139-142, bis b, 143-144, 16°. 29 12, '92, 145-146, 147-1506, 151-152, 16°. 30 19, '92, 155-158 [sic] b, 16°. 31 26, '92, 153-154, 159-160, 163-1665, 16°. 32 30, '92, (167-168 lacking) 169- 1720, 16°. Vol. 2: 33 July 3, 92, 1-4, 16°. 34 10, ’92, 5-8, 16°. 35 17, '92, 9-12, 16°. 36 24, ’92, 13-16, 16°. 37 3192; 17-20, 16°. 38 Aug. 7, '92, 21-24, 16°. Supplement to nos. 33-38, pp. 1-24d, 16°. 39 Aug.14, 92, pp. 25-28, 16°. 40 21, 792, 29-32, 16°. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Le Jeune (J. M. R.)— Continued. No. 41 ?) ee G1 = ite ( Katbash go ye pous lek \ all ee ee, 2 named JAsl now LE wants Lo ee Ae Speak, eut/y; Wi wk, . Z Uf wéo Wwart-~ Ce learn Co oh WW’ 2Oe Q fa asi HYo maktler Ja they be | lu Ace Men, So NN ee ee | FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE OF THE KAMLOOPS WAWA. 48 Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued. In a few numbers the article on Sacred His- tory is omitted. Of these no. 17 contains in lieu four pages of hymns set to music; no. 18, night prayer in Shushwap; in no. 22 nothing was substituted; no. 24, list of subscribers, ete. In explanation of these irregularities Father Le Jeune, under date of July 13, 1892, writes | me as follows: “Concerning your remarks on missing pages and numbers, let me say: There are only 4 pages of no. 19, pp. 25-28; it was a mistake; no. 18is Ap. 3 and no. 20, which should have been no.19,is Ap.10. It was too late to correct the error, so I continued counting from no. 20 upward. In the same way you will find no. 21, ‘Sacred History,’ § 64-70, pages 33-36, is the same date as no. 22, Ap.24. The list of sub- seribers can go in no. 24 as pages 97-100, and my French letter of Ap. Ist as pages 101-104, “T am ashamed that there should be so much confusion in the pagination of the little paper; as you see, I was trying to carry out two things at the same time—first to make the regular pages with the calendar of the week and second the four pages of Sacred History. These were not issued at the same time, but in two series, as I wished to have the Sacred His- tory bound separately. Then I am not sitting at rest in an office, but traveling throughout my mission, over 500 miles, taking my dupli- eating outfit with me, with much besides to do, as, for instance, 300 confessions to hear at Kamloops at Easter, 400 last month at the Shushwap, etc. “You will see that with July I began the second volume, and hereafter the pages, four to each number, will be numbered in succes- sion. The Sacred History will be given monthly only—16 pages to each number. I commence again from the very beginning, having Father St. Onge’s translation.” Most of the matter given is of a religious character, the Sacred History series of articles being the most extensive. Beginning with no. 13, each issue contains a list of the feast and fast days for the ensuing week, and with no. 15 the gospels of the various Sundays are given. A Chinook vocabulary appears in the first three numbers, and a list of phrases in the fourth. During October, 1892, I received from Father Le Jeune copies of a reissue of nos. 1-8 of the Wawa, paged 1-40, all in 16°, and containing for the most part the material given in the origi- nals. They are dated May, June, July, August, September, November, and December, 1892, and January, 1893, four pages each, con- secutively paged. To these is added a sup- plemental signature, paged 33-40, headed ‘“Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the natives of British Columbia.” There have also been issued two ‘‘ Supple- ments to the Kamloops Wawa” ‘‘ Chicago World’s Fair Notes,’ numbered 1 and 2, and dated respectively November 1 and 8, 1892, each BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. containing four pages, numbered 1-8. The first contains an illustration of a U.S. coast line battle ship, the second one of the Manufactures and Liberal Arts Building. There is also a third of these extras, a single quarto page headed: ‘‘ Chicago News, Supple- ment to the Kamloops Wawa. No.1, Nov. 1st, 1892,” at the top of which is the picture of the battle ship. My inquiries in regard to these stray issues met with the following response from Father Le Jeune: “In answer to your letter of Nov. 1, 1892, pages 1-40 you mention are simply a new edi- tion of the first eight numbers. As you see by the first numbers I sent you, I did not exactly know what my little paper was going to be, Now that the Indians want their papers bound, I find those first numbers exhausted. Besides, numbers 5, 6,7, and 8 were never properly num- bered; so I made this new edition of eight numbers to be used as heading for the volume. Tendeayored to get into these eight numbers what constitutes the first text-book for Indian students, so that they can be used separately. Now the collection follows in consecutive num- bers, 1, 2, 3, ete., to 18, no. 19 [except the sacred history supplement] being skipped by mistake; then 20-31, supplements to nos. 15-32, save no. 22, omitted also by mistake; then from no. 320n in regular order. I reprint some of the run-out numbers of vol. I to complete the sets sent me for binding, and redress as much as I can my former incorrectness of pagination. Concern- ing the pages ‘‘ Success of the Duployan,” etc., I have given up the idea of embodying them into something else; so they remain as they are, a letter of information to correspondents. The ‘Chicago News’’ supplement and any other I may hereafter produce are separate pages which I shall issue at my convenience to inter- est the Indians and give them some useful information, but without binding myself to issue them regularly. They are rather essays than anything else.”’ The supplemental signature of no.8 of the reissue of the Wawa contains so many interest- ing facts bearing upon Father Le Jeune’s work and upon the methods used in this new depart- ure in periodical making that I give it here- with in full. Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the 1 natives of British Columbia. “The Duployan system of stenography made its apparition in France in 1867. The orginators are the Duploye brothers, two of whom are members of the clergy and two others eminent stenographers in Paris. Father Le Jeune became acquainted with the system in 1871, being then 16 years old, and learned in a few hours. Two or three days after he wrote to Mr. E.Duploye and by return mail received a very encouraging letter. He found the knowledge of shorthand very profitable, CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 49 Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. ever since, either for taking down notes or for correspondence. It was only in July, 1890, that the idea first came to try the shorthand as an easy phonetic writing forthe Indians of British Columbia. The first trial became a success. At the end of September, 1890, a poor Indian eripple, named Charley-Alexis Mayoos, from the Lower Nicola, saw the writing for the first | time, and got the intuition of the systemat first | sight. Heset to decipherafew pagesof Indian prayers in shorthand. In less than two months he learned every word of them, and he soon | began to communicate his learning to his friends and relatives. ‘Through his endeavors some eight or ten Indians at Coldwater, Nicola, B. C., became | thoroughly acquainted with the writing system before April Ist, 1891. In July, 1891, the first lessons were given to the Shushwap Indians; | they lasted an hour every day for four or five | days. Three or fourof the best young men | went on studying what they had learned, and were delighted to find themselves able to correspond in shorthand in the early fall. | During the winter months they helped to prop- | agate the system of writing among their people. In the meantime Mayoos had come to Kam- loops and was pushing the work ahead among the young people there. -‘In December, 1891, the system was intro- duced to the North Thomson Indians; in Jan- uary, 1892, to those at Douglas Lake; in Febru- | ary at Spuzzum and North Bend; and, last of all, in March, to those at Deadman’s Creek, near Sarvina. Soon after, Indian letters came | from William’s Lake. In May, 1892, a few | lessons were given at St. Mary’s Mission to the Lower Fraser and seacoast Indians. Now the Indians teach each other and are very anxious to learn on all sides. The most | advanced understand the value of the letters | and the spelling of the words; but the greatest | number begin by reading the words, then learn the syllables by comparing the words together, and at last come to the letters. They learn by analysis and much quicker than by synthesis. “The ‘Kamloop Wawa’ was first issued in May, 1891, and in eight monthly numbers gave the rudiments of stenography and the Chinook hymns as first Chinook reader. “With no. 9, February Ist, 1892, it has become weekly, and has ever since continued to reach every week the ever increasing number of sub- scribers. It is now issued at 250 copies, 4 pages, 12mo, weekly. A supplement of equal | size issued whenever convenient. The first | yolume of the Kamloops Wawa closed last | June with number 32. Vol. IE will terminate with no. 58, Dec. 25, 1892. Contents: 1° Ele- ments of Stenography in Chinook and English. 2° Chinook and Latin Hymns. 3° A number of Indian news. 4° Beginning of Sacred History. 5° Weekly Calendar beginning with March 1st, | *92. 6° Gospel for every Sunday. 7° Some prayers in Shushwap. 8° A few hymns in | CHIN——-4 Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. Shushwap and Chinook. 9° A few English lessons. See nos. 33,34,35. 10° Narratives of early Church History, St. Mary Magdalen, St. James, ete. “The Kamloops Phonograpber had its first number issued in June, 1892. now ready, illustrating: taught to the natives. of shorthand. 3° Six numbers are 1° How shorthand is 2° Alphabet and rules Syllables and syllabical 4° Ist reading books of shorthand—16 pages monthly. The intention is, in the follow- ing numbers, to make a study of abbreviative phonography, showing how outlines can be made according to the Duployan system. We do not pretend to teach shorth. ex professo, but only to give to those interested all the informa- tion that we can concerning our little work. (Seven numbers are issued, the last in Janu- ary, 1893, none containing Chinookan material.] ‘‘In preparation: 1° A second edition of the Chinook and English Vocabulary. 2° Al manac for 1893, of which these pages are intended to become a part. 3° A Chinook trans- lation, by Rt. Rev. Bishop Durieu [q.v.] from New Westminster, of Bishop Gilmour's Bible History. 200 copies of the English text have been received through the kindness of Rev. L. N. St. Onge, Troy, N.Y. These will be inter- leaved with the Chinook text so as to present the illustrations of the original, and the English text opposite its Chinook version. *‘Some will ask: How are all these works issued? Up to date nearly all the work, auto- graphing and duplicating on the mimeograph, has been done by the author during the leisure hours of his missionarylabors. But that course can not be carried on any longer. Hired work has to be taken in. A few Indian women are already trained to do the printing. With their coéperation 16 pages can be printed on 200 to 250 copies inaday. But that work has to be paid for; and the resources are at an end. Peo- ple have first wondered at the work; some find fault with it; very little thus far has been done to help it. ‘Now is the time for the friends of a good cause to see if something better could not be done in favor of this little work. Voluntary donations will be accepted as a providential blessing. Subscriptions to papers are also a powerful means of support and improvement. Many say: ‘‘We do not want to study the pho- nograpby.”’ But could they not take the papers as speeimens of curiosity, etc., in their libraries ? The tirst volume of the Kamloops Wawa is now bound, and would make a very interesting item in any library. Price only $1.50. Send $2.50 and have the numbers of the Kamloops Pho- nographer as well. Please induce your friends to contribute according to their means. By doing so, you by all means shall help to enlighten many who are still sitting in dark- ness and in the shadow of death.” The periodical is almost entirely the work of Pére Le Jeune, but few contributions of Jar- tables. LL 19 Yc BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CXL, C0 / / { = ~ Ka my loops Was we, Sep rember 184) ne & 6 Sow =, Chi'noo & MAY 1 925, ) meget: con es Nos FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE'S JARGON HYMN BOOK. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. gon material appearing from other hands. The only exceptions I have discovered are short articles in nos. 24, 34,and 35,from the pen of Dr. T. 8. Bulmer, and occasionally one from Father St. Onge. An independent issue of the Wawa appeared | under date of June 1,1891, numbered 1; and two of the issues are in double numbers, 5-6, and [7-8]; these latter, 32° in size, lack the heading as given in the periodical proper and evidently were not intended originally as a part of the series. The titles of these three issues are as follows: ] [Two lines stenographic charac- ters.] | No.1. Kamloops Wawa. 1 Ju.’91 No title page, heading on cover as above; text, headed ‘“‘ Chinook Vocabulary,” pp. 1-32, advertisement on back cover, 16°. On the front cover following the heading are two columns of matter, one in English, italie [ characters, headed ‘‘Chinook vocabulary,” the second in Jargon, stenographic characters. The vocabulary, alphabetically arranged, triple columns, Jargon, shorthand, and English, pp. 1--21.—Chinook hymns, pp. 23-32. Copies seen: Pilling. |] [Two lines stenographic charac- ters.] | Kamloops Wawa, | September, 1891 | Nos 5 & 6, | Chinook Hymns. | [One line stenographic characters. ] [Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] Cover title verso the alphabet, no inside title; text (in stenographic characters, headings in Jargon and Latin in italics) pp. 1-32, alphabet and numerals on recto of back cover, list of publications by Father Le Jeune verso of back cover, 32°. See the facsimile of the cover title. Copies scen: Pilling. Issued also with cover title as follows: CHINOOKAN Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. [——] [Two lines stenographic charac- ters.] | Chinook Hymns. | Kamloops. B. C, | 1891 Cover title verso alphabet and numerals, no inside title; text in stenographiec characters pp. 1-32, alphabet recto of back cover, list of publications by Father LeJeune versoof back cover, 32°. Contents as under title next above; the verso of the front cover in the one edition forms the recto of the back cover in the other. Copies seen: Pilling. [ I. | Kamloops. | 1891 Cover title verso the alphabet, text pp. [1-32], alphabet and numerals recto of back cover, list of publications by Father Le Jeune verso of | back cover, 32°. Inserted by Father Le Jeune as a substitute for the lacking nos.7-8 of the Kamloops Wawa, Oct., 1891. Contains no Chinookan material. Oopies seen: Pilling. [——] Chinook | primer. | By which | The Native of British Columbia | and any other persons | Speaking the Chi- ] Elements | of | short hand. | Part | nook | are taught | to read and write | Chinook | in Shorthand | in the Space | of a few hours. | Price: 10 Cents. | Mimeographed at|St Louis Mis- sion. | Kamloops, B. C. | May, 1892. Cover title as above, verso advertisement, no inside title; text pp. 1-8, advertisementrecto of back cover, verso list of publications by lather Le Jeune, 16°. See p.52 for facsimile of the cover title. Copies seen: Pilling. A comparison of the facsimiles of the title. | pages of the hymn book and primer with the | printed text of the same will show a few differ- | ences of punctuation. The printed text is cor- rect; the facsimiles are defective in that re- | spect. A play | in Chinook, | Joseph and his Brethren. | Act I.| By J. M. R. Le Jeune O. M. I. Kamloops, B.C. | July 1s¢ 1892. Cover title (manuscript, in the handwriting of its author), no inside title; text (in Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters) pp. 1-20, 16°. Copies seen: Pilling. —— Chinook | First Reading Book | in- cluding | Chinook Hymns, Syllabary | and Vocabulary. |B7|J.M.R. Le Jeune O. M. I.| Price: 10 Cents. | [Eight lines stenographic characters, ] | Kamloops. | 1893 Title verso Chinook alphabet 1 1. text in stenographic characters, with headings in Eng- lish and Jargon in italics, pp. 1-[18], 16°. | L LANGUAGES. 51 Le Jeune (J. M. R.) -— Continued, Hymns, pp. 1-11. —Exercises, pp. 12-15.— Vocabulary, pp. 16-18. Copies seen: Pilling. —— See Durieu (P.) Pére Jean-Marie Raphael Le Jeune was born at Pleybert Christ, Finistére, France, April 12, 1855,and came to British Columbia as a mis- sionary priest in October, 1879. He made his first acquaintance with the Thompson Indians in June, 1880,and has been among them ever since. He began at once to study their lan- guage and was able to express himself easily in that language after a few months. When he first came he found about a dozen Indians that knew a few prayers and a little of a catechism in the Thompson language, composed mostly by Right Rev. Bishop Durieu, O. M. I., the present bishop of New Westminster. From 1880 to 1882 he traveled only between Yale and Lytton, 57 miles, trying to make acquaintance with as many natives as he could in that dis- trict. Since 1882 he has had to visit also the Nicola Indians, who speak the Thompson lan- guage and the Douglas Lake Indians, who are a branch of the Okanagan family, and had occasion to become acquainted with the Okan- agan language, in which he composed and revised most of the prayers they have in use up to the present. Since June 1, 1891, he has also had to deal with the Shushwap Indians, and, as the language is similar to that in use by the Indians of Thompson River, he very soon became familiar with it. He tried several years ago to teach the In- dians to read in the English characters, but without avail, and two years ago he undertook to teach them in shorthand, experimenting first upon a young Indian boy who learned the short- hand after a single lesson and began to help him teach the others. The work went on slowly until last winter, when they began to be interested in it all over the country, and since then they have been learning it with eagerness and teaching it to one another. Leland (Charles Godfrey). The Chinook Jargon. In St. James Gazette, vol. 17, no. 2529, p. 6, London, July 13, 1888, folio. (Pilling.) General remarks concerning the language, with words, phrases, and sentences therein. ] An international idiom. In the Saturday Review, vol. 30, no. 1822, pp. 377-378, London, Sept. 27, 1890, folio. A review of Hale (H.), An international idiom, giving a number of examples. Lenox: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piler in the Lenox Library, New York City. {Lionnet (Pére —).] Vocabulary | of the | Jargon or trade language | of Oregon. ay BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 6 Seen aretha yn a ee Ne eae 1 ~ if an 7 rN Wi | Gh UN UUK | etre | ) RIMER! it LY LY Han, t) ' ; ND) invnche The Natives of British Lonluernitan , Mid ani other persons Speak ny the € hinoak i are? taruht 1 toread amd. ee Ghinook | we Sharthouwd methe Spa ofa tow hows. ! | ra aR | Pris 4b Gowns. | Mimeg raphed al st Louis Mission. Kowdoops, BC. May 1692. FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE’S JARGON PRIMER, — CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES, 53 Lionnet (Pére —) — Continued. Colophon: Published by the Smith- sonian institution, | Washington, D. C., | April, 1853. No title page, heading only; letter of Prof. Henry and report of Prof. W. W. Turner 1 1. text pp. 1-22, 8° form on 4° page. French, English, and Jargon vocabulary, alphabetically arranged by French words, pp. 1-22. “Dr. B. Rush Mitchell, of the United States Navy, recently presented to the Smithsonian Institution a manuscript vocabulary, in French and Indian, obtained in Oregon, and said to have been compiled by a French Catholic priest. It was submitted for critical examination to Prof.W. W. Turner, and in accordance with his suggestion the vocabulary has been ordered to be printed for distribution in Oregon.’’— Extract from letter of Prof. Henry. ““Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon, furnished by Dr. R. B. Mitchell, of the U.S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterward learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for his own use while studying the language at Chinook Point.’—Extract from the preface of Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Copies seen: Georgetown, Pilling, Smithson- ian. Lord’s prayer: Cascade See Youth's. Chinook Bergholtz (G. F.) Chinook Duflot de Mofras (E.) Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Bancroft (H. H.) Boldue (J. B. Z.) Bulmer (T.S.) Chinook Jargon Chinook. Chinook Jargon Dictionary. Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Everette (W. FE.) Gibbs (G.) Gill (J. K.) Good (J. B.) Hale (H.) Marietti (P.) Nicoll (E. F.) Lowdermilk: This word followinga title or within parenthesesiafter a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the bookstore of W.H. Lowder- milk & Co., Washington, D. C. Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- ature | of | American aboriginal lan- guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. | With additions and corrections | by professor Wm. W. Turner, | Edited by Nicolas Triibner. | London: | Triibner and co., 60, Pater- noster row. | MDCCCLYVIII [1858]. Half-title “Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica I” verso blank 1 1. title as above verso printer 11. preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. Ludewig (II. E.) — Continued. editor's advertisement pp. ix—xii, biographical memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph- ical notices pp. xv—xxiv, text pp. 1-209, addenda pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 257-258, 8°. Arranged alphabetically by languages. Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and Nicholas Triibner, pp. 210-246. Contains alistof grammars and vocabularies of the languages of the American peoples, among them the following: American languages generally, pp. xv-xxiv; Chinuk and Chinuk Jargon, pp. 40-41, 47. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Congress, Eames, Georgetown, Pilling. At the Fischer sale, no. 990, a copy brought 5s. 6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, $2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. ‘Dr. Ludewig bas himself so fully detailed the plan and purport of this work that little more remains for me to add beyond the mere statement of the origin of my connection with the publication and the mention of such addi- tions for which I am alone responsible, and which, during its progress through the press, have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of the whole. This is but anactof justice to the memory of Dr. Ludewig, because at the timeof his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 pages were printed off, and these constitute the only portion of the work which had the benefit of his valuable personal and final revision. ‘Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, like myself, had been making bibliographical memoranda for years of all books which serve to illustrate the history of spoken language. As afirst section of a more extended work on the literary history of language generally, he had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of aboriginal languages of America. The manuscript had been deposited by him in the library of the Ethnological Society at New York, but at my request he at once most kindly placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that it should be printed in Europe, under my per- sonal superintendence. ‘‘Upon my return to England, I lost no time in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, intending then to confine myself simply to pro- ducing acorrect copy of my friend’s manuscript. But it soon became obvious that the transcript had been hastily made, and but for the valuable assistance of literary friends, both in this country and in America, the work would prob- ably have been abandoned. My thanks aremore particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by whose considerate and valuable coéperation many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- torial labors greatly lightened. This encouraged me to spare neither personal labor nor expense 54 Ludewig (HH. E.) — Continued. in the attempt to render the work as perfect as possible, with what success must be left to the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate the labors of a pioneer in any new field of lit- erary research.” —Editor’s advertisement. “Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in this country [England], was held in consider- ableesteem as a jurist, bothin Germany and the United States of America. Born at Dresden in 1809, with but little exception he continued to reside in his uative city until 1844, when he emi- grated to America; but, though in both coun- tries he practiced law as a profession, his bent was the study of literary history, which was | evidenced by his ‘Livre des Ana, Essai de Catalogue Manuel,’ published at his own cost in 1837, and by his ‘ Bibliothekonomie,’ which appeared a few years later. ‘*But even while thus engaged he delighted in investigating the rise and progress of the land of his subsequent adoption, and his researches into the vexed question of the origin of the peo- pling of America gained him the highest consid- eration. on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man of original and inquiring mind. He was a contributor to Naumann’s ‘Serapzeum;’ and among the chief of his contributions to that journal may be mentioned those on ‘American Libraries,’ on the ‘Aids to American Bibliog- raphy,’ and on the ‘ Book Trade of the United States of America.’ In 1846 appeared his ‘ Lit- erature of American Local History,’ a work of much importance and which required no small amount of laborand perseverance, owing tothe necessity of consulting the many and widely scattered materials, which had to be sought out from apparently the most unlikely channels. “These studies formed a natural introduc- tion to the present work on ‘The Literature of American Aboriginal Languages,’ which occu- pied his leisure concurrently with the others, and the printing of which was commenced in M. Macdonald (Duncan George Forbes). British Columbia | and | Vancouver’s island | comprising | a description of these dependencies: their physical | character, climate, capabilities, popu- lation, trade, natural history, | geology, ethnology, gold-fields, and future pros- pects | also | An Account of the Man- ners and Customs of the Native Indians | by | Duncan George Forbes Macdon- ald, C, E. | (Late of the Government Survey Staff of British Columbia, and of the International Boundary | Line of North America) Author of ‘What the Farmers may do with the | BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE | Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued. August, 1856, but which he did not live to see launched upon the world; for at the date of his death, on the 12th of December following, only 172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of love with him for years; and,if ever author were mindful of the nonwm prematur in annum, he was when he deposited his manuscript in the library of the American Ethnological Society, diffident himself as to its merits and value on a subject of such paramount interest. He had satisfied himself that in due time the reward of his patient industry might be the production of some more extended national work on the sub- ject, and with this he was contented; for it was a distinguishing feature in his character, not- withstanding his great and varied knowledge and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his own toil, even amounting to drudgery if need- ful, if he could in any way assist the promul- gation of literature and science. ‘*Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member of many of the most distinguished European and American literary societies, and few men were held in greater consideration by scholars bothin Americaand Germany, as will readily be acknowledged should his voluminous corre- spondence ever see the light. In private life he was distinguished by the best qualities which endear a man’s memory to those who survive him: he was a kind and affectionate husband and a sincere friend. Always accessible and ever ready to aidand counsel those who applied to him for advice upon matters pertaining to literature, his loss will long be felt by a most extended circle of friends, and in him Germany mourns one of the best representatives of her learned men in America, a genuine type of a class in which, with singular felicity, to genius of the highest order is combined a painstaking and plodding perseverance but seldom met with beyond theconfines of the ‘ Fatherland.’ ’’—Bio- graphie memoir. Macdonald (D. G. F.) — Continued. Land’ ‘The Paris Exhibition’ ‘Deci- mal Coinage’ &c. | With a comprehen- Sive map. | London | Longman,Green, Longman, Roberts, & Green | 1862. Half-title verso name of printcr 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiii, text pp. 1-442, appendices pp. 443-524, map, 8°. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon and Eng- lish equivalent terms (375 words and 10 phrases and sentences), pp. 394-398. Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 43149, mentions: Sec- ond edition, London, Longmans, 1863, 8°, ee ee — i ) Macleod (fev. Xavier Donald). CHINOOKAN Macfie (Matthew). Vancouver Island and | British Columbia. | Their his- tory, resources, and prospects. | By | Matthew Macfie, F. R. G.S. | Five years | resident in Victoria, V.I. | London: | Longman, Green, Long- | man, Roberts, & Green. | 1865. Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. frontis- piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix—xii, contents pp. xii- xxi, list of illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-518, appendix pp. 519-558, index pp. 559-574, 8°. A few sentences in the Chinook Jargon, pp. | 472-478. Oopies seen: Baticroft, Boston Athenzum, British Museum, Congiess, Geological Survey, Pilling. of the devotion | tothe | blessed virgin Mary | in| North America, | By | the History | rey. Xavier Donald Macleod, | professor | [&e. two lines.] | With a memoir of the author, | by | the most rey. John B. Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincin- nati. | New York: | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 Dey street. [Copyright 1866. ] Frontispiece, title verso copyright notice 1 1. publishers’ notice pp. lii-iv, inscription to the memory of the author verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 5-7, verso blank, memoir by Purcell pp. ix-xxiii verso blank, engraving, text pp. 1-461 verso blank, index pp. 463-467, 8°. Hymn to the Blessed Mary, in the Chinook _ Jargon, p. 256. Copies seen: British Museum, Georgetown. Congress, —— History | of | Roman Catholicism | in | North America. | By | the rev. Xavier Donald MacLeod, | professor [&c. one line.] | With a memoir of the author, | by | the most rev. John B. Pureell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincin- nati. | New York: | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 Dey street. [186-?] Portrait 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. publishers’ notice pp. ili-iv, contents pp. v—vii, dedication verso blank 1 1. memoir pp. ix-xxiii, text pp. 1-461, index pp. 463-467, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, p. 255. Copies seen : Boston Athenzun. Xavier Donald McLeod, author, born in New York city, November 17, 1821; died near Cincin- nati, Ohio, July 20,1865; studied at Columbus, and surprised his family and friends by taking orders in the Protestant Episcopal church in 1845, After spending a few years in a country parish, he went in 1850 to Europe, where he LANGUAGES. 5 Missionary’s Companion. or Macleod (X. D.) — Continued. traveled and studied until 1852. The result of his European visit was his conversion to the Roman Catholic faith. In 1857 he became edi- torially connected with the St. Louis ‘‘ Leader.” Subsequently he was ordained a priest, and appointed professor of rhetoric and belles- lettres at Mount St. Mary’s college, Ohio. He met his death in a railroad accident.—d pple- ton's Cyclop. of Am. Btog. Maisonneuve: This word following a title or included within parentheses after a note .ndi- cates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the bookstore of Maisonneuve et Cie., Paris, France. Mallet: This word following a title or inclosed within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of Major Edmond Mallet, Washington, D.C. Marietti (Pietro), editor. Oratio Domi- nica |in Ccr, lingvas versa | et) CLXXx, characterym formis | vel nostratibvs vel peregrinis expressa | cvrante | Petro Marietti| Eqvite Typographo Pontificio | Socio Administro | Typographei | S. Consilii de Propaganda Fide | [Print- er’s device] | Romae | AnnoM. DCCC. LXX [1870]. Half-title 1 1. title 1 1. dedication 3 IL pp. xi- Xxvii, 1-319, indexes 4 ll. 4°. Includes 69 versions of the Lord’s prayer in various American dialects, among them the Oregonice, p. 303. Copies seen: Trumbull. Massachusetts Historical Society: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that society, Boston, Mass. See Demers (M.) et al. Montgomerie (Lieut. John Eglinton) and De Horsey (A.,F.R.) A | few words | collected fromthe | languages | spoken by the Indians | in the neighbourhood of the | Columbia River & Puget’s Sound. | By John E. Montgomerie, Lieutenant R.N. | and Algernon F. R. De Horsey, Lieutenant, R. R. | London: | printed by George Odell, 18 Princess-street, Cavendish-square. | 1848. Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-iv, text pp. 5-30, 12°. Vocabulary of the Chinook, Clikitat, Cas- cade and Squally languages, pp. 1-23.—Numer- als in Chinook Jargon, p. 23.—Numerals in 56 Montgomerie (J. E.) — Continued. Squally, p.24.—Chinook proper and Chehalis numbers, p. 24.—Names of places, pp. 25-28.— Corruptions used in the trading language, pp. 28-30. Copies seen: British Museum, Sir Thomas Phillips, Cheltenham, England. Miiller (Friedrich). Grundriss | der | Sprachwissenschaft | von | D". Fried- rich Miiller| Professor[ &c. three lines. ] | I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band. | I. Abtheilung. | Nachtriige zum Grund- riss aus den Jahren | 1877-1887]. | Wien 1876[-1888]. | Alfred Holder | K. K. Universitiits-Buchhindler, | Roth- enthurmstrasse 15. 4vols. (vol.1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 N. Norris (P. W.)— Continued. National Museum: These words following atitle or within parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the library of that institu- tion, Washington, D.C. New. The New Testament in Chinook. In the New York Times, Qct. 12, 1890. (Eames.) A short extract from a sermon in the Chinook Jargon, with literal English translation. Copied from The Academy. (*) New edition. Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. See Dictionary. Nicoll (Edward Holland). The Chinook language or Jargon. In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 35, pp. 257- 261, New York, 1889, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling.) A conversation in Chinook Jargon, with English translation, p. 257.— Origin of the Chinook Jargon, showing many words derived from the English, French, Chinook, Chehalis, etc., onomatopeia, prefixes, ete., pp. 257-259.— Numerals 1-11, 20, 100, p. 260.—Lord’s prayer, with interlinear English translation, p. 260. Nihaloth: Vocabulary See Hale (H.) Norris (Philetus W.) The) calumetofthe | Coteau, |and other | poetical legends of the border. | Also, | a glossary of Indian names, words, and | western provin- cialisms. | Together with | a guide-book | of the | Yellowstone national park. | BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Miiller (F.) — Continued. part 1 all published), each part and division with an ontside title and two inside titles, 8° Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American languages, was originally issued in two divi- sions, each with the following special title: Die Sprachen | der | schlichthaarigen Rassen | von | D". Friedrich Miiller | Professor [&e. eight lines.] | I. Abtheilung. | Die Sprachen der australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der amerikanischen Rasse [sic]. | Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Hélder | K. K. Hof-und Universitits-Buchhindler | Rothen- thurmstrasse 15. Die Sprache der Tshinuk, vol. 2, part 1, division 2 (pp. 254-256) includes: Die Laute, p. 254.—Das Nomen, p. 254.—Das Pronomen, p. 255.—Das Verbum, pp. 255-256.—Die Zahlen- ausdriiecke, p. 256. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. tendent of the Yellowstone national park. | All rights reserved. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. | 1883. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. poem verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. 9-12, contents pp. 13-14, illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 17-170, notes pp. 171-221, glossary pp. 223-233, guide book pp. 235-275, map, sm. 8°. Glossary of Indian words and provincialisms, pp. 223-233, contains a number of Chinook Jargon words. Copies seen: National Museum, Pilling, Pow- ell. Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon By P. W. Norris, | five years superin- | Chinook Jargon | Numerals: Chinook See Boas (F.) Chinook Duflot de Mofras (E.) Chinook Eells (M.) Chinook Haldeman (S. 8.) Chinook Ross (A.) Chinook Jargon Cox (R.) Chinook Jargon Dictionary. Gill (J. K.) Good (J. B.) Haines (E. M.) Hale (H.) Hazlitt (W.C.) Montgomerie (J. E.) Nicoll (E. F.) Palmer (J.) Parker (S.) Richardson (A. D.) Stuart (G.) Swan (J. G.) Tate (C. M.) ’ ——— aS qn ~] CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES, |g Palmer (Joel). Journal of travels | over | Palmer (J.) — Continued. ge el ee ae —< = =. the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river; | made during the years 1845 and 1846: | con- taining minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon territory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, ;productions, ete., ete. ; | a list of | necessary outfits for emi- grants; | and aJ| Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Percé Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Inci- dents of Travel, &c., &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1847. Cover title: Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the | Columbia river; | made during the years 1845 | and 1846. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1847. Cover title, title verso copyright notice ete. 1 1. publishers’ statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189, errata slip, 12°. Words (200) used in the Chinook Jargon, alphabetically arranged by Jargon words, pp. 147-151.—Chinook mode of computing numbers (1-500), p. 152. Copies seen: Harvard. British Museum, Congress, — Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river ;| made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute | descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon terri- tory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, ete., etc.;|a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a| Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years,— among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organie Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chi- nook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Percé Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c., &e. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1850. Title verso copyright notice ete.1 1. publish- ers’ statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. Copies seen: British Museum. Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the |mouth of the Columbia river ;| made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a general description of | Oregon terri- tory; |its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, ete., etce.;]a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a| Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; Tables of about 300 words of the Chi- nook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Percé Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c., &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1851. Title verso copyright notice ete.1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. publishers’ advertisement pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sic], text pp. 9-189, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum. Journal of travels | over the | Rocky mountains, | to the | mouth of the Columbia river ;|made during the years 1845 and 1846: | containing minute descriptions of the | valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a Parker (Rev. Samuel). 58 Palmer (J.)— Continued. general description of | Oregon terri- tory; |its inhabitants, climate, soil, productions, etc., etc.;|a list of | necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a | Table of Distances from Camp to Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident Missionary, for the last ten years, | among the Nez Pereé Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | Organie Laws of Oregon Territory ; Tables of about 300 words of the Chin- ook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of the Nez Pereé Language; a Description of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, &c., &c. | By Joel Palmer. | Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut street, | between Fourth and | Fifth. | 1852. Title verso copyright notice ete.1 1. dedica- | tion verso blank 1 1. publishers’ advertisement | pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sic], text pp. 9-189, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above. Copies seen: Congress. Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. | Performed in the | years | 1835, ’36, and 737; | containing | | a description of the geography, geol- ogy, climate, and | productions; and the number, manners, and | customs of the natives. | With a| map of Oregon territory. | By Rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Published by the author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, Printers. | 1838. Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. lii-vi, contents pp. vii-xii, text pp. 13-371, map and plates, 12°. Vocabulary (90 words) of the Chinook [Jar- gon] language as spoken about Fort Vancouver, pp. 336-338.—Numerals 1-10, 20, 40, 100, p. 338. Copies seen: Boston Athenzeum, Boston Pub- lic, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Mallet, Trumbull. Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the| American board of | commissions [sic] for foreign missions, | in the years 1835, 36, and 737; | con- taining | a description of the geog- raphy, geology, climate, productions | of the country, and the number, man- ners, and | customs of the natives: | BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Parker (S.) — Continued. with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Second edition. | Ithaca, N. Y.| Published by the author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, printers. | 1840. Title verso copyright notice 11. reeommen- dations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-viii, preface to the second edition pp. ix—x, contetits pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 17-384, appendix pp. 385-399, addenda pp. 399-400, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under title next above, pp. 396-398. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological The edition: Edinburgh, 1841, 8°, does not contain the Chinook Jargon material. (Con- gress.) — Journal | of an| exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B.C. F. M. | in the years 1835, 36, and ’37; | containing | a description of the geography, ge- ology, climate, produc- | tions of the country, and the numbers, manners, | and customs of the natives: | with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rey. Samuel Parker, A.M. | Third edition. | Ithaca, N. Y.| Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff. | Boston: Crocker & Brew- ster.—New-York: Dayton & Saxton; | Collins, Keese, & co.—Philadelphia: Grigg & Elliot. | London: Wiley & Putnam. | 1842. Title verso copyright notice (1838) and names of printers 1 1. recommendations pp. ili-iv, preface pp. v-viii, preface to the second and third editions pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp.17-394, appendix pp. 395-408, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 405-408. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum, Eames, Geological Survey, Mallet. —— Journal | of an | exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M.| con- taining |a description of the geography, geology, climate, pro- | ductions of the country, and the numbers, man- | ners, and customs of the natives: | with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Sam- uel Parker, A. M. | Fourth edition. | Ithaca, N. Y. | Andrus, Woodruff, & Gauntlett. | Boston: Crocker & Brew- ster.—New York: Huntington & Sav- age; | Robinson, Pratt, & Co.—Phila- CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 59 Parker (S.)— Continued. —— so delphia: Thomas, Cowper- | thwait & Co.—London: Wiley & Putnam, | 1844. Pp. i-xvi, 17-416, map, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 413-416. Oopies seen: One in the library of W. W. | Beach, Yonkers, N. Y. Journal j of an| exploring tour | beyond the Rocky mountains, | under taining) a description of the geography, geology, climate, | productions of the country, and the numbers, | manners, and customs of the natives: | with a | map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Sam- uel Parker, A. M. | Fifth edition. | - the direction of the| A. B.C. F.M.| con- | Auburn: | J.C. Derby & co.; | New- | York: Mark H. Newman & co.,—Gen- eva: G. H. Derby & co. | Cincinnati: | Derby, Bradley & co. | 1846. Title verso copyright notice ete.11. recom- mendations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v—vii, preface to the fifth edition p. ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 17-422, map and plate, 12°. Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 419-421. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Georgetown, Harvard. Samuel Parker, clergyman, born in Ashfield, N. H., April 23, 1779; died in Ithaca, N. Y., March 24, 1866. He was graduated at Williams in 1806 and at Andover Theological Seminary in 1810, became a missionary in western New York, and subsequently was in charge of Con- gregational churches in Massachusetts and New York. Mr. Parker originated the mission of the American board in Oregon, traveled there in 1835-1837, subsequently lectured in many eastern States on the character of that territory, and did much to establish the claims of the United States Government to the lands, and to induce emigrants to settle there. He is also said to have been the first to suggest the possi- bility of constructing a railroad through the Rocky mountains to the Pacific ocean.—A pple- ton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. _ Periodical: Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Pilling: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to is in the possession of the compiler of this catalogue. Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson- ian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- uted only to collaborators) | i. Pilling (J. C.) — Continued. Washington | Government printing oftice | 1885 Title verso blatik 1 1. notice signed J. W. Powell p. iii, preface pp.v—-viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of the sheet only. Pinart (Alphonse L.) [Linguistic mate- rial relating to the Chinookan fam- Live (*) Manuscripts in possession of their author, who, some years ago, in response to my request for a list of his linguistic material,|wrote me as follows: ‘‘T have collected, during my fifteen years of traveling vocabularies, texts, songs, general linguistic material, etc.,in the following lan- guages and dialects . and some relating to the Chinook. It is impossible at present to give you the number of pages, etc., as most of it is contained in my note-books, and has not as yet been put into shape. | : : =i : | Platzmann (Julius). Verzeichniss | einer Auswahl | amerikanischer | Gramma- tiken, | Worterbiicher, Katechismen | u. s, w. | Gesammelt | von | Julius Platzmann. | Leipzig, 1876. | K.F.Kéhler’s anti- quarium, | Poststrasse 17. Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. quotation from Rouquette verso blank 1 1. text, alphabet- ically arranged by family names, pp. 1-38, 8°. List of works in Chinuk, p. 10. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Trumbull, Wellesley. Pilling, Pott (August Friedrich). Doppelung | (Reduplikation, Gemination) | als | eines der wichtigsten Bildungsmittel der Sprache, | beleuchtet | aus Sprachen aller Welttheile | durch | Aug. Friedr. Pott, Dr. | Prof. der Allgemeinen Sprachwiss. an der Univ. zu Halle [&e. two lines. ] | Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862. Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- tation1 1. Vorwort pp.iii-iv, Inhaltsverzeichniss pp. v—-vi, text pp. 1-304, list of books on versoof back cover, 8°. Reduplicate words in Chinook, p. 114; in Lower Chinook, pp. 37, 41, 60, 61, 62, 90. Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames. 60 Pott (A. F.) — Continued. Kinleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- wissenchaft. In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine BIBLIOGRAPHY | | | | | Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354, vol. 2, pp. 54-115, 209-251, vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275, Supp. pp. 1-193, vol. 4, pp. 67-96, vol. 5, pp. 3- 18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large | 8°. The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. Pott’s death, which occurred July 5,1887. The general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued from the manuscripts which he left, and that it | is to close with the languages of Australia. In | the section of American linguistics publica- tions in all the moreimportant stocks of North | America are mentioned, with briet characteri- zation. Powell: This word following a title or within parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the com- piier in the library of Major J. W. Powell, Washington, D.C. Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian lin- guistic families of America north of Mexico. By J. W. Powell. In Bureau of Ethnology, seventh annual report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°. Chinookan family, with a list of synonyms and principal tribes, derivation of the name, habitat, ete., pp. 63-65. Issued separately with title-page as follows: | —— Indian linguistic families of America | north of Mexico | by | Extract from the seventh annual report of the Bureau of ethnology | [Design] | Washington | Government printing office | 1891 Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title J. W. Powell | | | p. 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal | 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Pilling, Powell. Practical Chinook [Jargon] vocabulary. See Le Jeune (J. M. Rh.) Prayers: Cathlascon See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Chinook Blanchet (F. N.) Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon 3ulmer (T.S.) Demers (M.) et al. Priest (Josiah). American antiquities, | and | discoveries in the west: | being | an exhibition of the evidence | that an ancient population of partially civilized nations,| differing entirely from those of OF THE Priest (J.) — Continued. the present In- | dians, peopled America, many centuries before | its discovery by _ Columbus. | And | inquiries into their origin, | with a | copious description | Of many of their stupendous Works, now in ruins. | With | conjectures of what may have | become of them, | Com- piled | from travels, authentic sources, and the researches | of | Antiquarian Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | : Albany: | printed by Hoffman and White, No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. vV-vili, text pp. 9-400, map and plates, 8°. Rafinesque (C. 8.), Languages of Oregon— Chopunish and Chinue, pp. 395-397. _ Copies seen: Harvard. q American antiquities, | and | dis- coveries in the west: | being | an exhi- — bition of the evidence | thatan ancient — population of partially civilized na- tions, | differing entirely from those of the present In-| dians, peopled America, many centuries before | its discovery by Columbus. | And | inquiries into their origin,| with a | copious description | OF many of their stupendous Works, now in ruins. | With | conjectures concerning what may have| become of them. | Com- piled | from travels, authentic sources, — and the researches | of | Antiquarian Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | Third Edition Revised. | Albany: | printed by Hoffman and White, | No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v—viii, text pp. 9-400, map and plate, 8°. Rafinesque (C. S.), Tabular view of the American generic languages, pp. 309-312. —— Languages of Oregon—Chopunish and Chinue, pp. 395-397. Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Eames, Harvard, Massachusetts Historical Society. The Brinley copy, no. 5435, sold for $1.50. These articles are omitted in the later editions of Priest’s work. Primer: Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Proper names : Chinook See Catlin (G.) Chinook Stanley (J. M.) Clakama Stanley (J. M.) {Prosch (Thomas W.)] The complete | Chinook Jargon | or | Indian trade CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 61 Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. language | of | Oregon, Washington, 1888. | G. Davies & eco., | publishers, | Seattle, British Co- | lumbia, Alaska, Idaho | W.T. | ane 1888 i a ae s f Aye Cover title, title vers al . pretac a And other ports of the North Pacifie | WOE Ae gis eg Re Se ep RUE ETE fis , 3-5, text pp. 7-40, 18°. Coast. | The best yet issued. | | Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, G. Davies & co., | publishers. | 709 pp. 7-26.—English-Chinook, double columns, Front street, Seattle, | 1888. alphabetically arranged, pp. 27-38.—Conversa- Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook, | the | tion in Chinook, free translation, pp. 39-40.— : | Indian trade language | of | Oregon, Washing- | — Lord’s prayer with interlinear English trans- ton, Idaho, | British Columbia and | Alaska. | | lation, p. 40. Chinook-English and English-Chinook. | | Copies seen: Pilling. Q. Quaritch: This word following a title or within Quaritch (B.) — Continued. parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of the work referred to has been seen by the compiler in the bookstore of Bernard Quaritch, title of the series and the number of the part lettered on the back. Excepting the index, it . was originally issued as nos. 332-375 of the 3 London, Eng. | paper-covered series, from November, 1880, to Bpevaritch (Bernard). Catalogue | of August, 1887, at which date the publication : books on the | history, ge ography, | was discontinued. The index is dated 1892. Copies seen: Hames. and of | the philology | of | America, A large-paper edition with title as follows: Australasia, Asia, Africa. | I. Historical - geography, voyages, and | travels. | II. — A general catalogue of books | offered History, ethnology, and philology | of to the public at the affixed prices | by America. | III. History, topography, | Bernard Quaritch | Vol. I[-VII] | and ethnology | of Asia, Polynesia, and London :|15 Piccadilly, | 1887[-1892]. 7 vols. royal 8°. American languages, as under the preceding title, vol. 5, pp. 3021-3042. Copies seen: Lenox. net prices by | Bernard Quaritch. | | Africa. | Offered for Cash at the affixed | London: | 15 Piceadilly, June 1885 to _ October 1886. | 1886. This edition was published at 15l. for the set, 3 Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747— | including the seventh or index volume. 3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on the back: : i | caratoaus | parr xit. | ~~ No. 86. London, December, 1887. | A | VOYAGES | AND | TRAVELS | AMERICANA | AND | rough list. of | valuable and rare books, _ ‘ORIENTALIA | LONDON 1886. This volume com- | | comprising | the choicest portions of ; prises nos. 362-364 (June, July,and August, 1885) | Tarious Libraries, and many very cheap of the paper-covered series, with the addition of | a special title and a general index. American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains | two titles of books under the heading Chinook p. 3026. works of every class of Literature, | at greatly reduced prices, | offered by | Bernard Quaritch, 15, Piccadilly, W. Cover title: ‘‘The miscellaneous and the The complete ‘‘General Catalogue,” of which musical library of Mr. William Chappell,” etc., the above is a portion, comprises 15 parts, each catalogue with heading as above, pp. 1-128, 8°. bound in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4066, | American languages, pp. 1-13, contains titles and a sixteenth part containing a general index of afew works giving information relating to of 427 pages in treble columns. Each volume the Chinook Jargon, p. 7. has its own special title and index, with the | Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. ) | ; r , 62 Rafinesque (Constantine Samuel). At- | lantic journal, | and | friend of knowl. | edge. | In eight numbers, | Containing about 160 original articles and tracts on Natural and | Historical Sciences, the Description of about 150 New Plants, | and 100 New Animals or Fossils. Many Vocabularies of Langua- | ges, Histor- ical and Geological Facts, &c, &c. &c. | | By C.S. Rafinesque, A.M... Ph.D. | Professor of Historical and Natural Sciences, Member of seve- | ral learned societies in Europe and America, &c. | [Quotation and list of figures, six lines. ] | Philadelphia: | 1832-1833. | (Two dollars. ) Tabular view recto blank 1 1. title verso in- dex 1 l.iconography and illustrations ete.1 1. text pp. 1-202, 205-212, 8°. Originally issued in numbers (1-8, and extra of no. 3), from the ‘spring of 1832” to the ‘‘ winter of 1833.” American history. Tabular View of the Amer- ican Generic Languages, and Original Nations, including the Chinue, pp. 6-8. Languages of Oregon, Chopunish and Chinuc (pp. 133-184) contains a vocabulary, English and Chinuc, thirty-three words (including numerals 1-10), from Cox, Lewis, and other sources, p. 134. Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu- seum, Congress, Eames. These two articles reprinted in: Priest (J.), American antiquities, pp. 309-312, 395-397, Albany, 1833, 8°. Constantine Samuel Rafinesque, botanist, born in Galatz, a suburb of Constantinople, Turkey, in 1784, died in Philadelphia, Pa., Sep- tember 18,1842. He was of French parentage, and his father, amerchant, died in Philadelphia about 1791. The son came to Philadelphia with his brother in 1802, and, after traveling through Pennsylvania and Delaware, returned with a collection of botanical specimens in 1865 and went to Sicily, where he spent ten years as a merchant and in the study of botany. In 1815 he sailed for New York, but was shipwrecked on the Long Island coast, and lost his valuable books, collections, manuscripts, and drawings. In 1818 he went to the west and became pro- fessor of botany in Transylvania University, Lexington, Ky. Subsequently he traveled and lectured in various places, endeavored to estab- lish a magazine and botanic garden, but with- out success, and finally settled in Philadelphia, where he resided until his death, and where he published The Atlantic Journal and Friend of Knowledge; a CyclopedicJournaland Review, of which only eightnumbers appeared (1832-33). The number of genera and species that he BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Rafinesque (C.S.) — Continued. introduced into his works produced great con- fusion. A gradual deterioration is found in Rafinesque’s botanical writings from 1819 till 1830, when the passion for establishing new genera and species seems to have become a monomania with him. He assumed thirty to one hundred years as the average time required for the production of a new species and five hundred to a thousand years for anew genus. It is said that he wrote a paper describing “twelve new species of thunder and lightning.” Inaddition to translations and unfinished botan- ical and zodlogical works, he was the author of numerous books and pamphlets.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. [Reade(John).] Chinook versus Greek. In Montreal Gazette, vol. 119, no. 239, p. 4, Montreal, October 6,1890. (Pilling.) A review of Hale (H.), An international idiom. Contains a general discussion of the Chinook Jargon, with a number of examples. Reviews: Chinook Jargon See Charencey (C. de.) Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) Chinook Jargon Leland (C. G.) Chinook Jargon Reade (J.) Chinook Jargon Western. Richardson (Albert Deane). Beyond the Mississippi: | from the great river to the great ocean. | Life and adventure |on the | prairies, mountains, and Pacific coast. | With more than two hundred illustrations, from photo- graphs and original | sketches, of the prairies, deserts, mountains, rivers, — mines, | cities, Indians, trappers, pion- eers, and great natural | curiosities of the new states and territories. | 1857— 1867. | By | Albert D. Richardson, | author of ‘Field, dungeon and escape.’ | [Two lines advertisement. ] | Hartford, Conn., | American pub- lishing company. | National publishing company, | Philadelphia, Pa., Cincin- nati, O., Chicago, IIl., St. Louis, Mo., | New Orleans, La., Atlanta, Ga., Rich- mond, Va.| Bliss & company, New York. | 1867. Engraved title: Beyond | the | Mississippi | Albert D. Richardson. Map, engraved title verso blank, title verso copyright notice 1 1. extracts from Whittier and Longfellow verso blank 1 1. prefatory pp. i-i, illustrations pp. iii-vii, contents pp. ix—xvi, text pp. 17-972, 8°. Short vocabulary (20 words, alphabetically oe Oe malar CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 63 ‘Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. arranged by English words) of the Chinook Jargon, and the numerals 1-10, 20, 30, 100, 1000 in the same, pp. 502-503. Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenwum, Brit- ish Museum, Congress, Trumbull. Some copies vary slightly inthe imprint, and omit the date. (Eames, Harvard.) Another edition: Hartford, 1869, 8°. (*) A later edition with title-page as follows: — Beyond the Mississippi: | from the great river to the great ocean. | Life and adventure |on the | prairies, moun- tains, and Pacific coast. | With more than two hundred illustrations, from | photographs and original | sketches, of the prairies, deserts, mountains, Tivers, mines, | cities, Indians, trap- pers, pioneers, and great natural | curiosities of the new states and terri- tories. | New edition. | Written down to summer of 1869. | By | Albert D. Richardson, | author of ‘Field, dun- geon and escape,’ and ‘Personal | his- tory of Ulysses 8. Grant.’ | [Two lines advertisement. ] | Hartford: | American company, | 1875. 2p. ll. pp. i-xvi, 17-572, 8°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Trumbull. publishing Albert Deane Richardson, journalist, born in Franklin, Mass., October 6, 1833, died in New York city December 2, 1869. He was edu- cated at the district school of his native village and at Holliston academy. At eighteen years | of age he went to Pittsburg, Pa., where he | formed a newspaper connection, wrote a farce for Barney Williams, and appeared a few times on the stage. In 1857 he went to Kansas. taking an active part in the political struggle of the territory, attending antislavery meet- ings, makingspeeches, and corresponding about the issues of the hour with the Boston Journal. He was also secretary of the territorial legisla- ture. Two years later he went to Pike’s Peak, the gold fever being then at its height, in com- pany with Horace Greeley, between whom and Richardson a lasting friendship was formed. In the autumn of 1859 he made a journey through the southwestern territories, and sent accounts of his wanderings to eastern journals. During the winter that preceded the civil war he vol- unteered to go through the south as secret cor- respondent of the Tribune, and returned, after many narrow escapes, just before the firing on Sumter. He next entered the field as war cor- respondent, and for two years alternated between Virginia and the southwest, being present at many battles. On the night of May 3, 1863, he undertook, in company with Junius Henri Browne, a fellow correspondent of the Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. Tribune, and Richard T. Colburn, of the New York World, to run the batteries of Vicksburg on two barges, which were lashed to a steam tug. After they had been under fire for more than half an hour, a large shell struck the tug, and, bursting in the furnace, threw the coals on the barges and then set them on fire. Out of 34 men, 18 were killed or wounded and 16 were captured, the correspondents among them. ‘The Confederate government would neither release nor exchange the Tribune men, who, after spending eighteen months in seven southern prisons, escaped from Salisbury, N.C.,in the dead of winter, and, walking 400 miles, arrived within the national lines at Strawberry Plains, Tenn., several months before the close of the war.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. | Ross (Alexander). Adventures | of the first settlers on the | Oregon or Colum- bia river: | being | a narrative of the expedition fitted out by | John Jacob Astor, | to establish the | ‘‘ Pacific fur company ;” | with an account of some | Indian tribes on the coast of the Pacific. | By Alexander Ross, | one of the adventurers. | London: | Smith, Elder and co., 65 Cornhill. | 1849. Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-v, contents pp. vi-xv, errata p. [xvi], text pp. 1-352, 12°. Vocabulary of the Chinook (200 words) and numerals (1-5000), pp. 342-348.— Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (30 words), p. 349. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Atheneum, British Museum, Bureau of Eth- nology, Congress, Trumbull. Alexander Ross, author, born in Nairnshire, Scotland, May 9, 1783, died in Colony Gardens (now in Winnipeg, Manitoba), Red River Set- tlement, British North America, October 23, 1856. He came to Canada in 1805, taught in Glengarry, U. C., and in 1810 joined John Jacob Astor’s expedition to Oregon. Until 1824 he was a fur-trader and in the service of the Hud- son Bay Company. About 1825 he removed to the Red River settlement and was a member of the council of Assineboia, and was sheriff of the Red River settlement for several years. He was for fifteen years a resident in the territo- ries of the Hudson Bay Company, and has given the result of his observations in the works: Adventures of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia River; being a Narrative of the Expedition fitting out by John Jacob Astor to establish the Pacific Fur Company, with an Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific (London, 1849); The Fur-Hunters of the Far West, a Narrative of Adventures in the Oregon and Rocky Mountains (2 vols. 1855), and The Red River Settlement (1856).—A pple- ton’s Oyclop. of Am. Biog. 64. BIBLIOGRAPH 8. Sabin (Joseph). A | dictionary | of | Books relating to America, | from its discovery to the present time. | By Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XX]. | [Three lines quotation. ] | New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau street. | 1868[-1892]. 20 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication. Parts exv-exvi, which begin vol. 20, reach the article ‘‘Smith.’’ Now edited by Mr. Wilber- force Eames. Contains, passim, titles of books in and relating to the Chinookan languages. Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Lenox. See Field (T. W.) [St. Onge (Rev. Louis Napoleon).] His- tory of the old testament. | Age I. | From Adam to Abraham, | Containing 2083 Years. [Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] No title-page, heading only; text in the Chinook Jargon, stenographie characters, with English headings in italics, pp. 1-24, 16°. Forms a supplement to Le Jeune (J. M. R.), Kamloops Wawa, vol. 2, nos. 1-6 (nos. 33-88 of the series), July 3-August 7, 1892. Oopies seen: Pilling. — +] Bible history | translated | into the Chinook Jargon by | the Rey. L. N. Saint Onge Missionary | among the Yakamas and other Indian tribes of the Territo-| ries of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and of | Oregon, | A. M. D.G. | 1892. Manuscript; title verso blank 11. preface 13 leaves, written on one side only, text (in the Jargon with interlinear English translation, written on both sides) Il. 1-142, 4°. In possession of Dr. T. S. Bulmer, Cedar City, Utah, who intends incorporating it in one of his publica- tions on the Chinook Jargon. Father St. Onge informs me that he intends publishing this paper separately also, under the title of ““Chinook Jargon translation of the Epitome Historia Sacre.” — Chinook Jargon Dictionary | by | L. N. Saintonge, Ptre. | English-Chinook Jargon. | Part first. | Troy, N. Y., U. S. A.: | 1892. | A. M. DSG Manuscript; title verso note 1 1. text (alpha- betically arranged by English words) pp. 1-184, 8°. Recorded in a blank book bound in leather. In possession of its author. Chinook Wawa [writing], pp. 1-181.—Sounds of the letters used, pp. 142-154, Y OF THE St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. The dictionary contains probably 6,000 words. Concerning the second part of this work, Father Saintonge writes me, under date of January 24, 1893, as follows: “T am not now working at my dictionary (second part) because I am not well enough, but T intend to finish it as soon as Tean. ITcan not have it published now because I have not the means for that purpose. You may say it is intended for publication some time in the future. The second part will not be so volu- minous as the first; the list of words will not be so great, but the definitions will take greater space, as I shall give the etymology and source from which each Jargon word comes.” — Hymns in the Chinook Jargon. In Bulmer (T. S.), Hymns, songs, &c., in Chinook Jargon (manuscript), ll. 34-45. —— [Legends in the Chinook Jargon. } In Bulmer (T. S.), Appendix to Bulmer’s Chinook Jargon grammar and dictionary (man- uscript) ll. 26-57, 4°. Accompanied by an interlinear translation in English. — See Bulmer (T.S.) —— See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F.N.) and St. Onge (L. N.) ““The subject of this sketch, the Rev. Louis N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori parish, was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few miles south of Montreal, Canada, April14, 1842. He finished his classical course when yet very young, after which he studied law for two years. Feeling called to another field, he gave up this career in order to prepare himself to work for God's glory as an Indian missionary in the diocese of Nesqually, Washington Terri- tory. “A year and a half before his ordination, Right Rey. A. M. Blanchet, his bishop, ordered him to Vancouver, W.'T., where he was occu- pied as a professor of natural philosophy, astronomy, and other branches in the Holy Angel's College. All his spare time was conse- crated to the study of the Indian languages, in which he is to-day one of the most expert, so that he was ready to go on active missionary work as soon as ordained. ‘“The first years of his missionary life were occupied in visiting different tribes of Indians and doing other missionary work in the Terri- tories of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and other Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians and miners. After such labors he was then appointed to take charge of the Yakamas, Klikitats, Winatchas, Wishrams, Pshwanwa- pams, Narchez, and other Indian tribes inhab- iting the central part of Washington Territory. Having no means of support in his new mis- = d 4 CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. sion, Bishop Blanchet, in his self-sacrificing charity for the Indians of his extensive diocese, furnished him with the necessary outfit; and | with a number of willing though unskilled | Indians as apprentice carpenters, the young missionary set to work to rebuild the St. Joseph's mission, destroyed in 1856 by a party of vandals called the Oregon Volunteers, who had been sent to fight the Yakamas. “After four years of labor, he and his devoted companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now ordained and stationed among the Tulalip In- dians) had the satisfaction to see not only a comfortable residence, but also a neat church, erected, and a fine tract of land planted with fruit trees, and in a profitable state of cultiva- reigned. “His health breaking down entirely, he was forced to leave his present and daily increasing congregation of neophites. Wishing to give him the best medical treatment, Bishop Blanchet | sent Father St. Onge to his native land with a leave of absence until his health would be restored. During his eighteen months’ stay in a hospital he, however, utilized his time by composing and printing two small Indian books, containing rules of grammar, catechism, hymns, and Christian prayers in Yakama and Chinook languages—the former for children, the latter for the use of missionaries on the Pacific coast. “By the advice of his physician he then | undertook a voyage to Europe, where he spent nearly a year in search of health. Back again to this country, he had charge of a congregation for acouple of years in Vermont; and now he | is the pastor of the two French churches of | Glens Fails and Sandy Hill, in the diocese of Albany, New York. “Father St. Onge, though a man of uncom- mon physical appearance, stoutly built and six feet and four inches in height, has not yet entirely recovered his health and strength. The French population of Glens Falls have good cause for feeling very much gratified with the present condition of the affairs of the parish of | St. Alphonse de Liguori, and should receive the hearty congratulations of the entire commu- nity. Father St. Onge, aman of great erudition, a devoted servant to the church, and possessing a personality whose geniality and courtesy have won him a place in the hearts of his peo- ple, has by his faithful application to his parish developed it and brought out all that was to inure to its benefit and further advance its interests.” —Glens Falls (N. Y.) Republican, March 28, 1889. Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until October, 1891, when increasing infirmities com- pelled him to retire permanently from the min- | istry. He is now living with his brother, the | rector of St. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, N. Y. Since his retirement he has compiled an English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about ‘CHIN -5 | Sayce (Archibald Henry). tion, where formerly only ruin and desolation | 65 St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. six thousand words, and this he intends to supplement with a corresponding Jargon-Eng- lish part. of a Yakama dictionary, which he hopes to He has also begun the preparation make much more complete than that of Father Pandosy, published in Dr, Shea’s Library of American linguistics. I have adopted the spelling of his name as it appears on the title-page of Bishop Demers’s Chinook Jargon dictionary, though the true spelling, and the one he uses now, is Saint onge—that of a French province in which his ancestors lived and from which four or five families came in 1696, all adopting the name. His family name is Payant. Introduction to the | science of language. | By | A. H. Sayce, | deputy professor of compar- ative philology in the university of Oxford. | In two volumes. | Vol.I{-I1]. | (Design. ] | London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, Paternoster square. | 1880. 2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso quotation and notice 1 1. preface pp.v—viii, table of contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-441, colo- phon verso blank 11.; half-title verso blank 11. title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of con- tents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected list of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421, 12°. A classification of American languages (vol. 2, pp. 57-64) includes the Chinook, p. 60. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames. Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | and | statistical information, | respect- ing the | history, condition and pros- pects | of the | Indian tribes of the United States: | collected and prepared under the direction | of the | bureau of Indian affairs, | per actof Congress of March 3d, 1847, | by Henry R. School- craft, LL.D. Ilustrated by 8. Eastman, capt. U.S. A. | Published by Authority of Congress. | Part I[-VI]. | Philadelphia: | Lippincott,Grambo & company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot & co.) | 1851[-1857]. Engraved title: [Engraving.] | Historical | and | statistical information | respecting the | history, condition and prospects! of the | Indian tribes of the United States: | Collected and pre. pared under the | direction of the bureau of Indian affairs, per act of Congress | of Mareh 311847 | by Henry R. Schooleratt L.L.D. | Illus. trated by | S. Eastman, capt. U.S. army. | [Coat of arms.] | Published by authority of Con- gress. | Part 1 [-V1]. | Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo & co. 6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words ‘‘ Historical and statistical’ are left off the 66 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE ; Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. Schoolcraft (H. R.)— Continued. title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse- quently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the abridged title beginning ‘‘ Information respect- ing the history, condition, and prospects of the | Indian tribes,’ making it uniform with the other parts. Two editions with these title-pages were pub- | lished by the same house, one on thinner and somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols 1-5 | were issued. Part 1, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- searches, | respecting | the red man of America) verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso blank 1 1. printed title as above verso blank 1 1. introductory documents pp. ili-vi, preface pp. vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii- xviii, text pp. 13-524, appendix pp. 525-568, plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered 1-76. Part I, 1852. Half-title (as in part I) verso | blank 11. engraved title (Information respecting the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso blank 11. printed title (Information respecting | the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso printers 11. dedication verso blank1 1. introduc- tory document pp.vii-xiv, contents pp. xv—xxii, list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet and its application. Part 1, 1853. Half-title (as in part I) verso blank 1 l.engraved title (as in part 11) verso blank 11. printed title (as in part 1) verso printer 11. third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, contents xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii- xviii, text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 1-21, 25-45. Part Iv, 1854. Half-title {as in part 1) verso blank 11. engraved title (asin parti) verso blank 1 1. printed title (as in part 11) verso blank 1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of plates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and | maps numbered 1-42. | Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part I) verso blank 11. engraved title (as in part II) verso blank 11. printed title (as in part 1) verso blank 11. dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix—xii, list of divisions p, xiii, synopsis of general contents of vols. I-v pp. xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxii, list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 25-625, ap- pendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 1-8, 10-36. Part VI, 1857. Half-title (General history | of the | North American Indians) verso blank 11. portrait 11. printed title (History | of the| Indian tribes of the United States: | their | present condition and prospects, | and a sketch of their | ancient status. | Published by order of con- gress, |under the direction of the department of the interior—Indian bureau. | By | Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, LL. D. | Member [&c. six lines.] | With Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | Inone volume. | Part vi of the series. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott, & co. | 1857.) verso blank 11. | inscription verso blank 1 1. letter to the presi- dent pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix—x, preface pp. xi- xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. XXvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756, fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the other volumes, and three tables. Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (340 words alphabetically arranged by English words) vol. 5, pp. 548-551. Emmons (G. F.), Replies to inquiries respect- ing the Indian tribes of Oregon and California, vol. 3, pp. 200-225. Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian fami- lies of speech, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull. At the Fischer sale, 0.1581, Quaritch bought acopy for 4l.10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the Squier copies, no, 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 5l.5s.; the Pinart copy, no. 828 (5 vols. in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, 101. 10s.; by Clarke & co, 1886, $65; by Quaritch, in 1888, 151. Reissued with title-pages as follows: —— Archives| of| Aboriginal Knowledge. | Containing all the | Original Papers laid before Congress | respecting the | History, Antiquities, Language, Eth- nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti- tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian Tribes of the United States | by| Henry R. Schooleraft, LL. D. | With Illustra- tions. | Oncendun ih iew muzzinyegun un.—Algonguin. | In six volumes. | Volume I[{-VI]. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. | 1860. Engraved title: Information | respecting the | History, Condition and Prospects | of the | Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected and prepared under the| Bureau of Indian Affairs | By Henry R. Schooleraft L. L.D. | Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An- tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.t S. Eastman, U.S.A.andother eminent artists. | [Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con- gress. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 6 vols. maps and plates, 4°. This edition agrees in the text page for page with the original titled above, and contains in addition an index to each volume. Copies seen: Congress. Partially reprinted with title as follows: [——] The | Indian tribes] of the| United States: | their | history, antiquities, cus- toms, religion, arts, language, | tradi- CHINOOKAN Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. tions, oral legends, and myths. | Edited by|Francis 8. Drake. | Ilustrated with one hundred fine engravings on steel. | In two volumes. | Vol. I{-II]. | Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. | London: 16 Southampton street, Covent Garden. | 1884. 2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list of plates pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text pp- 25-458; frontispiece 1 1. title verso copy- right notice 1 1. contents pp. 3-6, list of plates p.7, text pp. 9-445, index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. “Tn the following pages the attempt has been made to place before the public in a convenient and accessible form the results of the life-long | labors in the field of aboriginal research of the | late Henry R. Schoolcraft.” Chapter u, Language, literature, and pic- | tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general | remarks on the Indian languages. Copies seen: Congress. Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25. Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in [Watervliet] Albany county, N. Y., March 28, 1793, died in Washington, D. C., December 10, 1864. Was educated at Middlebury college, Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the | studies ofchemistry and mineralogy. In 1817-18 he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, and returned with a large collection of geological and mineralogical specimens. appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass’s explor- ing expedition to Lake Superior and the head- waters of Mississippi River. He was secre- tary of a commission to treat with the Indians | at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illi- nois and along Wabash and Miami rivers, was in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes of the lake region, establishing himself at Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mack- inaw, where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston, granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway chief, who received her education in Europe. In 1828 he founded the Michigan historical society and in 1831 the Algic society. From 1828 till 1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- tureof Michigan. In 1832 heled a government expedition, which followed the Mississippi River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the upper lakes for the cession to the United States of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then appointed acting superintendent of Indian affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent for the northern department. On his return from Europe in 1842 he made atour through western | He wasappointed | Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. by the New York legislature in 1845 a commis- sioner to take the census of the Indians in the state and collect information concerning the Six Nations. After the performance of this task, Congressauthorized him, on March 3, 1847, In 1820 he was | to obtain through the Indian bureau reports | LANGUAGES. 67 Schoolcraft (HH. hk.) — Continued. relating to all the Indian tribes of the country, and to collate and edit the information. In this work he spent the remaining years of his life. Through his influence many laws were enacted for the protection and benefit of the Indians. Numerous scientific societies in the United States and Europe elected him to membership, and the University of Geneva gave him the degree of LL.D. in 1846. He was the author of numerous poems, lectures, and reports on Indian subjects, besides thirty-one larger works. Two of his lectures before the Algic society at Detroit on the ‘‘Grammatical Con- struction of the Indian Languages” were trans- lated into French by Peter 8. Duponcean, and gained for their author a gold medal from the French institute. To the five volumes of Indian researches compiled under the direc- tion of the war department he added a sixth, containing the post-Columbian history of the Indians and of their relations with Europeans (Philadelphia, 1857). He had collected material for two additional volumes, but the Govern- ment suddenly suspended the publication of the work.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on the indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of America. By John Scouler, M. D., F. IDSs eee In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251, London, 1841, 8°. (Congress.) Includes vocabularies of a number of the languages of the region named, among them the Chinook (entrance to Columbia River) and Cathlascon (banks of the Columbia), pp. 242- 247. Furnished the author by Dr. W, F. Tolmie. Extracts from these vocabularies appear in Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. On the Indian Tribes inhabiting the North-West Coast of America. By John Sconler, M.D., F.L. 8. Communicated by the Ethnological Society. In Edinburgh New Philosoph. Jour. vol. 41, pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846, 8°. (Congress.) Vocabulary (19 words) of the Chikeelis [Chi- nook Jargon], compared with the Tlaoquatch (of Tolmie) and the Nootkan (of Mozino) p. 176. Reprinted in the Ethnological Soc. of Lon- don Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, Edinburgh, n. 4., 8°, the vocabulary occurring on p. 236. | Semple (J. E.) Vocabulary of the Clat- sop language. Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°,in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D.C. Col- lected in 1870 near Fort Stevens, Oregon. Contains 35 words only. Sentences: Cascade See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Chinook Franchére (G.) Chinook Jargon Allen (A.) Chinook Jargon Chinook. Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 65 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Sentences — Continued. Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) Chinook Jargon Green (J.5.) Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) Chinook Jargon Leland (C. G.) Chinook Jargon Macfie (M.) Chinook Jargon Macdonald (D.G. F.) Chinook Jargon Stuart (G.) Clakama Gatschet (A.S.) Sermons: Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) Chinook Jargon New. Shortess (Robert). Vocabulary of the Lower Chinook. Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text 5 11. written on one side only, folio; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1853. Contains 180 words. Smith (Silas B.) On the Chinook names of the salmon in the Columbia River. By Silas B. Smith. In National Museum Proce. vol. 4, pp. 391-392, Washington, 1882, 8°. (Pilling.) Comprises a half-dozen names only. Smithsonian Institution: These words following a title or within parentheses after a note indi- cate that a copy of the work referred to has | been seen by the compiler in the library of that | institution, Washington, D.C. Songs: Chinook See Boas (F.) Chinook Eells (M.) Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T.S.) Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) Sproat (Gilbert Malcolm). Scenes and studies | of savage life. | By | Gilbert | Malcolm Sproat. | [Two lines quota- | tion.] | London: Smith, Elder and co. | 1868. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- tion verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-x, preface | pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-310, appendix pp. 311-317, colophon p. [318], 12°. Chapter xv. Intellectual capacity and lan- guage (pp. 119-148) includes a vocabulary of 14 words showing affinities between the Chinook Jargon and Aht, p. 189.—General discussion of the languages, including the Chinook Jargon, with examples, pp. 139-142.—Note on the Chi- nook and Jargon- Chinook, pp. 313-314. Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Public, Brit- | ish Museum, Congress, Eames, Georgetown. Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North American Indians, | with sketches of scenery, ete. | painted by | J. M. Stan- ley. | Deposited with | the Smithsonian institution.) [Seal of the institution. ] | Washington: | Smithsonian institu- tion. | December, 1852. Stanley (J. M.) — Continued. Cover title as above, title as above verso names of printers 11. preface verso contents 1 1. text pp. 5-72, index pp. 73-76, 8°. Forms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous Collections, 53; also part of vol. 2 of the same series, Washington, 1862. Contains the names of personages of many Indian tribes of the United States, toanumber of which is added the English signification. | Among the peoples represented are the Chi- | nooks, p. 60; Clackamas, p. 61. Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Geological Survey, Pilling, Smithsonian, Wel- lesley. Steiger (E.) Steiger’s | bibliotheca glot- tica, | part first. | A catalogue of | Dic- tionaries, Grammars, Readers, Exposi- tors, ete. | of mostly |modern languages | spoken in all parts of the earth, | except of | English, French, German, and Spanish. | First division :| Abenaki to Hebrew. | 1. Steiger, | 22. & 24 Frankfort Street, | New York. [1874.] Half-title on cover, title as above verso name of printer 1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 11. col- ophon on back cover, 12°. Titles of works relating to American lan- guages generally, p.3; Chinook, p. 24. The second division of the first part was not published. Part second is on the Enylish lan- guage and part third on the German language. In his notice the compiler states : ‘‘ This com- pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at acomplete linguistic bibliography, butsolely as a bookseller’s catalogue for business purposes, with special regard to the study of philology in America.” Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. Stuart (Granville). Montana as it is; | being | a general description of its re- sources,| both mineral and agricultural, | including a | complete description of the face of the | country, its climate, etc.,| illustrated with a | map of the ter- ritory, | drawn by capt. W.W. De Lacy, | showing the different roads and the location of | the different mining dis- tricts. | To which is appended, | complete dictionary | of | the Snake language, | and also of the | famous Chinnook [sic] Jargon, | with | numer- ous critical and explanatory notes, | concerning the habits, superstitions, ete., of | these Indians, | with | itiner- aries of all the routes across the plains. | By Granville Stuart. | ee Se ny Ee a — =" a Swan (James Gilchrist). | | Tate (Iev. Charles Montgomery). CHINOOKAN Stuart (G.) — Continued. New York: | C. 8. Westcott & co., printers, | No. 79 John street. | 1865. Half-title: A | dictionary ; of the | Chinnook Jargon, | in use among the tribes of | Oregon, Washington territory, British Columbia, | and the north Pacifie coast, | with | critical and explanatory notes. | By Granville Stuart. Cover title as above, large folded map, title LANGUAGES. 69 | Swan (J. G.) — Continned. as above verso copyright notice 11. preface pp. | 3-4, text pp. 5-98, half-title verso blank 1 1. preface verso rules of pronunciation pp. 101- 102, text pp. 103-175, 8°. Dictionary of the Chinnook Jargon, alpha- betically arranged by English words, pp. 103- 119.—Numerals 1-10, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p. 119.— Short dialogue in Chinnook Jargon, pp. 120- 121.—Explanatory notes, pp. 122-127. Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Eames, Georgetown. Congress, The | north- west coast; | or, | three years’ resi- dence in Washington | territory. | By James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | With numerous illustrations. | New York: | Harper & brothers, publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice | 11. dedication verso blank 11. introduction pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. | {xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431-435, 12°. Language of the Indians (pp. 306-326) con- tains remarks on the Jargon, different methods of spelling words by writers, difficulty of | rightly understanding the Jargon, etc., including a comparative vocabulary of Nootka, Chenook dialect or Jargon, and English (11 words), p. 307; explanation of a number of Jargon words, pp. 316-317. Vocabulary of the Chenook or Jargon (about 250 words, alphabet- ically arranged) and numerals 1-1000, pp. 415- 421.—Comparative list of 12 words in Nootka, and Chenook or Jargon, p. 422.—Many Chinook terms passim, Copies seen; Astor, Bancroft, British a Chi- | nook | As Spoken by the Indians | of | Washington Territory, British Columbia | and Alaska. | For the use of Traders, Tourists and others | who have business intercourse with | the Indians. | Chinook-English. English- Chinook. | By | rev. C. M. Tate, | Published by M. W. Waitt & co., | Victoria, B,C, [1889.] Cover title (as above, with the addition of the following around the border: Bourchier & Higgins, | real estate brokers. | Insurance —— The | northwest Museum, Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Harvard, Pilling. Issued also with title-page as follows: coast; | or, | tnree years’ residence in Washington | terri- tory. | By | James G. Swan. | With munerous illustrations. | London: | Sampson Low, Son & co., 47 Ludgate hill. | New York: Harper & brothers. | 1857. Frontispiece 1 1. title 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. v—vii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. xv, map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 435, 12°. Linguistic contents as under title next above. Copies seen: Charles L. Woodward, New York City. Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- ford, Masg., January 11, 1818, and was educated at an academy in that place. In 1833 he went to soston to reside, and remained there until 1849, when heleft forSan Francisco, where he arrived in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, where he remained until 1856, when he returned east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since then Port Townsend has been his headquarters. In 1860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. InJune, 1862, he was appointed teacher of the Makah Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he went a second time to Alaska, this time under the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial Exposition. This fine collection is now in the U.S. National Museum at Washington. July 31, 1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and remained there until August, 1888, addingmuch to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which was reported to Prof, Baird and published in a bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. In 1883 he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the Smithsonian Institution and made another col- lection for the U.S. National Museum, Tate (C. M.) — Continued. agents. | Financial agents), title as above verso copyright notice (1889) and name of printer1]. preface (May 17, 1889) verso blank 11. text pp, 5-47, 16°. Part I. Chinook [Jargon]-English, alphahet- ically arranged, pp. 5-23.—Part IL. English- Chinook [Jargon], alphabetically arranged, pp, 24-47.—Numerals, 1-12, 20, 50, 100, p. 47, P Copies seen; Eames, Pilling, —— [Hymn in the Chinook language. ] Manuscript, 1 leaf, 8°, in the possession of the compiler of this bibliography. One v erse and chorus of the hymn ‘ Nothing but the blood of Jesus.” ‘Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). T0 Tate (C. M.) — Continued. ““Mr. Tate came to British Columbia from Northumberland, England, in 1870. He engaged in mission work among the Flathead Indians at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island,in 1871, where he learned the Aukaménum language spoken by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Van- couver Island, lower Fraser River, and Puget Sound. Here he spent three years, when he removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next moved to the Fraser River and spent seven years amongst the Flathead tribes between Yale and Westminster, frequently visiting the Indians on the Nootsahk River in Washington Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 188+, among the Bella-Bellas, returning in the latter year to the mission on Fraser River.” ‘Ten commandments: Chinook Jargon See Everette (W. E.) ‘Texts: See Boas (F.) 3ulmer (T.S.) Demers (M.) Dictionary. Eells (M.) Chinook ‘Chinook Jargon ‘Chinook Jargon ‘Chinook Jargon Chinook Jargon [ Voeabu- laries of certain languages of the northwest coast of America. ] In Scouler (J.), Observations on the indig- enous tribes of northwest America, in Royal ‘Geog. Soc. of London Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251, ‘London, 1841, 8°. Includes, among others, vocabularies of the ‘Chenook and Cathlascon, pp. 242-247. and Dawson (G.M.) Geological and natural history survey of Canada. | Alfred R. C. Selwyn, F.R.S., F.G.S., Director. | Comparative vocabularies | of the | Indian tribes | of | British Columbia, | with a map illustrating dis- tribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie, | Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians and Surgeons,Glasgow. | And | George M. Dawson, D.S.,A.S.R.M., F.G.S., &c. | [Coat of arms.] | Published by author- ity of Parliament. | Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1884. Cover title nearly as above, title as above verso blank 11. letter of transmittal signed by G. M. Dawson verso blank 1 1. preface signed by G. M. Dawson pp. 5b-7b, introductory note signed by W. ¥. Tolmie pp. 9-120, text pp. 14b- 131b, map, 8°. Vocabulary (243 words) of the Tshinook tribe and of the Tilhilooit or upper Tshinook, pp- 50b-61b.—Comparison of words in various Indian languages of North America, among them a few in the Chinook, pp. 1z8b-130b. Copies seen: Eames, Georgetown, Pilling, Wellesley. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE Tolmie (W. F.)— Continued, William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver- ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died De- cember 8, 1886, after anillness of only threedays, at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B.C. He was educated at Glasgow University, where he graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 of the same year he accepted a position as sur- geon and clerk with the Hudson’s Bay Com- pany, and left home for the Columbia River, arriving in Vancouver in the spring of 1833. Vancouver was then the chief post of the Hud- son’s Bay Company on this coast. In 1841 he visited his native land, but returned in 1842 overland via the plains and the Columbia, and was placed in charge of the Hudson’s Bay posts on Puget Sound. He here took a prominent part, during the Indian war of 1855—’56, in pacifying the Indians. Being an excellent linguist, he hadacquired a knowledge of the native tongues and was instrumental in bringing about peace between the Americans and the Indians. He was appointed chief factor of the Hudson’s Bay Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver [sland in 1859, when he went into stock-raising, being the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into British Columbia; was a member of the local legislature two terms, until 1878; was a member of the first board of education for several years, exercising a great interest in educational mat- ters; held many offices of trust, and was always a valued and respected citizen. Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for his contributions to the history and linguistics of the native races of the West Coast, and dated his interest in ethnological matters from his contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the West Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes exploring expedition. He afterwards trans- mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some of which were published in Contributions to North American Ethnology. In 1884 he pub- lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a nearly complete series of short vocabularies of the principal languages met with in British Columbia, and his name is to be found fre- quently quoted as an authority on the history of the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. He fre- quently contributed to the press upon public questions and events now historical. Townsend (Dr. J. K.) See Haldeman (S.8.) Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. | A | rudimentary dictionary | of | universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. | [One line in Hebrew. ] | Hall and Co., 25, Paternoster row, London.| (Allrightsreserved.) [1873 ?] Colophon: London: | printed by Grant and co., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated February 7th, 1873) verso blank 11. introduction CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 71 Treasury — Continued. (signed J.B. and dated October 31st, 1873) pp. i-iv, dictionary of languages (in alphabetical order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], errata verso colophon 1 1. 12°, Edited by James Bonwick, Esq.,F. R.G.S., assisted by about twenty-two contributors, whose initials are signed to the most important of their respective articles. In the compila- tion of the work free use was made of Bagster’s | Bible of Every Land and Dr. Latham’s Ele- ments of Comparative Philology. There are also references to an appendix, concerning which there is the following note on p.301; ‘‘ Notice. -- Owing to the unexpected enlargement of this Book in course of printing, the Appendix is necessarily postponed ; and the more especially as additional matter has been received sufficient to make asecond volume. i 3 a we ———_—— TT. eee eS ee ee ae ee Ee a eS 1820 18380 1831 1832 1832-1833 1833 1855 1836 1838 1840 1840-184? 1841 1841 1841 1842 1843 1844 1844 1844 1844 1846 1846 1846 1846 1846 1846 1847 1847 1848 1848 1848 1848 1848 1849 1850 1850 1850 1851 1851-1857 1852 1852 1852 1852 1853 1853 1853 1853 1854 1856 1856 1857 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX, Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook and Jargon Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook and Cathlascon Chinook and Cathlascon Jargon Jargon Cathlascon Chinook Chinook Jargon Cathlascon Chinook Jargon Jargon Various Various Jargon Various Chinook Chinook and Cathlascon Chinook and Jargon Jargon Various Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook and Clakama Jargon Chinook Chinook Clatsop Jargon Jargon Chinook Jargon (hinook Vocabulary Sentences Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Tribal names Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Lord’s prayer, ete. Vocabulary Vocabulary Words Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Various Various Vocabulary Bibliographic Proper names Words Vocabularies Sentences Various Vocabularies Sentences Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Classification General Ciscussion Proper names Proper names Vocabulary Classification Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary General discussion Dictionary Words Franchére (G.) Green (J .S.) Cox (R.) Cox (R.) Rafinesque (C.5.) Priest (J.) Chinook. Gallatin (A.S.) Parker (S.) Parker (S.) Blanchet (F. N.) Gairdner (—). Scouler (J.) Tolmie (W. F.) Parker (S.) Boldue (J.-B. Z.) Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) Duflot de Mofras (E.) Dunn (J.) Parker (S.) Latham (R. G.) Dunn (J.) Parker (S.) Scouler (J.) Hale (H.) Hale (H.) Palmer (J.) Vater (J.S.) Catlin (G.) Latham (R. G.) Montgomerie (J. E.) Allen (A. J.) Gallatin (A.) Ross (A.) Allen (A. J.) Latham (R. G.) Palmer (J.) Palmer (J.) Schoolcraft (H. R.) Berghaus (H.) Catlin (G.) Stanley (J. M.) Palmer (J.) Gallatin (A.) Shortess (1.) Emmons (G. F.) Lionnet (—). Franchére (G.) Latham (R. G.) Blanchet (F. N.) Daa (L. K.) 77 78 1857 1857 1867 1857 1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1858 1859 1859 1860 1860 1860 1860? 1860 1860 1862 1862? 1862 1862? 1862 1862 1862 1863 1863 1863 1863 1863 1863 1863 1863 1863 1864 1865 1865 1865 1865 1866 1867 1867 1868 1868 1868 1868-1892 1869 1869 1869 186? 1870 1870 1870 1871 1871 1871 1871 1871? 1872 1872 187: 1873? 1873 1874 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. Chinook and Jargon Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Jargon Various Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Watlala Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jarzon Jargon Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook and Jargon Jargon Chinook Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Clatsop Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Jargon Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabulary Classification Vocabulary Bibliographic Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Vocabulary Sentences Vocabulary, ete. Classification Numerals Vocabulary, ete. Text Vocabulary Various Words Dictionary Dictionary Vocabulary Vocabulary General discussion Vocabulary Bibliographic Dictionary Dictionary Bibliographic Dictionary Dictionary Dictionary Vocabulary Vocabulary Classification Dictionary Dictionary General discussion Sentences Hymns Bibliographic Vocabulary General discussion Dictionary Vocabulary Bibliographic General discussion Numerals Vocabulary Hymns Bibliographic Vocabulary Lord’s prayer General discussion Proper names Words Dictionary, ete. Dictionary Bibliographic Dictionary Bibliographic Dictionary Dictionary Words Swan (J. G.) Swan (J. G.) Anderson (A. C.) Armstrong (A. N.) Jéhan (L. F.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Ludewig (H. E.) Anderson (A. C.) Chinook. Guide-book. Hazlitt (W. C.) Wabass (W.G.) Allen (A. J.) Buschmann (J.C. E.) Schooleraft (H. R.) Haldeman (S.58.) Domenech (E. H. D.) Demers (M.) Vocabulary. Latham (R. G.) Pott (A. F.) Blanchet (F. N.) Dictionary. Gibbs (G.) Macdonald (D. G. F.) Wilson (D.) Latham (R. G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.) Gibbs (G.), note. Macdonald (D. G. F.), note. Winthrop (T.) Jéhan (L. F.) Dictionary. Stuart (G.) Wilson (D.) Macfie (M.) Macleod (X. D.) Leciere (C.) Richardson (A. D.) Whymper (F.) Blanchet (F. N.) Sproat (G. M.) Sabin (.J.) Whymper (F.) Chase (P. E.) Richardson (A. D.), note. Macieod (X. D.) Triibner & Co. Semple (J. E.) Marietti (P.) Whymper (F.) Catlin (G.) Tylor (E. B.) Demers (M.), et al. Dictionary. Triibner & Co. Langevin (H. L.) Field (T. W.) Blanchet (F. N.) Dictionary. Tylor (E. B.) —_————— a a a oe 1874 1874-1876 1875 1875 1875 1875 1876 1876 1876 1877 1877 1877 1877 1877 1877? 1877 1877 1877-1887 1878 1878 1878 1878 1878 1878? 1878 1878-1886 1879 1880 1880 . 1880-1881 18sl 1881 1881-1886 1882 1882 1882 1882 1882 1882 1882 1882 1883 1883 1883 1883 1883 1884 1884 1884 1884 188t 1884 1884 1884-1887 1885 1885 1885 1885-1889 1886 1886 1886 1886 1886 1887 1887 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. Chinook and Jargon Various Chirook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook and Jargon Clakama Jargon Jargon Wasco Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Shinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Various Jargon Chinook Jargon Jargon Chinook and Jargon Chinook and Jargon Cascade Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook Chinook and Jargon Jargon Various Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Wasco Chinook Chinook Chinook Various Chinook Chinook Jargon Jargon Jargon Various Chinook Chinook Words Various sibliographie General discussion Sermons Vocabulary Bibliographic General discussion Words General discussion Songs General discussion Words Vocabulary Dictionary Dictionary Vocabulary Grammatic Classification General discussion Words Bibliographic Dictionary Dictionary Hymn bool Bibliographic Dictionary Classification Dictionary Grammatic Words Words Vocabulary Bibliographic Classification General discussion General discussion Words Bibliographic Dictionary Various Words Dictionary Lord's prayer Lord’s prayer Words General discussion Vocabularies Lord's prayer Dictionary Hymns Ten commandments Vocabulary Bibliographic Classification General discussion Bibliographic General discussion Proper names Dictionary Dictionary Hymns Bibliographic Proper names Proper names Tylor (E. B.) Bancroft (H. H.) Field (I. W.) Eells (M.) Eells (M.) Richardson (A. D.) Platzmann (J.) Wilson (D.) Clough (J. C.) Gatschet (A.8.) Helis (M.) Beach (W. W.) Tylor (E. B.) Gatschet (A.5.) Dictionary. Guide. Gatschet (A.58.) Miiller (F.) Keane (A. H.) Bates (H. W.) Dunean (D.) Leclere (C.) Blanchet (F. N.) Gill (J. K.), note. Eells (M.) Trumbull (J. H.) Blanchet (F. N.) Sayce (A. H.) Good (J. B.) Eells (M.) Tylor (E. B.) Tylor (E. B.) Youth's. Triibner & Co. Keane (A. H.), note. Bates (H. W.) Drake (S. G.) Smith (S. B.) Eells (M.) Gill (J. K.) Bancroft (H. H.) Tylor (E. B.) Dictionary. Everette (W. E.) Everette (W. E.) Norris (PR. W.) Schoolcraft (H. R.) 79 Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G.M.) Bergholtz (G. F.) Gill (J. K.) Everette (W. E.) Everette (W. E.) Curtin (J.) Pott (A. F.) Keane (A. H.), note. 3ates (H. W.) Pilling (J. C.) Featherman (A.) Catlin (G.) Durieu (P.), note. Le Jeune (J. M.R.) Fells (M.) Quaritch (B.) Catlin (G.) Catlin (G.) 80 1887 1887 1887 1887 1887 1887 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1888 1889 1889 1889 1889 1889 1889 1889 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 is9l 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891 1891-1893 1892 1892 1892 1892 1892 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 1893 CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Various Bibliographic Various Bibliographic Various Bibliographic Chinook Numerals Chinook Proper names Chinook Words Chinook Words Chinook and Jargon Various Chinook and Jargon Words Jargon Dictionary Jargon General discussion Jargon Numerals Jargon Numerals Jargon Songs Chinook and Jargon Words Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Hymn book Jargon Numerals Jargon Vocabulary Chinook Words Chinook Words Chinook Words Chinook Words Jargon Dictionary, etc. Jargon Review Jargon Review Jargon Review Jargon Sermon Chinook Classification Chinook Classification Chinook Classification Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Hymn book Jargon Periodical Jargon Periodical Jargon Periodical Jargon Review Jargon Words Jargon Periodical Jargon Bible history Jargon Dictionary Jargon Play Jargon Primer Various Geographic names Chinook Grammar, dictionary Chinook Grammatic Chinook Texts Chinook Various Jargon Bible history Jargon Bible history Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Dictionary Jargon Graminar, dictionary Jargon Hymns Jargon Hymns, songs Jargon Legends Dictionary. Dictionary: Gill (J. K) Dufossé (B.) Quaritch (B.) Quaritch (B.) Kells (M.) Catlin (G.) Brinton (D. G.) 3rinton (D.G.) Haines (EK. M.) Tylor (E. B.) Prosch (T. W.) Leland (C. G.) Fells (M.) Eells (M.), note. Boas (F.) Tylor (E. B.) Dictionary. Gill (J. K.) Tate (C. M.) Eells (M.) Fells (M.) Nicoll (. H.) Brinton (D. G.) Grasserie (R. de la). Hale (H.) Hale (H.) Hale (H.) Crane (A.) Leland (C. G.) Western. New. Brinton (D. G.) Powell (J. W.) Powell (J. W.) Coones (5S. F.) Gill (J. K.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Charencey (H. de). Chamberlain (A. F.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) St. Onge (L. N.) Le Jeune (J. M. BR.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Eells (M.) Boas (F.) Boas (F.) Boas (F.) Boas (F.) Durieu (P.) St. Onge (L. N.) Bulmer (T.5.) Bulmer (T.5.) Bulmer (T.35.) Bulmer (T.5S.) Eells (M.) St. Onge (L. N.) Bulmer (T.5.) St. Onge (L. N.) Bulmer (T.5S.) St. Onge (L. N.} CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Jargon Chinook Chinook and Jargon Jargon Jargon Various CHIN——6 ' Lord’s prayer Prayers Reader Various Vocabulary Hymns Vocabularies Vocabulary Vocabulary Tribal names 81 Bulmer (T.S.) ‘Bulmer (T.5.) Le Jeune (J. M. R.) Bulmer (T.S.) Chamberlain (A. F.) Tate (C. M.) Pinart (A. L.) Belden (G. P.) Kells (M.) Douglass (J.) a a Te ae =" t Ft , oh a 7? \ " , d i .. 4 oy we a LA Whe ‘ ee aks ay BULLETIN 30 hb . ilo ~ a (2 OC K 7 19 100 _os'_ 9084 aia | “Teed a | ¥\\ \ a ~~ | ris | II | || | | H | ea | |} | 1 1 /|s6° |) \ | | ) il | i 1 i ie | iif i | 1 5 i ] ] | || | | ow A Seer Veh) ls ” Ak Toh «a ty © le c Ved LINGUISTIC FAMILIES | ie co) ieee \|so & AMERICAN INDIANS NORTH or MEXICO BY J.W. POWELL vind t Ser BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY Wirn Lisr or PUBLICATIONS. [Reprinted from Handbook of the Indians, Bulletin 30, Bureau of American Ethnology. ] The Bureau of (American) Ethnology was organized in 1879 and placed by Congress under the supervision of the Smithsonian Institution. It was directed that all the archives, records, and ma- terials relating to the Indian tribes col- lected by the Survey of the Rocky Moun- tain Region under the auspices of the Interior Department should be trans- ferred to the Institution for use by the Bureau. Prof. Spencer F. Baird, Secre- tary of the Institution, recognizing the great value of Maj. J. W. Powell’s serv- ices in initiating researches among the western tribes, selected him as the per- son best qualified to organize and con- duct the work. The National Government had already recognized the importance of researches among the tribes. As early as 1795 the Secretary of War appointed Leonard 8. Shaw deputy agent to the Cherokee with instructions to study their elanguage and home life and to collect materials for an Indian history. President Jefferson, who planned the Lewis and Clark expedi- tion of 1804-06, ‘‘for the purpose of ex- tending the internal commerce of the United States,’’ especially stipulated, in his instructions to Lewis, the obserya- tions on the native tribes that should be made by the expedition for the use of the Government. These were to include their namesand numbers; the extent and limits of their possessions; their relations with other tribes or nations; their lan- guage, traditions, and monuments; their ordinary occupations in agriculture, fish- ing, hunting, war, arts, and the imple- ments for these; their food, clothing, and domestic accommodations; the diseases prevalent among them and the remedies they use; moral and physicai circum- stances which distinguish them from known tribes; peculiarities in their laws, customs, and dispositions; and articles of commerce they may need or furnish, and to whatextent; *‘and considering the in- terest which every nation has in extend- ing and strengthening the authority of reason and justice among the people around them, it will be useful to acquire what knowledge you can of the state of morality, religion, and _ information among them, as it may better enable those who endeavor to civilize and in- struct them to adapt their measures to the existing notions and practices of those on whom they are to operate.’? During much of his life Jefferson, like Albert Gallatin later on, manifested his deep in- terest in the ethnology of the American tribes by publishing accounts of his ob- servations that are of extreme value to-day. In 1820 Rey. Jedidiah Morse was commissioned by the President to make a tour for the purpose of ‘‘ascer- taining, for the use of the Government, the actual state of the Indian tribes of our country.’”? The Government also aided the publication of Schoolcraft’s voluminous work on the Indians. The various War Department expeditions and surveys had reported on the tribes and monuments encountered in the W.; the Hayden Survey of the Territories had examined and described many of the cliff-dwellings and pueblos, and had pub- lished papers on the tribes of the Missis- sippi valley, and Maj. Powell, as chief of the Survey of the Rocky Mountain Re- gion, had accomplished important work among the tribes of the Rio Colorado drainage in connection with his geological and geographical researches, and had commenced a series of publications known as Contributions to North American Eth- nology. The Smithsonian Institution had also taken an active part in the publica- tion of the results of researches under- taken by private students. The first vol- ume of its Contributions to Knowledge is The Ancient Monuments of the Missis- sippi Valley, by Squier and Davis, and up to the founding of the Bureau of Eth- nology the Institution had issued upward of 600 papers on ethnology and arche- ology. These early researches had taken a wide range, but in a somewhat unsys- tematic way, and Maj. Powell, on taking charge of the Bureau, began the task of classifying the subject-matter of the en- tire aboriginal field and the selection of those subjects that seemed to require im- mediate attention. There were numerous problems of a practical nature to be dealt with, and at the same time many less strictly praetical but none the less im- portant problems to be considered. Some of the practical questions were readily ap- proached, but in the main they were so involved with the more strictly scientific questions that the two could not be con- sidered separately. From its inception the Government has had before it problems arising from the presence within its domain, as dependent wards, of more than 300,000 aborigines. (1) In the main the difficulties encountered in solving these problemsarose froma lack of knowledge of the distribution, num- bers, relationships, and languages of the tribes, and a real appreciation of their character, culture status, needs, and possi- bilities. It was recognized that a knowl- edge of these elements lies at the very foundation of intelligent administration, and thus one of the important objects in organizing the Bureau of Ethnology was that of obtaining such knowledge of the tribes as would enable the several branches of the Government to know tribes, certain groups were selected as types, and investigations among them were so pursued as to yield results ap- plicable in large measure to all. Up to the present time much progress has been made and a deeper insight has been gained into the inner life and character of the native people, and thus, in a large sense, of primitive peo- ples generally, than had been reached before in the world’s history. Many of the results of these researches have already been published and are in the hands of all civilized nations. Some of the and appreciate the aboriginal population, and that at the same time would en- able the peo- ple generally to give intelligent administration sympathetic support. An es- sential step in this great work was that of locat- ing the tribes and classifying them in such manner as to make it possible to assemble them in harmo- nious groups, based on rela- tionship of blood, language, customs, beliefs, and grades of culture. It was found that with- in the area with which the na- tion has to deal there are spoken some 500 Indian languages, as distinct from one another as French is from English, and that these languages are grouped in more than 50 linguistic families. It was found, further, that in connection with the dif- ferences in language there are many other distinctions requiring attention. Tribes allied in language are often allied also in capacity, habits, tastes, social organiza- tion, religion, arts, and industries, and it was plain that a satisfactory investigation of the tribes required a systematic study of all of these conditions. It was not attempted, however, to cover the whole field in detail. When sufficient progress had been made in the classification of the << W. POWELL, FOUNDER AND DIRECTOR OF THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY more directly practical results accomplished -" may be briefly mentioned: (1) A study of the relations, loca- tion, and num- bers of the tribes, and their classification into groups or families, based on affinity in language—a nec- essary basis for dealing with the tribes practi- cally or scien- tifically; (2) a study of the nu- merous sociolo- gic, religious, and industrial problems in- volved, an ac- quaintance with which is essen- tial to the intel- ligent manage- ment of the tribes in adjust- ing them to the requirements of civilization; (3) a history of the relations of the Indian and white races embodied in a volume on land cessions; (4) investigations into the physiology, medical practices, and sani- tation of a people who suffer keenly from imperfect adaptation to the new conditions imposed on them; (5) the preparation of bibliographies em- bodying all works relating to the tribes; (6) a study of their industrial and economic resources; (7) a study of the antiquities of the country with a view to their record and preserva- tion; and (8) a handbook of the tribes, embodying, in condensed form, the accumulated information of years. The more strictly scientific results re- late to every department of anthropologic ‘research—physical, psychological, lin- guistic, sociologic, religious, technic, and esthetic—and are embodied in numerous papers published in the reports, contribu- tions, and bulletins; and the general re- sults in each of these departments, com- piled and collated by the highest available authorities, have now begun to appear in the form of handbooks. Maj. Powell, director, died Sept. 23, 1902, and on Oct. 11 W. H. Holmes was appointed to succeed him, with the title of chief. In addition to the chief the scientific staff of the Bureau comprises (1906) 7 ethnologists, an illustrator, an editor, a librarian, and 7 other employees. Besides the regular scientific members of the Bureau there are numerous asso- ciates or collaborators, including many of the best-known ethnologists of the country, who contribute papers or who engage at intervals in research work under the Bureau’s auspices. The li- brary contains about 12,000 volumes and 7,000 pamphlets, accumulated largely through exchange of publications. There are about 1,600 linguistic manuscripts, and 15,000 photographic negatives illus- trating the aborigines and their activi- ties. The publications consist of Contribu- tions to North American Ethnology, An- nual Reports, Bulletins, Introductions, and Miscellaneous Publications. The series of contributions was begun by the Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region before the organization of the Bureau, 3 volumes having been completed, and was discontinued after 8 volumes had been issued. Twenty-three annual re- ports, comprising 28 volumes, 30 bulle- tins (including the present Handbook), 4 introductions, and 6 miscellaneous pub- lications have appeared. The present edition of the annual reports and _ bulle- tins is 9,850 copies, of which the Senate receives 1,500, the House of Representa- tives 3,000, and the Bureau 3,500 copies. Of the Bureau edition 500 are distributed by the Smithsonian Institution. From the remaining 1,850 copies are drawn the personal copies of members of Congress, and 500 for distribution to Government libraries and other libraries throughout the country, as designated by Congress; the remainder are sold by the Superin- tendent of Documents, Government Print- ing Office. With the exception of the few disposed of by the Superintendent of Documents, the publications are distrib- uted free of charge; the popular demand for them is so great, however, that the editions are soon exhausted. The quota many allowed the Bureau is distributed to libraries, to institutions of learning, and to collaborators and others engaged in anthropologic research or in teaching. The publications are as follows: CONTRIBUTIONS TO NORTH AMERICAN ETH- NOLOGY.—Published in part under the auspices of the Department of the Interior, U. 8. Geo- graphical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region, J. W. Powellincharge. Vols. I-VII and 1x, Vol. I, 1877: Part 1.—Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by W. H. Dall. On the distribution and nomenclature of the native tribes of Alaska and the adja- cent territory. On suecession in Aleutian islands. On the origin of the Innuit. Appendix to parti. Linguisties. Notes on the natives of Alaska, by J. Furu- helm. Terms of relationship used by the Innuit: a series obtained from natives of Cumber- land inlet, by W. H. Dall. Vocabularies, by George Gibbs and W. H. Dall. Note on the use of numerals among the T’sim si-an’, by George Gibbs. Part i. Tribes of western Washington and northwestern Oregon, by George Gibbs. Appendix to part 11. Linguistics. Vocabularies, by George Gibbs, Wm. F. Tolmie, and G. Mengarini. Dictionary of the Niskwalli, Gibbs. Vol. 11, 1890: The Klamath Indians of southwestern Oregon, by Albert Samuel Gatschet. Two parts. Vol. 11, 1877: : Tribes of California, by Stephen Powers. Appendix. Linguistics, edited by J. W. Powell. Vol. Lv, 1881: Houses and house-life of the American aborig- ines, by Lewis H. Morgan. Vol. v, 1882: Observations on cup-shaped and other lapida- rian sculptures in the Old World and in America, by Charles Rau. On prehistoric trephining and cranial amulets, by Robert Fletcher. A study of the manuscript Troano, by Cyrus Thomas, with an introduction by D. G. Brinton. Vol. VI, 1890: The Gegiha language, by J. Owen Dorsey. Vol. vit, 1890: A Dakota-English dictionary, by Stephen R. Riggs, edited by J. OWen Dorsey. Vol. VIII: [Not issued]. Vol. 1X, 1893: Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography, by Stephen R. Riggs, edited by J. Owen Dorsey. ANNUAL REPORTS OF THE BUREAU OF (AMERI- CAN) ETHNOLOGY TO THE SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. 23 vols. roy. 8°. First Report (1879-80), 1881. Report of the Director. On the evolution of language, as exhibited in the specialization of the grammatiec processes; the differentiation of the parts of speech, and the integration of the sentence; from a study of Indian languages, by J. W. Powell. Sketch of the mythology of the North American Indians, by J. W. Powell. Wyandot government: A short study of tribal society, by J. W. Powell. On limitations to the use of some anthropologic data, by J. W. Powell. A further contribution to the study of the mor- tuary customs of the North American Indians, by H. C. Yarrow. Studies in Central American picture-writing, by Edward S. Holden. the shell-heaps of the by George Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United States: Illustrated by those in the State of In- diana, by C. C. Royce. Sign language among North American Indians, compared with that among other peoples and deaf-mutes, by Garrick Mallery. Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, by J. C. Pilling. Illustration of the method of recording Indian languages. From the manuscripts of J. Owen Dorsey, A. 8. Gatschet, and S. R. Riggs. Second Report (1880-81), 1883. Report of the Director. Zuni fetiches, by F. H. Cushing. Myths of the Iroquois, by Erminnie A. Smith. Animal carvings from mounds of the Mississippi valley, by H. W. Henshaw. Navajo silversmiths, by Washington Matthews. Art in shell of the ancient Americans, by W. H. Holmes. Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the Indians of New Mexico and Arizona in 1879, by James Stevenson. Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the Indians of New Mexico in 1880, by James Stevenson. Third Report (1881-82), 1884. Report of the Director (including On activital similarities). Notes on certain Maya and Mexican manu- scripts, by Cyrus Thomas. On masks, labrets, and certain aboriginal cus- toms, by W. H. Dall. : Omaha sociology, by J. Owen Dorsey. Navajo weavers, by Washington Matthews. Prehistoric textile fabrics of the United States, derived from impressions on pottery, by W. H. Holmes. Illustrated catalogue of a portion of the collec- tions made by the Bureau of Ethnology during the field season of 1881, by W. H. Holmes. Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the pueblos of Zuni, N. Mex., and Wolpi, Ariz., in 1881, by James Stevenson. Fourth Report (1882-83), 1886. Report of the Director. Pictographs of the North American Indians. A preliminary. paper, by Garrick Mallery. Pottery of the ancient Pueblos, by W. H. Holmes. Ancient pottery of the Mississippi valley, by W. H. Holmes. Origin and development of form and ornament in ceramic art, by W. H. Holmes. A study of Pueblo pottery as illustrative of Zuni culture growth, by F. H. Cushing. Fifth Report (1883-84) , 1887. Report of the Director. Burial mounds of the northern sections of the United States, by Cyrus Thomas. The Cherokee Nation of Indians: A narrative of their official relations with the Colonial and Federal Governments, by C. C. Royce. The mountain chant: A Navajo ceremony, by Washington Matthews. The Seminole Indians of Florida, by Clay MacCauley. The religious life of the Zuni child, by Matilda C. Stevenson. Sixth Report (1884-85), 1888. Report of the Director. Ancient art of the province of Chiriqui, Colom- bia, by W. H. Holmes. A study of the textile art in its relation to the development of form and ornament, by W. H. Holmes. Aids to the study of the Maya codices, by Cyrus Thomas. Osage traditions, by J. Owen Dorsey. The central Eskimo, by Franz Boas. Seventh Report (1885-86), 1891. Report of the Director. Indian linguistic families of America north of Mexico, by J. W. Powell. The Midé’wiwin or ‘‘grand medicine society ”’ of the Ojibwa, by W. J. Hoffman. The sacred formulas of the Cherokees, by James Mooney. Eighth Report (1886-87), 1891. Report of the Director. A study of Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and Cibola, by Victor Mindeleff. Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical sand painting of the Navajo Indians, by James Stevenson. Ninth Report (1887-88) 1892. Report of the Director. Ethnological results of the Point Barrow expe- dition, by John Murdoch. The medicine-men of the Apache, by John G. Bourke. Tenth Report (1888-89), 1893. Report of the Director. Picture writing of the American Indians, by Garrick-Mallery. Eleventh Report (1889-90), 1894. Report of the Director. The Sia, by Matilda C. Stevenson. Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hudson bay territory, by Lucien M. Turner. A study of Siouan cults, by J. Owen Dorsey. Twelfth Report (1890-91), 1894. Report of the Director. * Reporton the mound explorations of the Bureau of Ethnology, by Cyrus Thomas. Thirteenth Report (1891-92), 1896. Report of the Director. Prehistoric textile art of eastern United States, by W. H. Holmes. Stone art, by Gerard Fowke. Aboriginal remains in Verde valley, Arizona, by Cosmos Mindeleff. Omaha dwellings, furniture, and implements, by J. Owen Dorsey. Casa Grande ruin, by Cosmos Mindeleff. Outlines of Zuni creation myths, by F. H. Cushing. Fourteenth Report (1892-93), 1896. Report of the Director. The Menomini Indians, by Walter J. Hoffman. The Coronado expedition, 1540-42, by G. P. Winship. The Ghost-dance religion and the Sioux out- break of 1890, by James Mooney. Fifteenth Report (1893-94), 1897. Report of the Director (including On regimen- tation). Stone implements of the Potomac-Chesapeake tidewater province, by W. H. Holmes. The Siouan Indians: A preliminary sketch, by W J McGee. Siouan sociology: A posthumous paper, by J. Owen Dorsey. Tusayan katcinas, by J. Walter Fewkes. The repair of Casa Grande ruin, Arizona, in 1891, by Cosmos Mindeleff. Sixteenth Report (1894-95), 1897. Report of the Director, and list of publications of the Bureau of American Ethnology. Primitive trephining in Peru, by M. A. Muniz and W J McGee. The cliff ruins of Canyon de Chelly, Arizona, by Cosmos Mindeleff. Day symbols of the Maya year, by Cyrus Thomas. Tusayan snake ceremonies, by J. Walter Fewkes. Seventeenth Report (1895-96) , 1898. Report of the Director, and list of publications of the Bureau of American Ethnology. The Seri Indians, by W J McGee, with Com- parative lexicology, by J. N. B. Hewitt. Calendar history of the Kiowa Indians, by James Mooney. Navaho houses, by Cosmos Mindeleff. Archeological expedition to Arizona in 1895, by J. Walter Fewkes. Eighteenth Report (1896-97), 1899. Report of the Director. The Eskimo about Bering strait, by E. W. Nelson. Indian land cessions in the United States, com- piled by C. C. Royee, with an introduction by Cyrus Thomas. Nineteenth Report (1897-98), 1900. Report of the Director (including Esthetology, or the science of activities designed to give pleasure). Myths of the Cherokee, by James Mooney. Tusayan migration traditions, by J. Walter Fewkes. Localization of Tusayan clans, Mindeleff. Mounds in northern Honduras, by Thomas Gann. Mayan calendar systems, by Cyrus Thomas. Primitive numbers, by W J McGee. Numeral systems of Mexico and Central Amer- ica, by Cyrus Thomas. Tusayan flute and snake ceremonies, by J. Walter Fewkes. The wild-rice gatherers of the upper lakes, a study in American primitive economics, by A. E. Jenks. Twentieth Report (1898-99) 1903. Report of the Director (including Technology, or the science of industries; Sociology, or the science of institutions; Philology, or the science of activities designed for expression; Sophiology, or the science of activities designed to give in- struction; List of publications of the Bureau of American Ethnology). Aboriginal pottery of the eastern United States, by W. H. Holmes. Twenty-first Report (1899-1900), 1903. Report of the Director. Hopi katcinas, drawn by native artists, by J. Walter Fewkes. Iroquois cosmogony, by J. N. B. Hewitt. Twenty-second Report (1900-01), 1903. Report of the Acting Director. Two summers’ work in pueblo ruins, by J. Walter Fewkes. Mayan calendar systems—II, by Cyrus Thomas. The Hako, a Pawnee ceremony, by Alice C. Fletcher. Twenty-third Report (1901-02), 1904. Report of the Acting Director. The Zuni Indians, by Matilda C. Stevenson. Twenty-fourth Report (1902-03), 1905. Report of the Chief. American Indian games, by Stewart Culin. BULLETINS.—Thirty volumes, 8°. (1) Bibliography of the Eskimo language, by J.C. Pilling, 1887. (2) Perforated stones from California, by H. W. Henshaw, 1887. (3) The use of gold and other metals among the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of Darien, by W. H. Holmes, 1887. (4) Work in mound exploration of the Bureau of Ethnology, by Cyrus Thomas, 1887. (5) Bibliography of the Siouan languages, by J.C. Pilling, 1887. (6) Bibliography of the Iroquoian languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1888. (7) Textile fabrics of ancient Peru, by W. H. Holmes, 1889. (8) The problem of the Ohio mounds, by Cyrus Thomas, 1889, (9) Bibliography of the Muskhogean languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1889. (10) The circular, square, and octagonal earth- works of Ohio, by Cyrus Thomas, 1889. (11) Omaha and Ponka letters, by J. Owen Dorsey, 1891. by Cosmos (12) Catalogue of prehistoric works east of the Rocky mountains, by Cyrus Thomas, 1891. (13) Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1891. (14) Bibliography of the Athapascan languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1892. (15) Bibliography of the Chinookan languages (including the Chinook jargon), by J. C. Pilling, 1893. (16) Bibliography of the Salishan languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1893. (17) The Pamunkey Indians of Virginia, by J. G. Pollard, 1894. (18) The Maya year, by Cyrus Thomas, 1894. (19) Bibliography of the Wakashan languages, by J. C. Pilling, 1894. (20) Chinook texts, by Franz Boas, 1894. (21) An ancient quarry in Indian Territory, by W. H. Holmes, 1894. (22) The Siouan tribes of the East, by James Mooney, 1894. (23) Archeologic investigations in James and Potomae valleys, by Gerard Fowke, 1894. (24) List of the publications of the Bureau of Ethnology with index to authors and subjects, by F. W. Hodge, 1894. (25) Natick dictionary, 1903. (26) Kathlamet texts, by Franz Boas, 1901. (27) Tsimshian texts, by Franz Boas, 1902. (28) Mexican and Central American antiquities and calendar systems, twenty-nine papers, by Eduard Seler, E. Férstemann, Paul Schellhas, Carl Sapper, and E. P. Dieseldorff, translated from the German under the supervision of Charles P. Bowditch. (29) Haida texts and myths, Skidegate dialect, by J. R. Swanton. (30) Handbook of the Indians north of Mexico, Parts Iand It. INTRODUCTIONS.—Four volumes, 4°. (1) Introduction to the study of Indian lan- guages, by J. W. Powell, 1877. (2) Introduction to the study of Indian lan- guages, 2d edition, by J. W. Powell, 1880. (3) Introduction to the study of sign language among the North American Indians, by Garrick Mallery, 1880. (4) Introduction to the study of mortuary cus- toms among the North American Indians, by H. C. Yarrow, 1880. MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS: (1) A collection of gesture-signs and signals of the North American Indians, by Garrick Mal- lery, 1880. (2) Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the lan- guages of the North American Indians, by J. C. Pilling, 1885. (3) Linguistic families of the Indian tribes north of Mexico [by James Mooney, 1886]. (4) Map of linguistic stocks of American In- dians north of Mexico, by J. W. Powell, 1891. (5) Tribes of North America, with synonomy: Skittagetan family [by Henry W. Henshaw, 1890]. (ey Dictionary of American Indians north of Mexico [advance pages], 1903. by J. H. Trumbull, (w. H. H.) INDIAN MISSIONS NORTH OF MEXICO By JAMES MOONEY Extract from Handbook of American Indians, Bulletin 30 of the Bureau of American Ethnology, Part 1 WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE LOIOT BULL. 30] MISSLON Mission Indians of California. The first settlements in California were not made until more than a century after the ear- liest colonization of the peninsula of VICTORIANO, MISSION INDIAN (LUISENO), CALIFORNIA Lower California. The mission of San Diego, founded in 1769, was the first per- manent white settlement within the limits of the present state; it was followed by 20 other Franciscan missions, founded at intervals until the year -1823 in the re- gion between San Diego and San Fran- cisco bay and just x. of the latter. With very few exceptions the Indians of this territory were brought under the influ- ence of the missionaries with compara- tively little difficulty, and more by per- suasion than by the use of force. There is scarcely a record of any resistance or rebellion on the part of the natives re- sulting in the loss of life of even a single Spaniard at any of the missions except at San Diego, where there occurred an insig- nificant outbreak a few years after the foundation. The influence of the missions was proba- bly greater temporally than spiritually. The Indians were taught and compelled to work at agricultural pursuits and to some extent even at trades. Discipline, while not severe, was rigid; refusal to work was met by deprivation of food, and absence from church or tardiness there, by corpora? punishments and con- finement. Consequently the Indians, while often displaying much personal af- fection for the missionaries themselves, were always inclined to be recalcitrant INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA 873 toward the system, which amounted to little else than beneficent servitude. There were many attempts at escape from the missions. Generally these were fruit- less, both on account of the presence of a few soldiers at each mission and through the aid given these by other Indians more under the fathers’ influence. The Indians at each mission lived at and about it, often in houses of native type and construction, but were dependent for most of their food directly on the authori- ties. They consisted of the tribes of the region in which the mission was founded and of more distant tribes, generally from the interior. In some cases these were sasily induced to settle at the mission and to subject themselves to its discipline and routine, the neophytes afterward acting as agents to bringin their wilder brethren. The number of Indians at each mission ‘varied from a few hundred to two or three thousand. There were thus in many cases settlements of considerable size; they pos- sessed large herds of cattle and sheep and controlled many square miles of land. Theoretically this wealth was all the prop- erty of the Indians, held in trust for them by the Franciscan fathers. In 1834 the Mexican goyernment, against the protests of the missionaries, secularized the mis- sions. By this step the property of the missions was divided among the Indians, and they were freed from the restraint and WIFE OF VICTORIANO, MISSION INDIAN (LuISENO), CALIFORNIA authority of their former masters. Ina very few years, as might have been ex- pected and as was predicted by the fath- ers, the Indians had been either deprived >) S74 of their lands and property or had squan- dered them, and were living in a hope- less condition. Their numbers decreased rapidly, so that to-day in the region be- tween San Francisco and Santa Barbara there are probably fewer than 50 Indians. In s. California the decrease has been less rapid, and there are still about 3,000 of what are known as Mission Indians; these are, however, all of Shoshonean or Yuman stock. The decrease of popu- lation began even during the mission period, and it is probable that the deaths exceeded the births at the missions from the first, though during the earlier years the population was maintained or even increased by accessions from uncon- verted tribes. At the time of seculariza- tion, in 1834, the population of many missions was less than a decade earlier. The total number of baptisms during the 65 years of mission activity was about 90,000, and the population in the terri- tory subject to mission influence may be estimated as having been at any one time from 35,000 to 45,000. At this propor- tion the population of the entire state, before settlement by the whites, would have been at least 100,000, and was prob- ably much greater. See California, In- dians of, with accompanying map, _also Missions; Population. (ASS es) Mission Valley. The local name of a band of Salish of Fraser superintendency, Brit. Col.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1878, 79, 1879. Missions. From the very discovery of America the spiritual welfare of the na- tive tribes was a subject of concern to the various colonizing nations, particularly Spain and France, with whom the Chris- tianization and civilization of the Indians were made a regular part of the govern- mental scheme, and the missionary was frequently the pioneer explorer and dip- lomatic ambassador. In the English colonization, on the other hand, the work was usually left to the zeal of the indi- vidual philanthropist or of voluntary organizations. First in chronologic order, historic im- portance, number of establishments, and population come the Catholic missions, conducted in the earlier period chiefly by Jesuits among the French and by Fran- ciscans among the Spanishcolonies. The earliest mission establishments within the present United States were those begun by the Spanish Franciscan Fathers, ‘Pa- dilla, Juan de la Cruz, and Descalona of the Coronado expedition, among the Quivira (Wichita), Pecos, and Tigua in 1542. Three years later the work was begun among the Texas tribes by Father Olmos. : ¢ BULL. 30] the final result in Illinois was the same as elsewhere. The Natchezand Chickasaw wars interrupted the mission work for some years, and gave opportunity for invasion by hostile northern tribes. The dissipations consequent upon the prox- imity of garrison posts completed the demoralization, and by 1750 the former powerful Illinois nation was reduced to some 1,000 souls, with apparently but one mission. The Indiana missions at St Joseph (Potawatomi and Miami), Vin- cennes (? Piankashaw), and on _ the Wabash (Miami) continued to flourish until the decree of expulsion, when the mission property was confiscated by the French government, although the Jesuits generally chose to remain as secular priests untiltheir death. Their successors continued to minister to Indians as well as to whites until the disruption and removal of the tribes to the W., between 1820 and 1840, when the work was taken up in their new homes by missionaries already on the ground. The majority of the Indians of Michigan and Wisconsin remained in their old homes at missions in those states, kept in existence either _as regular establishments or as visiting stations served by secular priests. The most distinguished of these later mission- aries was the noted author and philolo- gist, Bishop Frederick Baraga, of the imperial house of Hapsburg, ‘who, after having voluntarily forfeited his estates to devote his life to the Indians, came to America in 1830, and for 36 years there- after until his death labored with success, first among the Ottawa at Arbre Croche in lower Michigan, and afterward at St Joseph, Green Bay, Lapointe, and other stations along the upper lakes, more par- ticularly at the Chippewa village of L’ Anse, on Keweenaw bay, which he converted into a prosperous Christian settlement. Even when past 60 years of age, this scion of Austrian nobility slept upon the ground and sometimes walked 40.m. a day on snowshoes to minister to his Indians. Besides numerous deyo- tional works in Ottawa and Chippewa, as well as other volumes in German and Slavonic, he is the author of the great Grammar and Dictionary of the Chip- pewa Language, which after half a cen- tury still remains the standard authority, having passed through three editions. In 1818 was begun, near Pembina, on Red r., just inside the U. 8. boundary, the Chippewa mission, afterward known as Assumption, which became the cen- tral station for work among the Chippewa of Minnesota and the Mandan and others of the upper Missouri. The most noted name in this connection is that of Rev. G. A. Belcourt, author of a dictionary of the Chippewa language, second in im- MISSIONS , 885 portance only to that of Baraga. In 1837 Father Augustin Ravyoux established a mission among the Santee Sioux at Fari- bault’s trading post in nr. Minnesota, learn- ing the language and ministering to the astern bands fora number of years. In 1843 (or 1844) he published a devotional work in that dialect, which has passed through two editions. The first regular mission station among the Menominee of Wisconsin was established in 1844, and among the Winnebago, then at Long Prairie, Minn., in 1850. For 20 years 2arlier missionary work had been done among them, notably by Father Samuel Mazzuchelli, whose Winnebago Prayer Book, published in 1833, is mentioned by Pilling as ‘‘the first publication, so far as I know, of a text in any of the dialects in the Siouan family.’’ In the farther W. work was carried on among all of the im- migrant, and the principal of the native, tribes, the chief laborers again being the Jesuits, whose order had been restored to full privilegein 1814. As the whole coun- try was now explored and organized on a permanent governmental basis, and the Indian day was rapidly waning, these later missions have not the same historic interest that attaches to those of the co- lonial period, and may be passed over with briefer notice. Chief among them were the Potawatomi missions of St Stan- islaus and St Mary, in Kansas, founded in 1836 by the Belgian Jesuits Von Quick- enborne, Hoecken, Peter J. de Smet, and others, working together, and the Osage mission of St Francis Hieronymo, founded about 1847 by Fathers Shoenmaker and Bax. The girls of these two mission schools were in charge respectively of the Sisters of the Sacred Heart and the Sisters of Loretto. Temporary missions were also established in 1836 and 1847 respec- tively among the Kickapoo and the Miami. The remote Flatheads in the moun- tains at the head of Missourir. had heard of Christianity and had been taught the rudimentary doctrines by some adopted Caughnawaga Indians, and in 1831 they sent a delegation all the long and danger- ous way to St Louis to ask of Indian Superintendent Clark that missionaries be sentamong them. To do this was not possible at the time, but with persevering desire other delegations were sent on the same errand, some of the envoys dying on the road and others being murdered by the Sioux, until the request met re- sponse. In 1834 the Methodist missionary, Jason Lee, with several assistants, accom- panied a trading expedition across the mountains, but, changing his original pur- pose, passed by without visiting ‘the Flat- heads and established ‘himself in the vicinity of the trading post of Ft Van- 886 couver, nearly opposite the mouth of the Willamette, in Washington. Another embassy from the Flatheads, in 1839, was successful, and in the next year the noted Belgian Jesuit, Peter John de Smet, priest, explorer, and author, was on the ground, 1,600 Indians of the confederated tribes being gathered to await his coming. In 1841 he founded the mission of St Mary on Bitter-root r., w. Mont., making it a starting point for other missions farther to the w., to be noted elsewhere. On ac- count of the hostility of the Blackfeet the mission was abandoned in 1850, to be suc- ceeded by that of St Ignatius on Flathead lake, within the present Flathead reserva- tion, which still exists in successful opera- tion, practically all of the confederated tribes of the reservation having been Christian for halfacentury. The principal co-workers in the Flathead mission were the Jesuits Canestrelli, Giorda, Mengarini, Point, and Ravalli. The first three of these have made important contributions to philology, chief among which are the Salish Grammar of Mengarini, 1861, and the Kalispel Dictionary, 1877, of Giorda, of whom it is said that he preached in six Indian languages. Next in chronologic order in the cen- tral region, after the Catholics, come the Moravians. Their work among the Dela- wares and associated tribes in Obio, and later in Ontario and Kansas, was a con- tinuation of that begun among the same people in New York and Pennsylvania as early as 1740, and has been already noted. After them came the Friends, or, as more commonly known, the Quakers. In all their missionary effort they seem to have given first place to the practical things of civilization, holding the doc- trinal teaching somewhat in reserve until the Indians had learned from experience to value the advice of the teacher. In accord also with the Quaker principle, their method was essentially democratic, strict regard being given to the wishes of the Indians as expressed through their chiefs, their opinions being frequently in- vited, with a view to educating them to a point of self-government. In 1804 the Maryland yearly meeting, after long councils with the Indians, established an industrial farm on upper Wabash r. in Indiana, where several families from the neighboring Miami, Shawnee, and others soon gathered for instruction in farming. For several years it flourished with in- creasing usefulness, until forced to discon- tinue by an opposition led by the Shawnee prophet (see Tenskwatawa). The work was transferred to the main Shawnee set- tlement at Wapakoneta, Ohio, where, in 1812, a saw mill and grist mill were built, tools distributed, and a farm colony was MISSIONS {B. A. BL successfully inaugurated. The war com- pelled a suspension until 1815, when work was resumed. In 1822 a boarding school was opened, and both farm and school continued, with some interruptions, until the final removal of the tribe to the W. in 1832-33. The teachers followed, and by 1837 the Shawnee mission was reestab- lished on the reservation in Kansas, about 9 m. w. from the present Kansas City. It was represented as flourishing in 1848, being then perhaps the most important among the immigrant tribes, but suffered the inevitable result on the later removal of the Shawnee to the present Oklahoma. The work was con- ducted under the joint auspices of the Indiana, Ohio, and Maryland yearly meetings, aided in the earlier years by liberal contributions from members of the society in England and Ireland. The most noted of the teachers were Isaac Harvey and his son, Henry Harvey, whose work covers the period from 1819 to 1842. During the period of the ‘‘ peace policy’”’ administration of Indian affairs, fora term of about a dozen years begin- ning in 1870, considerable work was done by laborers of the same denomination among the Caddo, Kiowa, Cheyenne, and other tribes of Oklahoma, but with- out any regular mission or school estab- lishment. The best known ol these workers was Thomas C. Battey, author of ‘A Quaker among the Indians,’ who conducted a camp school among the Kiowa in 1873. The Presbyterians, whonow stand second in the number of their mission establish- ments in the United States, began their labors in the Central states about the same time as the Friends, with a mission farm among the Wyandot on Sandusky r. in Ohio, in charge of Rev. Joseph Badger. It continued until 1810, when it was aban- doned in consequence of the opposition of the traders and the conservative party led by the Shawnee prophet. Morse’s report on the condition of the tribes in 1822 makes no mention of any Presby- terian mission work at that time excep- ting among the Cherokee (see Southern States). A few years later the Rev. Isaac Van Tassel, under authority from the American Board, was in charge of a mis- sion among the Ottawa, at Maumee, Ohio. He compiled an elementary reading book, printed in 1829, the first publication in the Ottawa language. In 1827, under the auspices of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, a Congregational mission was begun among the Chippewaon Macki- naw id., upper Michigan, by Rev. J. D. Stevens and wife, who with others after- ward extended their labors into nN. Wis- consin, and later were transferred to the es EY BULL. 30] Sioux mission. In 1829 Rey. Frederick Ayer joined the Mackinaw station, and, after two years’ study of the language, opened among the Chippewa at Sandy Lake, Minn., in 1831, what is said to have been the first school in Minnesota. He is the author of a small text-book in the language. Other stations were estab- lished svon after among the same tribe, at Lapointe, Wis., Pokegama lake, and Leech lake, Minn., but seem to have been discontinued about 1845. The Mackinaw mission had already been abandoned. Rey. Peter Dougherty, under the direct auspices of the Presbyterian mission board, labored among the Chippewa and the Ottawa at Grand "Traverse bay, lower Michigan, in 1843-47-!- and is the author of several text-books and small religious works in the language of the former tribe. In 1834 two volunteer workers, Mr Samuel W. Pond and his brother Gid- eon, took up their residence in a village of the Santee Sioux on L. Calhoun, near the present St Paul, Minn. They afterward became regularly ordained missionaries under the American Board, continuing in the work for 18 years. In he same year Rev. Thomas S. W illiam- son, ‘‘the father of the Dakota mission,’ made a reconnoissance of the field for the same Board, and on his favorable report two mission stations were estab- lished in 1835—one at L. Harriet, near St Paul, under Rey. J. D. Stevens, for- merly of the Mackinaw mission, the other under Williamson himself at Lac- qui-parle, high up on Minnesotar. With Mr Williamson then or later were his wife, his daughter, and his two sons, all of whom became efficient partners in the work. In 1837 Rey. Stephen R. Riggs, with his wife, Mary, and his son, Alfred L.—all known in mission annals—joined the station at Lac-qui-parle. In the next 10 or 12 years, as the good will of the Indians was gradually won and the work- ing force increased, other stations were established, all among the Santee Sioux in Minnesota. Among these was the one started by Rev. John F. Aiton, in 1848, at Redwing, where Revs. Francis Denton and Daniel Gavan, for the Evangelical Missionary Society of Lucerne, had estab- lished the ‘‘Swiss mission’’ in 1837, these two missionaries now combining forces with the American workers. In-1852, in consequence of a cession of Indian land, the eastern station, then at Kaposia, was removed by Williamson to Yellow Medi- cine on the upper Minnesota, and two ears later, in consequence of the burn- ing of the Lac-qui-parle station, that mis- sion also was removed to Hazelwood, in the same neighborhood. The work continued with varying suc- cess until interrupted by the Sioux out- 1033—07——_3 MISSIONS S87 break in the summer of 1862, when the missions were abandoned and the mis- sionaries sought safety within the older settlements. Throughout the troubles the Christian Sioux generally remained friendly and did good service in behalf of the endangered settlers. Asa result of the outbreak the Santee Sioux were removed to Niobrara, N. rE. Nebr., where they now reside. The missionaries fol- lowed, and in 1866 the ‘‘ Niobrara mission’’ was organized, the work being extended to other neighboring bands of Sioux, and the principal workers being Revs. John P. Williamson and Alfred L. Riggs, sons of the earlier missionaries. Nearly all the earlier Presbyterian work among the Sioux, as among the Chero- kee, was conducted through the Ameri- can Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions. To the Congregational missionaries we owe most of our knowledge of the Sioux language, their work being almost en- tirely in the Santee or eastern dialect. Stevens, the Pond brothers, all of the Williamsons, and Stephen and Alfred Riggs have all made important contribu- tions, ranging from school text-booksand . small devotional works up to diction- aries, besides adapting the Roman alpha- bet to the peculiarities of the language with such success that the Sioux haye become a literary people, the majority of the men being able to read and write in their own language. It is impossible to estimate the effect this acquisition has had in stimulating the self-respect and ambition of the tribe. Among the most important of these philologic productions are Riggs’ Grammar and Dictionary of the Dakota Language, published by the Smithsonian Institution in 1852, with a later revision by Dorsey, and Riggs and Williamson’s Dakota Bible, published in 1880, being then, in Pilling’s opinion, with two exceptions, the only complete Bible translation in any Indian language since Eliot’s Bible in 1663. In much of the earlier linguistic work the mission- aries had the efficient cooperation of Joseph Renville, an educated half-blood. As an adjunct to the educational work, a monthly journal was conducted for about 2 years by Rev. H. Pond, chiefly in the native language, under the title of ‘The Dakota Friend,’ while its modern successor, ‘Iapi Oaye’ (‘The Word Carrier’), has been conducted under the auspices of the Niobrara mission since 1871. In 1821 two Presbyterian missions were established among the Osage by the United Foreign Missionary Society. One of these, Harmony, was near the junction of the Marais des Cygnes with the Osage r., not far from the present Rich Hill, 888 Mo.; the other, Union, was on the w. bank of Neoshor., about midway between the present Muskogee and Ft Gibson, Okla. Both were established upon an extensive scale, with boarding schools and a full corps of workers; but in conse- quence of differences with the agent and an opposition instigated by the traders, the Osage field was abandoned after about 15 years of discouraging effort (McCoy). One of these workers, Rey. William B. Montgomery, compiled an Osage reading book, published in 1834. Among others connected with the mission were the Revs. Chapman, Pixley, Newton, Sprague, Palmer, Vaill, Belcher, and Requa. The missions conducted by the same denomi- nation among the removed Southern tribes in Oklahoma are noted in connection with the Southern states. In1834two Presbyterian workers, Reys. John Dunbar and Samuel Allis, began work among the Pawnee of Nebraska under the auspices of the American Board, and later were joined by Dr Satterlee. After some time spent in getting ac- quainted with the people and the lan- guage, a permanent station was selected on Plum cr., a small tributary of Loupr., in 1838, by consent of the Pawnee, who in the meantime had also acknowledged the authority of the Government. Cir- cumstances delayed the work until 1844, when a considerable mission and a Goy- ernment station were begun, and a num- ber of families from the different bands took up their residence adjacent thereto. In consequence, however, of the repeated destructive inroads of the Sioux, the ancient enemies of the Pawnee, the mis- sion effort was abandoned in 1847 and the tribe returned to its former wild life. About the year 1835 work was begun by the Presbyterian Board of Foreign Missions among the Iowaand Sauk, then residing on Missouri r. in &. Nebraska. Attention was given also to some others of the removed tribes, and about 10 years later a mission was established among the Omaha and the Oto at Bellevue, near the present Omaha, Nebr., where, in 1850, Rey. Edward McKenney compiled a small Omaha primer, the first publication in that language. Both missions continued down to the modern period, despite the shifting fortunes of the tribes. Other prominent workers were Rev. Samuel Irvin, who gave 30 years of his life, be- ginning in 1837, to the first tribes named; and Rey. William Hamilton, who, begin- ning also in 1837, with the same tribes, was transferred to the Bellevue mission in 1853, rounding out a long life witha record of half a century spent in the serv- ice. Working in collaboration these two produced several religious and linguistic works in the Iowa language, published MISSIONS [B. A. B. by the Mission press from 1843 to 1850, besides a collection of Omaha hymns and some manuscript translations by Mr Ham- ilton alone at a later period. The pioneer Methodist mission work in the central region appears to have been inaugurated by a volunteer negro minis- ter, Rev. Mr Stewart, who in 1816 began preaching among the Wyandot, about Sandusky, in Ohio, and continued with such success that 3 years later a regular mission was established under Rey. James B. Finley. This is the only work by that denomination noted in Morse’s Report of 1822. In 1835, with liberal aid from the Government, as was then customary, the Southern branch established a mission about 12 m. from the present Kansas City, in Kansas, among the immigrant Shaw- nee. In 1839 it was in charge of Rev. Thomas Johnson, and 3 years later was reported in flourishing condition, with boarding school and industrial farm. In 1855 both this mission and another, estab- lished by the Northern branch, were in operation. Smaller missions were estab- lished between 1835 and 1840 among the Kickapoo (Rey. Berryman in charge in 1839), Kansa (Rev. W. Johnson in charge in 1839), Delawares, Potawatomi, and united Peoria and Kaskaskia, all but the last-named being in Kansas. A small volume in the Shawnee language and an- other in the Kansa were prepared and printed for their use by Mr Lykins, of the Shawnee Baptist mission. The work just outlined, with some work among the immigrant Southern tribes (see Southern States), seems to be the sumof Methodist mission labors outside of the Chippewa territory until a recent period. In 1837 a mission was started by Rey. Alfred Brunson among the Santee Sioux at Kaposia, or Little Crow’s village, a few miles below the present St Paul, Minn.., which existed until 1841, when, on the demand of the Indians, it was discon- tinued. In 1823 the Wesleyan Methodist Society of England began work among the Chip- pewa and related bands in Ontario (see Canada, East), and some 20 years later the American Methodists began work in the same tribe along the s. shore of L. Superior in upper Michigan. In 1843 Rev. J. H. Pitezel took charge of the work, with headquarters at Sault Ste Marie as the principal station. Another station was established at Keweenaw pt. about the same time by Rey. John Clark. Others were established later at Sandy lake and Mille Lac, Minn., also among the Chippewa, and all of these were in successful operation in 1852. The earliest Baptist worker in the cen- tral region was Rey. Isaac McCoy, after- ward for nearly 30 yearsthegeneral agent BULL. 30] in the Indian mission work of that de- nomination. In 1818 he began preaching among the Wea in Indiana, and in 1820 organized at Ft Wayne, Ind., a small school for the children of the neighboring tribes, then in the lowest state of demor- alization from wars, removals, drunken- ness, and the increasing pressure of a hos- tile white population. His earliest asso- ciate was Mr Johnston Lykins, then a boy of 19, but later distinguished as a voluminous translator and author of a system of Indian orthography. Two years later this school was discontinued, and by treaty arrangement with the Goy- ernment, which assumed a large part of the expense, two regular missions were established, viz: Carey (1822) for the Potawatomi, on St Joseph r. near the preseat South Bend, Ind., and Thomas (1823) among the Ottawa, on Grand r., Mich. Mr Lykins took charge among the Ottawa, to whom he was soon able to preach in their own language, while Mr McCoy continued with the Potawatomi. In consequence of the inauguration of the Government plan for the removal of the Indians to the W., both missions were abolished in 1830, the work being resumed among the Indians in their new homes in Kansas. A small mission estab- lished among the Chippewa at Sauit Ste Marie, Mich., under Rev. A. Bingham about 1824, continued a successful exist- ence 1n charge of its founder for about 25 years. In 1831, while the removal of the In- dians was still 1n progress, the Shawnee Mission was established under Mr Lykins about 10 m.s. w. from the pres- ent Kansas City, among the Shawnee. In the fall of 1833 Rev. Jotham Meeker, one of the former assistants in the E., arrived with a printing press and types, with which it was proposed to print for distribution among the various neighbor- ing tribes educational and devotional works in their own languages according to a new phonetic system devised by Mr Meeker. The work of translating and printing was actively taken up, the first issue being a Delaware primer in 1834, believed to be the first book printed in Kansas. Within the next few years small volumes by various missionary workers were printed in the Shawnee, Delaware, Potawatomi, Ottawa, Wea, Kansa, Osage, Iowa, Oto, Creek, and Choc- taw languages, besides a small journal in the Shawnee language. Not alone the Baptists, but also Methodists and Presby- terians working in the same field, availed themselves of the services of the Shaw- nee mission press. In the meantime other missions were established among the Delawares (Mr Ira D. Blanchard, 1833), Oto (Rev. Moses Merrill, 1833), Iowa MISSIONS 889 (18347), Ottawa (Rev. Jotham Meeker, 1837), and Potawatomi (Mr _ Robert Simerwell, 1837), besides stations among the removed southern tribes of Indian Ter. (See Southern States.) All of these first--named were within what is now Kansas excepting the Oto mission known as Bellevue, which was at the mouth of Platte r., near the present Omaha, Nebr. At this station Mr Merrill, who had pre- viously worked among the Chippewa, made such study of the language that within 3 years he was able to preach to the Indians without an interpreter, be- sides compiling a book of hymns and one or two other small works in Oto. He died in 1840. The various missions re- mained in successful operation until about 1855, when, in consequence of the dis- turbed condition of affairs in Kansas, they were discontinued. All of the tribes have since been removed to Indian Ter. The Episcopalians appear to have done no work in the interior until about 1830, when they had a station in the vicinity of Sault Ste Marie, Mich., among the Chippewa. In 1852 a mission was estab- Hehed among the Chippewa of Gull lake, Minn., by Rev. J. L. Breck, and in 185 56 at Leech lake by the same worker. In 1860, through the efforts of Bishop H. B. Whipple, a mission was established among the Santee Sioux at the lower Sioux agency, Redwood, Minn., in charge of Rev. Samuel D. Hinman. The work was interrupted by the outbreak of 1862, but on the final transfer of the Indians to Niobrara, Nebr., in 1866, was resumed by Mr Hinman, who had kept in close touch with them during the period of disturb- ance. A large mission house, known as St Mary’s, was erected, which later be- came the central station for the work of this denomination among the Sioux and neighboring tribes. In 1870 St Paul’s mis- sion was established at the Yankton Sioux agency, S. Dak., by Rev. Joseph W. Cook, and in 1872 work was begun at the Lower Brulé Sioux agency, 8. Dak. , by Rev. W. J. Cleveland, and extended later to the Upper Brulé and Oglala Sioux of Rose- bud and Pine Ridge agencies, S. Dak. In the meantime Rey. J. Owen Dorsey had begun to labor among the Ponea, also in South Dakota, in 1871. The work is still being actively carried on in the same field. All of the Sioux mission- aries named have rendered valuable serv- ice to philology in the preparation of hymnals, prayer books, etc., in the native language, together with a small ae journal ‘Anpao’ (‘The Daybreak’), sued fora number of yearsin the anton Sioux dialect. Theethnologic researches of Mr Dorsey place him in the front rank of investigators, chief among his many contributions being his great monograph 890 upon the Dhegiha (Omaha and Ponca) language, published under direction of the Bureau of American Ethnology, in whose service he spent the last years of his life. In connection with the Epis- copal mission may be noted the lace- making industry for Indian women insti- tuted by Miss Sibyl Carter, chiefly among the Chippewa. In 1847 the Lutherans, under the aus- pices of the Evangelical Lutheran Mis- sionary Society of Dresden, Germany, began work among the Chippewa in lower Michigan, principally in the pres- ent Saginaw and Gratiot cos. The first mission school was opened in that year at Frankenmuth, on Cass r., by Rev. A. Craemer. In 1847 he was joined by Rey. Edward Baierlein, who, a year or two later, established a second station at Bethany, on Piner., in Gratiot co. Here Mr Baierlein compiled a small volume of reading lessons and Scripture stories, pub- lished in 1852. In the next year he was recalled and we hear no more of the mis- sion, which was probably discontinued soon after. In 1846 the first Mormon emigrants crossed the plains from Illinois and, after a long and toilsome journey, settled at Great Salt lake, Utah, where they have since transformed the desert into a garden and built up a religious commonwealth which now exercises a dominant influence over large portions of the Mountain states. Their religious tradition regards the In- dians as the descendants of the so-called Lost Ten Tribes of Israel (q. v.), and while no statistics are available it is known that their unsalaried missionaries from the first have given special attention to the Indian tribes, with the result that many among the Ute, Shoshoni, Paiute, and others at least nominally belong to that denomination. In 1905-6 their mis- sionary effort was extended to the Chey- enne and other tribes of Oklahoma. One of the most recent mission enter- prises undertaken in the middle W. is that of the Mennonites, a small but influ- ential denomination of German origin, professing the principles of peace and nonresistance common to the Moravians and the Quakers. After a short pre- liminary sojourn in 1877, regular work was begun among the Arapaho at Dar- lington, Okla., by Rey. Samuel D. Haury in 1880, the enterprise being aided by the active cooperation of the Government and local Indian agent. In 1883 another station was opened at Cantonment, about 70 m. N. w., among the Cheyenne, by Mr Haury, while Rev. H. R. Voth took charge of the work at Darlington and continued with it until transferred to a new field of duty in Arizona about 10 years later. Two other stations were MISSIONS [By ATE: afterward established among the same tribes, and provision was made for the industrial training of Indian boys in schools and private homes in Kansas. In 1890 the Cantonment mission received an important accession in the arrival of Rey. Rudolph Petter and wife from Switzer- land, who at once devoted themselves to a systematic study of the Cheyenne lan- guage in the tipi camps. The schools at both principal stations were in flourish- ing condition until the withdrawal of Gov- ernment aid compelled their discontinu- ance in 1902. The Cantonment mission is still kept up, the Cheyenne work being in charge of Mr Petter and his wife, as- sisted by Miss Bertha Kinsinger, while Rey. John A. Funk ministers to the Arapaho. There is also a small station among the Cheyenne at Hammon, in charge of Rev. H. J. Kliewer, and an- other among the Northern Cheyenne at Busby, Mont., in charge of Rev. and Mrs Gustav Linscheid since its establishment in 1904. To Mr Petter we are indebted for our principal knowledge of the Cheyenne language, into which he has translated some parts of the Bible, a number of hymns, and the ‘ Pilgrim’s Progress,’ be- sides being the author of a reading book and an extended manuscript grammar and dictionary. Tue CotumsBia Recion.—Through the influence of Catholic Caughnawaga and of some of the employés of the Hudson’s Bay Co., many individuals among the tribes of the Columbia r., particularly Flatheads and Nez Percés, had adopted the principles and ceremonials of the Christian religion as early as 1820, lead- ing later to the request for missionaries, as already noted. The first mission of the Columbia region was established in 1834 by a party under Rev. Jason Lee, for the Methodists, on the k£. side of the Willa- mette at French Prairie, about the pres- ent Oregon City, Oreg. In 1840 it was removed to Chemeketa, 10 m. farther up theriver. Other stations were established later at The Dalles of the Columbia, Oreg., by Revs. Lee and Perkins, in 1838; near Pt Adams, at the mouth of the Columbia, Oreg., by Rev. J. H. Frost, in 1841; and at Ft Nisqually on Puget sd., Wash., by Rev. J. P. Richmond in 1842. The tribes most directly concerned at the four stations, respectively, were the Ka- lapuya, Wasco, Clatsop, and Nisqualli, all in process of swift decline. For vari- ous reasons no success attended the pro- ject. The children in the schools sick- ened and died; one missionary after an- other resigned and went home; and Lee, as superintendent in charge, so far neg- lected his duties that in 1844 he was de- posed and the church board, after in- vestigation, ordered the discontinuanc¢ — es =, ee eee ae BULL. 30] of the work, which had already cost a quarter of a million dollars. The Dalles station was bought by the Presbyterians, who now entered the same field (see Ban- croft, Hist. Oreg., 1, 1886). In the fall of 1836 the Presbyterians, under the leadership of Rev. Marcus Whitman, established their first mission in the Columbia region at Waiilatpu, now Whitman, on Wallawalla r., s. &. Wash., in territory claimed by the Cayuse tribe. The site had been selected by an advance agent, Rev. Samuel Parker, a few months earlier. Rev. H. H. Spalding, of the same party, about the same time, established a mission among the Nez Percés at Lapwai, on Clearwater. r., a few miles above the present Lewiston, Idaho. Early in 1839 a second station was begun among the Nez Pereés at Kamiah, higher up the Clearwater, but was discontinued in 1841. Revs. E. Walker and C. C. Eells estab- lished themselves at Chemakane, N. E. Wash., on a lower branch of Spokane r., among the Spokan. The Spokane, whose chief had been ed- ucated among the whites, proved friendly, but from the very beginning the Cayuse and a considerable portion of the Nez Percés maintained an insulting and hos- tile attitude, the Cayuse particularly claiming that the missionaries were in- truders upon their lands and were in league with the immigrants to dispossess the Indians entirely. In consequence the Kamiah station was soon abandoned. At Waiilatpu, the main station, Whitman was more than once in danger of personal assault, the irritation of the Indians con- stantly growing as the flood of immigrants increased. In consequence of the contin- ued opposition of the Cayuse and the Nez Percés, the mission board in 1842 ordered the abandonment of all the stations but Chemakane. Whitman then crossed the mountains to New York to intercede for his mission, with some degree of success, returning the next year to find his wife a refugee at one of the lower settlements, in consequence of the burning of a part of the mission property by the Cayuse, who were restrained from open war only by the attitude of the Government agent and the Hudson’s Bay Co.’s_ officers. In the summer of 1847 the Cayuse and neighboring tribes were wasted by an epidemic of measles and fever communi- cated by passing immigrant trains, all of which made Waiilatpu a stopping point. Two hundred of the Cayuse died within a few weeks, while of the Nez Percés the principal chief and 60 of his men fell vic- tims. A rumorspread among the Cayuse . that Whitman had brought back the dis- ease poison from the E. and unloosed it for their destruction. The danger became so imminent that, actuated partly also by MISSIONS 891 the opposition of the mission board, he decided to abandon Waiilatpu and remove to the former Methodist station at The Dalles, which he had already bought for his own denomination. Atthe same time he began negotiations with the Catholics for their purchase of Waiilatpu. Before the removal could be made, however, the blow fell. On Noy. 29, 1849, the Cayuse attacked Waiilatpu mission, killed Dr and Mrs Whitman and 7 others and plundered the mission property. Within a few days thereafter, before the Indians dis- persed to their camps, 4 others of the mis- sion force were killed, making 13 mur- dered, besides 2 children who died of neglect, or 15 persons in all. The rest, chiefly women, were carried off as pris- oners and subjected to abuse until rescued by the effort of the Hudson’s Bay Co., a month later. The Catholic Bishop Brouillet, who was on his way from be- low to confer with Whitman about the sale of the mission property, was one of the first to learn of the massacre, and hastening forward was allowed to bury the dead and then found opportunity to send warning to the Lapwai mission in time for Spalding and his party to make their escape, some of them being shel- tered by friendly Nez Percés, although the mission buildings were plundered by the hostiles. The Spokan chief, Garry, remained faithful and gave the people at Chemakane missiona bodyguard for their protection until the danger was past. As a result of the Indian war which followed the Presbyterian missions in the Colum- bia region were abandoned. During the brief period that the station at Kamiah had continued, the missionary Rev. Asa Smith had ‘‘reduced the Nez Percé dia- lect to grammatical rules.’” In 1839 the Lapwai mission received a small printing outfit with which Spalding and his assist- ants printed small primers, hymns, and ‘portions of scripture in the language of the tribe by the aid of native interpreters. A Spokane primer of 1842, the joint work of Walker and Eells, is said to have been the third book printed in the Columbia r. region. As we have seen, the first Christian teaching among the tribes of the Colum- bia region had come from the Catholic employees of the Hudson’s Bay Co., through whose efforts many of the Nez Percés, Flatheads, and others had volun- tarily adopted the Christian forms asearly as 1820, and some years later sent dele- gates to St Louis to make requests for missionaries, to which the Methodists were first to respond. In 1838 Father Francis Blanchet and Modeste Demers arrived at Ft Vancouver, Wash., on the Columbia, from Montreal, to minister par- ticularly to the French employees of the 892 Hudson’s Bay Co., having visited the vari- ous tribes farther up along the river en route. In the next year St Francis Xavier mission was established by Blan- chet on the Cowlitz, in w. Washington, and St Paul mission at the French settle- ment on the lower Willamet, at Cham- poeg, Oreg., while Father J. B. Bolduc, afterward the pioneer missionary on Vancouver id., began preaching to the tribes on Puget sd. In 1841 the Jesuit de Smet had founded the mission of St Mary among the Flatheadsin w. Montana (see Interior States), while a companion Jesuit, Father Nicholas Point, established the Sacred Heart mission among the Coeur d’ Alénes in Idaho. In 1844 de Smet brought out from Europe a number of Jesuits and several sisters of the order of Notre Dame. Regu- lar schools were started and the tribes on both sides of the river as far up as the present Canadian boundary were included within the scope of the work. In the meantime Blanchet had been made arch- bishop of the Columbia territory and had brought out from Quebec 21 additional recruits—Jesuits, secular priests, and sis- ters—with which reinforcements 6 other missions were founded in rapid succes- sion, viz: St Ignatius, St Francis Borgia, and St Francis Regis, in Washington, among the Upper Pend d’Oreilles, Lower Pend d’Oreilles, and Colvilles, respec- tively, with 3 others across the line in British Columbia. Of these the first- named was the principal station, in charge of the Jesuit Fathers De Vos and Accolti. In the summer of 1847 Father N. OC. Pandosy and 3 others, the first Oblate fathers in this region, established a mis- sion at Ahtanam among the Yakima in gE. Washington; Father Pascal Ricard, Oblate, founded St Joseph on the Sound near the present Olympia; and in October of the same year, after some negotiation for the purchase of the Presbyterian establishment under Whitman at Waii- latpu, Father John Brouillet arrived to start a mission among the Cayuse. Hardly had he reached the nearest camp, however, when the news came of the terrible Whitman massacre, and Brouillet was just in time to bury the dead and send warning to the outlying stations, as already detailed. The project of a mission among the Cayuse was in consequence abandoned. In the next year the secular Fathers Rousseau and Mesplée founded a station among the Wasco, at The Dalles of Columbia r., Oreg. Work was attempted among the degenerate Chinook in 1851, but with little result. Father E. C. Chirouse, best known for his later successful work at Tulalip school, began his labors among the tribes of Puget sd. and the lower MISSIONS [B. A. B. Columbia about the same period. With the exception of the Wasco and Chinook, these missions, or their successors, are still in existence, numbering among their adherents the majority of the Christian Indians of Washington and s. Idaho. At the Tulalip school ‘The Youth’s Com- panion,’ a small journal in the Indian language, set up and printed by the In- dian boys, was begun in 1881 and con- ducted for some years. Father Louis Saintonge, for some years with the Yaki- ma and Tulalip missions, is the author of several important linguistic contributions to the Chinook jargon and the Yakima language. Father Pandosy also is the author of a brief ‘Grammar and Diction- ary’ of the Yakima. New Mexico anp Arizona.—As all of this region was colonized from Spain, the entire mission work until a very recent period was conducted by the Catholics and through priests of the Franciscan order. The earliest exploration of the territory w. of the Rio Grande was made by the Franciscan friar, Marcos de Niza, in 1539, and it was through his repre- sentations that the famous exploration of Coronado was undertaken a year later. Five Franciscans accompanied the army, and on the return of the expedition in 1542 three of these volunteered to remain behind for the conversion of the savages. Fray Luis de Escalona, or Descalona, chose Cicuye (Pecos) for his labors. Fray Juan de Padilla, with a few com- panions and a herd of sheep and mules, pushed on to distant Quivira, some- where on the plains of Kansas. Fray Juan de la Cruz stayed at Tiguex, Coro- nado’s winter quarters, properly Puaray on the Rio Grande, near the present Ber- nalillo, N. Mex. On arriving at Pecos Fray Luis sent back the message that while the tribe was friendly the medicine- . men were hostile and would probably cause hisdeath. Soit apparently proved, for nothing more was ever heard of his fate or of that of Fray Juan de la Cruz at Tiguex. Of Fray Juan de Padilla it was learned years afterward that he had-been killed by the Quivira people for attempt- ing to carry his ministrations to another tribe with which they were at war. In 1580 three other Franciscans, Rod- riguez, Santa Maria, and Lopez, crossed the Rio Grande with a small ‘escort and attempted to establish a mission at the same town of Tiguex, by that time known as Puaray, but were killed by the Indians within a few months of their arrival. In 1598 Juan deOnate withastrong party of 100 men, besides women and children, and 7,000 cattle, entered the country from Mexico and within a few months had received the submission of all the Pueblo tribes as far as the remote Hopi of Ari- BULL. 30] zona, organizing a regular colonization and governmental administration and dividing the region into 7 mission dis- tricts in charge « of a force of Franciscan friars. In 1617 the Pueblo missions counted 11 churches, with 14,000 ‘‘con- verts.’? In 1621 there were more than 16,000 converts, served by 27 priests in chargeot Father Alonso Benavides, whose Memorial is our principal source of intor- mation for this period. Another distin- guished name of this epoch is that of Father Geronimo de Zarate Salmeron, missionary, philologist, and historian. In 1630 there were some 50 priests sery- ing more than 60,000 Christianized In- dians in 90 pueblos, with 25 principal mission centers and churches. To this period belong the mission ruins at Ab6é and Tabira, or ‘‘Gran Quiyira’’ (one of which may be the San Isidro of the lost Jumano tribe), which were abandoned in consequence of Apache invasions about 1675. The entire Pueblo population to- day numbers barely 10,000 souls in 25 villages. About this time we begin to observe the first signs of revolt, due partly to the exactions of the Spanish military author- ities, but more, apparently, to the at- tachment of the Indians, particularly the medicine-men, to their own native cere- monies and religion. About the year 1650 the wild tribes, Known collectively as Apache, began the series of destruc- tive raids which continued down almost to the present century. Increasing fric- tion between the missionaries and the military administration prevented any united effort to meet the emergency. Missionaries were killed in outlying dis- tricts and several pueblos were wiped out by the wild tribes, until in 1675, after the murder of several missionaries and civil- ians and the execution or other punish- ment of the principals concerned, the Pueblo chiefs, led by Popé (q. v.) of San Juan, sent to the governor a Sane de- claring that they would kill all the ‘Span- iards and flee to the mountains before they would permit their medicine-men to be harmed. Conditions rapidly grew worse, until it was evident that a general conspiracy was on foot and an appeal was sent to Mexico by the governor for re- intorcements. Before help could arrive, however, the storm broke, on August 10, 1680, the historic Pueblo revolt, organ- ized and led by Popé. Says Bancroft (Hist. Ariz. and N. Mex., 1889): ‘‘It was the plan of the New Mexi- cans to utterly exterminate the Spaniards; and in the massacre none were spared— neither soldier, priest, or settler, personal friend or foe, young or old, man or woman—except that a few beautiful women and girls were kept as captives.”’ MISSIONS 893 Those in the 8S. were warned in time to escape, but those in the N., E., and W. per- ished to the number of over 400 persons, including 21 missionaries (see list, ibid., p. 179). Santa Fé itself, with a Spanish population of 1,000, after a battle lasting all day, was besieged nearly a week by 3,000 Indians, w ho were finally driven off by Goy. Otermin in a desperate sortie in which the Indians lost 350 killed. The result was the entire evacuation of New Mexico by the Spaniards until its reconquest by Vargas in 1692-94, when most of the missions were reestablished. The Pueblo spirit was not crushed, how- ever, and in the summer of 1696 there was another outbreak by five tribes, re- sulting in the death of five missionaries, besides other Spaniards. The rising was soon subdued, except among the Hopi, who deferred submission until 1700, but only one of their seven cr eight towns, Awatobi, would consent to receive mis- sionaries again. For the favor thus shown to Christians the other Hopi com- bined forces and utterly destroyed Awa- tobi and killed many of its people before the close of the year. The Hopi did not again become a mission tribe, but in 1742 more than 440 Tigua, who had fled to the Hopiat the time of the great revolt, were brought back and distributed among the missions of the Rio Grande until they could be. resettled in a new town of their own. (See Sandia.) In 1733 Father Mirabal established a mission among the wild Jicarilla, on Trampas r., a few leagues from Taos, N. Mex. In 1746 and 1749 attempts were made to gather a part of the Navaho into 2 new missions established in the neighbor- hood of Laguna, but the undertaking was a failure. Inthe latter year the number of Christian Indians in New Mexico, in- cluding the vicinity of El Paso, was re- ported to be about 13,000. By this time the territory had been organized as a bishopric, and with the increase of the Spanish population the relative impor- tance of the mission work declined. In 1780-81 an epidemic of smallpox carried off so many of the Christian Indians that by order of the governor the survivors were the next year concentrated into 20 missions, the other stations being discon- tinued. As the Indians assimilated with the Spanish population the missions gradually took on the character of ordi- nary church establishments, the Francis- cans being superseded by secular priests. The majority of the Pueblo Indians of to-day, excepting those of Hopi and Zuni, are at least nominal Christians. In the more recent historic period work has also been conducted at several pue- blos by various Protestant denominations. In 1854 a Baptist minister, Rey. Samuel 894 Gorman, began a mission at Laguna, N. Mex., which was kept up for several years. In 1894 Rev. C. P. Coe, of the same denomination, began a similar work for the Hopi of Arizona. The Mennonites, represented by Rey. H. R. Voth, had be- gun a year earlier at Oraibi a successful work among the Hopi, which is still ear- ried on, being now in charge of Revs. Jacob Epp and John B. Frey. About the year 1876 the Presbyterians, through Rey. John Menaul, established a mission at Laguna, the undertaking being aiterward extended to Jemez and Zui, N. Mex., besides an industrial school opened at Albuquerque in 1881. By means of a printing press operated at La- guna, with the aid of Indian pupils, sey- eral small devotional and reading books have been published by Menaul and Ber- covitz, connected with the mission, which still continues. With the exception of those among the Hopi, before the great revolt, the only missions in Arizona before the transfer of the territory to the United States were two in number, viz.: San Xavier del Bae and San Miguel de Guevavyi, established under Jesuit auspices on the upper waters of Santa Cruz r., among a subtribe of the Pima, about 1732. The Pima missions were a northern ex- tension of the Jesuit mission foundation of northern Sonora, Mexico. The noted German Jesuit explorer, Father Eusebio Kino (properly Kiuhne), made several missionary expeditions intos. Arizona be- tween 1692 and his death in 1710, but so far as known no regular stations were es- tablished until long after his death, the first priests in charge in 1732 being two other Germans, Father Felipe Segesser, at Bac, and Father Juan Grashoffer, at Gueyavi. Besides the main establish- ment, several other Indian villages were designated as ‘visitas,’ or visiting sta- tions. The Pima mission never flour- ished. In 1750 the tribes revolted and the missions were plundered, most of the missionaries escaping, and by the time peace was restored the contest had begun against the Jesuits, which resulted in the expulsion of the order from Spanish ter- ritory in 1767. Their place was at once filled by the Franciscans, but the work languished and steadily declined under the attacks from the wild tribes. About the year 1780 Guevavi was abandoned in consequence of Apache raids, and Tuma- cacori, in the same general region, was made mission headquarters. The work came to an end by decree of the revolu- tionary government in 1828, shortly after the transfer of authority from Spain to Mexico. CaLirorniA.—As if other parts of Span- ish America, the Cutholics were the sole MISSIONS [B. A. EB. mission workers in California until within avery recent period. The most noted of all the Spanish missions were the Fran- ciscan missions of California, whose story is so closely interwoven with the history and romance of the Pacific coast, and whose ruins still stand as the most pic- turesque landmarks of the region. Their story has been told so often that we need not here go into details. The first one was established in 1769 at San Diego, near the s. boundary, by Father Junipero Serra (to whose memory a monument yas erected at Monterey in 1891), who ad- vanced slowly along the coast and passed the work on to his successors, until in 1828 there was a chain of 21 prosperous mis- sions extending northward to beyond San Francisco bay. The full list, in the order of their establishment, with the names of the founders or superiors in charge of the California ae district at the time, is as follows: 1, San Diego de Aleala (Serra, 1769); 2, San Carlos Bor- romeo de Monterey, alias Carmel (Serra, 1770); 3, San Antonio de Padua (Serra, 1771, July); 4, San Gabriel Arcangel (Serra, 1771, Sept.); 5, San Luis Obispo de Tolosa (Serra, 1772); 6, San Francisco de Asis, alias Dolores (Serra, 1776, Oct.) ; 7, San Juan Capistrano (Serra, 1776, Nov.); 8, Santa Clara (Serra, 1777); 9, San Buenaventura (Serra, 1782); 10, Santa Barbara (Palou, 1786); 11, La Purfsima Concepcion (Palou, 1787); 12, Santa Cruz (Palou, 1791, Sept.); 13, Nuestra Sefiora de la Soledad (Palou, 1791, Oct. ); 14, San José (Lasuen, 1797, June 11); 15, San Juan Bautista (Lasuen, 1797, June 24); 16, San Miguel (Lasuen, 1797, July); 17, San Fernando Rey (Lasuen, 1797, Sept. ); 18, San Luis Rey de Francia (Peyri, 1798); 19, Santa Inez (eet: Rune 20, San Rafael (Payeras, 1817); 21, San Fran- cisco Solano, alias San Solano ‘or Sonoma (Sonoma, 1823); 22, La Purfsima Concep- cion, on lower Colorado r. (Garces, 1780); 23, San Pedro y San Pablo de Bicufer, on lower Colorado r., possibly in Lower California (Garcés, 1780). Among the many devoted workers connected with the California missions during the 65 years of their existence the most prominent, after Serra, are Fathers Crespi, Palou, and Peyri, the last-named being the founder, and for a number of years the superior, of San Luis Rey, which shared with San Diego the honor of being the largest and most important of the series. In 1810 the neophyte population of San Diego was 1,611, while that of San Luis Rey was 1,519. The mission buildings, constructed en- tirely by Indian labor under supervision of the fathers, were imposing structures of brick and stone, some of which even in their roofless condition have defied the ~~ BULL. 30] decay of 70 years. Around each mission, except in the extreme N., were groves of palms, bananas, oranges, Olives, and figs, together with extensive vineyards, while more than 400,000 cattle ranged the pas- tures. Workshops, schoolro#ms, store- rooms, chapels, dormitories, and hospitals were all provided for, and in addition to religious instruction and ordinary school studies, weaving, pottery-making, carpen- try, and every other most useful trade and occupation were taught to the neo- phytes, besides the violin and other in- struments to those who displayed apti- tude in music. There were fixed hours for prayers and work, with three hours of rest at noon, and dancing and other amusements after supper and the angelus, which was one hour before sunset. The diet consisted of an abundance of fresh beef, mutton, wheat and corn bread, and beans, from their own herds and planta- tions. From the sale of the surplus were bought clothing, tobacco, and trinkets for the Indians, and the necessary church supplies. At seasonable intervals there were outing excursions to allow the neo- phytes to visit their wilder relatives in the hills. The missionaries taught by practical example at the plow, the brick- kiln, andinthe vineyard. Duflot de Mo- fras, who made an official tour of the mis- sions on behalf of the French govern- ment shortly before their utter ruin, says: ‘Necessity makes the missionaries indus- trious. One is struck with astonishment at seeing that with such small resources, generally without any European work- men, and with the aid of savage popula- tions whose intelligence was of the lowest order and who were often hostile, besides the vast agricultural culture, they have been able to execute such extensive works of architecture and mechanical structures, such as mills, machinery, and workshops, besides bridges, roads, and canals for irrigation. The construction of almost all these missions required that timber, often cut upon steep mountains, should be brought 25 to 30 miles, and that the Indians should be taught how to make lime, cuf stone, and mould bricks. This fact can not be mistaken—it was not merely by proselytism that the old missionaries succeeded in attracting the Indians. In the work of their conver- sion, if religion was the end, material comfort was the means. The mission- aries had re-solved the great problem of making labor attractive.’’ The Indians themselves, of many tribes and dialects, were for the most part un- warlike and tractable, but without native energy, and probably, in their original condition, lower 1n the scale of e1viliza- tion and morality than any others within the limits of the United States. Infanti- MISSIONS 895 cide prevailed to such a degree that even the most earnest efforts of the mission- aries were unable to stamp it out, the fact showing how little the new teaching really affected the deeper instinct of the savage. Although there were frequent raids by the wild tribes, there was little serious opposition to mission discipline, which was supported when necessary by military assistance from the nearest gar- rison. Despite regular life, abundance of food, and proper clothing according to the season, the Indian withered away under the restrictions of civilization supple- mented by epidemic diseases introduced by the military garrisons or the seal hunt- ers along the coast. The death rate was so enormousin spite of apparent material advancement that it is probable that the former factor alone would have brought about the extinction of the missions with- in a few generations. But all this prosperity at last excited the cupidity of the recently established revolutionary government of Mexico, and in 1833-34 decrees were passed to ‘‘secu- larize’’ the missions and to expel the missionaries, who, as Spaniards, were hated by therevolutionists. The mission funds and vast herds were confiscated, the lands were distributed to eager polit- ical adventurers, and minor vandals com- pleted the work of destruction by taking even the tiles from the roofs and digging up the vines and fruit trees in the gar- dens. Someabortive provision was made for the Indians, of which in their help- lessness they were unable to avail them- selves, and in a few years, left without their protectors, they had again scattered to the mountains and swamps or sunk into the lowest degradation in the new mining towns. In 1834, when the blow came, the California missions had 30,650 Indians, with 424,000 cattle, 62,500 horses and mules; 321,900 sheep, goats, and hogs; and produced 122,500 bushels of wheat and corn. In 1842 there re- mained only 4,450 Indians, 28,220 cattle, and the rest in proportion. To-day, ac- cording to official report, there remain of the old Mission Indians only 2,855, whose condition isa subject of constant seri- ous concern to philanthropists. Two other California missions have a briefer history. In 1780 the military commander of the Sonora district deter- mined to establish among the warlike Yuma two garrison posts with colony and mission attachments, despite the protests of the missionaries concerned, who fore- saw that the combination would be dis- astrous to their own part of the work. Two sites were selected, however, in the fall of the year on the w. bank of the Col- orado—the one, La Purisima Concepcion, occupying the site of old Ft Yuma, the 896 MISS other, San Pedro y Pablode Bicuner, being 8 or 10m. lower dow n, possibly just across the present Mexican border. Purisima mission was placed in charge of Father Francisco Garcés, the explorer, with Father Juan Barreneche as his assistant, while the other was given over to Fathers Diaz and Moreno. The event was as pre- dicted. Within a year the Yuma were roused to hostility by the methods and broken promises of the military com- mander. In July, 1781, both settlements were attacked almost simultaneously, the buildings plundered and burned, the commander and every man of the small garrison killed afteradesperate resistance, the four missionaries and nearly all the men of the colonies also butchered, and the women and several others carried off as captives. A subsequent expedition rescued the captives and buried the dead, but the Yuma remained unsubdued and the colony undertaking was not renewed. (See California, Indians of; Mission In- dians of California.) ALAskA.—Alaska wasdiscovered by the Russiansin 1741 and remaineda possession of Russia until transferred to the United Statesin 1867. In 4794 regular missionary work was begun among the Aleut on Ko- diak id. by monks of the Greek Catholic (Russian orthodox) church, under the Archimandrite Joassaf, with marked suc- cess among the islanders, but with smaller result among the more warlike tribes of the mainland. Within a few years the savage Aleut were transformed to civilized Christians, many of whom were able to read, write; and speak the Russian lan- guage. Among the pioneer workers were Fathers Juvenal, murdered in 1796 by the Eskimo for his opposition to polygamy, and the distinguished John Veniaminof, 1823 to about 1840, the historian and phi- lologist of the Alaskan tribes, and author of a number of religious and educational works in the Aleut and Tlingit languages, including an Aleut grammar and a brief dictionary. Fathers Jacob Netzvietoff and Elias Tishnoff also have made several translations into the Aleut language. About the time of the transfer to the United States the Christian natives num- bered 12,000, served by 27 priests and deacons, with several schools, including aseminary at Sitka. Chapels had been established in every important settlement from Prince William id. to the outermost of the Aleutian ids., a distance of 1,800 m., besides other stations on the Yukon, Kus- kokwim, and Nushagak rs., and regular churches at Sitka, Killisnoo, and Juneau. In 1902 the Greek church had 18 minis- ters at work in Alaska. (See Russian in- fluence. ) The first Protestant missions after the transfer tothe United States were begun by IONS the Presbyterians in 1877, under thesuper- vision of Rey. Sheldon Jackson and Mrs A. R. McFarland, with headquarters at Ft Wrangell, where a school had already been organized by some Christian Indians from the Methodist station at Ft Simp- son, Brit. Col. Withinthe next 18 years some 15 stations had been established among the Indians of the s. coast and islands, besides two among the Eskimo, at Pt Barrow and on St Lawrence id. Among the earliest workers, besides those already named, were Rey. J. G. Brady, Rey. E. 8. Willard, and Mr Walter Stiles. The principal schools were at Sitka (1878) and Juneau (1886). At Pt Barrowa herd of imported reindeer added to the means of subsistence. The majority of these missions are still in successful operation. The next upon the ground were the Catholics, who made their first establish- ment at Wrangell in 1878, following with others at Sitka, Juneau, and Skagway. In 1886-87 they entered the Yukon region, with missions at Nulato on the Yukon, St Ignatius on the Kuskokwim, St Mary’s (Akularak), St Michael, Nome, Kusilvak id., Nelson id., Holy Cross (Koserefsky ), and others, the largest ua being those at Koserefsky and Nulato. With the ex- ception of Nulato all were in “Eskime ter- ritory. In 1903 the work was in charge of 12 Jesuits and lay brothers, assisted by 11 sisters of St Anne. The Innuit gram- mar and dictionary of Father Francis Barnum (1901) ranks as one of the most important contributions to Eskimo phil- ology. In 1884 the Moravians, pioneer workers among the eastern Eskimo, sent a com- mission to look over the ground in Alaska, and as a result a mission was established at Kevinak among the Eskimo of Kus- kokwimr.inthenext year by Revs. W. H. Weinland and J. H. Kilbuck, with their wives. In the same year other stations were established at Kolmakof, on the upper Kuskokwim, for Eskimo and In- dians together, and farther s., at Carmel, on Nushagak r. In 1903 there were 5 mission stations in Eskimo territory, in charge of 13 white workérs, having 21 native assistants, with Rev. Adolf Stecker as superintendent. The reindeer herd numbered nearly 400. In 1886 the Episcopalians began work with a school at St Michael, on the coast (Eskimo), which was removed next year to Anvik, on the Yukon, in charge of Rey. and Mrs Octavius Parker and Rey. J. H. Chapman. In 1890 a mission school was started at Pt Hope (Eskimo), under Dr J. B. Driggs, and about the same time another among the Tanana Indians in the middle Yukon valley, by Rey. and Mrs T. H. Canham. In 1903 the Episcopalians in Alaska, white and [B. Ale eta = ee BULL. 30] native, counted 13 churches, a boarding school, and 7 day schools, with a total working force of 31. The Baptists also began work in 1886 on Radial id., under Mr W. E. Roscoe. In 1893 a large orphanage was erected on Wood id., opposite Kodiak, by the Woman’s Home Mission Society, its sphere of influence now including a great part of the Alaska peninsula west ward from Mt St Elias. The Methodists, beginning also in 1886, have now several stations in s. BE. Alaska, together with the flourishing Jesse Lee Industrial Home, under the auspices of the Methodist Woman’s Home Mission Society, on Unalaska id. In 1887 the Swedish Tvangelical Union of Sweden, through Reys. Axel Karlson and Adolf Lydell, respectively, estab- lished stations at Unalaklik on Bering sea (Eskimo) and at Yakutat, on the s. coast among the Tlingit. In 1900, in consequence of an epidemic, an orphanage was founded on Golofnin bay. The civ- ilizing and Christianizing influence of the Swedish mission is manifest over a large area. In 1887 the Kansas Yearly Meeting of Friends began work on Douglas id., near Juneau, through Messrs E. W. Weesner and W. H. Bangham, chiefly for the white population. In 1892 a school was opened among the Kake Indians of Kuiu and Kupreanof ids., under the auspices of the Oregon meeting, and in 1897 another mission, under the auspices of the California meeting, was established among the Eskimo in Kotzebuesd. Here also is now a large reindeer herd. In 1890 the Congregationalists, under auspices of the American Missionary As- sociation, established the Eskimo mission school of Wales, at C. Prince of Wales, on Bering str., under Messrs W. T. Lopp and H. R. Thornton, the latter of whom was afterward assassinated by some re- bellious pupils. In 1902 the school was in prosperous condition, with more than a hundred pupils and a herd of about 1,200 reindeer. In 1900 the Lutherans, under the aus- pices of the Norwegian Evangelical Church, established an: orphanage at the Teller reindeer station, Port Clarence, Bering str., under Rey. T. L. Brevig, as- sisted by Mr A. Hovick, the missionaries having charge also of the Government reindeer herds at the place. It was at Teller station that Rey. Sheldon Jackson, in 1892, inaugurated the experiment of introducing Siberian reindeer to supple- ment the rapidly diminishing food supply of the natives, as the whale had been practically exterminated from the Alaska coast. The experiment has proved a complete success, the original imported MISSIONS 897 herd of 53 animals having increased to more than 15,000, with promise of soly- ing the problem of subsistence for the Eskimo as effectually as was done by the sheep introduced by the old Franciscans among the Pueblos and through them the Nayaho. For MerrLaKkatia, see Canada, West. Present Conpirions.—It may be said that at present practically every tribe officially recognized within the* United States is under the missionary influence of some religious denomination, workers of several denominations frequently la- boring in the same tribe. The complete withdrawal of Government aid to denom- inational schools some years ago for a time seriously crippled the work and obliged some of the smaller bodies to abandon the mission field entirely. The larger religious bodies have met the diffi- culty by special provision, notably in the case of the Catholics, by means of aid afforded by the Preservation Soc iety, the Marquette League, and by the liber rality of Mother Katharine Drexel, founder of the Order of the Blessed Sacrament, for Indian and Negromission work. The Catholic work is organized under super- vision of the Bureau of Catholic Indian Missions, established in 1874, with head- quarters at Washington. The report for 1904 shows a total of 178 Indian churches and chapels served by 152 priests; 71 boarding and 26 day schools, with 109 teaching priests, 384 sisters, and 138 other religious or secular teachers and school assistants. The principal orders engaged are the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Bene- dictines, and the sisters of the orders of St Francis, St Anne, St Benedict, St Jo- seph, Mercy, and Blessed Sacrament. Of the other leading denominations en- gaged in Indian mission work within the United States proper, according to the official Report of the Board of Indian Commissioners for 1903, the Presbyterians come first, with 101 churches, 69 ordained missionaries and a proportionate force ot other workers, and 32 schools. Next the Methodists, with 40 ordained mission- aries, but with only one school; Episco- palians, 14 missions, 28 ordained mis- sionaries, andl 17 schools; Baptists, 14 missions, 15 ordained missionaries, and 4 schools—exclusive of the Southern Bap- tists, not reported; ee ie weteeouie (American Missionary Association), 10 missions, 12 ordained missionaries, and 5 schoois; Friends, 10 missions, 15 ordained missionaries, and 1 school; Mennonites, 5 missions, 6 ordained missionaries, but no school; Moravians, 3 missions, 3 ordained missionaries, and no school. Statistics for any other denominations, including the Mormons, are not given. The mis- sionary work of each denomination re- - 898 ported is in charge of a central organiza- tion. CanapDA, East; NEWFOUNDLAND, ETC.— Canada, being originally a French posses- sion, the mission work for a century and a half was almost entirely with the Cath- olics. Port Royal, now Annapolis, Nova Scotia, was founded in 1605, and the res- ident priest, Father Fléche, divided his attention between the French settlers and the neighboring Micmac. In 1611 the Jesuits, Fathers Peter Biard and Ene- mond Masse, arrived from France, but finding work among the Micmac made difficult by the opposition of the govern- or, they went to the Abnaki, among whom they established a mission on Mt Desert id., Maine, in 1613. The mission was destroy ed in its very beginning by the English Captain Argall (see “New England). In 1619 work was resumed among the Micmac and the Malecite of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and lower Quebec under the Récollet Franciscans and continued forat least half a century. The most distinguished of these Récol- lets was Father Chrestien Le Clereq, who, while stationed at the Micmac mission of Gaspé, at the mouth of the St Lawrence, from 1655 to about 1665, mastered the language and devised for it a system of hieroglyphic writing which is still in use in the tribe. Another of the same order is said to have been the first to.compile a dictionary of a Canadian language, but the work is now lost. The eastern mis- sions continued, under varying auspices and fortunes, until the taking of Louis- burg, Nova Scotia, by the English in 1745, when all the missionaries in Nova Scotia and New Brunswick were either deported or compelled to seek other refuge. In theirabsence the Abbé Maillard, of Nova Scotia, ministered for some years to the Micmac and the Malecite, at first in secret and then openly after the peace of 1760. To him we owe a Micmac grammar and a treatise on the customs of the Indians. It was not until within the last centu- ry, when international and sectarian jeal- ousies had largely passed away, that the work was resumed, continuing without interruption to the present time. Work was begun in 1615 by the Ré- collets among the roving Montagnais and Algonkin of the Saguenay, Ottawa, and lower St Lawrence region. The pioneers were Fathers Dolbeau, Jamet, and Du Plessis, together with Father Le Caron in the Huron field. In 1636 Dol- beau had extended his ministrations to the outlying bands of the remote Eskimo of Labrador. The principal missions were established at Tadousaec (Montagnais), the great trading resort at the mouth of the Saguenay; Gaspé (Montagnais and Micmac) and Three Rivers (Montagnais MISSIONS [B. A. B. and Algonkin), all in Quebec province; Miscou, N. B., for the Micmac, and on Georgian bay for the Hurons. In 1625 the Récollets called the Jesuits to their aid, and a few years later withdrew en- tirely, leaving the work to be coutinued by the latter order. In 1637 the Jesuit mission of St Joseph was founded by Le Jeune at Sillery, near Quebec, and soon became the most important colony of the christianized Montagnais and Algonkin. In 1646, at the request of the Abnaki, Father Gabriel Druillettes was sent to a tribe. In consequence of the later New England wars, large numbers of the Abnaki and other more southerly tribes took refuge in the Canadian missions (see New England). In 1641 Fathers Charles Raymbault and Isaac Jogues, among the Ottawa bands on the headwaters of the river of that name, accompanied a party to the far W. and discovered the great L. Superior, planting a cross and preaching in the camps about the present Sault Ste Marie, Mich. In the next year a regular mis- sion was established among the Nipissing, on the n. shore of the lake of the same name. Other missions followed, con- tinuing until the dispersion of the Algon- kin tribes by the Iroquois in 1650. Most of the fugitives fled westward, roving along the shores of L. Superior without missionary attention until visited by the Jesuit Allouez in 1667. Other names connected with this early Algonkin mis- sion were those of Pijart, Garreau, and the pioneer explorer René Ménard. In 1657 the first Sulpicians arrived at Quebec from France, and soon afterward began work among the neighboring tribes, but with principal attention to the Iroquois colonies on both shores of L. Ontario, at Quinté and Oswegatchie (see New York). To this period belongs the wonderful ca- noe voyage of discove ery by the two Sul- picians, Galinée and Dollier de Casson, in 1669-70, from Montreal up through the great lakes to Mackinaw, where they were welcomed by the Jesuits Dablon and Marquette, and then home, by way of French r., Nipissing, and the Ottawa. No less important was the discovery of an overland route from the St Lawrence to Hudson bay in 1671-72 by the Sieur St Simon, accompanied by the Jesuit Charles Albanel. Ascending the Saguenay from Tadousac they crossed the divide, and after 10 months of toilsome travel finally reached the bay near the mouth of Ru- pertr., where Albanel, the first missionary to penetrate this remote region, spent some time preaching and baptizing among the wandering Maskegon along the shore. In 1720 a number of the christianized Iroquois, with fragments of the Algonkin bands, after years of shifting about, were aie oe BULL. 30] gathered into a new mission settlement at Oka, or Lake of the Two Mountains (Lac des Deux Montagnes), also known under its Troquois name of Canasadaga, on the n. bank of the St Lawrence, above the island of Montreal. It still exists as one of the principal Indian settlements. Among the earlier missionaries in this region who have made important con- tributions to Algonquian philology may be noted: Father Louis André, Jesuit, who spent more than 40 years with the Montagnais and the Algonkin, from 1669, leaving behind him a manuscript diction- ary of the Algonkin, besides a great body of other material; Father Antonio Silvy, Jesuit, of the same period, author of a manuscript Montagnais dictionary; Father Pierre Laure, Jesuit, with the Montagnais, 1720-38, author of a manu- script Montagnais grammar and diction- ary, and other works; Father Jean Mathe- vet, Sulpician, at Oka, 1746 to 1781, the author of an Abnaki dictionary; Father Vincent Guichart, ministering to Algon- kin and [Iroquois at Oka from 1754 until his death in 1793, master of both lan- guages and author of a manuscript Algon- kin grammar; the Abbé Thavenet, Sul- pician, at Oka, from about 1793 to 1815, author of an Algonkin grammar and dictionary and other miscellany, still in manuscript; Father J.-B. La Brosse, Jesuit, with the Montagnais and Malecite, 1754 to his death in 1782, author of a number of religious and teaching works in the Montagnais language. Among the most distinguished laborers within the last century in the Montagnais, Algonkin, and Maskegon territories, stretching from the St Lawrence to Hudson bay, may be named Fathers Durocher (1829-73), Garin (1845-57), Laverlochére (1845-51), Lebret (1861-69), Guéguen (1864-88+-), and Prévost (1873-88+-), all of the Obiate order, and each the author of some im- portant contribution to American philol- ogy. Rey. Charles Guay has given atten- tion to the language among the Micmac of New Brunswick. In recent years the most prominent name 1s that of Father J. A. Cuoq, Sulpician, already noted, missionary at Oka for more than half a century, beginning in 1847, master of the Mohawk and Algonkin languages, and author of a dictionary of each, besides numerous other important linguistic works. According to the official Canadian In- dian Report for 1906 the Catholic Indians of the five eastern provinces numbered 18,064, including all those of Prince Edward id., Nova Scotia, and New Bruns- wick, nearly all those of Quebec, and two-fifths of the Christian Indians of Ontario. Every settlement of impor- tance had a church, school, or visiting MISSLONS 899 priest, the standard for industry being fair, for temperance good, and for honesty and general morality exceptionally high. The noted Huron missions hold a place by themselves. The beginning was made by the Récollet, Joseph le Caron, who accompanied Champlain on his visit to the Huron country in 1615. The tribe at that time occupied the shores of Geor- gian bay, Ontario, and with other incor- porated bands may have numbered 10,000 souls or more (some estimates are much higher), in from 15 to 30 towns or villages, several of which were strongly palisaded. They were probably then of strength equal to that of their hereditary enemies and final destroyers, the Iroquois of New York. In more or less close alliance with the Hurons were the cognate Cae eee and Neutrals, farther to ‘the s. and s. in the pe minsula between L. Erie eh i Huron. Le Caron spent the winter with the Hurons and Tionontati, established the mission of St Gabriel, made a brief dictionary of the language, and returned to the French settlements in the spring. The work was continued for some years by other Récollets, Gabriel Sagard, au- thor of a Huron dic ‘tionary and a history of the Récollet missions, and Nicholas Viel, who was murdered by an Indian about 1624. In 1625 the Jesuits arrived in Canada to assist the Récollets, and the next year the heroic Jean de Brébeuf and another Jesuit, with Father Joseph Dal- lion, Récollet, reached St Gabriel. The Neutrals also were now visited, but with- out successful result. The work was brought to a temporary close by the English occupancy of Canada in 1629. In 1634, after the restoration of French control, the work was resumed, this time by the Jesuits alone, with Brébeuf as superior, assisted then or later by Fathers Daniel, Garnier, Jogues, and others of less note. The mission church of Im- maculate Conception was built in 1637 at Ossossani, one of the principal towns; St Joseph was established at Teanan- stayae, the capital, in the next year; the principal war chief of the tribe was bap- tized, and Christianity began to take root, in spite of the suspicions engendered by two wasting epidemic visitations, for which the missionaries were held respon- sible and solemnly condemned to death, until the current of opposition was turned by Brébeuf’s courageous bearing. In 1639 there were 4 established missions with 13 priests working in the Huron country and visiting in the neighboring tribes. St Marys, on Wye r., had been made the general headquarters. A visi- tation of smallpox again spread terror through the tribe and for a time rendered the position of the missionaries unsafe. In consequence of these successive epi- 900 demics within a few years several towns had been depopulated and the tribe so much weakened as to leave it an easy prey for the invading Iroquois, whose inroads now became more constant and serious than before. In 1641 the Iroquois invaded the Huron country in foree, killed many, and car- ried off many others to captivity. In 1648, after a temporary truce, they re- sumed the war of extermination, with perhaps 2,000 warriors well armed with guns obtained from the Dutch, while the Hurons had only bows. On July 4 Tea- nanstayae, or St Joseph, on the site of the present Barrie, was attacked and de- stroyed, the missionary, Father Anthony Daniel, killed with several hundred of his flock, and about 700 others were carried off as captives. The whole country was ravaged throughout the fall and winter, and one town after another destroyed or abandoned. On Mar. 16, 1649, a thou- sand warriors attacked St Ignatius town and massacred practically the whole population, after which they proceeded at once to the neighboring town of St Louis, where the burning and massacre were repeated, and two missionaries, Brébeuf and Father Gabriel Lalemant, killed after hours of the most horrible tortures. An attack on St Marys, where Father Ragueneau was stationed, was re- pulsed, after which the Iroquois retired. This was the deathblow to the Huron nation. Fifteen towns were abandoned and the people scattered in every direc- tion. Two whole town populations sub- mitted to the conquerors and removed in a body to the Seneca country. Others fled to the Tionontati, who were now in turn invaded by the Iroquois and com- pel.ed, by burning and massacre, with the killing of Fathers Garnier and Cha- banel, to abandon their country and flee with the rest. Others took refuge on the islands of L. Huron. Some joined the Neutrals, who soon after met the same fate. : For the next 50 years the history of the confederated Huron and Tionontati remnants is a mere record of flight from pursuing enemies—the Iroquois in the E. and the Sioux inthe W. A considerable body which sought the protection of the French, after several removals was finally settled by Father M. J. Chaumonot in 1693 at (New) Lorette, near Quebec, where their descendants still reside (see Hurons; Lorette). To Chaumonot we owe a standard grammar and dictionary of the Huron language, only the first of which is yet published. In the mean- time, in 1656-57, two-thirds of this band had bodily removed to the Iroquois coun- try to escape destruction, MISSIONS [B. A. B. The other fagitives, composed largely or principally of Tionontati, fled successively to Manitoulin id. in L. Huron; Macki- naw; the Noquet ids. in Green bay, Wis.; westward to the Mississippi; back to Green bay, where they were visited by the Jesuit Menard in 1660; to Chegoi- megon, near the present Bayfield, Wis., on the shore of L. Superior, where the Jesuit Allouez ministered to them for several years; back, in 1670, to Macki- naw, whence another party joined the Iroquois, and finally down to Detroit, Mich., when that post was founded in 1702. In 1751 a part of these, under Father de la Richard, settled at San- dusky, Ohio. From this period the W yandot, as they now began to be called, took their place as the leading tribe of the Ohio region and the privileged lighters of the confederate council fire. Their last Jesuit missionary, Father Peter Potier, died in 1781, after which they were served by occasional visiting priests and later by the Presbyterians and the Methodists, until about the period ot their removal to Kansas in 1842 (see Jn- terior States) . The work of the Episcopalians ( Angli- ‘an Church) among the Iroquois of New York, beginning about 1700 and continu- ing in Canada after the removal of a large part of the confederacy from the United States, has already been noted (see Mid- dle Atlantic—New York). In 1763 Rey. Thomas Wood of Nova Scotia, haying become acquainted with the Abbé Mail- lard and obtained the use of his Micmac manuscript, applied himself to the study of the language, dividing his ministra- tions thenceforth between the Indians and the whites until hisdeathin1778. He preached in the native tongue, in which he produced several religious translations. This seems to have been the only work recorded for this denomination in this part of the Dominion, and in the official Yanadian Indian Report for 1906 no In- dians are enumerated under this heading in the provinces of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, or Prince Edward id. In Quebec province the same report gives this denomination 119 Indians, including 60 Abnaki at St Francis and 48 Montagn- ais at Lake St John. In Ontario province, besides the work already noted among the Iroquois, active and successful missionary effort has been carried on by the Episcopalians among the various Chippewa bands and others since about 1830. One of the principal stations is that at Garden River, opposite Sault Ste Marie, begun in 1835 by Rey. Mr MeMurray, who was succeeded a few years later by Rev. F. A. O’ Meara, after- ward stationed on Manitoulin id., and or’ i a a el a alll a Ml ell — . BULL. 30] later at Port Hope on L. Ontario. Be- sides building up a flourishing school, Mr O’Meara found time to translate into the native language the Book of Common Prayer, consideravle portions of both the Old and the New Actions nt, and a vol- ume of hymns, the last in cooperation with the Rey. Peter Jacobs. He died about 1870. Of the more recent period the most noted worker is Rey. EK. F. Wil- son, who began his labors under the auspices of the Church Mission Society in 1868. To his efforts the Indians owe the Shingwauk and Wawanosh homes at Sault Ste Marie, Ontario, where some 60 or 80 children are cared for, educated, and taught the rudiments of trades and simple industries. A school journal, set up and printed by the Indian boys, has also been. conducted at intervals, under various titles, for nearly 30 years. Mr Wilson is the author of a number of Indian writings, of which the most im- portant is probably a ‘Manual of the Ojibway Language,’ for the use of mis- sion workers. In 1835 a mission was established also on Thames r., among the Munsee, a rem- nant of those Delaware refugees from the United States who for so many years of the colonial period had been the object of Moravian care (see Middle Atlantic States). One of the pioneer workers, Rey. Mr Flood, translated the church liturgy into the language of the tribe. Of 17, 498 Christian Indians officially reported in 1906 in Ontario province, 5,253, or not quite one-third, are credited to the Episcopal or Anglican church, in- cluding—Iroquois in various bands, 3 oF 073 33 ““Chippewas of the Thames,’ 593; “Ojib- bewas of L. Superior,’ 554; ‘‘Chippewas and Saulteaux of Treaty No. 3” ( Mani- toba border), 709; ‘ Mantes of the Thames’’ (originally Moravian converts from the United States; see Middle Atlantic States), 154; ‘‘Ojibbewas and Ottawas of Manitoulin and Cockburn ids.,’’ 169; Potawatomi of Walpole id., 79; and one or two smaller groups. The work among the Eskimo of the Labrador coast—oflicially a part of New- foundland—is conducted by the Mora- vians. In 1752 a reconnoitering mission- ary party landed near the present Hope- dale, but was attacked by the natives, who killed Brother J. C. Ehrhardt and 5 sailors, whereupon the survivors returned home and the attempt for a time was abandoned. One or two other exploring trips were made for the same purpose, and in 1769 permission to establish mis- sions on the Labrador coast was formally asked by the Moravians and granted by the British government. In 1771 the first mission was begun at Nain, appar- MISSIONS « 901 ently by Brother Jens Haven. It is now the chief settlement on the Labrador coast. In 1776 Okak was established by Brother Paul Layritz, followed by Hope- dalein 1782, and He broni in 1830. Tothese have more recently been added Zoar and Ramah. The efforts of the missionaries have been most successful, the wander- ing Eskimo having been gathered into permanent settlements, in each of which area church, store, mission residence, and workshops, with dwelling houses on the model of the native iglu. Besides receiv- mg religious instruction, the natives are taught the simple mechanical arts, but to guard against their innate improvidence, the missionaries have found it necessary to introduce the communalsystem, by tak- ing charge of all food supplies to distribute at their own discretion. All the missions are still in flourishing operation, having now under their influence about 1,200 of the estimated 1,500 Eskimo along a coast of about 500 m. in length. The total number of mission workers is about 30 (see Hind, Labrador Peninsula. ) To these Moravian workers we owe a voluminous body of Eskimo literature— grammars, dic ‘tionaries, scriptural trans- lations, hymns, and miscellaneous pub- lications. Among the prominent names are those of Bourquin, about 1880, author of a grammar and a Bible history; Burg- hardt, gospel translations, 1813; Erd- mann, missionary from 1834 to 1872, a dictionary and other works; Freitag, a manuscript grammar, 1839; and Kohl- meister, St John’s Gospel, 1810. The majority of these Moravian publications were issued anonymously. In 1820 the Wesleyan Methodists, through Rey. Alvin Torry, began work among the immigrant Iroquois of the Ontario reser- vations, which was carried on with not- able success for a long term of years by Rey. William Case. In 1823 Mr Case ex- tended his laborstothe Missisauga, a band of the Chippewa n. of L. Ontario. The most important immediate result was the conyersion of Peter Jones (Kahkewakuo- naby), a half-breed, who was afterward ordained, and became the principal mis- sionary among his people and the more remote Chippewa bands until his death in 1856. He is known as the author of a collection of hymns in his native language and also a small ‘ History of the Ojeb- way Indians.’ Another noted mission- ary convert of this period was Shawun- dais, or John Sunday. Another native worker of a somewhat later period was Rev. Henry Steinhauer, Chippewa, after- ward known as a missionary to the Cree. Still another pioneer laborer in the same region was Rey. James Evans, afterward also missionary to the Cree and inventor 902 of a Cree syllabary. Contemporary with the transfer of Evans and Steinhauer to the Cree in 1840, Rev. George Barnley was sent to establish a mission at Moose Fac- tory, James bay, which, however, was soon afterabandoned. Beginningin 1851 Rey. G. M. McDougall established Meth- odist mission stations among the Chip- pewa along the n. shore of L. Superior, at Garden River and elsewhere, but after- ward transferred his operations also to Cree territory. In 1861-62 Rey. Thomas Hurlburt, already a veteran worker, and considered the most competent Chippewa linguist in the Methodist mission, con- ducted a monthly journal, ‘ Petaubun,’ in the language, at the Sarnia station. According to the official Canadian In- dian Report for 1906, the Methodist In- dians of &. Canada numbered 4,557 in On- tario and 505 in Quebec, a total of 5,062, none being reported for the other eastern provinces. Those in Ontario included nearly all of the ‘‘Chippewas of the Thames,’ ‘‘ Mississaguas,’’ and ‘‘ Iro- quois and Algonquins of Watha,”’ all of the 348 ‘‘ Moravians of the Thames,’’ and a considerable percentage of the ‘‘Six Nations’? on Grand r. Those in Quebee province are chiefly Iroquois of the Oka, St Regis, and Caughnawaga settlements. Of other denominations, the same offi- cial report enumerates 1,020 Baptists in Ontario, almost entirely among the Six Nations on Grand r., with 99 Congrega- tionalists, 17 Presbyterians, and a total of 370 of all other denominations not pre- viously noted. In the other eastern proy- inces—Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and Prince Edward id.—there is no representation. The work of Rey. Silas T. Rand among the Micmac of Nova Scotia stands in a class by itself. Educated in a Baptist seminary, he became a minister, but afterward left that denomination to be- come an independent worker. His at- tention having been drawn to the neg- lected condition of the Indians, he began the study of the Micmac language, and in 1849 succeeded in organizing a mis- sionary society for their special instruc- tion. Under its auspices until its disso- lution in 1865, and from that time until his death in 1889, he gave his whole effort to the teaching of the Micmac and to the study of their language and tradi- tions. He isthe author ofa Micmac dic- tionary and of acollection of tribal myths as well as of numerous minor works, re- ligious and miscellaneous. CANADA, CENTRAL (Manitoba, Assini- boia, Saskatchewan, Alberta, s. Kee- watin).—In the great plains region stretching from Hudson bay southwest- ward to the Rocky mts., the former bat- MISSIONS [B. A. E. tle ground of Cree, Assiniboin, and Black- feet, the Catholics were again the pio- neers, antedating all others by a full cen- tury. According to Bryce, ‘‘the first heralds of the cross’? within this area were the French Jesuits accompanying Verendrye, who in the years 1731-1742 explored the whole territory from Mack- inaw to the upper Missouri and the Sas- katchewan, establishing trading posts and making alliances with the Indian tribes for the French government. Among these missionaries the principal were Fathers Nicholas Gonnor, who had labored among the Sioux as early as 1727; Charles Mesaiger, and Jean Aulneau, killed by the same tribe in 1736. No at- tempt was made during this period to form permanent mission settlements. Then follows a long hiatus until after the establishment of the Red River col- ony in the early part of the 19th century by Lord Selkirk, who in 1816 brought out from eastern Canada Fathers Sévére Dumoulin and Joseph Provencher, to minister both to the colonists and to the Indian and mixed-blood population of the Winnipeg country. In 1822 Father Provencher was made bishop, with ju- risdiction over all of Ruperts land and the Northwest territories, and carried on the work of systematic mission organiza- tion throughout the whole vast region until his death in 1853, when the noted Oblate missionary, Father Alexandre Taché, who had come out in 1845, suc- ceeded to the dignity, in which he con- tinued for many years. The Catholic work in this central re- gion has been carried on chiefly by the Oblates, assisted by the Gray Nuns. The first permanent mission was St Boniface, established at the site of the present Win- nipeg by Provencher and Dumoulin in 1816. St Paul mission on the Assiniboin later became the headquarters of the noted Father George Belcourt, who gave most of his attention to the Saulteux (Chip- pewa of Saskatchewan region), and who from 1831 to 1849 covered in his work a territory stretching over a thousand miles from £. to w. For his services in pre- venting a serious uprising in 1833 he was pensioned both by the Government and by the Hudson’s Bay Co. He is the au- thor of a grammatie treatise and of a manuscript dictionary of the Saulteur (Chippewa) language, as well as of some minor Indian writings. In the Cree field the most distinguished names are those of Fathers Albert La- combe (1848-90), Alexandre Taché (1845-90), Jean B. Thibault (ca. 1855- 70), Valentin Végréville (1852-90), and Kmile Petitot (1862-82), all of the Ob- late order, and each, besides his religious BULL. 30] work, the author of important contribu- tions to philology. To Father Lacombe, who tounded two missions among the Cree of the upper North Saskatchewan and spent also much time with the Blackfeet, we owe, besides several reli- gious and text-book translations, a manu- script Blackfoot dictionary and a monu- mental grammar and dictionary of the Cree language. Father Végréville la- bored among Cree, Assiniboin, and the remote northern Chipewyan, founded five missions, and composed a manuscript gramna”, dictionary, and monograph of the Cree language. Father Petitot’s im- portant work among the Cree has been overshadowed by his later great work among the remote Athapascans and Es- kimo, which will be noted hereafter. Among the Blackfeet the most promi- nent name is that of Father Emile Legal, Oblate (1881-90), author of several lin- guisticand ethnologic studies of the tribe, all in manuscript. Episcopalian work in the central region may properly be said to have begun with the arrival of Rev. John West, who was sent out by the Church Missionary So- ciety of England in 1820 as chaplain to the Hudson’s Bay Co’s establishment of Ft Garry (Winnipeg), on Red r. In the three years of his ministrations, be- sides giving attention to the white resi- dents, he made missionary journeys among the Cree and others for a distance of 500 m. to the w. He was followed by Rey. David Jones in 1823, by Rev. Wim. Cochrane in 1825, Rev. A. Cowley in 1841, and Rey. R. James in 1846, by whom, together, the tribes farther to the N. were visited and brought within mis- sion influence. In 1840 a Cree mission at The Pas, on the lower Saskatchewan, was organized by Henry Budd, a native convert, and in 1846 other stations were established among the same tribe at Lac la Ronge and Lac la Crosse, by James Settee and James Beardy respectively, also native converts. In 1838 a large bequest for Indian missions within Ru- pert’s Land, as the territory was then known, had been made by Mr James Leith, an officer of the Hudson’s Bay Co., and generously increased soon after by the company itself. With the assist- ance and the active effort of four mis- sionary societies of the church, the work grew so that in 1849 the territory was erected into a bishopric, and on the transfer of jurisdiction from the Hudson’s Bay Co., to the Canadian government in 1870 there were 15 Episcopal mis- sionaries laboring at the various stations in the regions stretching from Hudson bay to the upper Saskatchewan, the most important being those at York Factory MISSIONS 903 (Keewatin), Cumberland, and Carlton (Saskatchewan ). Among the most ~sted of those in the Cree country may be mentioned in chron- ologic order, Rey. Archdeacon James Hunter and his wife (1844-55), joint or separate authors of a number of transla- tions, including the Book of Common Prayer, hymns, gospelextracts, ete.,anda valuable treatise on the Cree language; Bishop John Horden (1851-90), of Moose Factory, York Factory, and Ft Churchill stations, self-taught printer and binder, master of the language, and author of a number of gospels, prayer, and hymn translations; Bishop William Bompas (1865-90), best known for his work among the more northern Athapascan tribes; Rev. W. W. Kirkby (1852-79), author of a Cree ‘Manual of Prayer and Praise,’ but also best known for his Athapascan work; Rey. John Mackay, author of sev- eral religious translations and of a manu- script grammar; and Rey. E. A. Watkins, author of a standard dictionary. Among the Blackfeet, Rev. J. W. Tims, who be- gan his work in 1883, is a recognized authority on the language, of which he has published a grammar and dictionary and a gospel translation. Methodist (Wesleyan ) effort in the Cree and adjacent territories began in 1840. In that year Rey. James Evans and his Indian assistant, Rev. Henry Steinhauer, both already noted in connection with previous work in Ontario, were selected for the western mission, and set out together for Norway House, a Hudson’s Bay Co’s post at the n. end of L. Winnipeg. Evans went on without stop to his des- tination, but Steinhauer halted at Lac la Pluie (now Rainy Lake) to act as inter- preter to Rey. William Mason, who had just reached that spot, having been sent out under the same auspices, the Wes- leyan Missionary Society of England, by arrangement with the Canadian body. The joint control continued until 1855, when the Canadian Methodists assumed full charge. Mr Evans had been ap- pointed superintendent of Methodist work for the whole region, and after establish- ing Rossville mission, near Norway House, as his central station, spent the next six years until his health failed, in travers- ing the long distances, founding several missions, mastering the Cree language, and devising for it a syllabary, which has ever since been in successful use for all literary purposes in the tribe. His first printing in the syllabary was done upon a press of his own making, with types cast from the sheet-lead lining of tea boxes and cut into final shape with a jackknife. In this primitive fashion he printed many copies of the syllabary for 904 distribution among the wandering bands, besides hymn collections and scripture translations. ‘‘By means of this sylla- bary a clever Indian can memorize in. an hour or two all the characters, and in two or three days read the Bible or any other book in his own language’’ (MacLean). In later years, the credit for this invention was unsuccessfully claimed by some for Rey. William Mason. Rossville for years continued to be the principal and most prosperous of all the Methodist missions in the central region. Rey. William Mason remained at Rainy Lake until that station was temporarily discontinued in 1844; he wasthen sent to Rossville (Norway House), where he was stationed until 1854, when the mission was abandoned by the Wesleyans. He then attached himself to the Episcopal church, with which he had formerly been connected, and was ordained in the same year, laboring thereafter at York Factory on Hudson bay until his final return to England in 1870, with the exception of 4 years spent in that country supervising the publication of his great Bible trans- lation in the Cree language, printed in 1861. This, with several other Sc ripture and hymn translations, excepting a Gos- pel of St John, was issued under the auspices of the Episcopal Church Mis- sionary Society. In his earlier linguistic (Methodist) work he was aided by Rev. Mr Steinhauer and John Sinclair, a halt- breed, but in all his later work, espe- cially in the Bible translation, he had the constant assistance of his wife, the edu- cated half-breed daughter of a Hudson’s Bay Co. officer. Rev. Mr Steinhauer, after some years with Mr Mason, joined Mr Evans at Norway House as teacher and interpreter. He afterward _ filled stations at Oxford House (Jackson bay), York Factory, Lac la Biche, White Fish Lake, Victoria, and other remote points, for a term of more than 40 years, making a record as ‘‘one of.the most de- voted and successful of our native Indian missionaries’? (Young). Among _ later Methodist workers with the Cree may be mentioned Rev. John McDougall, one of the founders of Victoria station, Alberta, in 1862, and Rey. Ervin Glass, about 1880, author. of several primary instruction books and charts in the syllabary. At the same time (1840) that Evans and Mason were sent to the Cree, Rey. Robert T. Rundle was sent, by the same authority, to make acquaintance with the more remote Blackfeet and Assiniboin (‘‘Stonies’’) of the upper Saskatchewan region. Visiting stations were selected where frequent services were conducted by Rundle, by Rev. Thomas Woolsey, who came out in 1855, and by others, but no regular mission was established until MISSIONS [B. A. B. begun by Rev. George M. McDougall at Edmonton, Alberta, in 1871. In 1873 he founded another mission on Bow r., Al- berta, among the Stonies ( western Assini- boin), and continued to divide attention between the two tribes until his accidental death 2 years later. Other stations were established later at Ft MacLeod and Mor- ley,inthesame territory. The most distin- guished worker of this denomination among the Blackfeet is Rev. John Mac- Lean (1880- -89), author of a manuscript grammar and dictionary of the language, several minor linguistic papers, ‘The Indians: Their Manners and Customs’ (1889), and ‘Canadian Savage Folk’ (1896). Presbyterian mission work was inaugu- rated in 1865 by the Rev. James Nisbet, among the Cree, at Prince Albert mission on the Saskatchewan. No data are at hand as to the work of the denomination in this region, but it is credited in the official report with nearly a thousand Indian communicants, chiefly among the Sioux and the Assiniboin, many of the latter being immigrants from the United States. According to the Canadian Indian Re- port for 1906, the Indians of Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Alberta, and the North- west Territories, classified under treaties 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, designated as Chip-, pewa, Cree, Saulteaux, Sioux, Assiniboin, Blackfeet, Bloods, Piegan, Sarcee, Stonies, and Chipewyan, are credited as follows: Catholic, 5,633; Anglican (Episcopal), 4,789; Methodist, 3,199; Presbyterian, 1,073; Baptist, 83; all other denomina- tions, 80; pagan, 5,524. Some 3,508 re- mote northern Cree, under Treaty No. 8, and 165 non-treaty Indians are not In- cluded in the estimate. Canapba, British CoLtumsta (including Vancouver id. and Metlakatla).—The earliest missionary entrance into British Columbia was made by the Catholics in 1839. In 1838 the secular priests Demers and Blanchet (afterward archbishop) had arrived at Fort Vancouver, Washing- ton, as already noted (see Columbia Re- gion), to minister to the employees of the Hudson’s Bay Co. In the next year an Indian mission was organized at Cowlitz, with visiting stations along the shores of Puget sd., and Father Demers made a tour of thé upper Columbia as far as the Okin- agan in British Columbia, preaching, bap- tizing, and givinginstruction by means ofa pictograph ‘device of Father Blanchet’s i in- vention, knownasthe ‘‘Catholic ladder.” Copies of this ‘‘ladder’’ were carried by visiting Indians to the more remote tribes and prepared the way for later effort.